Page 1
M155E4 Self-Propelled Windrower
Operators Manual 214737 Revision A
Original Instruction
The harvesting specialists.
Page 2
M155E4 Self-Propelled Windrower, featuring Dual Direction and Ultra Glide suspension.
Published August, 2018
California Proposition 65 Warning
Diesel engine exhaust and some of its constituents are known to the State of California to cause cancer, birth defects, and other reproductive harm. Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories contain lead and lead components. Wash hands after handling.
Page 3
Introduction
This manual contains information on The MacDon M155E4 Self-Propelled Windrower which, when coupled with one of MacDons auger, rotary, or draper headers, provides a package designed to cut and lay in windrows a variety of grain, hay, and specialty crops.
The M155E4 Windrower features Dual Direction, meaning that the windrower can be driven in cab-forward or engine-forward mode. Right and left designations are therefore determined by the operators position, facing the direction of travel. This manual uses the terms right cab-forward, left cab-forward, right engine-forward, and left engine-forward when referencing specific locations on the machine.
Use this manual as your first source of information about the machine. Use the Table of Contents and the Index to guide you to specific areas. Study the Table of Contents to familiarize yourself with how the material is organized.
When setting up the machine or making adjustments, review and follow the recommended machine settings in all relevant MacDon publications. Failure to do so may compromise the machine function and machine life and may result in a hazardous situation.
If you follow the instructions given here, your M155E4 Windrower will work well for many years.
Use this manual in conjunction with your header operator's manual.
A manual storage case is provided in the cab. Keep this manual handy for frequent reference and to pass on to new Operators or Owners. Call your Dealer if you need assistance, information, or additional copies of this manual.
Unless otherwise noted, use the standard torque values provided in Chapter 8.2 Recommended Torques, page 455 of this document.
CAREFULLY READ ALLTHE MATERIAL PROVIDED BEFORE ATTEMPTING TO USE THE MACHINE.
MacDon provides warranty for Customers who operate and maintain their equipment as described in this manual. A copy of the MacDon Industries Limited Warranty Policy, which explains this warranty, should have been provided to you by your Dealer. Damage resulting from any of the following conditions will void the warranty:
Accident
Misuse
Abuse
Improper maintenance or neglect
Abnormal or extraordinary use of the machine
Failure to use the machine, equipment, component, or part in accordance with the manufacturers instructions
NOTE: Keep your MacDon publications up-to-date. The most current version can be downloaded from our website www.macdon.com or from our Dealer-only site (https://portal.macdon.com) (login required).
214737 i Revision A
Page 4
Declaration of Conformity
Figure 1. Declaration of Conformity (Page 1 of 2)
214737 ii Revision A
Page 5
Figure 2. Declaration of Conformity (Page 2 of 2)
214737 iii Revision A
Page 6
Whole Body and Hand-Arm Vibration Levels
The weighted root mean square acceleration, to which the whole body is subjected, ranges from 0.59 to 1.07 m/s2
as measured on a representative machine during typical operations and analyzed in accordance with ISO 5008.
During the same operations, the weighted root means square hand-arm vibration was less than 1.81 m/s2 when analyzed in accordance with ISO 5349. These acceleration values depend on the roughness of the ground, the speeds at which the windrower is operated, the operator's experience, weight, and driving habits.
Noise Levels
The A-weighted sound pressure levels inside the operator's station ranged from 66 to 67 dB(A) as measured on several representative machines in accordance with ISO 5131. The sound pressure level depends upon the engine speed and load, field and crop conditions, and the type of platform used.
214737 iv Revision A
Page 7
List of Revisions
The following list provides an account of major changes from the previous version of this document.
Summary of Change Location
Updated the Declaration of Conformity. Declaration of Conformity, page ii
Updated caution statements Throughout
Added content to include R1 series headers Throughout
Updated fuse box decal illustration Fuse Box Decal, page 391
Updated table 8.1.3 Lubricants, Fluids, and System Capacities, page 452
Corrected callouts in illustration 2.4 Component Location, page 37
Revised notes to say two front field lights remain on when auto road light feature is activated
3.6.1 Field Light: Cab-Forward, page 50 Driving on the Road, page 182
Revised table content 8.1.3 Lubricants, Fluids, and System Capacities, page 452
Added replacement bulb information 5.9.10 Replacing the Bulbs in Beacon Lights, page 383
Corrected callouts and graphics 4.2.2 Windrower Operating Symbols, page 163
Corrected callouts and graphics 4.2.3 Header Functions, page 164
Added R1 Series information 4.8 Operating with an R Series or R1 Series Header, page 284
Updated procedure Connecting Batteries, page 368
Added topic 3.18.6 Cab Display Module (CDM) Configuration, page 93
Added note 4.5.6 Attaching to an R/R1 Series Header, page 248
Added topics to CDM chapter Activating the Swath Compressor, page 111
3.18.12 Calibrating the Swath Compressor Sensor, page 135
Edited note Inflating Caster Tire, page 414
Updated hydraulic filter/service kit number 5.10.4 Changing Hydraulic Oil Filters, page 3998.1.4 Filter Part Numbers, page 453
Updated illustrations Replacing the Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Vent Hose Filter , page 336
214737 v Revision A
Page 8
Serial Numbers
Record the model number, model year, and serial number of the windrower and engine on the lines below.
Figure 3. Machine Serial Number Location
The windrower serial number plate (A) is located on the left side of the main frame near the walking beam.
Windrower model number
Windrower serial number
Year of manufacture
Figure 4. Engine Serial Number Location
The engine serial number plate (A) is located on top of the engine cylinder head cover.
Engine serial number
Date of manufacture
214737 vi Revision A
Page 9
214737 vii Revision A
Introduction................................................................................................................................................ i
Declaration of Conformity........................................................................................................................... ii
Whole Body and Hand-Arm Vibration Levels .............................................................................................. iv
Noise Levels ............................................................................................................................................ iv
List of Revisions ........................................................................................................................................v
Serial Numbers ........................................................................................................................................ vi
Chapter 1: Safety .................................................................................................................................... 1
1.1 Safety Alert Symbols ............................................................................................................................1
1.2 Signal Words .......................................................................................................................................2
1.3 General Safety.....................................................................................................................................3
1.4Maintenance Safety .............................................................................................................................5
1.5 Hydraulic Safety...................................................................................................................................6
1.6 Tire Safety...........................................................................................................................................7
1.7 Battery Safety ......................................................................................................................................8
1.8Welding Precautions ............................................................................................................................9
1.9 Engine Safety ....................................................................................................................................10
1.9.1 High-Pressure Rail ....................................................................................................................10
1.9.2 Engine Electronics .................................................................................................................... 11
1.10 Safety Signs ....................................................................................................................................12
1.10.1 Installing Safety Decals............................................................................................................12
1.11 Safety Sign Locations .......................................................................................................................13
1.12 Understanding Safety Signs..............................................................................................................17
Chapter 2: Product Overview ............................................................................................................ 27
2.1 Definitions .........................................................................................................................................27
2.2 Specifications ....................................................................................................................................30
2.3Windrower Dimensions.......................................................................................................................34
2.4 Component Location ..........................................................................................................................37
Chapter 3: Operators Station............................................................................................................ 39
3.1 Operator Console ..............................................................................................................................39
3.2 Operator Presence System.................................................................................................................41
3.2.1 Header Drive ............................................................................................................................41
3.2.2 Engine and Transmission...........................................................................................................41
3.3 Operators Seat Adjustments ..............................................................................................................42
3.3.1 Adjusting Fore-Aft Position.........................................................................................................42
3.3.2 Adjusting Fore-Aft Isolator Lock..................................................................................................42
3.3.3 Adjusting Seat Suspension and Height .......................................................................................43
3.3.4 Adjusting Seat Tilt .....................................................................................................................43
3.3.5 Adjusting Vertical Dampener ......................................................................................................44
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 10
214737 viii Revision A
3.3.6 Adjusting Armrest......................................................................................................................44
3.3.7 Adjusting Armrest Angle ............................................................................................................45
3.3.8 Adjusting Lumbar Support..........................................................................................................45
3.3.9 Using Seat Belts .......................................................................................................................46
3.4 Training Seat .....................................................................................................................................47
3.5 Adjusting Steering Column .................................................................................................................48
3.6 Exterior Lighting.................................................................................................................................49
3.6.1 Field Light: Cab-Forward ...........................................................................................................50
3.6.2 Road Light: Engine-Forward ......................................................................................................51
3.6.3 Road Light: Cab-Forward...........................................................................................................52
3.6.4 Hazard Light .............................................................................................................................53
3.6.5 Beacon Light.............................................................................................................................53
3.6.6 Auto Road Light ........................................................................................................................54
3.7Windshield Wipers .............................................................................................................................55
3.8 Rear View Mirrors ..............................................................................................................................56
3.9 Cab Temperature ...............................................................................................................................57
3.9.1 Heater Shut-Off.........................................................................................................................57
3.9.2 Air Distribution ..........................................................................................................................57
3.9.3 Climate Controls .......................................................................................................................58
3.10 Interior Lights...................................................................................................................................59
3.11 Emergency Exit................................................................................................................................60
3.12 Operator Amenities ..........................................................................................................................61
3.13 Radio ..............................................................................................................................................63
3.13.1 AM/FM Radio..........................................................................................................................63
3.13.2 Mounting the Antenna..............................................................................................................63
3.14 Horn................................................................................................................................................65
3.15 Engine Controls and Display Module .................................................................................................66
3.15.1 Fuel and Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Display Module .................................................................67 Tools Menu ..............................................................................................................................69 Audible Alarm...........................................................................................................................70
3.16 Windrower Controls..........................................................................................................................71
3.17 Header Controls...............................................................................................................................73
3.17.1 Header Drive Switch................................................................................................................73
3.17.2 Header Drive Reverse Button...................................................................................................73
3.17.3 Ground Speed Lever (GSL) Header Switches............................................................................74 Display Selector Switch.............................................................................................................75 Reel Position Switches..............................................................................................................75 Header Position Switches .........................................................................................................76 Reel and Disc Speed Switches ..................................................................................................76
3.17.4 Console Header Switches........................................................................................................77 Deck Shift / Float Preset Switch .................................................................................................77 Double Windrow Attachment (DWA) / Swath Compressor Switch (If Installed)...............................78
3.18 Cab Display Module (CDM)...............................................................................................................79
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 11
214737 ix Revision A
3.18.1 Engine and Windrower Functions .............................................................................................79
3.18.2 Header Functions....................................................................................................................80
3.18.3 Operating Screens ..................................................................................................................81 Ignition ON, Engine Not Running ...............................................................................................81 Engine-Forward, Engine Running ..............................................................................................82 Cab-Forward, Engine Running, Header Disengaged ...................................................................82 Cab-Forward, Engine Running, Header Engaged, Auger Header Index Switch OFF ......................83 Cab-Forward, Engine Running, Header Engaged, Auger Header Index Switch ON........................84 Cab-Forward, Engine Running, Header Engaged, Draper Header, Index Switch OFF....................85 Cab-Forward, Engine Running, Header Engaged, Draper Header Index Switch ON ......................86 Cab-Forward, Engine Running, Header Engaged, Rotary Header Installed ...................................87 Miscellaneous Operational Information.......................................................................................88
3.18.4 Cab Display Module (CDM) Warning and Alarms .......................................................................89 Engine Warning Lights ..............................................................................................................89 Display Warnings and Alarms....................................................................................................90
3.18.5 Configuration Guidelines..........................................................................................................92
3.18.6 Cab Display Module (CDM) Configuration .................................................................................93
3.18.7 Cab Display Options................................................................................................................94 Setting the Cab Display Language .............................................................................................94 Changing the Windrower Display Units.......................................................................................95 Adjusting the Cab Display Buzzer Volume ..................................................................................96 Adjusting the Cab Display Backlighting.......................................................................................97 Adjusting the Cab Display Contrast ............................................................................................98
3.18.8 Configuring the Windrower.......................................................................................................99 Setting the Header Knife Speed.................................................................................................99 Setting the Knife Overload Speed ............................................................................................ 101 Setting the Rotary Disc Overload Speed................................................................................... 101 Setting the Hydraulic Overload Pressure .................................................................................. 102 Setting the Header Index Mode ............................................................................................... 103 Setting the Return to Cut Mode................................................................................................ 105 Setting the Auto Raise Height .................................................................................................. 105 Activating the Double Windrow Attachment (DWA).................................................................... 106 Activating the Hydraulic Center-Link......................................................................................... 108 Activating the Rotary Header Drive Hydraulics .......................................................................... 109 Setting the Header Cut Width .................................................................................................. 109 Activating the Swath Compressor ............................................................................................ 111 Activating the Hay Conditioner................................................................................................. 113 Displaying Reel Speed............................................................................................................ 114 Setting the Windrowers Tire Size ............................................................................................ 115 Setting the Engine Intermediate Speed Control (ISC) RPM........................................................ 116 Clearing Sub-Acres ................................................................................................................ 117
3.18.9 Activating Cab Display Lockouts............................................................................................. 117 Activating the Header Tilt Control Lockout ................................................................................ 118 Activating the Header Float Control Lockout ............................................................................. 119 Activating the Reel Fore-Aft Control Lockout............................................................................. 120 Activating the Draper Speed Control Lockout............................................................................ 121 Activating the Auger Speed Control Lockout ............................................................................. 123 Activating Knife Speed Control Lockout.................................................................................... 124 Activating Rotary Disc Speed Control Lockout .......................................................................... 125 Activating the Reel Speed Control Lockout ............................................................................... 126
3.18.10 Displaying Activated Cab Display Lockouts ........................................................................... 128
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 12
214737 x Revision A
3.18.11 Calibrating the Header Sensors ............................................................................................ 129 Calibrating the Header Height Sensor ...................................................................................... 129 Calibrating the Header Tilt Sensor............................................................................................ 131 Calibrating the Header Float Sensors....................................................................................... 133
3.18.12 Calibrating the Swath Compressor Sensor ............................................................................ 135
3.18.13 Troubleshooting Windrower Problems................................................................................... 137 Displaying the Windrower and Engine Error Codes ................................................................... 137 Switching the Installed Header Sensors ON or OFF .................................................................. 138 Displaying Header Sensor Input Signals................................................................................... 141 Forcing a Header ID................................................................................................................ 142
3.18.14 Troubleshooting Header Problems........................................................................................ 144 Testing the Header Up/Down Activate Function Using the Cab Display Module (CDM)................. 144 Testing the Reel Up/Down Activate Function Using the Cab Display Module (CDM)..................... 145 Testing the Header Tilt Activate Function Using the Cab Display Module (CDM) .......................... 147 Testing the Knife Drive Circuit Using the Cab Display Module (CDM) .......................................... 149 Testing the Draper Drive Circuit Activate Function Using the Cab Display Module (CDM) ............. 150 Testing the Reel Drive Circuit Activate Function Using the Cab Display Module (CDM) ................ 152 Testing the Rotary Disc Drive Circuit Activate Function Using the Cab Display
Module (CDM) ........................................................................................................... 154 Testing the Double Windrower Attachment (DWA) Drive Activate Function Using the Cab
Display Module (CDM)................................................................................................ 155 Testing the Reel Fore-Aft Activate Function Using the Cab Display Module (CDM) ...................... 157 Activating the Hydraulic Purge Using the Cab Display Module (CDM) ......................................... 159
3.18.15 Engine Error Codes ............................................................................................................. 160
3.18.16 Cab Display Module (CDM) and Windrower Control Module (WCM) Fault Codes ..................... 160
Chapter 4: Operation .........................................................................................................................161
4.1 Owner/Operator Responsibilities....................................................................................................... 161
4.2 Symbol Definitions ........................................................................................................................... 162
4.2.1 Engine Functions .................................................................................................................... 162
4.2.2 Windrower Operating Symbols ................................................................................................. 163
4.2.3 Header Functions.................................................................................................................... 164
4.3 Operating the Windrower.................................................................................................................. 165
4.3.1 Operational Safety .................................................................................................................. 165
4.3.2 Break-In Period....................................................................................................................... 165
4.3.3 Preseason Checks / Annual Service ......................................................................................... 166 Air Conditioning (A/C) Compressor Coolant Cycling .................................................................. 167
4.3.4 Daily Checks and Maintenance ................................................................................................ 167
4.3.5 Engine Operation .................................................................................................................... 168 Starting the Engine ................................................................................................................. 168 Engine Warm-Up.................................................................................................................... 170 Engine Intermediate Speed Control (ISC)................................................................................. 170 Shutting down the Engine........................................................................................................ 171 Engine Temperature ............................................................................................................... 171 Engine Oil Pressure................................................................................................................ 171 Cab Display Module (CDM) Voltage Display ............................................................................. 172 Engine Warning Lights ............................................................................................................ 172
4.3.6 Exhaust System Cleaning ........................................................................................................ 172
4.3.7 Driving the Windrower ............................................................................................................. 173
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 13
214737 xi Revision A
Entering and Exiting the Windrower ......................................................................................... 174 Driving Forward in Cab-Forward Mode ..................................................................................... 175 Driving Reverse in Cab-Forward Mode..................................................................................... 176 Driving Forward in Engine-Forward Mode................................................................................. 177 Driving in Reverse in Engine-Forward Mode ............................................................................. 179 Spin Turning........................................................................................................................... 179 Stopping ................................................................................................................................ 180
4.3.8 Adjusting Caster Tread Width................................................................................................... 181
4.3.9 Transporting ........................................................................................................................... 182 Driving on the Road ................................................................................................................ 182 Towing Header with Windrower................................................................................................ 184 Towing the Windrower (Emergency)......................................................................................... 194 Engaging and Disengaging Final Drives ................................................................................... 195
4.3.10 Storing the Windrower ........................................................................................................... 196
4.4 Operating with a Header................................................................................................................... 197
4.4.1 Engaging and Disengaging Header Safety Props: M Series Self-Propelled Windrower ................. 197
4.4.2 Using Header Float ................................................................................................................. 199 Float Operating Guidelines...................................................................................................... 199 Checking Float ....................................................................................................................... 199 Float Options.......................................................................................................................... 202
4.4.3 Levelling the Header................................................................................................................ 204
4.4.4 Header Drive .......................................................................................................................... 207 Engaging and Disengaging the Header .................................................................................... 207 Reversing the Header ............................................................................................................. 207
4.4.5 Adjusting Header Angle ........................................................................................................... 208 Checking Self-Locking Center-Link Hook ................................................................................. 209
4.4.6 Controlling Cutting Height ........................................................................................................ 211 Return to Cut.......................................................................................................................... 211 Auto Raise Height................................................................................................................... 213 Header Drop Rate .................................................................................................................. 215
4.4.7 Using the Double Windrowing Attachment................................................................................. 215 Engaging and Disengaging the Double Windrow Attachment (DWA) .......................................... 216 Adjusting Double Windrow Attachment (DWA) Draper Speed .................................................... 217
4.4.8 Swath Roller Operation............................................................................................................ 217
4.5 Attaching and Detaching Headers ..................................................................................................... 218
4.5.1 Attaching Header Boots ........................................................................................................... 218
4.5.2 Attaching a D Series or D1 Series Header................................................................................. 219 Attaching a D Series or D1 Series Header: Hydraulic Center-Link with Optional Self-
Alignment .................................................................................................................. 219 Attaching a D Series or D1 Series Header: Hydraulic Center-Link without Self-Alignment............. 224
4.5.3 Detaching a D Series or D1 Series Header................................................................................ 230 Detaching a D Series or D1 Series Header: Hydraulic Center-Link ............................................. 230
4.5.4 Attaching an A Series Header .................................................................................................. 233 Attaching an A Series Header: Hydraulic Center-Link with Optional Self-Alignment ..................... 233 Attaching an A Series Header: Hydraulic Center-Link without Self-Alignment .............................. 239
4.5.5 Detaching an A Series Header ................................................................................................. 245 Detaching an A Series Header: Hydraulic Center-Link ............................................................... 245
4.5.6 Attaching to an R/R1 Series Header ......................................................................................... 248 Attaching an R/R1 Series Header: Hydraulic Center-Link with Optional Self-Alignment ................ 248
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 14
214737 xii Revision A
Attaching an R/R1 Series Header: Hydraulic Center-Link without Optional Self-Alignment ........... 254
4.5.7 Detaching an R Series or R1 Series Header .............................................................................. 259 Detaching an R/R1 Series Header: Hydraulic Center-Link.......................................................... 259
4.6 Operating with a D Series or D1 Series Header .................................................................................. 263
4.6.1 Configuring Hydraulics ............................................................................................................ 263
4.6.2 Header Position ...................................................................................................................... 264
4.6.3 Adjusting the Reel Fore-Aft Position ......................................................................................... 264
4.6.4 Adjusting the Reel Height......................................................................................................... 264
4.6.5 Reel Speed............................................................................................................................. 264 Setting Reel to Ground Speed ................................................................................................. 264 Setting the Reel Only Speed.................................................................................................... 266
4.6.6 Draper Speed ......................................................................................................................... 267 Setting Draper to Ground Speed.............................................................................................. 267 Setting Minimum Draper Speed ............................................................................................... 267 Setting Draper Index............................................................................................................... 268 Setting Draper Speed Independent of Ground Speed ................................................................ 270
4.6.7 Knife Speeds .......................................................................................................................... 271 Setting Knife Speed: Windrower in Motion ................................................................................ 272
4.6.8 Deck Shift Control ................................................................................................................... 272 Deck Shift .............................................................................................................................. 272 Setting Float Options with Deck Shift........................................................................................ 273
4.7 Operating with an A Series Header.................................................................................................... 276
4.7.1 Auger Speed........................................................................................................................... 276 Auger Speed on A30D Headers............................................................................................... 276 Setting the Auger Speed on A40D Headers .............................................................................. 276
4.7.2 Reel Speed............................................................................................................................. 277 Displaying Reel Speed: A30S and A30D Headers..................................................................... 277 Reel Speed on A40D Headers................................................................................................. 278
4.7.3 Knife Speed............................................................................................................................ 282 Setting Knife Speed While in Motion......................................................................................... 282
4.8 Operating with an R Series or R1 Series Header ................................................................................ 284
4.8.1 Disc Speed ............................................................................................................................. 284 Setting Disc Speed ................................................................................................................. 284
Chapter 5: Maintenance and Servicing .........................................................................................287
5.1 Preparation for Servicing .................................................................................................................. 287
5.2 Engine Compartment Hood .............................................................................................................. 288
5.2.1 Opening Hood (Lower Position)................................................................................................ 288
5.2.2 Closing Hood (Lower Position) ................................................................................................. 289
5.2.3 Opening Hood (Highest Position) ............................................................................................. 289
5.2.4 Closing Hood (Highest Position) ............................................................................................... 290
5.3Maintenance Platforms..................................................................................................................... 291
5.3.1 Opening Platforms (Standard Position) ..................................................................................... 291
5.3.2 Closing Platforms (Standard Position)....................................................................................... 292
5.3.3 Opening Platforms (Major Service Position) .............................................................................. 293
5.3.4 Closing Platforms (Major Service Position) ................................................................................ 294
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 15
214737 xiii Revision A
5.4Windrower Lubrication...................................................................................................................... 296
5.4.1 Lubricating the Windrower ....................................................................................................... 296
5.4.2 Lubrication Points.................................................................................................................... 297
5.5 Operators Station............................................................................................................................ 298
5.5.1 Seat Belts............................................................................................................................... 298
5.5.2 Safety Systems....................................................................................................................... 298 Checking Operator Presence System ...................................................................................... 298 Checking Engine Interlock....................................................................................................... 299
5.5.3 Ground Speed Lever (GSL) Adjustments .................................................................................. 300 Adjusting Ground Speed Lever (GSL) Lateral Movement........................................................... 300 Adjusting Ground Speed Lever (GSL) Fore-Aft Movement ......................................................... 301
5.5.4 Steering Adjustments .............................................................................................................. 302 Checking Steering Link Pivots ................................................................................................. 302 Checking and Adjusting Steering Chain Tension ....................................................................... 304
5.5.5 Cab Suspension Limit Straps ................................................................................................... 304
5.6 Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning (HVAC) System .................................................................. 305
5.6.1 Fresh Air Intake Filter .............................................................................................................. 305 Removing Fresh Air Filter........................................................................................................ 305 Inspecting and Cleaning Fresh Air Filter Element ...................................................................... 306 Installing Fresh Air Filter.......................................................................................................... 306
5.6.2 Cleaning Return Air Filter......................................................................................................... 307 Servicing the Return Air Cleaner/Filter ..................................................................................... 307 Cleaning Return Air Cleaner/Filter............................................................................................ 308
5.6.3 Air Conditioning Condenser ..................................................................................................... 309
5.6.4 Air Conditioning (A/C) Evaporator Core..................................................................................... 309 Removing Air Conditioning (A/C) Cover.................................................................................... 309 Cleaning Air Conditioning (A/C) Evaporator Core ...................................................................... 310 Installing Air Conditioning (A/C) Cover ..................................................................................... 311
5.6.5 Air Conditioning (A/C) Compressor ........................................................................................... 311 Servicing the Air Conditioning Compressor............................................................................... 312
5.7 Engine ............................................................................................................................................ 313
5.7.1 General Engine Inspection....................................................................................................... 313
5.7.2 Turning the Engine Manually .................................................................................................... 313
5.7.3 Checking Engine Oil Level ....................................................................................................... 315
5.7.4 Changing Engine Oil................................................................................................................ 317 Draining Engine Oil................................................................................................................. 317 Replacing Engine Oil Filter ...................................................................................................... 317 Adding Engine Oil................................................................................................................... 318
5.7.5 Air Intake System .................................................................................................................... 319 Removing Primary Air Filter..................................................................................................... 319 Installing Primary Air Filter....................................................................................................... 321 Cleaning the Engine Air Cleaners Primary Filter ....................................................................... 323 Replacing the Secondary Air Filter ........................................................................................... 323
5.7.6 Charge Air Cooling .................................................................................................................. 325
5.7.7 Fuel System ........................................................................................................................... 325 Replacing Fuel Tank Vent Filter ............................................................................................... 325 Maintaining Fuel Filters ........................................................................................................... 326 Draining Fuel Tank.................................................................................................................. 330
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 16
214737 xiv Revision A
Filling the Fuel Tank................................................................................................................ 332 Fuel/Water Separator.............................................................................................................. 332
5.7.8 Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) System .......................................................................................... 334 Draining the Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Tank........................................................................... 334 Refilling the Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Tank ........................................................................... 335 Replacing the Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Vent Hose Filter ....................................................... 336 DEF Supply Module Filter........................................................................................................ 339
5.7.9 Engine Cooling System ........................................................................................................... 342 Checking Coolant Level .......................................................................................................... 342 Checking Engine Coolant Strength .......................................................................................... 343 Inspecting Pressurized Coolant Tank Cap ................................................................................ 344 Changing Coolant................................................................................................................... 344
5.7.10 Gearbox ............................................................................................................................... 348 Checking Lubricant Level and Adding Lubricant ........................................................................ 348 Changing Lubricant ................................................................................................................ 349
5.7.11 Inspecting Exhaust System .................................................................................................... 350
5.7.12 Belts..................................................................................................................................... 352 Tensioning Alternator/Fan Belt................................................................................................. 352 Replacing Fan Belt ................................................................................................................. 352 Tensioning Air Conditioner (A/C) Compressor Belt .................................................................... 353 Replacing Air Conditioner (A/C) Compressor Belt ..................................................................... 354
5.7.13 Engine Speed ....................................................................................................................... 354 Throttle Adjustment ................................................................................................................ 354
5.8Maintaining Engine Cooling Box........................................................................................................ 355
5.8.1 Opening Cooler Box Screen..................................................................................................... 355
5.8.2 Cleaning Screens and Coolers ................................................................................................. 355
5.8.3 Cleaning Cooler Box Components............................................................................................ 357
5.8.4 Adjusting Screen Cleaner Rotor to Screen Clearance ................................................................ 359
5.8.5 Closing Cooler Box Screen ...................................................................................................... 359
5.9 Electrical System ............................................................................................................................. 360
5.9.1 Preventing Electrical System Damage ...................................................................................... 360
5.9.2 Battery ................................................................................................................................... 360 Maintaining Batteries .............................................................................................................. 360 Battery Main Disconnect Switch............................................................................................... 361 Charging the Batteries ............................................................................................................ 361 Boosting the Batteries............................................................................................................. 363 Adding Electrolyte to the Battery .............................................................................................. 364 Removing Batteries ................................................................................................................ 365 Installing Batteries .................................................................................................................. 367 Connecting Batteries .............................................................................................................. 368
5.9.3 Headlights: Engine-Forward..................................................................................................... 369 Aligning Headlights................................................................................................................. 369 Replacing Headlight Bulb ........................................................................................................ 371
5.9.4 Field Lights: Cab-Forward........................................................................................................ 374 Adjusting Field Lights.............................................................................................................. 374 Replacing Field Light Bulb....................................................................................................... 375
5.9.5 Floodlights: Forward................................................................................................................ 375 Adjusting Forward Floodlights.................................................................................................. 375 Replacing Bulb in Cab-Forward Flood Light .............................................................................. 375
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 17
214737 xv Revision A
5.9.6 High-Intensity Discharge (HID) Auxiliary Lighting (Optional MD #B5596) .................................. 377 Replacing High-Intensity Discharge (HID) Auxiliary Lights (if Installed) ....................................... 377 Adjusting High-Intensity Discharge (HID) Auxiliary Lights (if Installed)......................................... 380
5.9.7 Floodlights: Rear..................................................................................................................... 380 Adjusting Rear Floodlights....................................................................................................... 380 Replacing Bulb in Rear Flood Light .......................................................................................... 381
5.9.8 Replacing Bulbs in Red and Amber Lights................................................................................. 382
5.9.9 Replacing Red Taillights .......................................................................................................... 383
5.9.10 Replacing the Bulbs in Beacon Lights ..................................................................................... 383
5.9.11 Replacing the Cabin Dome Light............................................................................................. 387
5.9.12 Replacing the Ambient Light Fixture........................................................................................ 388
5.9.13 Turn Signal Indicators ............................................................................................................ 388
5.9.14 Accessing Circuit Breakers and Fuses .................................................................................... 388 Checking and Replacing Fuses ............................................................................................... 389 Replacing Circuit Breakers and Relays..................................................................................... 390 Fuse Box Decal ...................................................................................................................... 391 Accessing T4 Specific Fuses ................................................................................................... 392 Inspecting and Replacing 125A Main Fuses ............................................................................. 394
5.10 Hydraulic System ........................................................................................................................... 396
5.10.1 Checking and Filling Hydraulic Oil........................................................................................... 397
5.10.2 Hydraulic Oil Cooler............................................................................................................... 398
5.10.3 Changing the Hydraulic Oil..................................................................................................... 398
5.10.4 Changing Hydraulic Oil Filters ................................................................................................ 399 Charge Oil Filter ..................................................................................................................... 400 Return Oil Filter ...................................................................................................................... 401
5.10.5 Header and Reel Hydraulics................................................................................................... 402 Pressure Compensator Valve .................................................................................................. 402 Flow Control Blocks ................................................................................................................ 403 Adjusting Header Drop Rate.................................................................................................... 403 Adjusting Reel Drop Rate ........................................................................................................ 404
5.10.6 Traction Drive Hydraulics ....................................................................................................... 405 Checking Transmission Oil Pressure........................................................................................ 405 Checking Charge Pump Pressure............................................................................................ 406
5.10.7 Hoses and Lines ................................................................................................................... 406
5.11 Wheels and Tires ........................................................................................................................... 408
5.11.1 Drive Wheels......................................................................................................................... 408 Inflating Drive Wheel Tire ........................................................................................................ 408 Tightening Drive Wheel Nuts ................................................................................................... 409 Servicing Drive Wheels ........................................................................................................... 409 Lubrication ............................................................................................................................. 412
5.11.2 Caster Wheels....................................................................................................................... 414 Inflating Caster Tire ................................................................................................................ 414 Tightening Caster Wheel Nuts ................................................................................................. 415 Servicing Caster Wheels ......................................................................................................... 416 Tightening Caster Wheel Anti-Shimmy Dampeners ................................................................... 420 Ballast Requirements.............................................................................................................. 420
5.12 Maintenance Schedule ................................................................................................................... 422
5.12.1 Maintenance Schedule/Record............................................................................................... 422
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 18
214737 xvi Revision A
Chapter 6: Options and Attachments............................................................................................427
6.1 Cab................................................................................................................................................. 427
6.1.1 AM/FM Radio.......................................................................................................................... 427
6.1.2 Automated Steering Systems ................................................................................................... 427
6.1.3 High Intensity Discharge (HID) Auxiliary Lighting ....................................................................... 427
6.1.4 Windshield Shades ................................................................................................................. 427
6.2 Engine ............................................................................................................................................ 428
6.2.1 Engine Block Heater................................................................................................................ 428
6.2.2 Engine Fan Air Baffle............................................................................................................... 428
6.3 Header Operation ............................................................................................................................ 429
6.3.1 Double Windrow Attachment (DWA) ......................................................................................... 429
6.3.2 Draper Header Case Drain Kit .................................................................................................. 429
6.3.3 Draper Header Reel Drive and Lift Plumbing ............................................................................. 429
6.3.4 Header Drive Reverser ............................................................................................................ 429
6.3.5 Light Header Flotation ............................................................................................................. 429
6.3.6 Pressure Sensor Kit ................................................................................................................ 430
6.3.7 R1 Disc Drive Kit ..................................................................................................................... 430
6.3.8 R80 and R85 Rotary Header Drive Hydraulics (4.0 m [13 ft.])...................................................... 430
6.3.9 Self-Aligning Center-Link ......................................................................................................... 430
6.3.10 Spring with External Booster Spring........................................................................................ 430
6.3.11 Spring with Internal Booster Spring ......................................................................................... 430
6.3.12 Swath Compressor................................................................................................................ 431
6.3.13 Swath Roller ......................................................................................................................... 431
6.4 Transport......................................................................................................................................... 432
6.4.1 Lighting and Marking for Cab-Forward Road Travel ................................................................... 432
6.4.2 Towing Harness ...................................................................................................................... 432
6.4.3 Weight Box ............................................................................................................................. 432
Chapter 7: Troubleshooting .............................................................................................................433
7.1 Engine Troubleshooting.................................................................................................................... 433
7.2 Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) System Troubleshooting .......................................................................... 437
7.3 Electrical Troubleshooting................................................................................................................. 439
7.4 Hydraulics Troubleshooting............................................................................................................... 440
7.5 Header Drive Troubleshooting........................................................................................................... 441
7.6 Traction Drive Troubleshooting.......................................................................................................... 442
7.7 Steering and Ground Speed Control Troubleshooting ......................................................................... 445
7.8 Cab Air Troubleshooting ................................................................................................................... 446
7.9 Operators Station Troubleshooting ................................................................................................... 450
Chapter 8: Reference .........................................................................................................................451
8.1 Recommended Fuel, Fluids, and Lubricants....................................................................................... 451
8.1.1 Storing Lubricants and Fluids ................................................................................................... 451
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 19
214737 xvii Revision A
8.1.2 Fuel Specifications .................................................................................................................. 451
8.1.3 Lubricants, Fluids, and System Capacities ................................................................................ 452
8.1.4 Filter Part Numbers ................................................................................................................. 453
8.2 Recommended Torques ................................................................................................................... 455
8.2.1 Torque Specifications .............................................................................................................. 455 SAE Bolt Torque Specifications................................................................................................ 455 Metric Bolt Specifications ........................................................................................................ 457 Metric Bolt Specifications Bolting into Cast Aluminum................................................................ 459 Flare-Type Hydraulic Fittings ................................................................................................... 460 O-Ring Boss (ORB) Hydraulic Fittings (Adjustable) ................................................................... 461 O-Ring Boss (ORB) Hydraulic Fittings (Non-Adjustable) ............................................................ 463 O-Ring Face Seal (ORFS) Hydraulic Fittings ............................................................................ 464 Tapered Pipe Thread Fittings................................................................................................... 465
8.3 Conversion Chart ............................................................................................................................. 466
8.4 Engine Error Codes.......................................................................................................................... 467
8.5 Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Supply Module Fault Codes ..................................................................... 496
8.6 Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Tank and Sensor Associated Fault Codes ................................................. 497
8.7 Cab Display Module (CDM) / Windrower Control Module (WCM) Error Codes ...................................... 499
8.7.1 Cab Display Module (CDM) Error Codes ................................................................................... 499
8.7.2 Miscellaneous Information / Error Codes................................................................................... 502
Index.......................................................................................................................................................503
Lubricants, Fluids, and System Capacities .................................................... Inside Back Cover
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 21
214737 1 Revision A
1 Safety
1.1 Safety Alert Symbols
Figure 1.1: Safety Symbol
This safety alert symbol indicates important safety messages in this manual and on safety signs on the machine.
This symbol means:
ATTENTION!
BECOME ALERT!
YOUR SAFETY IS INVOLVED!
Carefully read and follow the safety message accompanying this symbol.
Why is safety important to you?
Accidents disable and kill
Accidents cost
Accidents can be avoided
Page 22
214737 2 Revision A
1.2 Signal Words Three signal words, DANGER, WARNING, and CAUTION, are used to alert you to hazardous situations. Signal words are selected using the following guidelines:
DANGER Indicates an imminently hazardous situation that, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury.
WARNING Indicates a potentially hazardous situation that, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury. It may also be used to alert against unsafe practices.
CAUTION Indicates a potentially hazardous situation that, if not avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury. It may be used to alert against unsafe practices.
SAFETY
Page 23
214737 3 Revision A
1.3 General Safety
Figure 1.2: Safety Equipment
CAUTION The following are general farm safety precautions that should be part of your operating procedure for all types of machinery.
Protect yourself.
When assembling, operating, and servicing machinery, wear all protective clothing and personal safety devices that could be necessary for job at hand. Do NOT take chances. You may need the following:
Hard hat
Protective footwear with slip-resistant soles
Protective glasses or goggles
Heavy gloves
Wet weather gear
Respirator or filter mask
Figure 1.3: Safety Equipment
Be aware that exposure to loud noises can cause hearing impairment or loss. Wear suitable hearing protection devices such as earmuffs or earplugs to help protect against loud noises.
Figure 1.4: Safety Equipment
Provide a first aid kit for use in case of emergencies.
Keep a fire extinguisher on the machine. Be sure fire extinguisher is properly maintained. Be familiar with its proper use.
Keep young children away from machinery at all times.
Be aware that accidents often happen when Operator is tired or in a hurry. Take time to consider safest way. Never ignore warning signs of fatigue.
SAFETY
Page 24
214737 4 Revision A
Figure 1.5: Safety around Equipment
Wear close-fitting clothing and cover long hair. Never wear dangling items such as scarves or bracelets.
Keep all shields in place. NEVER alter or remove safety equipment. Make sure driveline guards can rotate independently of shaft and can telescope freely.
Use only service and repair parts made or approved by equipment manufacturer. Substituted parts may not meet strength, design, or safety requirements.
Figure 1.6: Safety around Equipment
Keep hands, feet, clothing, and hair away from moving parts. NEVER attempt to clear obstructions or objects from a machine while engine is running.
Do NOT modify machine. Unauthorized modifications may impair machine function and/or safety. It may also shorten machines life.
To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of machine, ALWAYS stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operators seat for any reason.
Figure 1.7: Safety around Equipment
Keep service area clean and dry. Wet or oily floors are slippery. Wet spots can be dangerous when working with electrical equipment. Be sure all electrical outlets and tools are properly grounded.
Keep work area well lit.
Keep machinery clean. Straw and chaff on a hot engine is a fire hazard. Do NOTallow oil or grease to accumulate on service platforms, ladders, or controls. Clean machines before storage.
NEVER use gasoline, naphtha, or any volatile material for cleaning purposes. These materials may be toxic and/or flammable.
When storing machinery, cover sharp or extending components to prevent injury from accidental contact.
SAFETY
Page 25
214737 5 Revision A
1.4 Maintenance Safety
Figure 1.8: Safety around Equipment
To ensure your safety while maintaining machine:
Review operators manual and all safety items before operation and/or maintenance of machine.
Place all controls in Neutral, stop the engine, set the park brake, remove the ignition key, and wait for all moving parts to stop before servicing, adjusting, and/or repairing.
Follow good shop practices:
Keep service areas clean and dry
Be sure electrical outlets and tools are properly grounded
Keep work area well lit
Figure 1.9: Equipment NOT Safe for Children
Relieve pressure from hydraulic circuits before servicing and/or disconnecting machine.
Make sure all components are tight and that steel lines, hoses, and couplings are in good condition before applying pressure to hydraulic systems.
Keep hands, feet, clothing, and hair away from all moving and/or rotating parts.
Clear area of bystanders, especially children, when carrying out any maintenance, repairs, or adjustments.
Install transport lock or place safety stands under frame before working under machine.
If more than one person is servicing machine at same time, be aware that rotating a driveline or other mechanically-driven component by hand (for example, accessing a lubricant fitting) will cause drive components in other areas (belts, pulleys, and knives) to move. Stay clear of driven components at all times.
Figure 1.10: Safety Equipment
Wear protective gear when working on machine.
Wear heavy gloves when working on knife components.
SAFETY
Page 26
214737 6 Revision A
1.5 Hydraulic Safety
Figure 1.11: Testing for Hydraulic Leaks
Always place all hydraulic controls in Neutral before dismounting.
Make sure that all components in hydraulic system are kept clean and in good condition.
Replace any worn, cut, abraded, flattened, or crimped hoses and steel lines.
Do NOTattempt any makeshift repairs to hydraulic lines, fittings, or hoses by using tapes, clamps, cements, or welding. The hydraulic system operates under extremely high-pressure. Makeshift repairs will fail suddenly and create hazardous and unsafe conditions.
Figure 1.12: Hydraulic Pressure Hazard
Wear proper hand and eye protection when searching for high-pressure hydraulic leaks. Use a piece of cardboard as a backstop instead of hands to isolate and identify a leak.
If injured by a concentrated high-pressure stream of hydraulic fluid, seek medical attention immediately. Serious infection or toxic reaction can develop from hydraulic fluid piercing the skin.
Figure 1.13: Safety around Equipment
Make sure all components are tight and steel lines, hoses, and couplings are in good condition before applying pressure to a hydraulic system.
SAFETY
Page 27
214737 7 Revision A
1.6 Tire Safety
Figure 1.14: Overinflated Tire
WARNING Service tires safely.
A tire can explode during inflation which could cause serious injury or death.
Follow proper procedures when mounting a tire on a wheel or rim. Failure to do so can produce an explosion that may result in serious injury or death.
Figure 1.15: Safely Inflating Tire
WARNING Do NOTstand over tire. Use a clip-on chuck and
extension hose.
Do NOTexceed maximum inflation pressure indicated on tire label.
Replace tires that have defects.
Replace wheel rims that are cracked, worn, or severely rusted.
Never weld a wheel rim.
Never use force on an inflated or partially inflated tire.
Make sure tire is correctly seated before inflating to operating pressure.
If tire is not correctly positioned on rim or is overinflated, tire bead can loosen on one side causing air to escape at high speed and with great force. An air leak of this nature can thrust tire in any direction endangering anyone in area.
Make sure all air is removed from tire before removing tire from rim.
Do NOT remove, install, or repair a tire on a rim unless you have proper equipment and experience to perform job.
Take tire and rim to a qualified tire repair shop.
SAFETY
Page 28
214737 8 Revision A
1.7 Battery Safety
Figure 1.16: Safety around Batteries
WARNING Keep all sparks and flames away from batteries, as a
gas given off by electrolyte is explosive.
Ventilate when charging in enclosed space.
Figure 1.17: Safety around Batteries
WARNING Wear safety glasses when working near batteries.
Do NOT tip batteries more than 45 to avoid electrolyte loss.
Battery electrolyte causes severe burns. Avoid contact with skin, eyes, or clothing.
Electrolyte splashed into eyes is extremely dangerous. Should this occur, force eye open, and flood with cool, clean water for 5 minutes. Call a doctor immediately.
If electrolyte is spilled or splashed on clothing or body, neutralize it immediately with a solution of baking soda and water, then rinse with clear water.
Figure 1.18: Safety around Batteries
WARNING To avoid injury from spark or short circuit, disconnect
battery ground cable before servicing any part of electrical system.
Do NOToperate engine with alternator or battery disconnected. With battery cables disconnected and engine running, a high voltage can be built up if terminals touch frame. Anyone touching frame under these conditions would be severely shocked.
When working around storage batteries, remember that all of the exposed metal parts are live. Never lay a metal object across terminals because a spark or short circuit will result.
Keep batteries out of reach of children.
SAFETY
Page 29
214737 9 Revision A
1.8 Welding Precautions High currents and voltage spikes associated with welding can cause damage to electronic components. Before welding on any part of windrower or an attached header, disconnect all electronic module harness connections as well as battery cables. Refer to your Dealer for proper procedures.
SAFETY
Page 30
214737 10 Revision A
1.9 Engine Safety
WARNING Do NOTuse aerosol starting aids such as ether. Such use could result in an explosion and personal injury.
CAUTION On initial start-up of a new, serviced, or repaired engine, always be ready to stop the engine in order to
stop an overspeed. This may be accomplished by shutting off the air and/or fuel supply to the engine.
Do NOT bypass or disable automatic shutoff circuits. The circuits are provided in order to help prevent personal injury. The circuits are also provided in order to help prevent engine damage. Contact your Dealer for repairs and adjustments.
Inspect the engine for potential hazards.
Before starting the engine, ensure that no one is on, underneath, or close to the engine. Ensure that people clear the area.
All protective guards and all protective covers must be installed if the engine must be started in order to perform service procedures.
To help prevent an accident that is caused by parts in rotation, work around parts carefully.
If a warning tag is attached to engine start switch or to controls, do NOTstart engine or move controls. Consult with person who attached warning tag before engine is started.
Start engine from operators compartment. Always start engine according to procedure that is described in Starting Engine section of operators manual. Knowing correct procedure will help to prevent major damage to engine components and prevent personal injury.
To ensure that the jacket water heater (if equipped) and/or lubricant oil heater (if equipped) is working correctly, check the water temperature gauge and/or oil temperature gauge during heater operation.
Engine exhaust contains products of combustion, which can be harmful to your health. Always start the engine and operate the engine in a well-ventilated area. If the engine is started in an enclosed area, vent the engine exhaust to the outside.
Engine exhaust gases become very hot during operation and can burn people and common materials. Stay clear of the rear of machine and avoid exhaust gases when engine is running.
NOTE:
The engine may be equipped with a device for cold starting. If the engine will be operated in very cold conditions, then an additional cold starting aid may be required.
1.9.1 High-Pressure Rail
CAUTION Contact with high-pressure fuel may cause fluid penetration and burn hazards. High-pressure fuel
spray may cause a fire hazard. Failure to follow these instructions may cause personal injury or death.
Before disconnecting fuel lines or any other components under high-pressure between the fuel pump and high-pressure common rail fuel system, confirm that the fuel pressure is relieved.
SAFETY
Page 31
214737 11 Revision A
1.9.2 Engine Electronics
WARNING Tampering with electronic system installation or original equipment manufacturer (OEM) wiring installation can be dangerous and could result in personal injury or death and/or engine damage.
WARNING Electrical Shock Hazard. The electronic unit injectors use DC voltage. The engine control module (ECM) sends this voltage to the electronic unit injectors. Do NOTcome in contact with the harness connector for the electronic unit injectors while engine is operating. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury or death.
This engine has a comprehensive, programmable engine monitoring system. The ECM has the ability to monitor engine operating conditions. If conditions exceed the allowable range, the ECM will initiate immediate action.
The following actions are available for engine monitoring control:
Warning
Derate
Shut down
The following monitored engine operating conditions have the ability to limit engine speed and/or engine power:
Engine coolant temperature
Engine oil pressure
Engine speed
Intake manifold air temperature
Diesel exhaust fluid (DEF) system performance
Aftertreatment system performance
SAFETY
Page 32
214737 12 Revision A
1.10 Safety Signs
Figure 1.19: Operators Manual Decal
Keep safety signs clean and legible at all times.
Replace safety signs that are missing or illegible.
If original part on which a safety sign was installed is replaced, be sure repair part also bears current safety sign.
Replacement safety signs are available from your MacDon Dealer Parts Department.
1.10.1 Installing Safety Decals 1. Clean and dry installation area.
2. Decide on exact location before you remove decal backing paper.
3. Remove smaller portion of split backing paper.
4. Place decal in position and slowly peel back remaining paper, smoothing decal as it is applied.
5. Prick small air pockets with a pin and smooth out.
SAFETY
Page 33
214737 13 Revision A
1.11 Safety Sign Locations
Figure 1.20: Safety Sign Locations (Left Side)
A - Hazard Sign (MD #135378) B - Cab Door and Rim (MD #166454) C - Oil Reservoir under Hood (MD #166466) D - Exhaust Cover (MD #166450) E - Close to Radiator Cap (MD #166461) F - Fan Shroud (Top) (MD #166450) G - Fan Shroud (Middle) (MD #166451) H - Fan Shroud (Bottom) (MD #166452) J - Frame Opening (MD #166233) K - Platform (Left of Step) (MD #166425) L - Platform (Right of Step) (MD #166441) M - Frame at Valve Manifold (MD #166466) N - Lift Linkage (MD #166438) P - Inner Post (MD #166234) Q - Inner Post (MD #166463) R - Neutral Interlock (MD #166425) S - Frame (MD #166425) T - Trainers Seat (MD #167502) U - Air Baffle (MD #166450) V - Inner Post (MD #166457)
SAFETY
Page 34
214737 14 Revision A
Figure 1.21: Safety Signs (Left Side)
SAFETY
Page 35
214737 15 Revision A
Figure 1.22: Safety Sign Locations (Right Side)
A - Hazard Sign on Seat (MD #115148) B - Lift Linkage (MD #166439) C - Frame (MD #166455) D - Frame (MD #166456) E - Cab Frame (MD #184372) F - Platform (MD #166425) G - Shroud (MD #166451) H - Shroud (MD #166452) J - Hydraulic Reservoir (MD #166466) K - Wiper Cover (MD #166465) L - Rim (MD #166454 [similar to [E]) M - Window (MD #167504)
SAFETY
Page 36
214737 16 Revision A
Figure 1.23: Safety Signs (Right Side)
SAFETY
Page 37
214737 17 Revision A
1.12 Understanding Safety Signs
Figure 1.24: MD #166233
MD #166233
Run-over hazard
DANGER
Do NOT start engine by shorting across starter or starter relay terminals. Machine will start with drive engaged and move if starting circuitry is bypassed.
Start engine only from operators seat. Do NOT try to start engine with someone under or near machine.
Figure 1.25: MD #166234
MD #166234
Run-over hazard
WARNING
The training seat is provided for an experienced Operator of the machine when a new Operator is being trained.
The training seat is not intended as a passenger seat or for use by children.
Use the seat belt whenever operating the machine or riding as a trainer.
Keep all other riders off the machine.
Figure 1.26: MD #166425
MD #166425
Run-over hazard
WARNING
Remove the key from the ignition.
Read the windrower and header manuals for inspection and maintenance instructions.
SAFETY
Page 38
214737 18 Revision A
Figure 1.27: MD #166438
MD #166438
Crushing hazard
DANGER
Rest header on ground or engage safety props before going under unit.
Figure 1.28: MD #166439
MD #166439
Crushing hazard
DANGER
Rest header on ground or engage safety props before going under unit.
SAFETY
Page 39
214737 19 Revision A
Figure 1.29: MD #166441
MD #166441
Loss of control hazard
CAUTION
To prevent machine damage and/or loss of control, it is essential that the machine be equipped such that weights are within the specified limits.
Figure 1.30: MD #166450
MD #166450
Hot surface hazard
WARNING
To avoid injury, keep a safe distance from hot surface.
Figure 1.31: MD #166451
MD #166451
Rotating fan hazard
WARNING
To avoid injury, stop the engine and remove the key before opening engine hood.
SAFETY
Page 40
214737 20 Revision A
Figure 1.32: MD #166452
MD #166452
Hand and arm entanglement hazard
WARNING
Do NOTopen or remove safety shields while the engine is running.
To avoid injury, stop the engine and remove the key before opening engine hood.
Figure 1.33: MD #166454
MD #166454
General hazard pertaining to machine operation and servicing
CAUTION
Read the operators manual and follow all safety instructions.
Do NOTallow untrained persons to operate the machine.
Review safety instructions with all Operators every year.
Ensure that all safety signs are installed and legible.
Make certain everyone is clear of machine before starting engine and during operation.
Keep riders off the machine.
Keep all shields in place and stay clear of moving parts.
Disengage header drive, put transmission in Neutral, and wait for all movement to stop before leaving operators position.
Stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before servicing, adjusting, lubricating, cleaning, or unplugging machine.
Engage locks to prevent lowering of header or reel before servicing in the raised position.
Use slow moving vehicle emblem and flashing warning lights when operating on roadways unless prohibited by law.
SAFETY
Page 41
214737 21 Revision A
Figure 1.34: MD #166455
MD #166455
Explosion hazard
WARNING
Prevent serious bodily injury caused by explosive battery gases.
Keep sparks and flames away from the battery.
Refer to operators manual for battery boosting and charging procedures.
Figure 1.35: MD #166456
MD #166456
Battery acid hazard
WARNING
Corrosive and poisonous battery acid. Acid can severely burn your body and clothing.
SAFETY
Page 42
214737 22 Revision A
Figure 1.36: MD #166457
MD #166457
General hazard pertaining to machine operation and servicing
CAUTION
To avoid injury or death from improper or unsafe machine operation:
Read the operators manual and follow all safety instructions.
Do NOTallow untrained persons to operate the machine.
Review safety instructions with all Operators every year.
Ensure that all safety signs are installed and legible.
Make certain everyone is clear of machine before starting engine and during operation.
Keep riders off the machine.
Keep all shields in place and stay clear of moving parts.
Disengage header drive, put transmission in Neutral and wait for all movement to stop before leaving operators position.
Stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before servicing, adjusting, lubricating, cleaning, or unplugging machine.
Engage locks to prevent lowering of header or reel before servicing in the raised position.
Use slow moving vehicle emblem and flashing warning lights when operating on roadways unless prohibited by law.
Run-over hazard
WARNING
Machine will move if steering wheel is turned while engine is running.
Steering response is opposite to what is normally expected when backing up. Turn bottom of steering wheel in direction you want to go.
Always move ground speed lever to slow end of range before shifting high-low speed control.
Stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before servicing, adjusting, lubricating, cleaning, or unplugging the machine.
SAFETY
Page 43
214737 23 Revision A
Figure 1.37: MD #166461
MD #166461
Hot fluid under pressure hazard
CAUTION
Coolant is under pressure and may be hot. Never remove pressurized coolant tank cap when engine is hot.
Figure 1.38: MD #166463
MD #166463
Collision hazard in transport
WARNING
Collision between windrower and other vehicles may result in injury or death.
When driving windrower on public roadways:
Obey all highway traffic regulations in your area. Use pilot vehicles front and rear of windrower if required by law.
Use slow moving vehicle emblem and flashing warning lights unless prohibited by law.
If width of attached header impedes other vehicle traffic, remove header and install MacDon approved weight box. Refer to operators manual for safe procedure to tow header.
Figure 1.39: MD #166465
MD #166465
Loss of control hazard
WARNING
To avoid serious injury or death from loss of control:
Do NOT make abrupt changes in steering direction.
Anticipate turns by slowing down well in advance.
Do NOT rapidly accelerate or decelerate while turning.
When travelling on steep slopes:
Reduce speed and lower header.
Move ground speed lever to slow end of range.
Shift high-low speed control to low range.
SAFETY
Page 44
214737 24 Revision A
With header removed, steering control is reduced if weight is not added to drive wheels. If you must drive the windrower without header or MacDon weight system:
Operate in low-speed range.
Avoid slopes.
Do NOT tow a header. If control of machine is lost, immediately pull ground speed lever to neutral.
Figure 1.40: MD #166466
MD #166466
High-pressure oil hazard
WARNING
Do not go near leaks.
High-pressure oil easily punctures skin, causing serious injury, gangrene, or death.
If injured, seek emergency medical help. Immediate surgery is required to remove oil.
Do not use finger or skin to check for leaks.
Lower load or relieve hydraulic pressure before loosening fittings.
Figure 1.41: MD #166843
MD #166843
Steering control
WARNING
To avoid serious injury or death from loss of control:
Do not make abrupt changes in steering direction.
Anticipate turns by slowing down well in advance.
Do not rapidly accelerate or decelerate while turning.
SAFETY
Page 45
214737 25 Revision A
Figure 1.42: MD #167502
MD #167502
Pinch point hazard
WARNING
To avoid injury, be cautious when opening/closing the training seat to avoid getting pinched.
Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury.
Figure 1.43: MD #167504
MD #167504
Emergency exit
ATTENTION
To exit the machine via the secondary door, follow the arrow on the running man sign.
Figure 1.44: MD #184372
MD #184372
General hazard pertaining to machine operation and servicing
CAUTION
To avoid injury or death from improper or unsafe machine operation:
Read the operators manual and follow all safety instructions. If you do not have a manual, obtain one from your Dealer.
Do not allow untrained persons to operate the machine.
Review safety instructions with all Operators annually.
Ensure that all safety signs are installed and legible.
Make certain everyone is clear of machine before starting engine and during operation.
Keep riders off the machine.
Keep all shields in place and stay clear of moving parts.
SAFETY
Page 46
214737 26 Revision A
Disengage header drive, put transmission in Neutral, and wait for all movement to stop before leaving operators position.
Stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before servicing, adjusting, lubricating, cleaning, or unplugging machine.
Engage safety props to prevent lowering of raised unit before servicing in the raised position.
Use slow moving vehicle emblem and flashing warning lights when operating on roadways unless prohibited by law.
Figure 1.45: MD #190546
MD #190546
Slippery surface
WARNING
Do not use this area as a step or platform.
Failure to comply could result in serious injury or death.
SAFETY
Page 47
214737 27 Revision A
2 Product Overview
2.1 Definitions The following terms and acronyms may be used in this manual:
Term Definition
A Series header MacDon A30D and A40D auger headers
API American Petroleum Institute
ASTM American Society of Testing and Materials
Bolt A headed and externally threaded fastener that is designed to be paired with a nut
Cab-forward Windrower operation with Operator and cab facing in direction of travel
CDM Cab display module on a windrower
Center-link A hydraulic cylinder link between header and machine used to change header angle
CGVW Combined gross vehicle weight
D Series header MacDon D50, D60, and D65 rigid draper headers
D1 Series header MacDon D115, D120, D125, D130, D135, and D140 rigid draper headers for M Series Windrower
DDD Double-draper drive
DEF Diesel exhaust fluid; also called AdBlue in Europe, and AUS 32 in Australia
DEF DOSING UNIT Pump that supplies diesel exhaust fluid through system
DM Dosing module
DK Double knife
DKD Double-knife drive
DOC Diesel oxidation catalyst
DRT Aftertreatment decomposition tube
DWA Double Windrow Attachment
ECM Engine control module
Engine-forward Windrower operation with Operator and engine facing in direction of travel
FFFT Flats from finger tight
Finger tight Finger tight is a reference position where sealing surfaces or components are making contact with each other, and fitting has been tightened to a point where fitting is no longer loose
GSL Ground speed lever
GSS Grass Seed
GVW Gross vehicle weight
Hard joint A joint made with use of a fastener where joining materials are highly incompressible
Page 48
214737 28 Revision A
Term Definition
Header A machine that cuts and lays crop into a windrow and is attached to a windrower
Hex key A tool of hexagonal cross-section used to drive bolts and screws that have a hexagonal socket in head (internal-wrenching hexagon drive); also known as an Allen key and various other synonyms
HDS Hydraulic deck shift
hp Horsepower
ISC Intermediate Speed Control
JIC Joint Industrial Council: A standards body that developed standard sizing and shape for original 37 flared fitting
Knife A cutting device which uses a reciprocating cutter (also called a sickle)
MDS Mechanical deck shift
n/a Not applicable
N-DETENT The slot opposite the NEUTRAL position of M Series SP Windrowers on operators console
NPT National Pipe Thread: A style of fitting used for low-pressure port openings. Threads on NPT fittings are uniquely tapered for an interference fit
Nut An internally threaded fastener that is designed to be paired with a bolt
ORB O-ring boss: A style of fitting commonly used in port openings on manifolds, pumps, and motors
ORFS O-ring face seal: A style of fitting commonly used for connecting hoses and tubes. This style of fitting is also commonly called ORS, which stands for O-ring seal
R Series header MacDon R80 and R85 rotary disc headers
RoHS (Reduction of Hazardous Substances)
A directive by the European Union to restrict use of certain hazardous substances (such as hexavalent chromium used in some yellow zinc platings)
rpm Revolutions per minute
SAE Society of Automotive Engineers
SCR Selective catalytic reduction catalyst
Screw A headed and externally threaded fastener that threads into preformed threads or forms its own thread into a mating part
SDD Single-draper drive
Self-Propelled (SP) Windrower
Self-propelled machine consisting of a power unit with a header
SK Single knife
SKD Single-knife drive
Soft joint A joint made with use of a fastener where joining materials are compressible or experience relaxation over a period of time
spm Strokes per minute
Tension Axial load placed on a bolt or screw, usually measured in Newtons (N) or pounds (lb.)
PRODUCT OVERVIEW
Page 49
214737 29 Revision A
Term Definition
TFFT Turns from finger tight
Torque The product of a force X lever arm length, usually measured in Newton-meters (Nm) or foot-pounds (lbfft)
Torque angle A tightening procedure where fitting is assembled to a precondition (finger tight) and then nut is turned farther a number of degrees to achieve its final position
Torque-tension The relationship between assembly torque applied to a piece of hardware and axial load it induces in bolt or screw
UCA Upper cross auger
ULSD Ultra-low sulphur diesel
Washer A thin cylinder with a hole or slot located in the center that is to be used as a spacer, load distribution element, or locking mechanism
WCM Windrower control module
Windrower Power unit of a self-propelled header
WOT Wide open throttle
PRODUCT OVERVIEW
Page 50
214737 30 Revision A
2.2 Specifications
Engine
Type Cummins QSB-4.5L CM2350 4 cylinder turbo diesel, B20 biodiesel approved
Displacement 4.5 L (275 cu. in.)
Power Rated 116 kW (156 hp) @ 2200 rpm
Electrical System
Recommended battery (2) 12 Volt, maximum dimension: 334 x 188 x 232 mm (13.25 x 7.37 x 9.44 in.), group rating 29H or 31A. Heavy duty / off road / vibration resistant.
Minimum CCA per battery (cold cranking amps)
650
Battery BCI group rating 29H or 31A
Alternator 160 amp
Egress lighting Standard
Warning beacons Standard
Starter Wet type
Working lights 11
GPS ready Wiring harness factory installed for Trimble and JD Greenstar
Traction Drive
Type Hydrostatic, three-speed electric shift
Speed Field (cab-forward) Low range: 018 km/h (11 mph), Mid range: 026 km/h (16 mph)
Speed Reverse (cab-forward) 9.6 km/h (6 mph)
Speed Transport (engine-forward) High range: 037 km/h (23 mph)
Transmission Type Two piston pumps: one per drive wheel
Transmission Displacement 44 cc (2.65 cu. in.)
Transmission Flow 167 L/min (40 US gpm)
Transmission Pressure 379 bar (5500 psi)
Final drive Type Planetary gearbox
Final drive Ratio 30.5 : 1
Wheel motor displacement
Low range 68 cc (4.15 cu. in.)
Wheel motor displacement
Mid range 50 cc (3.01 cu. in.)
Wheel motor displacement
High range 32 cc (1.93 cu. in.)
PRODUCT OVERVIEW
Page 51
214737 31 Revision A
System Capacities
Fuel tank 367 L (97 US gallons)
Hydraulic reservoir 65 L (17.2 US gallons)
Diesel exhaust fluid (DEF) tank capacity 29 L (7.5 US gallons)
Header Drive (Refer to Table 2.1, page 33).
Header Lift/Tilt
Type Lift - Hydraulic double-acting cylinders Tilt - Optional hydraulic positioning Tilt - Hydraulic center-link
Function Lift/tilt
Header Float
Primary adjustment Manual, external, drawbolt with springs (one per side), two inner booster spring
Fine adjustment Hydraulic, in-cab switch
Automatic Hydraulic, three programmable settings for all headers (Deck shift compensation on draper headers)
Cab
Type Spring/shock suspension
Dimensions Width 1600 mm (63 in.)
Dimensions Depth 1735 mm (68.3 in.) (at top of window)
Dimensions Height 1640 mm (64.6 in.)
Dimensions Volume 3540 L (125 cu. ft.)
Seat Driver Adjustable air-ride suspension, seat belt
Seat Training Folding, cab mounted, seat belt
Windshield wiper
Front 800 mm (31.5 in.) blade
Windshield wiper
Rear 560 mm (22 in.) blade
Heater 37,900 Btu/h (11,107 W)
Air conditioning 29,800 Btu/h (8734 W)
Electrical outlets One live, two on ignition, one live/keyed
Mirrors One inside (transport), two outside (field)
Radio Two speakers and antenna are factory installed. Radio is dealer installed
System Monitoring
Speeds Ground (mph or km/h), engine (rpm), knife (spm), disc (rpm), reel (rpm or mph/km/h), conveyor (ref. no.)
Header Height, angle, float, header drive load gauge
PRODUCT OVERVIEW
Page 52
214737 32 Revision A
Tire Options (Refer to Table 2.2, page 34 for options.)
Frame and Structure
Dimensions Refer to 2.3 Windrower Dimensions, page 34
Frame to ground (crop clearance) 1160 mm (45.7 in.)
Weight Base 4450 kg (9810 lb.)1
Weight Maximum GVW 9750 kg (21,500 lb.)1
Weight Maximum CGVW 10,480 kg (23,100 lb.)1
Header Compatibility
Auger headers
A30 D, A40 D All sizes
Draper headers
D502 Up to 35 ft.
Draper headers
D60 and D652 Up to 40 ft.
Draper headers
D1 Series Up to 40 ft.
Rotary disc R80 and R85 13 ft. only3
Rotary disc R113 and R116 13 ft. and 16 ft.
NOTE:
Specifications and design are subject to change without notice or obligation to revise previously sold units.
Figure 2.1: Pumps
Pump Locations: A Piston pump (closest to engine) knife drive.
B Reel/conveyor pump (or M2 with disc).
C Oil from the inner gear pump is normally routed directly to the cooler bypass valve and combines with the return flow from the first gear pump. From there the oil is cooled and moves through the high pressure filter and then into the supercharge valve manifold. If a Double Windrow Attachment (DWA) is installed, oil is diverted to power the draper; the return flow proceeds to the supercharge valve manifold.
D The outboard gear pump (D) supplies oil to the multifunction control manifold. The returned oil combines with the return flow from the inboard gear pump (C) at the cooler bypass and maintains standby pressure to operate brake disengage (either low- or high-speed range) and the neutral interlock cylinder.
PRODUCT OVERVIEW
1. Weights do not include options. 2. Depending on header options. 3. Only 18.4 x 26 tires are compatible with the 4 m (13 ft.) R80 and R85.
Page 53
214737 33 Revision A
E Traction drive double piston pump. Engine end pump drives right wheel; outboard pump drives left wheel.
Table 2.1 Hydraulic Pumps
Pump Type Specifications Controller Type Function
Pump A - Load sense pressure compensated piston pump
Variable displacement: 045 cc (2.75 cu. in.) flow = 0102 L/min (27 gpm) at 27.56 MPa (4000 psi)
Electric over hydraulic max. flow rate determined by header ID
Knife drive or part of disc drive (option) M1 circuit
Pump B - Load sense pressure compensated piston pump
Variable displacement: 038 cc (2.32 cu. in.) flow = 084 L/min (24 gpm) at 22.05 MPa (3200 psi)
Electric over hydraulic max. flow rate determined by header ID
Conveyor and reel drive or part of disc drive (option) M2 circuit
Pump C - Gear pump
Displacement: 16.7 cc (1.02 cu. in.) flow at full throttle 44 L/min (11.5 gpm) at 17.23 MPa (2500 psi)
Engine rpm
Supercharge flow and pressure for traction drive, brake release, neutral lock, and DWA draper drive (if installed)
Pump D - Gear pump
Displacement: 16.7 cc (1.02 cu. in.) flow at full throttle 44 L/min (11.5 gpm) at 17.23 MPa (2500 psi)
Engine rpm
Supercharge flow and pressure for traction drive, brake release, and neutral lock
PRODUCT OVERVIEW
Page 54
214737 34 Revision A
2.3 Windrower Dimensions
Figure 2.2: Windrower Dimensions Cab-Forward
A - Drive Tire Tread B - Drive Tire Hubs C - Drive Tires F - 1160 mm (45-3/4 in.) G - 3378 mm (133 in.) H - 4022 mm (158-5/16 in.) J - 5280 mm (207-7/8 in.)
Table 2.2 Drive Tires
Tire Size Wheel Position Tread (A) mm (in.)
Hubs (B) mm (in.)
Tires (C) mm (in.)
18.4 x 26 bar and turf narrow track4
Inner/outer (shipping) 3144 (123-3/4) 3571 (140-9/16) 3644 (143-7/16)
18.4 x 26 bar and turf narrow track4
Outer/outer 3324 (130-7/8) 3751 (147-11/16) 3824 (150-5/8)
18.4 x 26 bar and turf narrow track4
Inner/inner 2964 (116-11/16) 3391 (133-1/2) 3464 (136-3/8)
18.4 x 26 bar and turf wide track4
Inner/outer (shipping) 3319 (130-11/16) 3571 (140-9/16) 3819 (150-3/8)
18.4 x 26 bar and turf wide track4
Outer/outer 3499 (137-3/4) 3751 (147-11/16) 3999 (157-7/16)
PRODUCT OVERVIEW
4. Only 18.4 x 26 tires are compatible with the 4.0 m (13 ft.) R80 and R85.
Page 55
214737 35 Revision A
Table 2.2 Drive Tires (continued)
Tire Size Wheel Position Tread (A) mm (in.)
Hubs (B) mm (in.)
Tires (C) mm (in.)
18.4 x 26 bar and turf wide track4
Inner/inner 3139 (123-9/16) 3391 (133-1/2) 3639 (143-1/4)
600/65R28 radial tire
Inner/outer (shipping) 3139 (123-9/16) 3571 (140-9/16) 3758 (147-15/16)
600/65R28 radial tire
Outer/outer 3319 (130-11/16) 3751 (147-11/16) 3938 (155-1/16)
600/65R28 radial tire
Inner/inner 2959 (116-1/2) 3391 (133-1/2) 3578 (140-7/8)
23.1-26 and 580/70R26 turf tires
Inner/outer (shipping) 3203 (126-1/8) 3571 (140-9/16) 3793 (149-5/16)
23.1-26 and 580/70R26 turf tires
Outer/outer 3383 (133-3/16) 3751 (147-11/16) 3973 (156-7/16)
23.1-26 and 580/70R26 turf tires
Inner/inner 3023 (119) 3391 (133-1/2) 3613 (142-1/4)
PRODUCT OVERVIEW
Page 56
214737 36 Revision A
Figure 2.3: Windrower Dimensions Engine-Forward
D - Caster Tire Tread E - Caster Tire Casters K - 3064 mm (120-9/16 in.) L - 4747 mm (186-7/8 in.)
Table 2.3 Caster Tires
Tire Size Wheel Position Tread (D) mm (in.)
Casters (E) mm (in.)
7.5-16SL Minimum 2448 (96-7/16) 3032 (118-15/16)
7.5-16SL Maximum 3448 (135-11/16) 4032 (158-3/4)
10-16 formed caster Minimum 2448 (96-7/16) 3032 (118-15/16)
10-16 formed caster Maximum 3448 (135-11/16) 4032 (158-3/4)
10-16 forked caster Minimum 2448 (96-7/16) 3014 (118-11/16)
10-16 forked caster Maximum 3448 (135-11/16) 4014 (158)
16.5 x 16.1 Minimum 2448 (96-7/16) 3014 (118-11/16)
16.5 x 16.1 Maximum 3448 (135-11/16) 4014 (158)
PRODUCT OVERVIEW
Page 57
214737 37 Revision A
2.4 Component Location
Figure 2.4: Front Cab-Forward View
A - Header Lift Leg B - Header Float Springs C - Operators Station D - Windshield Wiper E - Turn Signal/Hazard Lights F - Tail Light Engine-Forward G - Field/Road Lights H - Handholds J - Beacon K - Mirror L - Door M - Maintenance Platform N - Center-Link
PRODUCT OVERVIEW
Page 58
214737 38 Revision A
Figure 2.5: Rear Cab-Forward View
A - Caster Wheel B - Walking Beam C - Taillights - Cab-Forward (Option) D - Engine Compartment Hood E - Windshield Wiper F - Field/Road Lights G - Horn H - Turn Signal/Hazard Lights J - Mirror K - Door L - Drive Wheel M - Maintenance Platform N - Precleaner P - Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Tank
PRODUCT OVERVIEW
Page 59
214737 39 Revision A
3 Operators Station The operators station is designed for operating the windrower in cab-forward mode (working mode) or in engine-forward mode (transport mode). The operators stationwhich includes the seat, console, and steering columnpivots 180 to provide access to controls and gauges regardless of the direction of travel.
3.1 Operator Console
Figure 3.1: Operator Console A - Ignition B - Cab Display Module (CDM) C - Header Controls D - Ground Speed Lever (GSL) E - Throttle
The console contains controls to operate the windrower, as well as amenities for the Operator. The console position is adjustable to suit each Operator.
Figure 3.2: Console Fore-Aft
1. Adjusting fore-aft and height:
a. Pull lever (A) and slide console fore or aft to the desired position.
b. Release lever to lock console.
Page 60
214737 40 Revision A
Figure 3.3: Console Fore-Aft
2. Adjusting only fore-aft:
a. Loosen nuts (A) under console.
b. Move console as required.
c. Tighten nuts (A).
OPERATORS STATION
Page 61
214737 41 Revision A
3.2 Operator Presence System The operator presence system is a safety feature designed to deactivate or alert selected systems when the Operator is not seated at the operators station.
These systems include:
Header drive
Engine and transmission
3.2.1 Header Drive To engage the header drive, the Operator must be seated in the operators seat.
If the Operator leaves the seat, power to the header drive is maintained for 5 seconds, then the header shuts down automatically.
To restart the header after an automatic shut down, move the HEADER DRIVE switch to the OFF position and then to the ON position.
3.2.2 Engine and Transmission If the HEADER DRIVE switch is engaged, the engine will not start.
If the windrower is moving 8 km/h (5 mph) or slower and the Operator leaves the seat, the CDM will flash NO OPERATOR on the upper line and ENGINE SHUT DOWN 5...4...3...2...1...0 on the lower line accompanied by a steady tone. When the countdown reaches 0, the engine shuts down.
If the windrower is moving 8 km/h (5 mph) or faster, and the Operator leaves the seat for more than 5 seconds, an alarm will sound and the lower display line will flash NO OPERATOR.
If the operators seat is in between cab-forward and engine-forward positions and the transmission is not locked in the NEUTRAL position, the engine shuts off. The lower display will flash LOCK SEAT BASE until the seat base is locked into position.
OPERATORS STATION
Page 62
214737 42 Revision A
3.3 Operators Seat Adjustments The operators seat has several adjustments. Refer to the following for the location and description of each adjustment.
3.3.1 Adjusting Fore-Aft Position
Figure 3.4: Fore-Aft Position
1. Pull lever (A) up to release.
2. Move seat forward or rearward.
3. Release lever (A).
3.3.2 Adjusting Fore-Aft Isolator Lock Locks seat fore-aft isolator.
Figure 3.5: Fore-Aft Isolator Lock
LOCK: Push lever (A) down.
UNLOCK: Pull lever (A) up.
OPERATORS STATION
Page 63
214737 43 Revision A
3.3.3 Adjusting Seat Suspension and Height Controls suspension stiffness and seat height.
Figure 3.6: Seat Suspension and Height on Armrest
INCREASE: Press upper switch (A).
DECREASE: Press lower switch (B).
3.3.4 Adjusting Seat Tilt
Figure 3.7: Seat Tilt
1. Pull lever (A) up to release.
2. Position seat back as desired.
3. Release lever (A).
OPERATORS STATION
Page 64
214737 44 Revision A
3.3.5 Adjusting Vertical Dampener Controls suspension dampening.
Figure 3.8: Vertical Dampener
INCREASE: Turn knob (A) counterclockwise.
DECREASE: Turn knob (A) clockwise.
3.3.6 Adjusting Armrest
Figure 3.9: Armrest
Raise armrest (A) for easier access to seat.
Lower armrest (A) after seat belt is buckled.
OPERATORS STATION
Page 65
214737 45 Revision A
3.3.7 Adjusting Armrest Angle
Figure 3.10: Armrest Angle
INCREASE: Rotate knob (A) clockwise.
DECREASE: Rotate knob (A) counterclockwise.
3.3.8 Adjusting Lumbar Support Adjusts the stiffness of seat back.
Figure 3.11: Lumbar Support
INCREASE: Rotate knob (A) upward.
DECREASE: Rotate knob (A) downward.
OPERATORS STATION
Page 66
214737 46 Revision A
3.3.9 Using Seat Belts The windrower is equipped with seat belts on the operators and trainers seats.
WARNING Seat belts can help ensure your safety when properly used and maintained.
Before starting the engine, fasten your seat belt, and ensure that the training seat occupants seat belt is securely fastened.
Never wear a seat belt loosely or with slack in the belt system. Never wear the belt in a twisted condition or pinched between the seat structural members.
To fasten seat belt:
Figure 3.12: Seat Belt
1. Pull belt with metal eye (A) at right side completely across your body.
2. Push metal eye (A) into buckle (B) until it locks.
3. Adjust the position of the belt as low on your body as possible.
To release seat belt:
Figure 3.13: Seat Belt
4. Push red button (C) in the end of the buckle.
5. Separate buckle (B) and metal eye (A).
OPERATORS STATION
Page 67
214737 47 Revision A
3.4 Training Seat A wall-mounted, fold-up training seat complete with seat belt is provided.
WARNING The training seat is provided for use by an experienced machine Operator while training a new
Operator.
The training seat is NOT intended as a passenger seat or for use by children. Use the seat belt whenever operating the machine or riding as a Trainer.
Keep all other riders off the machine.
Figure 3.14: Training Seat in Storage Position
For storage, lift seat (B) and secure with latch (A).
Figure 3.15: Training Seat
To lower seat, lift latch (A) and lower seat (B).
OPERATORS STATION
Page 68
214737 48 Revision A
3.5 Adjusting Steering Column The steering column can be adjusted to suit each particular Operator and to make it easier to get in and out of the seat.
Figure 3.16: Steering Column
1. Hold onto the steering wheel, lift handle (A), and move the steering wheel up or down to desired position.
2. Release handle (A) to lock the steering wheel position.
OPERATORS STATION
Page 69
214737 49 Revision A
3.6 Exterior Lighting
Figure 3.17: Headliner Console (except Russia) A - FIELD / OFF / ROAD B - HIGH / LOW C - BEACONS / OFF
The field/road (A), high/low beam (B), and beacon light (C) switches are located on a panel in the cab headliner. The hazard/turn signal switch is located on the cab display module (CDM).
The position of the operators station (cab-forward mode or engine-forward mode) automatically determines the lighting.
An auto-road light feature is available and is activated when certain conditions are met. For more information, refer to 3.6.6 Auto Road Light, page 54.
IMPORTANT:
Red and amber reflector tape is positioned so as to be visible in both engine-forward and cab-forward modes.
Figure 3.18: Headliner Console (Russia) A - FIELD / OFF / ROAD B - LOW / HIGH C - BEACON & CLEARANCE / OFF / CLEARANCE
OPERATORS STATION
Page 70
214737 50 Revision A
3.6.1 Field Light: Cab-Forward
Figure 3.19: Field Light Switch
The following lights are ON when the light switch is in FIELD position with the windrower in cab-forward mode:
Field lights in cab roof (front and rear)
Swath lights in hood
HID lights (if installed) on mirror supports
NOTE:
If the auto-road light feature is activated (i.e., windrower is in engine- or cab-forward mode, out of park, high range switch position, and header off), only the two front corner field lights will turn on; the remaining field lights are disabled.
Figure 3.20: Cab-Forward: Front View
The two innermost lights in the field light group (A) at the front of the cab are adjustable. Refer to Adjusting Field Lights, page 374.
Figure 3.21: Cab-Forward: Rear View
The two field lights (A) at the rear of the cab are adjustable. Refer to Adjusting Rear Floodlights, page 380.
NOTE:
When the engine is shut down, rear field lights (A) turn on for 60 seconds to illuminate the platform and stairs.
The two swath lights (B) in the hood are adjustable, but because they are used as road lights in engine-forward mode and adjusted accordingly, they should NOT be adjusted for field operation.
OPERATORS STATION
Page 71
214737 51 Revision A
3.6.2 Road Light: Engine-Forward
Figure 3.22: Road Light Switch
The following lights are ON when the light switch (A) is in ROAD position with the windrower in engine-forward mode:
Figure 3.23: Engine-Forward: Rear View
Red taillights (A) on the mirror supports
Amber turn signals and hazard lights (B) on mirror supports rear view
Beacon lights (C) on mirror supports
Figure 3.24: Engine-Forward: Front View
Amber turn signals and hazard lights (A) on mirror supports front view
Headlights (B) in hood with low/high switch
Beacon lights (C) on mirror supports
The two headlights in the hood are adjustable. Refer to Aligning Headlights, page 369.
OPERATORS STATION
Page 72
214737 52 Revision A
3.6.3 Road Light: Cab-Forward
Figure 3.25: Road Light Switch
If equipped, the following lights are functional with switch (A) in the ROAD position:
Figure 3.26: Cab-Forward: Front View
Four lights (A) in cab roof
Amber turn signals and hazard lights (B) on mirror supports visible from both front and rear
Beacon lights (C) on both sides of the cab roof
Figure 3.27: Cab Forward: Rear View
Red lights (A) in hood
Beacon lights (B) on mirror supports visible from both front and rear
IMPORTANT:
Optional red tail lighting and marking kit must be installed so that road travel in the cab-forward mode complies with regulations. Refer to 6.4.1 Lighting and Marking for Cab- Forward Road Travel, page 432 or see your MacDon Dealer.
NOTE:
If the red tail lighting kit is not installed, travelling in cab- forward mode and activating the turn indicator will trigger a stop lamp error (E134 or E135).
IMPORTANT:
If red tail lighting kit is installed and stop lamp errors still occur, contact your MacDon Dealer.
OPERATORS STATION
Page 73
214737 53 Revision A
3.6.4 Hazard Light
Figure 3.28: CDM
The hazard lights can be switched on or off manually by pressing the HAZARD switch (A) on the cab display module (CDM).
These lights will also turn on automatically when the auto- road light feature is activated (i.e., engine running, header off, and transmission in either mid or high range), and can only be turned off by engaging the header drive.
3.6.5 Beacon Light
Figure 3.29: Cab-Forward: Front View
Figure 3.30: Beacon Light Switch
The beacon lights (A) are functional when the ignition and the beacon switch (B) are ON.
The beacons will also turn on automatically when the auto- road light feature is activated (i.e., engine running, header off, and transmission in either mid or high range), and can only be turned off by engaging the header drive.
OPERATORS STATION
Page 74
214737 54 Revision A
3.6.6 Auto Road Light The beacon and hazard lights are included in the auto road light feature. The beacon and hazard lights will turn on when this feature is activated, and can only be turned off by engaging the header drive.
This feature will activate when
Windrower is in cab- or engine-forward mode
Engine is running
Header is disengaged
Transmission is in either mid or high range
Moving the ground speed lever (GSL) out of neutral (brake off) will switch the white lights from field/work lights to road lights, if the switch is in the field/road lights position.
OPERATORS STATION
Page 75
214737 55 Revision A
3.7 Windshield Wipers
Figure 3.31: Wiper Controls A - Rear Wiper B - Front Wiper
The windshield wiper controls are located in the cab headliner. The illustration shows the controls in cab-forward mode.
OPERATORS STATION
Page 76
214737 56 Revision A
3.8 Rear View Mirrors
Figure 3.32: Mirrors
Two outside-mounted, adjustable mirrors (A) provide a rear view when the windrower is in cab-forward mode.
A single interior-mounted mirror (B) provides a rear view in the engine-forward mode.
The mirror/light assembly (A) is designed to fold back if accidentally struck. A detent-type lock keeps it in place.
OPERATORS STATION
Page 77
214737 57 Revision A
3.9 Cab Temperature The cab environment is controlled by a climate control system that provides clean air-conditioned or heated air.
The heater/evaporator/blower assembly is located under the cab floor and is accessible from beneath the windrower.
3.9.1 Heater Shut-Off
Figure 3.33: Heater Shut-Off Valve
A shut-off valve (A) at the engine allows the cab heater to be isolated from the engine coolant.
The valve must be OPEN to provide heat to the cab, but can be CLOSED for maximum cooling.
3.9.2 Air Distribution
Figure 3.34: Adjustable Air Vents A - Vent B - Open/Close C - Direction
Cab air distribution is controlled through adjustable air vents (A) located in the cab posts. The vents provide Operator ventilation.
OPERATORS STATION
Page 78
214737 58 Revision A
3.9.3 Climate Controls
Figure 3.35: Climate Controls
A BLOWER Switch controls the blower speed
OFF / LOW / MEDIUM / HIGH
B Air Conditioning (A/C) Switch controls A/C system
OFF: A/C does not operate
ON: A/C operates with blower switch ON
C Outside Air Switch controls the air source
FRESH AIR: Starts booster fan and filtered outside air is drawn into cab
RECIRCULATE: Stops booster fan and cab air is recirculated
D TEMPERATURE Control Dial controls cab temperature
Turning the dial clockwise increases temperature
Turning the dial counterclockwise decreases temperature
IMPORTANT:
When starting the windrower after more than one week of storage, the refrigerant oil needs to be distributed through the A/C system. For instructions, refer to Air Conditioning (A/C) Compressor Coolant Cycling, page 167.
OPERATORS STATION
Page 79
214737 59 Revision A
3.10 Interior Lights
Figure 3.36: Interior Lights
Two interior lights are installed in the cab headliner.
A low intensity LED light (A) is located directly overhead to provide ambient lighting if desired. It functions only when the key is in the RUN position. An ON/OFF switch is located on the light.
The other interior light (B) is located on the headliner switch panel and the push-ON, push-OFF button is located on the light. It functions at any time.
OPERATORS STATION
Page 80
214737 60 Revision A
3.11 Emergency Exit
Figure 3.37: Emergency Exit Sign
The emergency exit window (indicated by the emergency exit decal [A]) is located beside the operators station.
To open the emergency exit window, follow these steps:
Figure 3.38: Emergency Exit Window
1. Release the window latch (A).
2. Remove the latch pin (B).
3. Push window open (C).
OPERATORS STATION
Page 81
214737 61 Revision A
3.12 Operator Amenities The operators station includes the following amenities:
Figure 3.39: Console
Operators console
A - Auxiliary power outlet
B - Utility tray (under armrest)
C - Cigarette lighter
D - Ashtray/cup holder
E - Utility tray
Figure 3.40: Windshield Shades
Windshield shades (optional)
Retractable window shades (A) can be installed for the front and rear windows. Refer to 6.1.4 Windshield Shades, page 427 for ordering information.
Figure 3.41: Auxiliary Power Outlets A - Auxiliary Power Outlet B - Auxiliary Power Outlet C - Battery Terminal D - Ground Terminal E - Switched Terminal
Auxiliary outlets
Two auxiliary power outlets are located on either side of the wiper motor cover/storage tray behind the Operator (cab-forward mode).
OPERATORS STATION
Page 82
214737 62 Revision A
Figure 3.42: Operators Manual Storage
Manual storage
A manual storage case (A) is located under the training seat.
Figure 3.43: Coat Hook
Coat hook
A coat hook (A) is located above the training seat, left of the Operator.
OPERATORS STATION
Page 83
214737 63 Revision A
3.13 Radio A radio is available as optional equipment from your Dealer.
3.13.1 AM/FM Radio
Figure 3.44: Speakers in Headliner A - Speakers B - Radio Mounting Location
A space (B) is provided in the cab headliner to accommodate the installation of an AM/FM radio. In order to retain radio settings and preset memory with the battery disconnect turned off, select a radio with non-volatile settings memory.
Two pre-wired speakers (A) have been factory-installed in the headliner.
Operating instructions are supplied with the radio.
3.13.2 Mounting the Antenna An optional base for a magnetic, roof-mounted antenna is available from your Dealer.
IMPORTANT:
The antenna base can only be installed on the left cab-forward and right rear cab roof bolts.
Order antenna mount (MD #160288 [B]) or refer to 3.47, page 64 for part dimensions to make an improvised version. A knockout (C) for the antenna lead is provided on the cab post, as shown in the following illustration.
Figure 3.45: Antenna Mount
1. Remove existing bolt (A).
2. Install antenna mount (B) and secure with bolt (A).
OPERATORS STATION
Page 84
214737 64 Revision A
Figure 3.46: Knockout Location in Cab
The knockout (A) is located on the exterior right cab-forward rear corner post of the cab, under the roof, between the horn and the light.
Figure 3.47: Template for Antenna Mount
To make your own mount, refer to dimensions template. Use 11 GA. or 3.0 mm steel sheet.
OPERATORS STATION
Page 85
214737 65 Revision A
3.14 Horn
Figure 3.48: Horn Button Location
The horn is activated by pushing button (A) located beside the ignition key.
Sound the horn three times prior to starting the engine.
Figure 3.49: Horn Location
The horn (A) is located outside the cab on the rear right cab-forward corner of the cab, under the roof.
OPERATORS STATION
Page 86
214737 66 Revision A
3.15 Engine Controls and Display Module
Figure 3.50: Engine Controls and DEF Display Module
The following engine controls and display module are conveniently located on the operators console.
Ignition switch (A)
ACC (Accessory): Fully counterclockwise
OFF: All electrical systems OFF
RUN: Clockwise
START: Fully clockwise to crank engine: Release and switch returns to RUN
NOTE:
Remove key when windrower is not in use; the key also locks doors.
Fuel and diesel exhaust fluid (DEF) display module (B)
Fuel level monitoring
DEF monitoring
High Exhaust System Temp indicator (HEST)
Selective Catalytic Reduction (SCR) system cleaning inhibit and forced indicator
NOTE:
For information about temperature warnings and alarms, refer to Display Warnings and Alarms, page 90.
Throttle (C) controls engine speed
FULL: Push lever forward
OPERATING: Refer to Driving Forward in Cab-Forward Mode, page 175
CLOSED: Pull lever back
OPERATORS STATION
Page 87
214737 67 Revision A
3.15.1 Fuel and Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Display Module
Figure 3.51: Fuel and Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Display Module
A - Fuel and DEF Level B - High Exhaust System Temperature (HEST) C - Inhibit Selective Catalytic Reduction (SCR) System Cleaning D - Force SCR System Cleaning
Fuel and DEF level
Level gauge appears green when levels are between full and 1/8, and appears red when levels are between 1/8 and empty.
When the levels are in the green range, switches (icons) appear white. When the levels are in the red range, switches (icons) turn black and are backlit with amber light. The amber lights blink when the tank level is depleted to 1/16.
IMPORTANT:
Running out of DEF will cause the engine to derate and will eventually limit throttle to idle.
OPERATORS STATION
Page 88
214737 68 Revision A
Figure 3.52: Inactive HEST Icon
WARNING Do NOT park vehicle indoors when HEST lamp is on.
When the HESTwarning is active, the switch (icon) turns black and a warning lamp is backlit with amber light at location (A) (warning lamp not shown).
The HEST lamp appears when the engine enters a selective catalytic reduction (SCR) system cleaningthis will not hinder normal vehicle operation.
When the HESTwarning is inactive, the switch (icon) is not visible and will appear entirely black (A).
NOTE:
A forced system cleaning can only be initiated if the Operator is prompted by a flashing icon. A forced system cleaning cannot be initiated at other times.
SCR System Cleaning Inhibit and SCR System Cleaning Forced
SCR system cleaning is a high-temperature clean-out cycle to keep the after-treatment free of crystallized DEF.
A passive system cleaning may occur depending on engine duty cycles, and may last for 1530 minutes. It will not affect operation other than high exhaust temperature. A forced SCR system cleaning may be required for extensive cleaning (for example, when the inhibit switch has been left ON for a long period of time). The system will derate if the forced SCR system cleaning is not done.
Figure 3.53: SCR System Cleaning Icons
Switches (icons) (A) and (B) work as lamps and switches.
The switches (icons) turn gray when the function is not active. When the function is active, the switches (icons) turn black and are backlit with amber light.
To activate the functions, press and hold the switch (icon) (SCR system cleaning inhibit [A] or SCR system cleaning forced [B]) for 3 seconds. During the 3-second interval, the fuel icon and gauge are replaced with the following red text at location (C), HOLD 3 SECONDS, and the red border turns white. After which, the fuel gauge returns and the white border starts blinking. The border reverts to solid red when the switch (icon) is released.
IMPORTANT:
SCR System Cleaning inhibit (A) allows the Operator to temporarily prevent the machine from performing an SCR System Cleaning. It should be used only when the environment is unsafe to allow high exhaust temperatures (e.g., inside of a building).
SCR System Cleaning Forced (B) will rarely require activation by the Operator. If required, the switch (icon) will flash amber. If the SCR System Cleaning Forced switch (icon) begins to flash, park the windrower outside in a safe environment for high exhaust temperatures. Place the ground speed lever (GSL) in N-DETENT, throttle to idle, and press and hold the SCR System Cleaning Forced switch (icon) for 3 seconds. The engine will then take over throttle control. During the 3-second interval, the fuel icon and gauge will be replaced with the following red text, HOLD 3 SECONDS (C), and the red border will turn white. After which, the fuel gauge will return and the white border will start blinking. The border will revert to solid red when the switch (icon) is released.
OPERATORS STATION
Page 89
214737 69 Revision A
Tools Menu
Figure 3.54: Fuel and Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Display Module
To display the tools and brightness symbols, press and hold the fuel gauge display (A) for two seconds.
Figure 3.55: Tools and Brightness Symbols on Display
The fuel gauge display will be replaced by the tools (A) and brightness (B) symbols.
Figure 3.56: Backlighting Control Display
Press the brightness symbol to display the backlighting control function (A).
Display will revert back to fuel gauge display if backlighting control function is not pressed for five seconds or if the DEF gauge display is pressed.
Press () to decrease backlighting and (+) to increase backlighting.
OPERATORS STATION
Page 90
214737 70 Revision A
Figure 3.57: Language Display
Press the tools symbol to display the languages menu (A).
The active language will be indicated by a white square (B) around the flag symbol and a text corresponding to the flag (C). Software version (D) is at the bottom of the languages menu screen.
Figure 3.58: Language Icons on Display
NOTE:
Languages available are Russian (A), English (B), and Spanish (C).
Audible Alarm
An audible alarm indicates that something needs attention as shown in the fuel and diesel exhaust fluid (DEF) display module.
Alarm Tone Reason Duration
Ongoing intermittent moderate tone until the condition is corrected
When DEF or fuel level amber light first starts to blink (1/16th tank)
5 seconds
When the selective catalytic reduction (SCR) system cleaning INHIBIT is active and the system calls for a passive SCR system cleaning
5 seconds; repeats every 30 minutes
Single moderate tone
At the end of the delay when a switch (icon) is activated
At the end of the delay for entering the brightness/ tools menu
OPERATORS STATION
Page 91
214737 71 Revision A
3.16 Windrower Controls
Figure 3.59: Console Controls
Console controls:
A TURN SIGNALS activate turn signals on windrower and header
Push-ON/Push-OFF
B GROUND SPEED LEVER (GSL) controls speed and direction of movement
F: Forward
N: NEUTRAL
N-DETENT: Engages neutral interlock, and applies park brake when steering locked in center
R: Reverse
C HAZARDWARNING LIGHTS activate signals on windrower and header
Push-ON/Push-OFF
D GROUND SPEED RANGE SWITCH shifts transmission speed range
High range: 037 km/h (23 mph) ENGINE-FORWARD ONLY
Mid range: 025.7 km/h (16 mph) CAB-FORWARD ONLY
Low range: 017.7 km/h (11 mph)
E N-DETENT
Figure 3.60: GSL
Autosteer control:
A AUTOSTEER ENGAGEMENT SWITCH engages/disengages the automated steering system (if compatible system is installed)
ENGAGE: Click to engage
DISENGAGE: Turn steering wheel or click to disengage
The autosteer engagement switch harness has two connectors and is located as follows:
OPERATORS STATION
Page 92
214737 72 Revision A
Figure 3.61: Autosteer Harness SW1
GSL SW1 (A) is located in the cab, beneath the floor mat at the engine-end seat position switch.
Figure 3.62: Autosteer Harness SW2
GSL SW2 (A) is located beneath the cab, between the fuel tank and evaporator box.
OPERATORS STATION
Page 93
214737 73 Revision A
3.17 Header Controls All header controls are conveniently located on the operators console and on the ground speed lever (GSL) handle.
NOTE:
Some controls are optional equipment and may not be present in your unit. Some controls may be installed, but nonfunctional for certain headers.
Refer to specific header sections in this manual for detailed header operating procedures.
3.17.1 Header Drive Switch
Figure 3.63: Header Drive Switch
The HEADER DRIVE switch (A) engages and disengages the header drive.
To engage the header drive, pull up on collar (B) and push down on switch (A).
To disengage the header drive, push the switch down.
IMPORTANT:
Always move throttle lever back to IDLE before engaging header drive. Do NOTengage header with engine at full rpm.
3.17.2 Header Drive Reverse Button
Figure 3.64: Header Drive Switches
NOTE:
The hydraulic reversing kit must be installed on auger headers and on draper headers with a conditioner. Rotary disc headers are factory-equipped with the ability to reverse.
ENGAGE: Push and hold REVERSER button (B) and engage header with switch (A)
DISENGAGE: Release REVERSER Button (B)
NOTE:
To engage forward operation, push switch (A) down and then up again.
OPERATORS STATION
Page 94
214737 74 Revision A
3.17.3 Ground Speed Lever (GSL) Header Switches
Figure 3.65: Decal on Cab Post
The switches on the GSL (A) control the most common header functions.
NOTE:
A decal (B) identifying switch functions is located on the cab post above the operators console.
Figure 3.66: GSL Function Groups A - Reel Speed B - Reel Position C - Autosteer Engagement D - Display Selector E - Header Position
OPERATORS STATION
Page 95
214737 75 Revision A
Display Selector Switch
Figure 3.67: Ground Speed Lever
Pressing the display selector switch (A) selects and displays the settings on the cab display module (CDM) top line read-out for each of the header controls.
Press switch (A) to scroll through settings.
Reel Position Switches
Figure 3.68: Ground Speed Lever A - Reel Down B - Reel Forward C - Reel Up D - Reel Aft
The reel position switches perform different functions depending on cab display module (CDM) programming, and on which header is attached. For detailed switch operating modes, refer to one of the following sections that is specific to your header:
Double Windrow Attachment (DWA) position. Refer to:
4.4.7 Using the Double Windrowing Attachment, page 215
Reel fore-aft position and height on draper headers. Refer to:
4.6.3 Adjusting the Reel Fore-Aft Position, page 264
4.6.4 Adjusting the Reel Height, page 264
Center-link assist cylinder. Refer to:
4.5.2 Attaching a D Series or D1 Series Header, page 219
4.5.4 Attaching an A Series Header, page 233
OPERATORS STATION
Page 96
214737 76 Revision A
Header Position Switches
Use the header position switches on the ground speed lever (GSL) to adjust the position of the header relative to the ground.
Figure 3.69: Ground Speed Lever
To lower the header, press switch (A)
To raise the header, press switch (C)
To tilt the header down, press switch (B)
To tilt the header up, press switch (D)
Release switch at desired position.
NOTE:
Refer to the section in this manual that is specific to your header for detailed switch operating modes.
Reel and Disc Speed Switches
Figure 3.70: Ground Speed Lever
Press and hold switch (A) to increase the reel or disc speed. Press and hold switch (B) to decrease the reel or disc speed. Release switch at desired speed.
Auger header A30D header: Not applicable
A40D header: Auger speed is automatically maintained when reel speed is changed
IMPORTANT:
Reel speed on auger header MUST NOT EXCEED 85 rpm. Auger speed MUST NOT EXCEED 320 rpm.
Draper header Reel speed is limited in INDEX HEADER SPEED mode
Rotary disc header Conditioner speed automatically adjusts when DISC
SPEED is changed
OPERATORS STATION
Page 97
214737 77 Revision A
3.17.4 Console Header Switches The operators console contains switches for the following header functions:
Deck Shift / Float Preset Switch
Figure 3.71: Header Switches A - Deck Shift / Float Preset Switch B - Left-Side Delivery C - Center Delivery D - Right-Side Delivery
Draper header with deck shift option
Controls deck shifting and float settings for double windrowing options with a draper header.
Figure 3.72: Header Switches A - Deck Shift / Float Preset Switch B - Float Preset 1 C - Float Preset 2 D - Float Preset 3
Draper header with fixed decks / auger header / rotary header
Selects preprogrammed header float settings. Refer to Float Options, page 202 to learn how to preset the float.
NOTE:
Refer to the section in this manual that is specific to your header for detailed switch operating modes.
OPERATORS STATION
Page 98
214737 78 Revision A
Double Windrow Attachment (DWA) / Swath Compressor Switch (If Installed)
The functions performed by the DWA/swath compressor switch depend on how the windrower is equipped.
Figure 3.73: Console Switches
If the windrower is equipped with a double windrow attachment:
The DWA deck is raised with switch (A) in position (C)
The DWA deck is lowered with switch (A) in position (B)
The cab display module (CDM) must be programmed for this configuration. Refer to Activating the Double Windrow Attachment (DWA), page 106.
Switch (A) may be used instead of the DWA switches on the ground speed lever (GSL). If using switch (A) is not desired, the controls can be swapped to the reel fore/aft buttons on the GSL.
The DWA draper speed is controlled with the rotary switch (D) next to the rocker switch on the operators console.
For more information on the DWA attachment and controls, refer to 4.4.7 Using the Double Windrowing Attachment, page 215.
If the windrower is equipped with a swath compressor attachment:
The swath compressor is raised by pressing switch (A) to position (C)
The swath compressor is lowered by pressing switch (A) to position (B)
NOTE:
When using the Double Windrower Attachment (DWA), you may swap controls to the rocker switch or to the GSL handle using the programming in the CDM. Refer to 3.18.6 Cab Display Module (CDM) Configuration, page 93.
OPERATORS STATION
Page 99
214737 79 Revision A
3.18 Cab Display Module (CDM)
3.18.1 Engine and Windrower Functions
Figure 3.74: Cab Display Module (CDM) Engine and Windrower Functions
(A) ENGINE RPM
(B) GROUND SPEED km/h or mph
(C) DISPLAY Engine/windrower functions
(D) HAZARD WARNING LIGHTS SWITCH Activates hazard warning lights, cancels turn signal
(E) SELECT SWITCH Allows Operator to select display item on lower line. Push to SELECT
(F) TURN SIGNAL SWITCHES Activates turn signals on windrower and header. Push-ON/Push-OFF
(G) IGNITION SWITCH POSITIONS Accessory / Stop / Run / Start
(H) ENGINE WARNING LIGHTS Engine Pre-Heat / Water In Fuel / CAUTION / Stop Engine
OPERATORS STATION
Page 100
214737 80 Revision A
3.18.2 Header Functions
Figure 3.75: Cab Display Module (CDM)
(A) DISPLAY Header functions.
(B) SELECT SWITCH Allows Operator to select display item on lower line. Push to SELECT.
(C) FLOAT SWITCH Header Right Side: Changes header float. The system remembers setting with deck shift option if activated with float setting switch. Push + to Increase. Push to Decrease.
(D) FLOAT SWITCH Header Left Side: Changes header float. The system remembers setting with deck shift option if activated with float setting switch. Push + to Increase. Push to Decrease.
(E) AUGER/DRAPER SPEED ADJUST: Changes auger/draper speed INDEX with INDEX SWITCH ON. Changes auger/draper SPEED with INDEX SWITCH OFF. Push upper switch to increase. Push lower switch to decrease.
(F) HEADER INDEX SWITCH: Links reel and conveyor speed to ground speed. Push-ON/Push-OFF.
NOTE:
Illuminates in ON position. (Header must be engaged)
(G) RETURN TO CUT HEIGHT SWITCH: Allows cutting height preset. Push-ON/Push-OFF.
NOTE:
Illuminates in ON position (Header must be engaged).
OPERATORS STATION
Page 101
214737 81 Revision A
3.18.3 Operating Screens The cab display module (CDM) and the windrower control module (WCM) provide information on several functions for the engine, header, and windrower. The information displayed in various operating modes is described in the following sections.
Figure 3.76: CDM Operating Screen
A - Display Selector for Upper Line B - Display C - CDM Upper Line D - CDM Lower Line E - Display Selector for Lower Line
Ignition ON, Engine Not Running
Display (Upper Line) (23 Seconds) Description
HEADER DISENGAGED Indicates HEADER DRIVE switch is OFF
IN PARK Indicates ground speed lever (GSL) is in N-DETENT
OPERATORS STATION
Page 102
214737 82 Revision A
Engine-Forward, Engine Running
Display Description
ROAD GEAR (upper line) low-speed range in HIGH range
#####.# ENGINE HRS (upper or lower line) Total engine operating time
#####.# UNIT HRS (upper or lower line) Total windrower operating time
#####.# HEADER HRS (upper or lower line) Total header operating time
###### TOTAL ACRES (upper or lower line) ###### TOTAL HECT (if metric)
Total area cut by machine
##.# HEADER HEIGHT (upper or lower line) Distance setting (00.010.0) between cutterbar and ground
##.# HEADER ANGLE (upper or lower line) Angle setting (00.010.0) header relative to ground
### C or F HYD OIL TEMP Hydraulic oil temperature
##.# VOLTS (upper or lower line) Engine electrical system operating voltage
##.# SWATH COMPR HT Swath compressor height (00.010.0); fully raised is 0
SCROLL (lower line) Displays above items after 2 to 3 seconds; press SELECT to cancel
Cab-Forward, Engine Running, Header Disengaged
Scroll through display with cab display module (CDM) switch or ground speed lever (GSL) switch.
Display (Lower or Upper Line) Description
#####.# ENGINE HRS Total engine operating time
#####.# UNIT HRS Total windrower operating time
#####.# HEADER HRS Total header operating time
###.# SUB ACRES ###.# SUB HECTARES (if metric)
Area cut since last reset. To reset, display SUB ACRES on lower line, and hold down PROGRAM switch until display resets (5 to 7 seconds)
###### TOTAL ACRES ###### TOTAL HECT (if metric)
Total area cut by machine
##.# HEADER HEIGHT Distance setting (00.010.0) between cutterbar and ground
##.# HEADER ANGLE Angle setting (00.010.0) header relative to ground
##.# L FLOAT R ##.# Float setting (0.010.0)
### C or F HYD OIL TEMP Hydraulic oil temperature
##.# VOLTS Engine electrical system operating voltage
##.# SWATH COMPR HT Swath compressor height (00.010.0); fully raised is 0
SCROLL (lower line) Displays above items after 2 to 3 seconds; press SELECT to cancel
OPERATORS STATION
Page 103
214737 83 Revision A
Cab-Forward, Engine Running, Header Engaged, Auger Header Index Switch OFF
Scroll through display with cab display module (CDM) switch or ground speed lever (GSL) switch.
Display (Lower or Upper Line) Description
#####.# ENGINE HRS Total engine operating time
#####.# UNIT HRS Total windrower operating time
#####.# HEADER HRS Total header operating time
##.# ACRES/HOUR ##.# HECTARES/HOUR (if Metric)
Actual cutting rate in acres (hectares)/hour
###.# SUB ACRES ###.# SUB HECTARES (if Metric)
Area cut since last reset; to reset, display SUB ACRES on lower line, and hold down PROGRAM switch until display resets (5 to 7 seconds)
###### TOTAL ACRES ###### TOTAL HECT (if Metric)
Total area cut by machine
##.## REEL RPM ##.## REEL SENSOR
Reel rotational speed Sensor disabled. RPM and SENSOR alternate at 1 second intervals
##.# AUGER SPEED Auger rotational speed (4.79.9)
#### KNIFE SPEED #### KNIFE SENSOR
Knife speed in strokes per minute Sensor disabled. SPEED and SENSOR alternate at 1 second intervals
##.# HEADER HEIGHT ##.# HEADER SENSOR
Distance setting (00.010.0) between cutterbar and ground Sensor disabled. HEIGHTand SENSOR alternate at 1 second intervals.
##.# HEADER ANGLE ##.# HEADER SENSOR
Angle setting (00.010.0) header relative to ground Sensor disabled. ANGLE and SENSOR alternate at 1 second intervals
##.# L FLOAT R ##.# FLOAT SENS DISABLED
Left and right float setting (0.010.0) Sensor disabled
LOAD|| | ####
Bar graph representing hydraulic operating pressure. Full scale is preprogrammed overload pressure (17,23734,474 kPa [25005000 psi]). If sensor disabled, LOAD does not display5
### C or F HYD OIL TEMP ### C or F HYD TEMP
Hydraulic oil temperature Sensor disabled. TEMP and SENSOR alternate at 1 second intervals
##.# VOLTS Engine electrical system operating voltage
OPERATORS STATION
5. The LOAD sensor to monitor knife/conditioner circuit pressure is optional. To monitor reel/auger circuit pressure, relocate sensor as per kit instruction MD #169031, which is available through your Dealer.
Page 104
214737 84 Revision A
Display (Lower or Upper Line) Description
##.# SWATH COMPR HT SWATH CO SENSOR
Swath compressor height (00.010.0); fully raised is 0 Sensor disabled
SCROLL SUB-MENU (lower line only) #### KNIFE SPEED ##.# HEADER HEIGHT LOAD||| ####
Displays sub-menu after 2 to 3 seconds. Press SELECT to cancel. Scroll through sub-menu display with CDM switch
Cab-Forward, Engine Running, Header Engaged, Auger Header Index Switch ON
Scroll through display with cab display module (CDM) switch or ground speed lever (GSL) switch.
Display (Lower or Upper Line) Description
#####.# ENGINE HRS Total engine operating time
#####.# UNIT HRS Total windrower operating time
#####.# HEADER HRS Total header operating time
##.# ACRES/HOUR ##.# HECTARES/HOUR (if metric)
Actual cutting rate in acres (hectares)/hour
###.# SUB ACRES ###.# SUB HECTARES (if metric)
Area cut since last reset; to reset, display SUB ACRES on lower line, and hold down PROGRAM switch until display resets 5 to 7 seconds)
###### TOTAL ACRES ###### TOTAL HECT (if metric)
Total area cut by machine
##.## ##.# REEL IND.
##.## REEL SENSOR
Reel peripheral speed along with ground speed in mph or km/h Sensor disabled. IND and SENSOR alternate at 1 second intervals
##.# AUGER SPEED ##.# AUGER SENSOR
Auger rotational speed (4.79.9) Sensor disabled. SPEED and SENSOR alternate at 1 second intervals
#### KNIFE SPEED #### KNIFE SENSOR
Knife speed In strokes per minute Sensor disabled. SPEED and SENSOR alternate at 1 second intervals
##.# HEADER HEIGHT ##.# HEADER SENSOR
Distance setting (00.010.0) between cutterbar and ground Sensor disabled. HEIGHTand SENSOR alternate at 1 second intervals
##.# HEADER ANGLE ##.# TILT SENSOR
Angle setting (00.010.0) header relative to ground. Sensor disabled. ANGLE and SENSOR alternate at 1 second intervals
##.# L FLOAT R ##.# FLOAT SENS DISABLED (if sensor disabled)
Left and right float setting (0.010.0) Sensor disabled
OPERATORS STATION
Page 105
214737 85 Revision A
Display (Lower or Upper Line) Description
LOAD|| | ####
Bar graph representing hydraulic operating pressure. Full scale is preprogrammed overload pressure (17,23734,474 kPa [25005000 psi]).. If sensor disabled, LOAD does not display6
### C or F HYD OIL TEMP ### C or F HYD TEMP
Hydraulic oil temperature Sensor disabled. TEMP and SENSOR alternate at 1 second intervals
##.# VOLTS Engine electrical system operating voltage
##.# SWATH COMPR HT SWATH CO SENSOR
Swath compressor height (00.010.0); fully raised is 0 Sensor disabled
SCROLL SUB-MENU (lower line only) #### KNIFE SPEED ##.# HEADER HEIGHT LOAD||| ####
Displays sub-menu after 2 to 3 seconds. Press SELECT to cancel. Scroll through sub-menu display with CDM switch
Cab-Forward, Engine Running, Header Engaged, Draper Header, Index Switch OFF
Scroll through display with cab display module (CDM) switch or ground speed lever (GSL) switch.
Display (Lower or Upper Line) Description
#####.# ENGINE HRS Total engine operating time
#####.# UNIT HRS Total windrower operating time
#####.# HEADER HRS Total header operating time
##.# ACRES/HOUR ##.# HECTARES/HOUR (if metric)
Actual cutting rate in acres (hectares)/hour
###.# SUB ACRES ###.# SUB HECTARES (if metric)
Area cut since last reset. To reset, display SUB ACRES on lower line, and hold down PROGRAM switch until display resets (5 to 7 seconds)
###### TOTAL ACRES ###### TOTAL HECT (if metric)
Total area cut by machine
##.## REEL MPH ##.## REEL KPH (if metric) ##.## REEL SENSOR (flashing)
Reel peripheral speed Sensor disabled. MPH or KPH and SENSOR alternate at 1 second intervals
##.# DRAPER SPEED Draper speed (0.011.0)
#### KNIFE SPEED #### KNIFE SENSOR
Knife speed In strokes per minute Sensor disabled. SPEED and SENSOR alternate at 1 second intervals
##.# HEADER HEIGHT ##.# HEADER SENSOR
Distance setting (00.010.0) between cutterbar and ground Sensor disabled. HEIGHTand SENSOR alternate at 1 second intervals
##.# HEADER ANGLE ##.# HEADER SENSOR
Angle setting (00.010.0). Header relative to ground Sensor disabled. ANGLE and SENSOR alternate at 1 second intervals
OPERATORS STATION
6. The LOAD sensor to monitor knife/conditioner circuit pressure is optional. To monitor reel/auger circuit pressure, relocate sensor as per kit instruction MD #169031, which is available through your Dealer.
Page 106
214737 86 Revision A
Display (Lower or Upper Line) Description
##.# L FLOAT R ##.# FLOAT SENS DISABLED
Left and right float setting (0.010.0) Sensor disabled
### C or F HYD OIL TEMP ### C or F HYD SENSOR
Hydraulic oil temperature Sensor disabled. TEMP and SENSOR alternate at 1 second intervals
LOAD|| | #### Bar graph representing hydraulic operating pressure. Full scale is pre- programmed overload pressure (25005000 psi). If sensor disabled, LOAD does not display7
##.# VOLTS Engine electrical system operating voltage
##.# SWATH COMPR HT SWATH CO SENSOR
Swath compressor height (00.010.0); fully raised is 0 Sensor disabled
SCROLL SUB-MENU (lower line only) #### KNIFE SPEED ##.# HEADER HEIGHT LOAD||| #### ##.## REEL MPH ##.# DRAPER SPEED
Displays sub-menu after 2 to 3 seconds. Press SELECT to cancel. Scroll through sub-menu display with CDM switch
KNIFE SPD OVERLOAD Knife or disc speed drops below programmed value
Cab-Forward, Engine Running, Header Engaged, Draper Header Index Switch ON
Scroll through display with cab display module (CDM) switch or ground speed lever (GSL) switch.
Display (Lower or Upper Line) Description
#####.# ENGINE HRS Total engine operating time
#####.# UNIT HRS Total windrower operating time
#####.# HEADER HRS Total header operating time
##.# ACRES/HOUR ##.# HECTARES/HOUR (if metric)
Actual cutting rate in acres (hectares)/hour
###.# SUB ACRES ###.# SUB HECTARES (if metric)
Area cut since last reset. To reset, display SUB ACRES on lower line and hold down PROGRAM switch until display resets (5 to 7 seconds)
###### TOTAL ACRES ###### TOTAL HECT (if metric)
Total area cut by machine
##.## ##.# REEL IND REEL.SENSOR
Reel peripheral speed along with ground speed in mph or km/h Sensor disabled. IND and SENSOR alternate at 1 second intervals
##.# ##.# DRAP INDX Draper speed along with ground speed in mph or km/h
#### KNIFE SPEED #### KNIFE SENSOR
Knife speed in strokes per minute. Sensor disabled SPEED and SENSOR alternate at 1 second intervals
##.# HEADER HEIGHT ##.# HEADER SENSOR
Distance setting (00.010.0) between cutterbar and ground Sensor disabled. HEIGHTand SENSOR alternate at 1 second intervals
OPERATORS STATION
7. The LOAD sensor to monitor knife/conditioner circuit pressure is optional. To monitor reel/auger circuit pressure, relocate sensor as per kit instruction MD #169031, which is available through your Dealer.
Page 107
214737 87 Revision A
Display (Lower or Upper Line) Description
##.# HEADER ANGLE ##.# HEADER SENSOR
Angle setting (00.010.0) header relative to ground Sensor disabled. ANGLE and SENSOR alternate at 1 second intervals.
##.# L FLOAT R ##.# FLOAT SENS DISABLED
Left and right float setting (0.010.0) Sensor disabled
LOAD|| | #### Bar graph representing hydraulic operating pressure. Full scale is preprogrammed overload pressure (17,23734,474 kPa [25005000 psi]). If sensor disabled, LOAD does not display8
##.# VOLTS Engine electrical system operating voltage
##.# SWATH COMPR HT SWATH CO SENSOR
Swath compressor height (00.010.0); fully raised is 0. Sensor disabled.
SCROLL SUB-MENU (lower line only) #### KNIFE SPEED ##.# HEADER HEIGHT LOAD||| ##.## ##.# REEL IND ##.# ##.# DRAP INDX
Displays sub-menu after 2 to 3 seconds. Press SELECT to cancel Scroll through sub-menu display with CDM switch
##.## REEL MIN RPM (lower line) Reel speed drops below programmed set-point
MINIMUM (lower line) Reel speed at zero ground speed
Cab-Forward, Engine Running, Header Engaged, Rotary Header Installed
Scroll through display with cab display module (CDM) switch or ground speed lever (GSL) switch.
Display (Lower or Upper Line) Description
#####.# ENGINE HRS Total engine operating time
#####.# UNIT HRS Total windrower operating time
#####.# HEADER HRS Total header operating time
##.# ACRES/HOUR ##.# HECTARES/HOUR (if metric)
Actual cutting rate in acres (hectares)/hour
###.# SUB ACRES ###.# SUB HECTARES (if metric)
Area cut since last reset; to reset, display SUB ACRES on lower line, and hold down PROGRAM switch until display resets (5 to 7 seconds)
###### TOTAL ACRES ###### TOTAL HECT (if metric)
Total area cut by machine
#### DISC RPM ##.## DISC SENSOR
Disc rotational speed Sensor disabled. RPM and SENSOR alternate at 1 second intervals
##.# HEADER HEIGHT ##.# HEIGHT SENSOR
Distance setting (00.010.0) between cutterbar and ground Sensor disabled. HEIGHTand SENSOR alternate at 1 second intervals
##.# HEADER ANGLE ##.# HEADER SENSOR
Angle setting (00.010.0) header relative to ground Sensor disabled. ANGLE and SENSOR alternate at 1 second intervals
OPERATORS STATION
8. The LOAD sensor to monitor knife/conditioner circuit pressure is optional. To monitor reel/auger circuit pressure, relocate sensor as per kit instruction MD #169031, which is available through your Dealer.
Page 108
214737 88 Revision A
Display (Lower or Upper Line) Description
##.# L FLOAT R ##.# FLOAT SENS DISABLED
Left and right float setting (0.010.0) Sensor disabled
LOAD|| | #### Bar graph representing hydraulic operating pressure. Full scale is preprogrammed overload pressure (17,23734,474 kPa [25005000 psi]). If sensor disabled, LOAD does not display9
### C or F HYD OIL TEMP ### C or F HYD TEMP
Hydraulic oil temperature Sensor disabled. TEMP and SENSOR alternate at 1 second intervals
##.# VOLTS Engine electrical system operating voltage
##.# SWATH COMPR HT SWATH CO SENSOR
Swath compressor height (00.010.0); fully raised is 0 Sensor disabled
SCROLL SUB-MENU (lower line only) #### DISC RPM ##.# HEADER HEIGHT LOAD||| ####
Displays sub-menu after 2 to 3 seconds. Press SELECT to cancel. Scroll through sub-menu display with CDM switch
Miscellaneous Operational Information
Scroll through display with cab display module (CDM) switch or ground speed lever (GSL) switch.
Display (Upper Line) Description
HEADER DISENGAGED Header drive is disengaged
##.# FOOT DISK AUGER or DRAPER will appear in place of DISK, depending on type of header attached
IN PARK GSL in N-DETENT position
< LEFT TURN Indicates left turn when left arrow is pressed on CDM (engine-forward mode only10)
RIGHT TURN > Indicates right turn when right arrow is pressed on CDM (engine- forward mode only11)
HAZARD Indicates hazard warning lights are on when hazard button is pressed on CDM
HEADER REVERSE Header drive running in reverse
HEADER ENGAGED Header drive engaged
ROAD GEAR With HIGH RANGE selected on console switch (engine-forward only11 )
OPERATORS STATION
9. The LOAD sensor to monitor knife/conditioner circuit pressure is optional-installed. To monitor reel/auger circuit pressure, relocate sensor as per kit instruction MD #169031, which is available through your Dealer.
10. If road light kit is not installed, CDM will display E135 LEFT STOP LAMP as a malfunction in cab-forward mode. 11. If road light kit is not installed, CDM will display E134 RIGHT STOP LAMP as a malfunction in cab-
forward mode.
Page 109
214737 89 Revision A
3.18.4 Cab Display Module (CDM) Warning and Alarms The CDM displays warnings and sounds alarms to notify of abnormal windrower status at startup when the ignition is turned ON, and at engine operating speeds above 500 rpm.
Engine Warning Lights
Figure 3.77: CDM Engine Warning Lights
A - Engine Preheat B - Water in Fuel C - Caution D - Stop E - Display
ENGINE PRE-HEAT: Illuminates yellow. Wait to start engine.
WATER IN FUEL: Illuminates yellow. Service recommended.
CAUTION: Illuminates yellow. Prompt attention is required. Refer to display code.
STOP: Illuminates red. Stop engine immediately. Refer to display code.
DISPLAY: Displays malfunction code. Refer to 8.4 Engine Error Codes, page 467 or your Dealer.
OPERATORS STATION
Page 110
214737 90 Revision A
Display Warnings and Alarms
The cab display module (CDM) warnings and alarms indicate abnormal windrower conditions.
Figure 3.78: CDM Display Warnings and Alarms
Display (A) Flashing Alarm Tone Description
BRAKE OFF X Short beep with each flash Engine running, GSL in N-DETENT, brake pressure switch or brake switch relay fault
BRAKE ON X Short beep with each flash Ground speed lever (GSL) out of N-DETENT, but interlock switch remains closed to apply brake
BRAKE SW FAILURE X Short beep with each flash Ignition ON/engine not running, brake switch and relay closed
CAB-FORWARD SW ON/ ENG-FORWARD SW ON
X Messages flash alternately Both seat switches activated
CENTER STEERING Two beeps per second GSL or interlock switches not closed with key ON/engine OFF
DISENGAGE HEADER RE-ENGAGE <1800 RPM>
X None R80/R85 - Engine rpm above 1800 rpm when engaging header
ENGINE AIR FILTER X Single loud tone for 10 seconds, Repeats every 30 minutes until condition is corrected
Engine air filter requires servicing
OPERATORS STATION
Page 111
214737 91 Revision A
Display (A) Flashing Alarm Tone Description
ENGINE TEMPERATURE X Ongoing intermittent moderate tone until temperature is below 102C (215F)
Engine temperature over 104C (220F)
HEADER DISENGAGED None Normal
DISENGAGE HEADER X None Header switch is in the ON position when ignition switch is turned ON
HEADER OIL PRESS X Continuous loud tone until oil pressure is regained
Low header charge oil pressure causes header to shut down: header ON switch must be moved to OFF position and then to ON position to restart the header
HYDRAULIC FILTER X Single loud tone for 10 seconds, Repeats every 15 minutes until condition is corrected
Excessive pressure increase across hydraulic oil filter
### C or F HYD OIL COLD
X
Tone sounds with each flash for 5 seconds and then stops for 1 minute, flashing continues if oil still cold after 1 minute, tone sounds again
Hydraulic oil temp <10C (50F)
### C or F HYD OIL HOT X
Tone with each flash for 5 seconds at 104C (220F) then tone stops for 1 minute while flashing continues. If oil still hot after 1 minute, tone sounds again. Flashing and steady tone at temperatures of 110C (230F) and higher
Hydraulic oil temp >104C (220F) but <110C (230F)
IN PARK X One short beep GSL in N-DETENT, steering wheel centered, and brakes are engaged
KNIFE SPEED OVERLOAD
X Short beep with each flash until condition is corrected
Machine overload: knife or disc speed drops below programmed value
LOCK SEAT BASE X None Seat base not detected in cab or engine-forward position
LOW HYDRAULIC OIL X
Continuous loud tone for 5 seconds. If condition is not rectified, single loud tone every 5 minutes
Low hydraulic oil level, header shuts down automatically if engaged: Header ON switch must be moved to OFF position and then to ON position to restart the header
NO HEADER None Header is not detected
OPERATORS STATION
Page 112
214737 92 Revision A
Display (A) Flashing Alarm Tone Description
NO OPERATOR Continuous tone
Operator not detected in seat with header engaged or out of N-DETENT: engine shutdown after 5 seconds
NO OPERATOR ENGINE SHUT DOWN
Continuous tone Engine shutdown when Operator not detected in seat with machine moving under 8 km/h (5 mph)
NOT IN PARK X Short beep with each flash GSL or interlock switches not closed with key ON/engine OFF
PLACE GSL INTO N Two beeps per second GSL or interlock switches not closed with key ON/engine OFF
SLOW DOWN X Short beep with each flash
Ground speed is greater than or equal to 40 km/h (25 mph): Operator should pull back on the GSL to reduce ground speed
TRANS OIL PRESS X Continuous loud tone until oil pressure is regained
Low transmission charge oil pressure
##.# LOW VOLTS X Single loud tone for 10 seconds Voltage below 11.5
##.# HIGH VOLTS X Single loud tone for 10 seconds Voltage above 15.5
3.18.5 Configuration Guidelines Use the following guidelines when configuring the cab display module (CDM):
The monitoring system requires configuration for each header.
The HEADER MUST BE ATTACHED TO THE WINDROWER so the CDM recognizes the header type.
The transmission must be in Neutral (GSL in N-DETENT) to configure the system with the engine running.
The ignition switch must be in the RUN position to configure the system when the engine is not running.
The system only needs to be configured once for each header. Most functions are factory preset, but the Operator can make changes to suit windrowing conditions or modifications to the machine.
The windrower input values are provided in this manual. Header function values are in the header operators manual.
The CDM must be in programming mode to view the program menus. Press PROGRAM and SELECT simultaneously on the CDM to enter programming mode. Exit programming mode at any time by pressing PROGRAM or by turning ignition to OFF.
Refer to 3.18.6 Cab Display Module (CDM) Configuration, page 93 for a detailed list of menu items.
NOTE:
Contact your MacDon Dealer for information about software updates to the electronic modules. Your Dealer will have the necessary interface tools and access to the latest software upgrades.
OPERATORS STATION
Page 113
214737 93 Revision A
3.18.6 Cab Display Module (CDM) Configuration
Figure 3.79: CDM
A - Side Display B - Main Display C - Select Switch D - Menu Item Scroll Forward E - Menu Item Scroll Backward F - Program Switch
Side Display: Displays software revision status.
Upper line C### (CDM)
Lower line E### (WCM)
Main Display: Displays menu item and selection12.
Upper line Menu item
Lower line Selection
Select Switch: Places monitor into program mode with PROGRAM switch. Press to accept menu item and advance to next item.
Menu Item Scroll Forward: Displays value under menu item.
Push to scroll forward
Hold down for fast scroll13
Menu Item Scroll Backward: Displays value under menu item.
Push to scroll backward
Hold down for fast scroll13
OPERATORS STATION
12. The current selection is flashing. 13. Fast scroll applies only when changing KNIFE SPEED, OVERLOAD PRESSURE, and TIRE SIZE.
Page 114
214737 94 Revision A
Program Switch: Places monitor into program mode. Press while pressing select switch.
NOTE:
Contact your MacDon Dealer for information regarding software updates to the electronic modules. Your Dealer will have the necessary interface tools and access to the latest software upgrades.
NOTE:
The following menus are available when ignition key is set to RUN:
WINDROWER SETUP
CAB DISPLAY SETUP
DIAGNOSTIC MODE
The CALIBRATE SENSORS menu is available only when engine is running.
3.18.7 Cab Display Options The display and sound features of the cab display module (CDM) can be adjusted to suit each particular Operator.
NOTE:
The procedures listed in this section are current for CDM software version C512 and windrower control module (WCM) E237. The WCM is supplied preloaded with the latest released version of the operating software. Any subsequent updates will be made available via internet download from the MacDon Dealer Portal (https://portal. macdon.com).
NOTE:
Pages may appear differently if running newer or older versions of software, and not all features are available on every machine.
Setting the Cab Display Language
Figure 3.80: Windrower Setup Display
1. Turn ignition key to RUN, or start the engine.
2. Press PROGRAM (A) and SELECT (B) on cab display module (CDM) to enter programming mode.
WINDROWER SETUP? is displayed on the upper line.
NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
OPERATORS STATION
Page 115
214737 95 Revision A
Figure 3.81: Cab Display Setup
3. Press SELECT (A) until CAB DISPLAY SETUP? is displayed on the upper line.
NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
Figure 3.82: Language Display
4. Press right arrow (C) to select YES. Press SELECT (D).
DISPLAY LANGUAGE? is displayed on the upper line.
Default language is displayed on the lower line.
5. Press left (B) or right (C) arrow to select preferred language.
NOTE:
English, Russian, and Spanish language options are available on windrowers. Not all language options are available on all windrowers.
6. Press PROGRAM (A) to exit programming mode or press SELECT (D) to proceed to next CAB DISPLAY SETUP? action.
Changing the Windrower Display Units
Figure 3.83: CDM Programming Buttons
1. Turn ignition key to RUN, or start the engine.
2. Press PROGRAM (A) and SELECT (B) on cab display module (CDM) to enter programming mode.
WINDROWER SETUP? is displayed on the upper line.
NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
OPERATORS STATION
Page 116
214737 96 Revision A
Figure 3.84: Cab Display Setup
3. Press SELECT (B) until CAB DISPLAY SETUP? is displayed on the upper line.
NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
4. Press right arrow (A) to select YES. Press SELECT (B).
DISPLAY LANGUAGE? is displayed on the upper line.
Figure 3.85: Display Units
5. Press SELECT (D) until DISPLAY UNITS? is displayed on the upper line.
Default setting is displayed on the lower line.
6. Press left (B) or right (C) arrow to select either METRIC or IMPERIAL speed display.
7. Press PROGRAM (A) to exit programming mode or press SELECT (D) to proceed to next CAB DISPLAY SETUP? action.
Adjusting the Cab Display Buzzer Volume
Figure 3.86: CDM Programming Buttons
1. Turn ignition key to RUN, or start the engine.
2. Press PROGRAM (A) and SELECT (B) on cab display module (CDM) to enter programming mode.
WINDROWER SETUP? is displayed on the upper line.
NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
OPERATORS STATION
Page 117
214737 97 Revision A
Figure 3.87: Cab Display Setup
3. Press SELECT (B) until CAB DISPLAY SETUP? is displayed on the upper line.
NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
4. Press right arrow (A) to select YES. Press SELECT (B).
DISPLAY LANGUAGE? is displayed on the upper line.
Figure 3.88: Buzzer Volume
5. Press SELECT (D) until BUZZER VOLUME is displayed on the upper line.
Previous setting is displayed on the lower line.
6. Press left (B) or right (C) arrows to adjust buzzer volume.
7. Press PROGRAM (A) to exit programming mode or press SELECT (D) to proceed to next CAB DISPLAY SETUP? action.
Adjusting the Cab Display Backlighting
The backlighting feature brightens the display screen helping you read the cab display module (CDM) in low light situations.
Figure 3.89: CDM Programming Buttons
1. Turn ignition key to RUN, or start the engine.
2. Press PROGRAM (A) and SELECT (B) on cab display module (CDM) to enter programming mode.
WINDROWER SETUP? is displayed on the upper line.
NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
OPERATORS STATION
Page 118
214737 98 Revision A
Figure 3.90: Cab Display Setup
3. Press SELECT (B) until CAB DISPLAY SETUP? is displayed on the upper line.
NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
4. Press right arrow (A) to select YES. Press SELECT (B).
DISPLAY LANGUAGE? is displayed on the upper line.
Figure 3.91: Backlighting
5. Press SELECT (D) until BACKLIGHTING is displayed on the upper line.
Default setting is displayed on the lower line.
6. Press left (B) or right (C) arrows to adjust display backlighting.
7. Press PROGRAM (A) to exit programming mode or press SELECT (D) to proceed to next CAB DISPLAY SETUP? action.
Adjusting the Cab Display Contrast
Figure 3.92: CDM Programming Buttons
1. Turn ignition key to RUN, or start the engine.
2. Press PROGRAM (A) and SELECT (B) on cab display module (CDM) to enter programming mode.
WINDROWER SETUP? is displayed on the upper line.
NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
OPERATORS STATION
Page 119
214737 99 Revision A
Figure 3.93: Cab Display Setup
3. Press SELECT (B) until CAB DISPLAY SETUP? is displayed on the upper line.
NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
4. Press right arrow (A) to select YES. Press SELECT (B).
DISPLAY LANGUAGE? is displayed on the upper line.
Figure 3.94: Display Contrast
5. Press SELECT (D) until DISPLAY CONTRAST is displayed on the upper line.
Default setting is displayed on the lower line.
6. Press left (B) or right (C) arrows to adjust display contrast.
7. Press PROGRAM (A) to exit programming mode or press SELECT (D) to proceed to next CAB DISPLAY SETUP? action.
3.18.8 Configuring the Windrower The windrower can be configured to meet changing crop conditions, activate newly added options, indicate a change of header type, or increase operator comfort level.
Setting the Header Knife Speed
This topic does not apply to rotary disc headers.
NOTE:
The header MUST be attached to the windrower to perform this procedure. The cab display module (CDM) automatically adjusts its programming for each header. For more information, refer to 4.5 Attaching and Detaching Headers, page 218.
OPERATORS STATION
Page 120
214737 100 Revision A
Figure 3.95: CDM Programming Buttons
1. Turn ignition key to RUN, or start the engine.
2. Press PROGRAM (A) and SELECT (C) on the cab display module (CDM) to enter programming mode.
WINDROWER SETUP? is displayed on the upper line.
NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
3. Press right arrow (B) to select YES. Press SELECT (C).
SET KNIFE SPEED? is displayed.
The current knife speed is displayed on the lower line.
Figure 3.96: Knife Speed
4. Press left (B) or right (C) arrows to select knife speed. Press SELECT (D).
5. Press PROGRAM (A) to exit programming mode or press SELECT (D) to proceed to next WINDROWER SETUP action.
OPERATORS STATION
Page 121
214737 101 Revision A
Setting the Knife Overload Speed
NOTE:
The header MUST be attached to the windrower to perform this procedure. The cab display module (CDM) automatically adjusts its programming for each header. For more information, refer to 4.5 Attaching and Detaching Headers, page 218.
The recommended knife overload speed is 75% of knife speed.
Figure 3.97: CDM Programming Buttons
1. Turn ignition key to RUN, or start the engine.
2. Press PROGRAM (A) and SELECT (C) on the cab display module (CDM) to enter programming mode.
WINDROWER SETUP? is displayed on the upper line.
NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
3. Press right arrow (B) to select YES. Press SELECT (C).
SET KNIFE SPEED? is displayed.
Figure 3.98: Knife Overload Speed
4. Press SELECT (D) until KNIFE OVERLOAD SPD? is displayed on the upper line.
Current overload speed is displayed on the lower line.
NOTE:
Default setting is -300 spm. Range is -500 to -100 spm.
5. Press left (B) or right (C) arrows to set knife overload speed. Press SELECT (D).
6. Press PROGRAM (A) to exit programming mode or press SELECT (D) to proceed to next WINDROWER SETUP action.
Setting the Rotary Disc Overload Speed
This topic applies to rotary disc headers only.
NOTE:
The header MUST be attached to the windrower to perform this procedure. The cab display module (CDM) automatically adjusts its programming for each header. For more information, refer to 4.5 Attaching and Detaching Headers, page 218.
The recommended disc overload speed is 75% of disc speed. For more information, refer to the rotary disc header operators manual to determine proper overload speed.
OPERATORS STATION
Page 122
214737 102 Revision A
Figure 3.99: CDM Programming Buttons
1. Turn ignition key to RUN, or start the engine.
2. Press PROGRAM (A) and SELECT (C) on the cab display module (CDM) to enter programming mode.
WINDROWER SETUP? is displayed on the upper line. NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
3. Press right arrow (B) to select YES. Press SELECT (C).
SET KNIFE SPEED? is displayed.
Figure 3.100: Disc Overload Speed
4. Press SELECT (D) until DISC OVERLOAD SPD? is displayed on the upper line.
The current overload speed is displayed on the lower line.
NOTE:
Default setting is -300 rpm. Range is -500 to -100 rpm.
5. Press left (B) or right (C) arrows to set disc overload speed. Press SELECT (D).
6. Press PROGRAM (A) to exit programming mode or press SELECT (D) to proceed to next WINDROWER SETUP action.
Setting the Hydraulic Overload Pressure
NOTE:
This procedure requires installation of the optional pressure sensor (MD #B5574). For overload pressure values, refer to pressure sensor installation instructions (MD #169031).
To enable sensor, refer to Switching the Installed Header Sensors ON or OFF, page 138.
OPERATORS STATION
Page 123
214737 103 Revision A
Figure 3.101: CDM Programming Buttons
1. Turn ignition key to RUN, or start the engine.
2. Press PROGRAM (A) and SELECT (C) on the cab display module (CDM) to enter programming mode.
WINDROWER SETUP? is displayed on the upper line.
NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
3. Press right arrow (B) to select YES. Press SELECT (C).
SET KNIFE SPEED? is displayed.
Figure 3.102: Hydraulic Overload Pressure
4. Press SELECT (D) until OVERLOAD PRESSURE? is displayed on the upper line.
The current overload pressure is displayed on lower line.
NOTE:
Pressure range is 17,23734,474 kPa (25005000 psi).
5. Press left (B) or right (C) arrows to set hydraulic overload pressure. Press SELECT (D).
6. Press PROGRAM (A) to exit programming mode or press SELECT (D) to proceed to next WINDROWER SETUP action.
Setting the Header Index Mode
Index mode links reel and draper speed to ground speed. This feature is not applicable to rotary disc headers.
For more information on the Header Index feature, refer to 4.6.5 Reel Speed, page 264 and 4.6.6 Draper Speed, page 267.
NOTE:
The header MUST be attached to the windrower to perform this procedure. The cab display module (CDM) automatically adjusts its programming for each header. For more information, refer to 4.5 Attaching and Detaching Headers, page 218.
OPERATORS STATION
Page 124
214737 104 Revision A
Figure 3.103: CDM Programming Buttons
1. Turn ignition key to RUN, or start the engine.
2. Press PROGRAM (A) and SELECT (C) on the cab display module (CDM) to enter programming mode.
WINDROWER SETUP? is displayed on the upper line.
NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
3. Press right arrow (B) to select YES. Press SELECT (C).
SET KNIFE SPEED? is displayed on the upper line.
Figure 3.104: Header Index Mode
4. Press SELECT (D) until HEADER INDEX MODE? is displayed on the upper line.
REEL & CONVEYOR or REEL ONLY is displayed on the lower line.
5. Press left (B) or right (C) arrows to set HEADER INDEX mode. Press SELECT (D).
6. Press PROGRAM (A) to exit programming mode or press SELECT (D) to proceed to next WINDROWER SETUP action.
OPERATORS STATION
Page 125
214737 105 Revision A
Setting the Return to Cut Mode
Return to Cut allows the operator to resume preferred header positions and headland presets.
NOTE:
The header MUST be attached to the windrower to perform this procedure. The cab display module (CDM) automatically adjusts its programming for each header. For more information, refer to 4.5 Attaching and Detaching Headers, page 218.
1. Turn ignition key to RUN, or start the engine.
Figure 3.105: CDM Programming Buttons
2. Press PROGRAM (A) and SELECT (C) on the cab display module (CDM) to enter programming mode.
WINDROWER SETUP? is displayed on the upper line.
NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
3. Press right arrow (B) to select YES. Press SELECT (C).
SET KNIFE SPEED? is displayed.
Figure 3.106: Return to Cut Mode
4. Press SELECT (D) until RETURN TO CUT MODE? is displayed on the upper line.
HEIGHT & TILTor HEIGHT ONLY will be displayed on the lower line.
5. Press left (B) or right (C) arrows to select RETURN TO CUT MODE. Press SELECT (D).
6. Press PROGRAM (A) to exit programming mode or press SELECT (D) to proceed to next WINDROWER SETUP action.
Setting the Auto Raise Height
For more information on the Auto Raise Height feature, refer to Auto Raise Height, page 213.
NOTE:
The header MUST be attached to the windrower to perform this procedure. The cab display module (CDM) automatically adjusts its programming for each header.
OPERATORS STATION
Page 126
214737 106 Revision A
Figure 3.107: CDM Programming Buttons
1. Turn ignition key to RUN, or start the engine.
2. Press PROGRAM (A) and SELECT (C) on the cab display module (CDM) to enter Programming Mode.
WINDROWER SETUP? is displayed on the upper line.
NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
3. Press right arrow (B) to select YES. Press SELECT (C).
SET KNIFE SPEED? is displayed on the upper line.
Figure 3.108: Auto Raise Height
4. Press SELECT (D) until AUTO RAISE HEIGHT? is displayed on the upper line.
Last measurement is displayed on the lower line.
NOTE:
The auto raise height ranges from 4.0 (minimum) to 9.5 (maximum), in 0.5 increments. A setting of 10 disables the auto raise function.
5. Press left arrow (B) or right arrow (C) to change auto raise height.
6. Press PROGRAM (A) to exit programming mode or press SELECT (D) to proceed to next WINDROWER SETUP action.
Activating the Double Windrow Attachment (DWA)
NOTE:
Follow this procedure if installing the DWA; however, refer to the DWA manual if you require additional installation instructions.
The DWA cannot be activated if the swath compressor is enabled.
Follow this procedure if installing a drive manifold (MD #139508).
CAUTION Check to be sure all bystanders have cleared the area.
OPERATORS STATION
Page 127
214737 107 Revision A
Figure 3.109: CDM Programming Buttons
1. Turn ignition key to RUN, or start the engine.
2. Press PROGRAM (A) and SELECT (C) on the cab display module (CDM) to enter programming mode.
WINDROWER SETUP? is displayed on the upper line.
NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
3. Press right arrow (B) to select YES. Press SELECT (C).
SET KNIFE SPEED? is displayed on the upper line.
Figure 3.110: DWA Controls
4. Press SELECT (B) until DWA INSTALLED? is displayed on the upper line.
NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
5. Press right arrow (A) to select YES. Press SELECT (B).
Figure 3.111: DWA Controls
6. SWAP DWA CONTROLS? is displayed on the upper line.
NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
NOTE:
This step swaps the DWA controls from the console switch to the ground speed lever (GSL) reel fore-aft buttons.
OPERATORS STATION
Page 128
214737 108 Revision A
Figure 3.112: DWA Auto Up/Down
7. Press right arrow (C) to select YES. Press SELECT (D).
DWA AUTO UP/DOWN? is displayed on the upper line.
NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
NOTE:
If the Operator selects YES, the DWA Auto-Up function will be activated by the GSL Reel Fore-Aft button.
8. Press right arrow (C) to select YES. Press SELECT (D).
9. Press PROGRAM (A) to exit programming mode or press SELECT (D) to proceed to next windrower setup action.
Activating the Hydraulic Center-Link
Figure 3.113: CDM Programming Buttons
1. Turn ignition key to RUN, or start the engine.
2. Press PROGRAM (A) and SELECT (C) on the cab display module (CDM) to enter programming mode.
WINDROWER SETUP? is displayed on the upper line.
NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
3. Press right arrow (B) to select YES. Press SELECT (C).
SET KNIFE SPEED? is displayed on the upper line.
Figure 3.114: Hydraulic Center-Link
4. Press SELECT (C) until TILT CYL INSTALLED? is displayed on the upper line.
NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
5. Press right arrow (B) to select YES. Press SELECT (C).
6. Press PROGRAM (A) to exit programming mode or press SELECT (C) to proceed to next WINDROWER SETUP action.
OPERATORS STATION
Page 129
214737 109 Revision A
Activating the Rotary Header Drive Hydraulics
NOTE:
This procedure requires installation of the optional Rotary Header Drive Hydraulics (MD #B5510).
For more information, refer to 6.3.8 R80 and R85 Rotary Header Drive Hydraulics (4.0 m [13 ft.]), page 430.
Figure 3.115: CDM Programming Buttons
1. Turn ignition key to RUN, or start the engine.
2. Press PROGRAM (A) and SELECT (C) on the cab display module (CDM) to enter programming mode.
WINDROWER SETUP? is displayed on the upper line.
NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
3. Press right arrow (B) to select YES. Press SELECT (C).
SET KNIFE SPEED? is displayed on the upper line.
Figure 3.116: Rotary Disc Hydraulics
4. Press SELECT (C) until DISC BLK INSTALLED? is displayed on the upper line.
NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
5. Press right arrow (B) to select YES. Press SELECT (C).
6. Press PROGRAM (A) to exit programming mode or press SELECT (C) to proceed to next WINDROWER SETUP action.
Setting the Header Cut Width
NOTE:
The header MUST be attached to the windrower to perform this procedure. The cab display module (CDM) automatically adjusts its programming for each header. For more information, refer to 4.5 Attaching and Detaching Headers, page 218.
Header cut width is less than actual header width to accurately measure number of acres cut.
The header sends an electrical signal to the windrower to produce a header ID; however, the cut width will always default to the smallest header size available for each header type. For example, A Series Auger Headers come in 4.3, 4.9, and 5.5 m (14, 16, and 18 ft.) sizes, but the cut width will default to 4.3 m (14 ft.). Adjust setting to your specific header size.
1. Turn ignition key to RUN, or start the engine.
OPERATORS STATION
Page 130
214737 110 Revision A
Figure 3.117: CDM Programming Buttons
2. Press PROGRAM (A) and SELECT (C) on the cab display module (CDM) to enter programming mode.
WINDROWER SETUP? is displayed on the upper line.
NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
3. Press right arrow (B) to select YES. Press SELECT (C).
SET KNIFE SPEED? is displayed.
Figure 3.118: Header Cut Width
4. Press SELECT (D) until HDR CUT WIDTH? #### is displayed on the upper line.
Previous cutting width is displayed on the lower line.
5. Press left (B) or right (C) arrows to change the header cut width. Press SELECT (D).
6. Press PROGRAM (A) to exit programming mode or press SELECT (D) to proceed to next WINDROWER SETUP action.
OPERATORS STATION
Page 131
214737 111 Revision A
Activating the Swath Compressor
An optional swath compressor (MD #C2061) is available through your MacDon Dealer.
NOTE:
CDM5 (version 512 or later) and WCM2 (version 237 or later), or WCM3 (version 116 or later), are required to operate the swath compressor.
The Double Windrow Attachment (DWA) system must be disabled in the CDM when setting up the swath compressor.
Users can activate and set up the swath compressor via in-cab controls without a header attached to the windrower.
Use the following procedure when installing and setting up the swath compressor.
CAUTION Check to be sure all bystanders have cleared the area.
Figure 3.119: CDM Programming Buttons
1. Turn ignition key to RUN, or start the engine.
2. Press PROGRAM (A) and SELECT (C) on the cab display module (CDM) to enter programming mode.
WINDROWER SETUP? is displayed on the upper line.
NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
3. Press right arrow (B) to select YES. Press SELECT (C).
SET KNIFE SPEED? is displayed on the upper line.
Figure 3.120: Swath Compressor Controls
4. Press SELECT (B) until SWATH COMPR INSTALL? is displayed on the upper line.
NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
5. Press right arrow (A) to select YES. Press SELECT (B).
6. Press SELECT (B) until CALIBRATE SENSORS is displayed on upper line. NO/YES is displayed on lower line.
7. Press right arrow (A) to select YES. Press SELECT (B).
TO CALIBRATE SELECT is displayed on upper line.
HEADER HEIGHT is displayed on lower line.
8. Press right arrow (A) to scroll through choices until SWATH COMPR HT is displayed. Press SELECT (B).
SWATH SENSOR CAL is displayed on upper line.
SWATH UP TO START is displayed on lower line.
OPERATORS STATION
Page 132
214737 112 Revision A
Figure 3.121: Swath Compressor Switch
9. Press switch (B) on console to raise swath compressor.
CALIBRATING SWATH is displayed on upper line.
FORM UP and flashing HOLD is displayed on lower line until system has completed reading signal with swath compressor fully raised.
SWATH FORM UP and DONE (with buzzer) is displayed on lower line when complete.
SWATH SENSOR CAL is displayed on upper line.
PRESS SWATH DOWN is displayed on lower line.
10. Press switch (A) on console to lower swath compressor.
CALIBRATING SWATH is displayed on upper line.
FORM DOWN and HOLD is displayed on lower line.
SWATH FORM COMPLETE flashes for 2 seconds on lower line (with buzzer) when calibration is finished.
Figure 3.122: CDM Programming Buttons
11. Press PROGRAM (A) to exit programming mode or press SELECT (B) to proceed to next windrower setup action.
OPERATORS STATION
Page 133
214737 113 Revision A
Activating the Hay Conditioner
NOTE:
This procedure is for draper headers only.
The header MUST be attached to the windrower to perform this procedure. The cab display module (CDM) automatically adjusts its programming for each header. For more information, refer to 4.5 Attaching and Detaching Headers, page 218.
Figure 3.123: CDM Programming Buttons
1. Turn ignition key to RUN, or start the engine.
2. Press PROGRAM (A) and SELECT (C) on the cab display module (CDM) to enter programming mode.
WINDROWER SETUP? is displayed on the upper line.
NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
3. Press right arrow (B) to select YES. Press SELECT (C).
SET KNIFE SPEED? is displayed on the upper line.
Figure 3.124: Hay Conditioner
4. Press SELECT (C) until HAY CONDITIONER? is displayed on the upper line.
NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
5. Press right arrow (B) to select YES. Press SELECT (C).
6. Press PROGRAM (A) to exit programming mode or press SELECT (C) to proceed to next WINDROWER SETUP action.
OPERATORS STATION
Page 134
214737 114 Revision A
Displaying Reel Speed
NOTE:
This procedure is for draper and auger headers. It does not apply to rotary disc headers.
The header MUST be attached to the windrower to perform this procedure. The cab display module (CDM) automatically adjusts its programming for each header. For more information, refer to 4.5 Attaching and Detaching Headers, page 218.
Figure 3.125: CDM Programming Buttons
1. Turn ignition key to RUN, or start the engine.
2. Press PROGRAM (A) and SELECT (C) on CDM to enter programming mode.
WINDROWER SETUP? is displayed on the upper line.
NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
3. Press right arrow (B) to select YES. Press SELECT (C).
SET KNIFE SPEED? is displayed on the upper line.
Figure 3.126: Reel Speed Display
4. Press SELECT (D) until HEADER REEL SPEED? is displayed on the upper line.
RPM/MPH or RPM/KPH is displayed on the lower line.
5. Press left (B) or right (C) arrow to select either IMPERIAL or METRIC units. Press SELECT (D).
6. Press PROGRAM (A) to exit programming mode or press SELECT (D) to proceed to next WINDROWER SETUP action.
OPERATORS STATION
Page 135
214737 115 Revision A
Setting the Windrowers Tire Size
Figure 3.127: CDM Programming Buttons
1. Turn ignition key to RUN, or start the engine.
2. Press PROGRAM (A) and SELECT (C) on the cab display module (CDM) to enter programming mode.
WINDROWER SETUP? is displayed on the upper line.
NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
3. Press right arrow (B) to select YES. Press SELECT (C).
SET KNIFE SPEED? is displayed on the upper line.
Figure 3.128: Tire Size
4. Press SELECT (D) until SET TIRE SIZE? is displayed on the upper line.
Currently installed tire size is displayed on the lower line.
NOTE:
The following tire sizes are available:
18.4 x 26 TURF
18.4 x 26 BAR
23.1 x 26 TURF
600 65 R28
5. Press left (B) or right (C) arrow and select tire size. Press SELECT (D).
6. Press PROGRAM (A) to exit programming mode or press SELECT (D) to proceed to next WINDROWER SETUP action.
OPERATORS STATION
Page 136
214737 116 Revision A
Setting the Engine Intermediate Speed Control (ISC) RPM
The engine operating speed can be programmed to enable the windrower to operate at reduced engine rpm (that is, 1900, 2050, or 2200 rpm) without significantly affecting the ground or header speeds. The default setting is 2200 rpm or the last selected rpm.
NOTE:
The programmed engine speed is activated when the header is engaged. For more information, refer to Engine Intermediate Speed Control (ISC), page 170.
The engineMUST be running to perform this procedure.
Figure 3.129: CDM Programming Buttons
1. Start the engine.
2. Press PROGRAM (A) and SELECT (C) on cab display module (CDM) to enter programming mode.
WINDROWER SETUP? is displayed on the upper line.
NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
3. Press right arrow (B) to select YES. Press SELECT (C).
SET KNIFE SPEED? is displayed on the upper line.
Figure 3.130: Engine ISC RPM
4. Press SELECT (B) until SET ENGINE ISC RPM? is displayed on the upper line.
NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
5. Press right arrow (A) to select YES. Press SELECT (B).
PRESS HAZARD TO SET is displayed on the upper line.
ISC RPM #### is displayed on the lower line.
Table 3.1 ISC Settings
ISC and RPM
Off14 1 2
High Idle 2050 1900
NOTE:
The previously selected ISC rpm will be flashing.
OPERATORS STATION
14. Off is always used when the header is not engaged.
Page 137
214737 117 Revision A
Figure 3.131: ISC RPM
6. Press right arrow (C) to cycle between rpm options. Press HAZARD (B) to set.
7. Press Select (D).
EXIT ENGINE ISC? is displayed on the upper line.
NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
8. Press right arrow (C) to select YES. Press SELECT (D).
9. Press PROGRAM (A) to exit programming mode.
Clearing Sub-Acres
The windrower has two counters for acres: one counter tracks a total count of acres harvested for the machines lifetime, and the other counter tracks sub-acres harvested for smaller harvesting instances (instances like harvesting a particular field, or for a particular day). The total acres cant be cleared from the windrowers tracking, but the sub-acres can be cleared between smaller harvesting instances.
Figure 3.132: Cab Display Module (CDM)
1. With the key in the ON position, and the operators station in cab-forward mode, press SELECT until the cab display module (CDM) displays sub-acres on the bottom line. Then press and hold the PROGRAM (A) button on the CDM until the sub-acres are cleared.
3.18.9 Activating Cab Display Lockouts You can lock some of the header functions controlled by the cab display module (CDM) to prevent accidental changes to header settings. You can use this feature to keep header settings constant when several different Operators use the windrower.
NOTE:
FUNCTION LOCKED flashes on CDM when locked header function switch is pressed.
OPERATORS STATION
Page 138
214737 118 Revision A
Activating the Header Tilt Control Lockout
NOTE:
The header MUST be attached to the windrower to perform this procedure. The cab display module (CDM) automatically adjusts its programming for each header. For more information, refer to 4.5 Attaching and Detaching Headers, page 218.
Figure 3.133: CDM Programming Buttons
1. Turn ignition key to RUN, or start the engine.
2. Press PROGRAM (A) and SELECT (C) on the cab display module (CDM) to enter programming mode.
WINDROWER SETUP? is displayed on the upper line.
NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
3. Press right arrow (B) to select YES. Press SELECT (C).
SET KNIFE SPEED? is displayed on the upper line.
Figure 3.134: Control Locks
4. Press SELECT (B) until SET CONTROL LOCKS? is displayed on the upper line.
NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
5. Press right arrow (A) to select YES. Press SELECT (B).
OPERATORS STATION
Page 139
214737 119 Revision A
Figure 3.135: Header Tilt Control Lock
6. Press SELECT (D) until HEADER TILT is displayed on the upper line.
ENABLED/LOCKED is displayed on the lower line.
7. Press left arrow (B) to enable the HEADER TILTcontrol switch.
Press right arrow (C) to lock the HEADER TILTcontrol switch.
8. Press PROGRAM (A) to exit programming mode, or press SELECT (D) to proceed to next WINDROWER SETUP action.
Activating the Header Float Control Lockout
NOTE:
The header MUST be attached to the windrower to perform this procedure. The cab display module (CDM) automatically adjusts its programming for each header.
For more information, refer to 4.5 Attaching and Detaching Headers, page 218.
Figure 3.136: CDM Programming Buttons
1. Turn ignition key to RUN, or start the engine.
2. Press PROGRAM (A) and SELECT (C) on the cab display module (CDM) to enter programming mode.
WINDROWER SETUP? is displayed on the upper line.
NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
3. Press right arrow (B) to select YES. Press SELECT (C).
SET KNIFE SPEED? is displayed on the upper line.
Figure 3.137: Control Locks
4. Press SELECT (B) until SET CONTROL LOCKS? is displayed on the upper line.
NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
5. Press right arrow (A) to select YES. Press SELECT (B).
OPERATORS STATION
Page 140
214737 120 Revision A
Figure 3.138: Header Float Control Lock
6. Press SELECT (D) until HEADER FLOAT is displayed on the upper line.
ENABLED/LOCKED is displayed on the lower line.
7. Press left arrow (B) to enable HEADER FLOATcontrol switch, or press right arrow (C) to lock HEADER FLOAT control switch.
8. Press PROGRAM (A) to exit programming mode or press SELECT (D) to proceed to next WINDROWER SETUP action.
Activating the Reel Fore-Aft Control Lockout
NOTE:
This procedure is for draper headers only.
The header MUST be attached to the windrower to perform this procedure. The cab display module (CDM) automatically adjusts its programming for each header. For more information, refer to 4.5 Attaching and Detaching Headers, page 218.
Figure 3.139: CDM Programming Buttons
1. Turn ignition key to RUN, or start the engine.
2. Press PROGRAM (A) and SELECT (C) on the cab display module (CDM) to enter programming mode.
WINDROWER SETUP? is displayed on the upper line.
NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
3. Press right arrow (B) to select YES. Press SELECT (C).
SET KNIFE SPEED? is displayed on the upper line.
OPERATORS STATION
Page 141
214737 121 Revision A
Figure 3.140: Control Locks
4. Press SELECT (B) until SET CONTROL LOCKS? is displayed on the upper line.
NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
5. Press right arrow (A) to select YES. Press SELECT (B).
Figure 3.141: Reel Fore-Aft Control Lock
6. Press SELECT (D) until REEL FORE/AFT is displayed on the upper line.
ENABLED/LOCKED is displayed on the lower line.
7. Press left arrow (B) to enable REEL FORE/AFTcontrol switch.
Press right arrow (C) to lock REEL FORE/AFTcontrol switch.
8. Press PROGRAM (A) to exit programming mode, or press SELECT (D) to proceed to next WINDROWER SETUP action.
Activating the Draper Speed Control Lockout
NOTE:
This procedure is for draper headers only.
The header MUST be attached to the windrower to perform this procedure. The cab display module (CDM) automatically adjusts its programming for each header. For more information, refer to 4.5 Attaching and Detaching Headers, page 218.
OPERATORS STATION
Page 142
214737 122 Revision A
Figure 3.142: CDM Programming Buttons
1. Turn ignition key to RUN, or start the engine.
2. Press PROGRAM (A) and SELECT (C) on the cab display module (CDM) to enter programming mode.
WINDROWER SETUP? is displayed on the upper line.
NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
3. Press right arrow (B) to select YES. Press SELECT (C).
SET KNIFE SPEED? is displayed on the upper line.
Figure 3.143: Control Locks
4. Press SELECT (B) until SET CONTROL LOCKS? is displayed on the upper line.
NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
5. Press right arrow (A) to select YES. Press SELECT (B).
Figure 3.144: Draper Control Lock
6. Press SELECT (D) until DRAPER SPEED is displayed on the upper line.
ENABLED/LOCKED is displayed on the lower line.
7. Press left arrow (B) to enable DRAPER SPEED control switch, or press right arrow (C) to lock DRAPER SPEED control switch.
8. Press PROGRAM (A) to exit programming mode or press SELECT (D) to proceed to next WINDROWER SETUP action.
OPERATORS STATION
Page 143
214737 123 Revision A
Activating the Auger Speed Control Lockout
NOTE:
This procedure is for A40D headers only.
An auger header MUST be attached to the windrower to perform this procedure. The cab display module (CDM) automatically adjusts its programming for each header. For more information, refer to 4.5 Attaching and Detaching Headers, page 218.
Figure 3.145: CDM Programming Buttons
1. Turn ignition key to RUN, or start the engine.
2. Press PROGRAM (A) and SELECT (C) on the cab display module (CDM) to enter programming mode.
WINDROWER SETUP? is displayed on the upper line.
NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
3. Press right arrow (B) to select YES. Press SELECT (C).
SET KNIFE SPEED? is displayed on the upper line.
Figure 3.146: Control Locks
4. Press SELECT (B) until SET CONTROL LOCKS? is displayed on the upper line.
NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
5. Press right arrow (A) to select YES. Press SELECT (B).
OPERATORS STATION
Page 144
214737 124 Revision A
Figure 3.147: Auger Control Lock
6. Press SELECT (D) until AUGER SPEED is displayed on the upper line.
ENABLED/LOCKED is displayed on the lower line.
7. Press left arrow (B) to enable AUGER SPEED control switch.
Press right arrow (C) to lock AUGER SPEED control switch.
8. Press PROGRAM (A) to exit programming mode, or press SELECT (D) to proceed to next WINDROWER SETUP action.
Activating Knife Speed Control Lockout
NOTE:
The header MUST be attached to the windrower to perform this procedure. The cab display module (CDM) automatically adjusts its programming for each header. For more information, refer to 4.5 Attaching and Detaching Headers, page 218.
Figure 3.148: CDM Programming Buttons
1. Turn ignition key to RUN, or start the engine.
2. Press PROGRAM (A) and SELECT (C) on the cab display module (CDM) to enter programming mode.
WINDROWER SETUP? is displayed on the upper line.
NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
3. Press right arrow (B) to select YES. Press SELECT (C).
SET KNIFE SPEED? is displayed on the upper line.
Figure 3.149: Control Locks
4. Press SELECT (B) until SET CONTROL LOCKS? is displayed on the upper line.
NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
5. Press right arrow (A) to select YES. Press SELECT (B).
OPERATORS STATION
Page 145
214737 125 Revision A
Figure 3.150: Knife Speed Control Lock
6. Press SELECT (D) until KNIFE SPEED is displayed on the upper line.
ENABLED/LOCKED is displayed on the lower line.
7. Press left arrow (B) to enable KNIFE SPEED control switch, or press right arrow (C) to lock KNIFE SPEED control switch.
8. Press PROGRAM (A) to exit programming mode or press SELECT (D) to proceed to next WINDROWER SETUP action.
Activating Rotary Disc Speed Control Lockout
NOTE:
This procedure is for rotary disc headers only.
The header MUST be attached to the windrower to perform this procedure. The cab display module (CDM) automatically adjusts its programming for each header. For more information, refer to 4.5 Attaching and Detaching Headers, page 218.
Figure 3.151: CDM Programming Buttons
1. Turn ignition key to RUN, or start the engine.
2. Press PROGRAM (A) and SELECT (C) on the cab display module (CDM) to enter programming mode.
WINDROWER SETUP? is displayed on the upper line.
NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
3. Press right arrow (B) to select YES. Press SELECT (C).
SET KNIFE SPEED? is displayed on the upper line.
OPERATORS STATION
Page 146
214737 126 Revision A
Figure 3.152: Control Locks
4. Press SELECT (B) until SET CONTROL LOCKS? is displayed on the upper line.
NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
5. Press right arrow (A) to select YES. Press SELECT (B).
Figure 3.153: Disc Speed Control Lock
6. Press SELECT (D) until DISK SPEED is displayed on the upper line.
ENABLED/LOCKED is displayed on the lower line.
7. Press left arrow (B) to enable DISK SPEED control switch, or press right arrow (C) to lock DISK SPEED control switch.
8. Press PROGRAM (A) to exit programming mode or press SELECT (D) to proceed to next WINDROWER SETUP action.
Activating the Reel Speed Control Lockout
NOTE:
The header MUST be attached to the windrower to perform this procedure. The cab display module (CDM) automatically adjusts its programming for each header.
For more information, refer to 4.5 Attaching and Detaching Headers, page 218.
OPERATORS STATION
Page 147
214737 127 Revision A
Figure 3.154: CDM Programming Buttons
1. Turn ignition key to RUN, or start the engine.
2. Press PROGRAM (A) and SELECT (C) on the cab display module (CDM) to enter programming mode.
WINDROWER SETUP? is displayed on the upper line.
NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
3. Press right arrow (B) to select YES. Press SELECT (C).
SET KNIFE SPEED? is displayed on the upper line.
Figure 3.155: Control Locks
4. Press SELECT (B) until SET CONTROL LOCKS? is displayed on the upper line.
NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
5. Press right arrow (A) to select YES. Press SELECT (B).
Figure 3.156: Reel Speed Control Lock
6. Press SELECT (D) until REEL SPEED is displayed on the upper line.
ENABLED/LOCKED is displayed on the lower line.
7. Press left arrow (B) to enable the REEL SPEED control switch.
Press right arrow (C) to lock the REEL SPEED control switch.
8. Press PROGRAM (A) to exit programming mode, or press SELECT (D) to proceed to next WINDROWER SETUP action.
OPERATORS STATION
Page 148
214737 128 Revision A
3.18.10 Displaying Activated Cab Display Lockouts Displaying the activated control locks allows you to quickly determine which controls are locked on the cab display module (CDM).
Figure 3.157: CDM Programming Buttons
1. Turn ignition key to RUN, or start the engine.
2. Press PROGRAM (A) and SELECT (C) on the cab display module (CDM) to enter programming mode.
WINDROWER SETUP? is displayed on the upper line.
NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
3. Press right arrow (B) to select YES. Press SELECT (C).
SET KNIFE SPEED? is displayed on the upper line.
Figure 3.158: Control Locks
4. Press SELECT (B) until VIEW CONTROL LOCKS? is displayed on the upper line.
NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
5. Press right arrow (A) to select YES. Press SELECT (B).
HEADER TILT is displayed on the upper line.
The control switch status is displayed on the lower line. The hours displayed indicate when a switch was enabled or locked.
Figure 3.159: Control Locks
6. Press left (B) or right (C) arrow to cycle between control switch lockouts. The displayed control switches are as follows:
HEADER TILT
HEADER FLOAT
REEL FORE/AFT
DRAPER SPEED
AUGER SPEED
KNIFE SPEED
DISK SPEED
REEL SPEED
NOTE:
Not all control locks apply to every header.
OPERATORS STATION
Page 149
214737 129 Revision A
7. Press SELECT (D).
EXIT VIEW LOCKOUTS? is displayed on the upper line.
NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
8. Press right (C) to select YES.
9. Press PROGRAM (A) to exit programming mode or press SELECT (D) to proceed to next WINDROWER SETUP action.
3.18.11 Calibrating the Header Sensors Sensor calibration programs the windrower control module (WCM) with settings for the attached header.
Calibrating the Header Height Sensor
NOTE:
The header MUST be attached to the windrower to perform this procedure. The cab display module (CDM) automatically adjusts its configuration for each header type. For more information, refer to 4.5 Attaching and Detaching Headers, page 218.
The engine MUST be running to perform this procedure.
Figure 3.160: CDM Programming Buttons
1. Start the engine.
2. Press PROGRAM (A) and SELECT (B) on cab display module (CDM) to enter programming mode.
WINDROWER SETUP? is displayed on the upper line.
3. Press SELECT (B) until CALIBRATE SENSORS? is displayed on the upper line.
NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
OPERATORS STATION
Page 150
214737 130 Revision A
Figure 3.161: Header Height Calibration
4. Press right arrow (B) to select YES. Press SELECT (C).
TO CALIBRATE SELECT is displayed in upper line.
5. Press left (A) or right (B) arrow until HEADER HEIGHT is displayed on the lower line. Press SELECT (C).
CALIBRATING HEIGHT is displayed on the upper line.
RAISE HEADER HOLD is displayed on the lower line.
Figure 3.162: Header Height Controls on GSL
CAUTION Check to be sure all bystanders have cleared the area.
6. Press and hold the HEADER UP button (A) on the ground speed lever (GSL).
CALIBRATING HEIGHT is displayed on the upper line.
RAISE HEADER HOLD is displayed on the lower line.
NOTE:
The word HOLD will flash during calibration. RAISE HEADER DONE will display on the lower line once calibration is complete.
7. Release the HEADER UP button (A).
HEIGHT SENSOR CAL is displayed on the upper line.
PRESS LOWER HEADER is displayed on the lower line.
OPERATORS STATION
Page 151
214737 131 Revision A
Figure 3.163: Header Height Controls on GSL
8. Press and hold HEADER DOWN button (A) on the GSL.
NOTE:
The word HOLD will flash during calibration. HT SENSOR COMPLETE will display on the lower line once calibration is complete.
9. Release HEADER DOWN button (A).
TO CALIBRATE SELECT is displayed on the upper line.
HEADER HEIGHT is displayed on the lower line.
10. Press right arrow to select next header sensor calibration or STOP & EXIT. Press SELECT.
Refer to Calibrating the Header Tilt Sensor, page 131 or Calibrating the Header Float Sensors, page 133.
11. Press PROGRAM to exit programming mode.
Calibrating the Header Tilt Sensor
NOTE:
The header MUST be attached to the windrower to perform this procedure. The cab display module (CDM) automatically adjusts its programming for each header. Refer to 4.5 Attaching and Detaching Headers, page 218.
The engine MUST be running to perform this procedure.
Figure 3.164: CDM Programming Buttons
1. Start the engine.
2. Press PROGRAM (A) and SELECT (B) on cab display module (CDM) to enter programming mode.
WINDROWER SETUP? is displayed on the upper line.
3. Press SELECT (B) until CALIBRATE SENSORS? is displayed on the upper line.
NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
OPERATORS STATION
Page 152
214737 132 Revision A
Figure 3.165: Header Tilt
4. Press right arrow (B) to select YES. Press SELECT (C).
TO CALIBRATE SELECT is displayed in upper line.
5. Press left (A) or right (B) arrow until HEADER TILT is displayed on the lower line. Press SELECT (C).
HDR TILT SENSOR CAL is displayed on the upper line.
EXTEND TILT TO START is displayed on the lower line.
Figure 3.166: Header Tilt Controls on GSL
CAUTION Check to be sure all bystanders have cleared the area.
6. Press and hold the HEADER TILT EXTEND button (A) on the ground speed lever (GSL).
CALIBRATING TILT is displayed on the upper line.
EXTEND TILT HOLD is displayed on the lower line.
NOTE:
The word HOLD will flash during calibration. HEADER TILT DONE will display on the lower line once calibration is complete.
7. Release the HEADER TILT EXTEND button (A).
HEADER TILT SENSOR CAL is displayed on upper line.
PRESS RETRACT TILT is displayed on the lower line.
OPERATORS STATION
Page 153
214737 133 Revision A
Figure 3.167: Header Tilt Controls on GSL
8. Press and hold HEADER TILT RETRACT button (A) on GSL.
CALIBRATING TILT is displayed on the upper line.
RETRACT TILT HOLD is displayed on the lower line.
NOTE:
The word HOLD will flash during calibration. HEADER TILT COMPLETE will display on the lower line once calibration is complete.
9. Release HEADER TILT RETRACT button (A).
TO CALIBRATE SELECT is displayed on the upper line.
HEADER TILT is displayed on the lower line.
10. Press right arrow to select next header sensor calibration or STOP & EXIT. Press SELECT.
Refer to Calibrating the Header Height Sensor, page 129 or Calibrating the Header Float Sensors, page 133.
11. Press PROGRAM to exit programming mode.
Calibrating the Header Float Sensors
NOTE:
The header MUST be attached to the windrower to perform this procedure. The cab display module (CDM) automatically adjusts its programming for each header. For more information, refer to 4.5 Attaching and Detaching Headers, page 218.
Use the left or right FLOAT buttons on the cab display module (CDM) to perform this procedure.
Figure 3.168: Float Pin Right Side
IMPORTANT:
Ensure float pins (A) are installed in the working position.
OPERATORS STATION
Page 154
214737 134 Revision A
Figure 3.169: CDM Programming Buttons
1. Start the engine.
2. Press PROGRAM (A) and SELECT (B) on cab display module (CDM) to enter programming mode.
WINDROWER SETUP? is displayed on the upper line.
3. Press SELECT (B) until CALIBRATE SENSORS? is displayed on the upper line.
NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
Figure 3.170: Header Float Display
4. Press right arrow (B) to select YES. Press SELECT (C).
TO CALIBRATE SELECT is displayed in upper line.
5. Press left (A) or right (B) arrow until HEADER FLOAT is displayed on the lower line. Press SELECT (C).
CALIBRATING FLOAT is displayed on the upper line.
PRESS FLOAT + TO START is displayed on the lower line.
CAUTION Check to be sure all bystanders have cleared the area.
Figure 3.171: Positive Header Float Display
6. Press and hold FLOAT + button (A) on the CDM.
CALIBRATING FLOAT is displayed on the upper line.
FLOAT ( + ) HOLD is displayed on the lower line.
NOTE:
The word HOLD will flash during calibration. FLOAT (+) DONE will display on the lower line once calibration is complete.
7. Release the FLOAT + button (A).
CALIBRATING FLOAT is displayed on the upper line.
FLOAT ( ) HOLD is displayed on the lower line.
OPERATORS STATION
Page 155
214737 135 Revision A
Figure 3.172: Negative Header Float Display
8. Press and hold FLOAT button (A) on CDM.
CALIBRATING FLOAT is displayed on the upper line.
FLOAT ( ) HOLD is displayed on the lower line.
NOTE:
The word HOLD will flash during calibration. HDR FLOAT COMPLETE will display on the lower line once calibration is complete.
9. Release FLOAT button (A).
TO CALIBRATE SELECT is displayed on the upper line.
HEADER FLOAT is displayed on the lower line.
10. Press right arrow to select next header sensor calibration or STOP & EXIT. Press SELECT. Refer to Calibrating the Header Height Sensor, page 129 or Calibrating the Header Tilt Sensor, page 131.
11. Press PROGRAM to exit programming mode.
3.18.12 Calibrating the Swath Compressor Sensor This topic only applies to machines equipped with a swath compressor. To calibrate the swath compressor sensor, follow these steps:
NOTE:
To calibrate the swath compressor sensor, the DWA must be disabled, and the swath compressor enabled in WINDROWER SETUP on the CDM.
Figure 3.173: CDM Programming Buttons
1. Turn ignition key to RUN, or start the engine.
2. Press PROGRAM (A) and SELECT (B) on cab display module (CDM) to enter programming mode.
WINDROWER SETUP? is displayed on the upper line.
3. Press SELECT (B) until CALIBRATE SENSORS? is displayed on the upper line.
NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
OPERATORS STATION
Page 156
214737 136 Revision A
Figure 3.174: Swath Compressor Sensor Calibration
4. Press right arrow (A) to select YES. Press SELECT (B).
TO CALIBRATE SELECT is displayed in upper line.
5. Press right arrow (A) to scroll through the choices until SWATH COMPR HT is displayed on the lower line. Press SELECT (B).
SWATH SENSOR CAL is displayed on the upper line.
SWATH UP TO START is displayed on the lower line.
Figure 3.175: Swath Compressor Controls A - Lower Swath Compressor B - Raise Swath Compressor
6. Press and hold button (B) to raise the swath compressor.
CALIBRATING SWATH is displayed on the upper line.
FORM UP and flashing HOLD is displayed on the lower line until the system has completed reading signal with swath compressor fully raised.
SWATH FORM UP DONE (with buzzer) is displayed on the lower line when complete.
Figure 3.176: Swath Compressor Sensor Calibration
SWATH SENSOR CAL is displayed on the upper line.
PRESS SWATH DOWN is displayed on the lower line.
OPERATORS STATION
Page 157
214737 137 Revision A
Figure 3.177: Swath Compressor Controls
7. Press and hold button (A) to lower the swath compressor.
CALIBRATING SWATH is displayed on the upper line.
FORM DOWN and flashing HOLD is displayed on the lower line.
SWATH FORM COMPLETE flashes for 2 seconds on the lower line (with buzzer) when the calibration is complete.
8. Press PROGRAM to exit programming mode.
3.18.13 Troubleshooting Windrower Problems
Displaying the Windrower and Engine Error Codes
Figure 3.178: CDM Programming Buttons
1. Turn ignition key to RUN, or start the engine.
2. Press PROGRAM (A) and SELECT (B) on cab display module (CDM) to enter programming mode. Press SELECT (B).
WINDROWER SETUP? is displayed on the upper line.
3. Press SELECT (B) until DIAGNOSTIC MODE? is displayed in upper line.
NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
Figure 3.179: Diagnostic Functions
4. Press right arrow (A) to select YES. Press SELECT (B).
5. VIEW ERROR CODES? is displayed on the upper line.
NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
6. Press right arrow (A) to select YES. Press SELECT (B).
VIEW WINDRWR CODES? is displayed on the upper line.
NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
OPERATORS STATION
Page 158
214737 138 Revision A
Figure 3.180: Windrower Codes
7. Press right arrow (A) to select YES. Press SELECT (C).
The most recent error code will be displayed.
Refer to 8.7.1 Cab Display Module (CDM) Error Codes, page 499.
8. Press and left (A) or right (B) arrow to cycle through the last ten recorded windrower error codes until EXIT WINDROWER CODES is displayed.
9. Press right arrow (B) to select YES. Press SELECT (C).
VIEW ENGINE CODES is displayed on the upper line.
NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
Figure 3.181: Engine Codes
10. Press right arrow (C) to select YES. Press SELECT (D).
11. Press left (B) or right (C) arrow to cycle through the last ten recorded engine error codes until EXIT ENGINE CODES is displayed.
Refer to 8.4 Engine Error Codes, page 467.
12. Press right arrow (C) to select YES. Press SELECT (D).
13. Press PROGRAM (A) to exit programming mode or press SELECT (D) to proceed to next diagnostic mode.
Switching the Installed Header Sensors ON or OFF
You can selectively enable or disable header sensors in the event of a malfunction or as part of a troubleshooting routine.
NOTE:
The header MUST be attached to the windrower to perform this procedure. The cab display module (CDM) automatically adjusts its programming for each header. For more information, refer to 4.5 Attaching and Detaching Headers, page 218.
Disabled sensors flash the word SENSOR on CDM during regular operation.
OPERATORS STATION
Page 159
214737 139 Revision A
Figure 3.182: CDM Programming Buttons
1. Turn ignition key to RUN, or start the engine.
2. Press PROGRAM (A) and SELECT (C) on the cab display module (CDM) to enter programming mode.
WINDROWER SETUP? is displayed on the upper line.
NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
3. Press SELECT (C) until DIAGNOSTIC MODE? is displayed on the upper line.
NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
4. Press right arrow (B) to select YES. Press SELECT (C).
VIEW ERROR CODES? is displayed on the upper line.
Figure 3.183: Diagnostic Functions
5. Press SELECT (B) until ENTER SENSOR SETUP? is displayed on the upper line.
NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
6. Press right arrow (A) to select YES. Press SELECT (B).
KNIFE SPEED SENSOR is displayed on the lower line.
ENABLE/DISABLE is displayed on the lower line.
Figure 3.184: Header Sensors
7. Press left arrow (B) to enable a sensor. Press right arrow (C) to disable sensor. Press SELECT (D) to confirm selection and move on to next sensor.
The following sensors are available:
HEADER HT SENSOR
HEADER TILT SENSOR
KNIFE SPEED SENSOR
REEL SPEED SENSOR
HEADER FLOAT SENSOR
OVERLOAD PRESSURE15
HYD OIL TEMP SENSOR
When sensors have been modified, press SELECT (D) to display the EXIT SENSOR SETUP? selection.
8. Press right arrow (C) to select YES. Press SELECT.
OPERATORS STATION
15. Requires installation of optional pressure sensor (MD #B5574).
Page 160
214737 140 Revision A
9. Press PROGRAM (A) to exit programming mode or press SELECT to proceed to next diagnostic mode.
OPERATORS STATION
Page 161
214737 141 Revision A
Displaying Header Sensor Input Signals
You can display individual sensor input signals in the event of a malfunction or as part of a troubleshooting routine.
NOTE:
The header MUST be attached to the windrower to perform this procedure. The cab display module (CDM) automatically adjusts its programming for each header. For more information, refer to 4.5 Attaching and Detaching Headers, page 218.
Figure 3.185: CDM Programming Buttons
1. Turn ignition key to RUN, or start the engine.
2. Press PROGRAM (A) and SELECT (B) on cab display module (CDM) to enter programming mode.
WINDROWER SETUP? is displayed on the upper line.
NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
Figure 3.186: Diagnostic Functions
3. Press SELECT (B) until DIAGNOSTIC MODE? is displayed on the upper line.
NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
4. Press right arrow (A) to select YES. Press SELECT (B).
VIEW ERROR CODES? is displayed on the upper line.
5. Press SELECT (B) until READ SENSOR SETUP? is displayed on the upper line.
NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
OPERATORS STATION
Page 162
214737 142 Revision A
Figure 3.187: Header Sensors
6. Press right arrow (C) to select YES. Press SELECT (D).
SENSOR INPUT is displayed on the upper line.
HDR HEIGHT 1.23 V is displayed on the lower line.
7. Press left (B) or right (C) arrow to cycle between individual sensor readers.
8. Press SELECT (D) to skip to EXIT READ SENSORS? selection.
9. Press right arrow (C) to select YES. Press SELECT.
10. Press PROGRAM (A) to exit programming mode or press SELECT (D) to proceed to next diagnostic mode.
Forcing a Header ID
The header must be attached to the windrower to troubleshoot certain issues. If damage has occurred to the header wiring or no header is available, you can force the windrower control module (WCM) to read a header ID. The WCM reverts to reading NO HEADER each time the engine ignition is cycled.
IMPORTANT:
Forcing a Header ID that is different from the attached header can damage the windrower and header. Doing so can lead to vibration, belt failures, and other overspeeding related problems.
Figure 3.188: CDM Programming Buttons
1. Turn ignition key to RUN, or start the engine.
2. Press PROGRAM (A) and SELECT (B) on cab display module (CDM) to enter programming mode.
WINDROWER SETUP? is displayed on the upper line.
OPERATORS STATION
Page 163
214737 143 Revision A
Figure 3.189: Diagnostic Functions
3. Press SELECT (B) until DIAGNOSTIC MODE? is displayed in upper line.
NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
4. Press right arrow (A) to select YES. Press SELECT (B).
Figure 3.190: Header Type
5. Press SELECT (B) until FORCE HEADER TYPE? is displayed on the upper line.
NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
6. Press right arrow (A) to select YES. Press SELECT (B).
SELECT HEADER TYPE is displayed on the upper line.
DISK HEADER is displayed on the lower line.
Figure 3.191: Header Type
7. Press left (A) or right (B) arrow to cycle through list of header types.
8. When desired header type is displayed, press SELECT (C).
EXIT FORCE HEADER? is displayed on the upper line.
NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
9. Press right arrow (B) to select YES. Press SELECT (C).
Proceed to next diagnostic mode, or press PROGRAM to exit programming mode.
OPERATORS STATION
Page 164
214737 144 Revision A
3.18.14 Troubleshooting Header Problems You can test individual parts of the header as part of a troubleshooting routine.
Testing the Header Up/Down Activate Function Using the Cab Display Module (CDM)
NOTE:
The header MUST be attached to the windrower to perform this procedure. The cab display module (CDM) automatically adjusts its programming for each header. For more information, refer to 4.5 Attaching and Detaching Headers, page 218.
The engine MUST be running to perform this procedure.
Figure 3.192: CDM Programming Buttons
1. Start the engine.
2. Press PROGRAM (A) and SELECT (B) on cab display module (CDM) to enter programming mode. Press SELECT (B).
WINDROWER SETUP? is displayed on the upper line.
Figure 3.193: Diagnostic Functions
3. Press SELECT (B) until DIAGNOSTIC MODE? is displayed in upper line.
NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
4. Press right arrow (A) to select YES. Press SELECT (B).
OPERATORS STATION
Page 165
214737 145 Revision A
Figure 3.194: Functions
5. Press SELECT (B) until ACTIVATE FUNCTIONS? is displayed on the upper line.
NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
6. Press right arrow (A) to select YES. Press SELECT (B).
CAUTION Check to be sure all bystanders have cleared the area.
Figure 3.195: Header Height
7. Press SELECT (D) until ACTIVATE HEADER HT is displayed on the upper line.
DOWN/UP is displayed on the lower line.
8. Press and hold left arrow (B) to lower header, or press and hold right arrow (C) to raise header. Verify header is functioning properly.
9. Press PROGRAM (A) to exit programming mode or press SELECT (D) to proceed to next ACTIVATE FUNCTION.
Testing the Reel Up/Down Activate Function Using the Cab Display Module (CDM)
NOTE:
This procedure is for draper headers only.
The header MUST be attached to the windrower to perform this procedure. The cab display module (CDM) automatically adjusts its programming for each header.
OPERATORS STATION
Page 166
214737 146 Revision A
Figure 3.196: CDM Programming Buttons
1. Turn ignition key to RUN, or start the engine.
2. Press PROGRAM (A) and SELECT (B) on cab display module (CDM) to enter programming mode. Press SELECT (B).
WINDROWER SETUP? is displayed on the upper line.
Figure 3.197: Diagnostic Functions
3. Press SELECT (B) until DIAGNOSTIC MODE? is displayed in upper line.
NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
4. Press right arrow (A) to select YES. Press SELECT (B).
Figure 3.198: Functions
5. Press SELECT (B) until ACTIVATE FUNCTIONS? is displayed on the upper line.
NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
6. Press right arrow (A) to select YES. Press SELECT (B).
OPERATORS STATION
Page 167
214737 147 Revision A
Figure 3.199: Reel Height
7. Press SELECT (D) until ACTIVATE REEL HT is displayed on the upper line.
DOWN/UP is displayed on the lower line.
CAUTION Check to be sure all bystanders have cleared the area.
8. Press and hold left arrow (B) to lower reel. Press and hold right arrow (C) to raise reel.
IMPORTANT:
Verify reel is functioning properly.
9. Press PROGRAM (A) to exit programming mode or press SELECT (D) to proceed to next ACTIVATE FUNCTION.
Testing the Header Tilt Activate Function Using the Cab Display Module (CDM)
NOTE:
The header MUST be attached to the windrower to perform this procedure. The cab display module (CDM) automatically adjusts its programming for each header. For more information, refer to 4.5 Attaching and Detaching Headers, page 218.
The engine MUST be running to perform this procedure.
Figure 3.200: CDM Programming Buttons
1. Start the engine.
2. Press PROGRAM (A) and SELECT (B) on cab display module (CDM) to enter programming mode.
WINDROWER SETUP? is displayed on the upper line.
OPERATORS STATION
Page 168
214737 148 Revision A
Figure 3.201: Diagnostic Functions
3. Press SELECT (B) until DIAGNOSTIC MODE? is displayed in upper line.
NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
4. Press right arrow (A) to select YES. Press SELECT (B).
Figure 3.202: Functions
5. Press SELECT (B) until ACTIVATE FUNCTIONS? is displayed on the upper line.
NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
6. Press right arrow (A) to select YES. Press SELECT (B).
Figure 3.203: Header Tilt Angle
7. Press SELECT (D) until ACTIVATE HDR TILT is displayed on the upper line.
IN/OUT is displayed on the lower line.
8. Press and hold left arrow (B) to decrease header tilt. Press and hold right arrow (C) to increase header tilt.
IMPORTANT:
Verify header is functioning properly.
9. Press PROGRAM (A) to exit programming mode or press SELECT (D) to proceed to next ACTIVATE FUNCTION.
OPERATORS STATION
Page 169
214737 149 Revision A
Testing the Knife Drive Circuit Using the Cab Display Module (CDM)
IMPORTANT:
Do NOToverspeed a drive. Overspeeding can lead to vibration, belt failures, or other overspeeding related problems.
NOTE:
The header MUST be attached to windrower to follow this procedure. For more information, refer to 4.5 Attaching and Detaching Headers, page 218.
The engine MUST be running to perform this procedure.
Figure 3.204: CDM Programming Buttons
1. Start the engine.
2. Press PROGRAM (A) and SELECT (B) on cab display module (CDM) to enter programming mode. Press SELECT (B).
WINDROWER SETUP? is displayed on the upper line.
Figure 3.205: Diagnostic Functions
3. Press SELECT (B) until DIAGNOSTIC MODE? is displayed in upper line.
NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
4. Press right arrow (A) to select YES. Press SELECT (B).
OPERATORS STATION
Page 170
214737 150 Revision A
Figure 3.206: Functions
5. Press SELECT (B) until ACTIVATE FUNCTIONS? is displayed on the upper line.
NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
6. Press right arrow (A) to select YES. Press SELECT (B).
ACTIVATE HEADER HT is displayed on the upper line.
Figure 3.207: Knife Drive
CAUTION Check to be sure all bystanders have cleared the area.
7. Press SELECT (E) until KNIFE DRIVE SPD XXXX is displayed on the upper line.
IMPORTANT:
Do NOToverspeed the knife drive.
8. Press and hold HAZARD (C) button.
Press left arrow (B) to decrease knife speed.
Press right arrow (D) to increase knife speed.
IMPORTANT:
Verify the knife drive is functioning properly.
9. Release the HAZARD (C) button. The knife will stop.
10. Press PROGRAM (A) to exit programming mode or press SELECT (E) to proceed to next ACTIVATE FUNCTION.
Testing the Draper Drive Circuit Activate Function Using the Cab Display Module (CDM)
IMPORTANT:
Do NOToverspeed a drive. Overspeeding can lead to vibration, belt failures, or other overspeeding related problems.
NOTE:
A draper header MUST be attached to windrower to follow this procedure. For more information, refer to 4.5 Attaching and Detaching Headers, page 218.
The engine MUST be running to perform this procedure.
OPERATORS STATION
Page 171
214737 151 Revision A
Figure 3.208: CDM Programming Buttons
1. Start the engine.
2. Press PROGRAM (A) and SELECT (B) on cab display module (CDM) to enter programming mode.
WINDROWER SETUP? is displayed on the upper line.
Figure 3.209: Diagnostic Functions
3. Press SELECT (B) until DIAGNOSTIC MODE? is displayed in upper line.
NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
4. Press right arrow (A) to select YES. Press SELECT (B).
Figure 3.210: Functions
5. Press SELECT (B) until ACTIVATE FUNCTIONS? is displayed on the upper line.
NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
6. Press right arrow (A) to select YES. Press SELECT (B).
ACTIVATE HEADER HT is displayed on the upper line.
OPERATORS STATION
Page 172
214737 152 Revision A
Figure 3.211: Draper Drive
CAUTION Check to be sure all bystanders have cleared the area.
7. Press SELECT (E) until DRAPER DRV SPD XXXX is displayed on the upper line.
IMPORTANT:
Do NOToverspeed the drapers.
8. Press and hold HAZARD (C) button.
Press left arrow (B) to decrease draper speed.
Press right arrow (D) to increase draper speed.
IMPORTANT:
Verify the draper drive is functioning properly.
9. Release the HAZARD (C) button. The drapers will stop.
10. Press PROGRAM (A) to exit programming mode or press SELECT (E) to proceed to next ACTIVATE FUNCTION.
Testing the Reel Drive Circuit Activate Function Using the Cab Display Module (CDM)
IMPORTANT:
Do NOToverspeed a drive. Overspeeding can lead to vibration, belt failures, or other overspeeding related problems.
NOTE:
The header MUST be attached to windrower to follow this procedure. For more information, refer to 4.5 Attaching and Detaching Headers, page 218.
This procedure does not apply to rotary disc headers.
The engine MUST be running to perform this procedure.
1. Start the engine.
Figure 3.212: CDM Programming Buttons
2. Press PROGRAM (A) and SELECT (B) on cab display module (CDM) to enter programming mode.
WINDROWER SETUP? is displayed on the upper line.
OPERATORS STATION
Page 173
214737 153 Revision A
Figure 3.213: Diagnostic Functions
3. Press SELECT (B) until DIAGNOSTIC MODE? is displayed in upper line.
NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
4. Press right arrow (A) to select YES. Press SELECT (B).
Figure 3.214: Functions
5. Press SELECT (B) until ACTIVATE FUNCTIONS? is displayed on the upper line.
NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
6. Press right arrow (A) to select YES. Press SELECT (B).
ACTIVATE HEADER HT is displayed on the upper line.
Figure 3.215: Reel Drive
CAUTION Check to be sure all bystanders have cleared the area.
7. Press SELECT (E) until REEL DRV SPD XXXX is displayed on the upper line.
IMPORTANT:
Do NOToverspeed the reel.
8. Press and hold HAZARD (C) button.
Press left arrow (B) to decrease reel speed.
Press right arrow (D) to increase reel speed.
IMPORTANT:
Verify the reel drive is functioning properly.
9. Release the HAZARD (C) button. The reel will stop.
10. Press PROGRAM (A) to exit programming mode or press SELECT (E) to proceed to next ACTIVATE FUNCTION.
OPERATORS STATION
Page 174
214737 154 Revision A
Testing the Rotary Disc Drive Circuit Activate Function Using the Cab Display Module (CDM)
IMPORTANT:
Do NOToverspeed a drive. Overspeeding can lead to vibration, belt failures, or other overspeeding related problems.
NOTE:
A rotary disc header MUST be attached to windrower to follow this procedure.
The engine MUST be running to perform this procedure.
Figure 3.216: CDM Programming Buttons
1. Start the engine.
2. Press PROGRAM (A) and SELECT (B) on cab display module (CDM) to enter programming mode.
WINDROWER SETUP? is displayed on the upper line.
Figure 3.217: Diagnostic Functions
3. Press SELECT (B) until DIAGNOSTIC MODE? is displayed in upper line.
NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
4. Press right arrow (A) to select YES. Press SELECT (B).
OPERATORS STATION
Page 175
214737 155 Revision A
Figure 3.218: Functions
5. Press SELECT (B) until ACTIVATE FUNCTIONS? is displayed on the upper line.
NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
6. Press right arrow (A) to select YES. Press SELECT (B).
ACTIVATE HEADER HT is displayed on the upper line.
Figure 3.219: Disc Drive
CAUTION Check to be sure all bystanders have cleared the area.
7. Press SELECT (E) until DISC DRV SPD XXXX is displayed on the upper line.
IMPORTANT:
Do NOToverspeed the disc drive.
8. Press and hold HAZARD (C) button.
Press left arrow (B) to decrease disc speed.
Press right arrow (D) to increase disc speed.
IMPORTANT:
Verify the disc drive is functioning properly.
9. Release the HAZARD (C) button. The disc drive will stop.
10. Press PROGRAM (A) to exit programming mode or press SELECT to proceed to next ACTIVATE FUNCTION.
Testing the Double Windrower Attachment (DWA) Drive Activate Function Using the Cab Display Module (CDM)
IMPORTANT:
Do NOToverspeed a drive. Overspeeding can lead to vibration, belt failures, or other overspeeding related problems.
NOTE:
The DWA must be attached to the windrower and activated under the WINDROWER SETUP menu. For more information, refer to Activating the Double Windrow Attachment (DWA), page 106.
Engine MUST be running to perform this procedure.
OPERATORS STATION
Page 176
214737 156 Revision A
Figure 3.220: CDM Programming Buttons
1. Start the engine.
2. Press PROGRAM (A) and SELECT (B) on cab display module (CDM) to enter programming mode. Press SELECT (B).
WINDROWER SETUP? is displayed on the upper line.
Figure 3.221: Diagnostic Functions
3. Press SELECT (B) until DIAGNOSTIC MODE? is displayed in upper line.
NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
4. Press right arrow (A) to select YES. Press SELECT (B).
Figure 3.222: Functions
5. Press SELECT (B) until ACTIVATE FUNCTIONS? is displayed on the upper line.
NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
6. Press right arrow (A) to select YES. Press SELECT (B).
ACTIVATE HEADER HT is displayed on the upper line.
OPERATORS STATION
Page 177
214737 157 Revision A
Figure 3.223: DWA Drive
7. Press SELECT (E) until ACTIVATE DWA DRV is displayed on the upper line.
CAUTION Check to be sure all bystanders have cleared the area.
IMPORTANT:
Do NOToverspeed the DWA drive.
8. Press and hold HAZARD (C) button.
Press left arrow (B) to decrease DWA drive speed.
Press right arrow (D) to increase DWA drive speed.
IMPORTANT:
Verify the DWA drive is functioning properly.
9. Release the HAZARD (C) button. The DWA drive will stop.
10. Press PROGRAM (A) to exit programming mode or press SELECT (E) to proceed to next ACTIVATE FUNCTION.
Testing the Reel Fore-Aft Activate Function Using the Cab Display Module (CDM)
NOTE:
The header MUST be attached to windrower to perform this procedure. For more information, refer to 4.5 Attaching and Detaching Headers, page 218.
The engine MUST be running to perform this procedure.
Figure 3.224: CDM Programming Buttons
1. Start the engine.
2. Press PROGRAM (A) and SELECT (B) on cab display module (CDM) to enter programming mode.
WINDROWER SETUP? is displayed on the upper line.
OPERATORS STATION
Page 178
214737 158 Revision A
Figure 3.225: Diagnostic Functions
3. Press SELECT (B) until DIAGNOSTIC MODE? is displayed in upper line.
NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
4. Press right arrow (A) to select YES. Press SELECT (B).
Figure 3.226: Functions
5. Press SELECT (B) until ACTIVATE FUNCTIONS? is displayed on the upper line.
NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
6. Press right arrow (A) to select YES. Press SELECT (B).
CAUTION Check to be sure all bystanders have cleared the area.
Figure 3.227: Reel Fore-Aft
7. Press SELECT (D) until ACTIVATE REEL F/A is displayed on the upper line.
FORE/AFT is displayed on the lower line.
8. Verify reel fore-aft is functioning properly.
a. Press and hold left arrow (B) to move reel forward. Press and hold right arrow (C) to move reel backward.
b. Press PROGRAM (A) to exit programming mode or press SELECT (D) to proceed to next ACTIVATE FUNCTION.
OPERATORS STATION
Page 179
214737 159 Revision A
Activating the Hydraulic Purge Using the Cab Display Module (CDM)
The hydraulic purge removes air from the hydraulic pump system after it has been repaired or changed.
NOTE:
Engine MUST be running to perform this procedure.
Figure 3.228: CDM Programming Buttons
1. Start the engine.
2. Press PROGRAM (A) and SELECT (B) on cab display module (CDM) to enter programming mode.
WINDROWER SETUP? is displayed on the upper line.
Figure 3.229: Diagnostic Functions
3. Press SELECT (B) until DIAGNOSTIC MODE? is displayed in upper line.
NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
4. Press right arrow (A) to select YES. Press SELECT (B).
Figure 3.230: Functions
5. Press SELECT (B) until ACTIVATE FUNCTIONS? is displayed on the upper line.
NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
6. Press right arrow (A) to select YES. Press SELECT (B).
ACTIVATE HEADER HT is displayed on the upper line.
DOWN/UP is displayed on the lower line.
OPERATORS STATION
Page 180
214737 160 Revision A
Figure 3.231: Hydraulic Purge
7. Press SELECT (B) until ACTIVATE HYD PURGE? is displayed on the upper line.
NO/YES is displayed on the lower line.
8. Press right arrow (A) to select YES. Press SELECT (B).
TO ACTIVATE PURGE is displayed on the upper line.
PRESS AND HOLD is displayed on the lower line.
NOTE:
Holding the right arrow (A) activates a timed purge cycle. The CDM will jump to the exit menu if the arrow is released before the end of the timed cycle.
CAUTION Check to be sure all bystanders have cleared the area.
Figure 3.232: Hydraulic Purge Cycle
9. Press and hold right arrow (A) to activate purge cycle.
PURGE CYCLE STARTED will display on the upper line.
10. When PURGE CYCLE ENDED is displayed release right arrow (A).
NO EXIT YES is displayed on the lower line.
11. Press right arrow to select YES. Press SELECT.
12. Press PROGRAM to exit programming mode or press SELECT to proceed to next ACTIVATE FUNCTION.
3.18.15 Engine Error Codes To assist the Operator or Technician in locating a specific problem with engine operation, the cab display module (CDM) displays error codes when there is a fault with one of the several sensors that monitor and control engine operation. For an explanation of an engine error code, refer to 8.4 Engine Error Codes, page 467.
3.18.16 Cab Display Module (CDM) and Windrower Control Module (WCM) Fault Codes To assist the Operator or Technician in locating a specific problem with the windrower, the CDM displays fault codes when there is a fault with one of the sensors that monitor and control windrower operation. For an explanation of fault code, refer to 8.7.1 Cab Display Module (CDM) Error Codes, page 499.
OPERATORS STATION
Page 181
214737 161 Revision A
4 Operation
4.1 Owner/Operator Responsibilities
CAUTION It is your responsibility to read and understand this manual completely before operating the windrower.
Contact your Dealer if an instruction is not clear to you.
Follow all safety messages in the manual and on safety signs on the machine.
Remember that YOU are the key to safety. Good safety practices protect you and the people around you.
Before allowing anyone to operate the windrower, for however short a time or distance, make sure they have been instructed in its safe and proper use.
Review the manual and all safety related items with all Operators every year.
Be alert for other Operators not using recommended procedures or not following safety precautions. Correct these mistakes immediately, before an accident occurs.
Do NOT modify the machine. Unauthorized modifications may impair the function and/or safety and affect machine life.
The safety information given in this manual does NOT replace safety codes, insurance needs, or laws governing your area. Be sure your machine meets the standards set by these regulations.
Page 182
214737 162 Revision A
4.2 Symbol Definitions The following symbols are used to depict functions or reactions of the various instruments and controls.
Learn the meaning of these symbols before operating the windrower.
4.2.1 Engine Functions These are the symbols that are used on the console.
Figure 4.1: Engine Function Symbols
A - Electrical Power Accessories B - Engine Coolant Temperature C - Engine Glow Plugs
D - Engine Malfunction E - Engine rpm F - Engine Run
G - Engine Start H - Engine Stop J - Engine Throttle
K - Engine Urgent Stop L - Fast M -Slow
N - Water in Fuel
OPERATION
Page 183
214737 163 Revision A
4.2.2 Windrower Operating Symbols These are the symbols used on the console for windrower operation.
Figure 4.2: Windrower Operating Symbols
A - Turn Signals B - Hazard Warning Lights C - Forward
D - Neutral E - Reverse F - Headlights Low Beam
G - Headlights High Beam H - Work Light J - Lighter
K - Fresh Air L - Blower M -Windshield Wiper
N - Seat Height Up P - Seat Height Down Q - Seat Fore and Aft
R - Seat Fore Aft Isolator S - Seat Back Fore and Aft T - Seat Ride Damping
U - Cab Temperature Control V - Air Conditioning W -Recirculate
OPERATION
Page 184
214737 164 Revision A
4.2.3 Header Functions Figure 4.3: Header Function Symbols
A - Program B - Header Index C - Return to Cut
D - Conveyor/Auger Speed E - Float Left F - Float Right
G - Reel Speed H - Disc Speed J - Reel Down
K - Reel Forward L - Reel Up M - Reel Rearward
N - Display Select P - DWA Down Q - DWA Draper Speed
R - DWA Up S - Header Tilt Up T - Header Down
U - Header Up V - Header Tilt Down W - Increase
X - Decrease Y - Deck Shift Z - Float
AA - Header Engage AB - Header Disengage AC - Push Down Header Disengage
AD - Pull Up Header Engage AE - Header Reverse
OPERATION
Page 185
214737 165 Revision A
4.3 Operating the Windrower
4.3.1 Operational Safety
CAUTION Follow these safety precautions:
Figure 4.4: Safety Equipment
Wear close fitting clothing and protective shoes with slip resistant soles.
Remove foreign objects from the machine and surrounding area.
Carry with you any protective clothing and personal safety devices that COULD be necessary through the day. Dont take chances.
You may need:
a hard hat
protective glasses or goggles
heavy gloves
respirator or filter mask
wet weather gear
Figure 4.5: Safety Equipment
Protect against noise. Wear a suitable hearing protective device such as ear muffs or ear plugs to protect against objectionable or uncomfortable loud noises.
Follow all safety and operational instructions given in your operators manuals. If you do not have a header manual, get one from your Dealer and read it thoroughly.
Never attempt to start the engine or operate the machine except from the operators seat
Check the operation of all controls in a safe clear area before starting work.
Check for excessive vibration and unusual noises. If there is any indication of trouble, shut down and inspect the machine. Follow proper shutdown procedure. Refer to Shutting down the Engine, page 171.
Operate only in daylight or good artificial light.
4.3.2 Break-In Period The windrower is ready for normal operation. However, there are several items to check and watch out for during the first 150 hours.
IMPORTANT:
Until you become familiar with the sound and feel of your new windrower, be extra alert and attentive.
OPERATION
Page 186
214737 166 Revision A
DANGER Before investigating an unusual sound or attempting to correct a problem, place ground speed lever (GSL) in N-DETENT, shut off engine, and remove key.
In addition to the following, check the items specified in 5.12.1 Maintenance Schedule/Record, page 422:
Operate engine at moderate load and avoid extremely heavy or light loading for longer than 5 minutes.
Avoid unnecessary idling. If engine will be idling longer than 5 minutes after reaching operating temperature, turn key OFF to stop engine.
Check engine oil level frequently. Watch for any signs of leakage. If oil must be added, refer to 5.7.3 Checking Engine Oil Level, page 315.
NOTE:
During the break-in period, a higher than usual oil consumption should be considered normal.
NOTE:
If windrower must be driven in cold weather (below freezing), let engine idle for 3 minutes, and then operate at moderate speed until oil has warmed up.
Watch coolant gauge in cab for temperature rising beyond normal operating range. Check that coolant level at reserve tank (mounted next to radiator) stays between HOTand COLD marks on tank. Refer to 5.7.9 Engine Cooling System, page 342. If over-heating problems occur, check for coolant leaks.
4.3.3 Preseason Checks / Annual Service
CAUTION Review the this operators manual to refresh your memory on safety and operating recommendations.
Review all safety signs and other decals on the windrower and note hazard areas.
Be sure all shields and guards are properly installed and secured. Never alter or remove safety equipment.
Be sure you understand and have practiced safe use of all controls. Know the capacity and operating characteristics of the machine.
Store a properly stocked first aid kit and charged fire extinguisher on the windrower.
1. Perform the following checks:
a. Drain off excess hydraulic oil added for storage. Refer to 5.10.3 Changing the Hydraulic Oil, page 398.
b. Remove plastic bags and/or tape from all sealed openings (air cleaner intake, exhaust pipe, fuel tank).
c. Charge battery and install. Be sure terminals are clean and cables are connected securely.
d. If the diesel exhaust fluid (DEF) tank was drained for storage, ensure the DEF tank drain plug is tight and add DEF fluid to the tank.
e. Adjust tension on air conditioning (A/C) compressor belt. Refer to Tensioning Air Conditioner (A/C) Compressor Belt, page 353.
f. Distribute A/C refrigerant by cycling A/C switch. Refer to Air Conditioning (A/C) Compressor Coolant Cycling, page 167.
g. Check the entire A/C system for leakage at the beginning of each season.
2. Perform annual maintenance. Refer to 5.12 Maintenance Schedule, page 422.
OPERATION
Page 187
214737 167 Revision A
Air Conditioning (A/C) Compressor Coolant Cycling
IMPORTANT:
Perform the following steps whenever the machine is first started after storage for more than one week:
Figure 4.6: Climate Control A - Blower Switch B - Air Conditioning Switch C - Outside Air Switch D - Temperature Control
1. Turn blower switch (A) to the first position, turn TEMPERATURE control switch (D) to maximum heating, and A/C control switch (B) to OFF.
2. Start the engine, and operate at low idle until the engine is warm.
3. Click A/C switch (B) from OFF to ON for 1 second, then back to OFF for 510 seconds. Repeat this step ten times.
4.3.4 Daily Checks and Maintenance Perform the following checks and recommended maintenance before operating the windrower every day:
1. Check the machine for leaks.
NOTE:
Use proper procedure when searching for pressurized fluid leaks. Refer to 5.10.7 Hoses and Lines, page 406.
2. Check for missing or broken parts.
3. Clean the windows and mirrors to ensure good visibility in all directions. Stand on the platform to access the rear window. Hold onto the handholds on the cab front corners and stand on the header anti-slip strips to wash the front window.
4. Clean all lights and reflective surfaces to maintain visibility to others.
5. Perform daily maintenance. Refer to 5.12 Maintenance Schedule, page 422.
OPERATION
Page 188
214737 168 Revision A
4.3.5 Engine Operation
Starting the Engine
Carefully review the following topic before attempting to start the engine. It contains important information about Operator safety and the engine ignition system.
DANGER Avoid possible injury or death from a runaway machine.
This machine has safety devices which allow the engine to start only when the ground speed lever is in N-DETENT, the steering wheel is locked in the NEUTRAL position, and the header drive switch is in the OFF position. Under no circ*mstances are these devices to be deliberately rewired or misadjusted so that the engine can be started with controls out of NEUTRAL.
Do NOTstart engine by shorting across starter or starter relay terminals. Machine will start with drive engaged and move if normal starting circuitry is bypassed.
Start engine only from operators seat with controls in NEUTRAL. NEVER start engine while standing on ground. Never try to start engine with someone under or near machine.
Before starting engine, be sure there is plenty of ventilation to avoid asphyxiation.
WARNING If starter engages with steering wheel unlocked, ground speed lever out of NEUTRAL, or header clutch engaged, DO NOT START ENGINE. Contact your Dealer.
IMPORTANT:
Do NOT tow machine to start the engine. Damage to hydrostatic drives will result.
Figure 4.7: Battery Disconnect Switch
1. The battery main disconnect switch (A) is located on the right frame rail, behind the maintenance platform, and can be accessed by moving the platform. Ensure switch is in the POWER ON position.
WARNING Before starting engine, fasten your seat belt and ensure trainers seat belt is used if seat is occupied. Seat belts improve safety if used and maintained properly.
OPERATION
Page 189
214737 169 Revision A
Figure 4.8: Operator Controls
2. Ensure lock (A) at the base of the steering column is engaged at cab-forward or engine-forward position.
3. Move ground speed lever (GSL) (B) into N-DETENT.
4. Turn steering wheel until it locks. It may be possible to move the steering wheel slightly in the locked position.
IMPORTANT:
Do NOTattempt to force the wheel out of locked position as damage to the traction system may occur.
5. Fasten seat belt.
6. Push HEADER DRIVE switch (C) to ensure it is OFF.
CAUTION Check to be sure all bystanders have cleared the area.
Figure 4.9: Operator Console
7. Set throttle (A) to START positionfully back.
8. Sound horn three times.
9. Turn ignition key (B) to RUN position. A single loud tone sounds, engine warning lights illuminate as a self-test, and cab display module (CDM) displays HEADER DISENGAGED and IN PARK.
10. Turn ignition key (B) to START position until engine starts, and then release key. CDM displays programmed header data for 5 seconds if attached, and then returns to previous display.
IMPORTANT:
The cab display module (CDM) provide important information about machine operation and condition. Familiarize yourself with the CDMs information screen. Refer to 3.18 Cab Display Module (CDM), page 79.
IMPORTANT:
Do NOToperate starter for longer than 15 seconds at a time.
If engine does not start, wait at least 2 minutes before trying again.
After the third 15 second crank attempt, allow solenoid to cool for 10 minutes before further cranking attempts. If engine still does not start, refer to 7.1 Engine Troubleshooting, page 433.
Do NOToperate engine above 1500 rpm until engine temperature gauge is above 40C (100F).
Cold Start
Engine temperature below 5C (40F)
WARNING If starter engages with steering wheel unlocked, ground speed lever (GSL) out of NEUTRAL, or header clutch engaged, DO NOT START ENGINE. See your Dealer.
OPERATION
Page 190
214737 170 Revision A
Figure 4.10: Operator Controls
1. Set throttle (A) to START positionfully back (low idle).
2. Turn ignition key (B) to RUN.
Grid heater light (C) on CDM will cycle ONOFFON after two seconds for a preset length of time. The operating period for the glow plug light will change depending on engine temperature.
3. Sound horn three times.
4. When grid heater light (C) goes out, turn ignition key to START, and crank engine until it starts. Leave throttle (A) at IDLE.
5. If engine fails to start, repeat procedure beginning with Step 2, page 170.
NOTE:
Engine will cycle through a period where it appears to labour.
IMPORTANT:
Do NOToperate engine above 1500 rpm until engine temperature gauge is above 40C (100F).
Engine Warm-Up
Figure 4.11: Operator Console
Allow engine to run with throttle lever (A) at or near low-idle position until temperature reaches approximately 40C (100F).
NOTE:
Scroll through cab display module (CDM) for engine temperature. Refer to Engine Temperature, page 171.
Engine Intermediate Speed Control (ISC)
The engine operating speed can be programmed to enable the windrower to operate at reduced engine rpm (that is, 1900, 2050, or 2200 rpm) without significantly affecting the ground or header speeds. The default setting is 2200 rpm or the last selected rpm.
Engine ISC is useful when operating loads are reduced such as in light crop conditions that do not require the maximum engine rpm. Reduced engine speed lowers fuel consumption, noise levels, and exhaust emissions in addition to reducing engine wear.
The programmed engine speed is activated when the header is engaged.
Programming instructions are provided in 3.18.6 Cab Display Module (CDM) Configuration, page 93.
OPERATION
Page 191
214737 171 Revision A
Shutting down the Engine
CAUTION Park on a flat, level surface with the header on the ground, the ground speed lever in N-DETENT position, and the steering wheel in locked position (centered). Wait for the CDM to beep and display an In Park message to confirm the park brakes have engaged.
IMPORTANT:
Before stopping engine, run at low idle for approximately 5 minutes to cool hot engine parts (and allow turbocharger to slow down while engine oil pressure is available).
Figure 4.12: Operator Console
1. Lower header.
2. Place ground speed lever (GSL) (B) into N-DETENT.
3. Lock steering wheel.
4. Turn ignition key (A) counterclockwise to OFF position.
Engine Temperature
Figure 4.13: Operator Console
The engine temperature is displayed on the cab display module (CDM) (A) when selected with the SELECT button (B) on the ground speed lever (GSL) handle or the SELECTswitch (C) on the CDM.
The normal engine operating temperature range is 82104C (180220F).
If the temperature exceeds 104C (220F), an ongoing intermittent tone will be heard and the CDM (A) will flash ENGINE TEMP. Stop the engine immediately and determine cause. The tone will stop and the CDM (A) will return to normal when the temperature drops below 102C (215F).
Engine Oil Pressure
The nominal engine oil pressure is 69 kPa (10 psi) at low idle and 380 kPa (55.1 psi) at maximum rated speed.
If the oil pressure drops below the preset level of 52 kPa (7.5 psi), the cab display module (CDM) flashes an error code and error message.
If the STOP ENGINE light illuminates, stop the engine IMMEDIATELY and investigate.
OPERATION
Page 192
214737 172 Revision A
If the yellow CAUTION light illuminates, you may continue operations and investigate later, but you are STRONGLY advised to monitor the situation carefully.
Cab Display Module (CDM) Voltage Display
The electrical system voltage is displayed on the cab display module (CDM) when selected with the SELECT button on the ground speed lever (GSL) handle or the SELECTswitch on the CDM. The display indicates the condition of the battery and alternator.
Ignition Engine Reading Indicated Condition
13.815.0 Normal
ON Running > 16.016 Regulator out of adjustment
< 12.516 Alternator not working or regulator out of adjustment
Shut down 12.0 Battery normal
Engine Warning Lights
There are four engine warning lights that illuminate if abnormal conditions occur while the engine is running. The engine warning lights should NOT be illuminated under normal operating conditions. For more information, refer to Engine Warning Lights, page 89.
4.3.6 Exhaust System Cleaning The exhaust aftertreatment system uses diesel exhaust fluid (DEF) and selective catalyst reduction (SCR) technology to reduce the emission of nitrogen oxides (NOx). The process involves injecting DEF (a nitrogenous compound which decomposes into ammonia) into the exhaust over a catalyst. The ammonia reacts with NOx, producing harmless nitrogen and water.
Automatic exhaust system cleaning events maintain the performance of the aftertreatment system by increasing exhaust temperatures in order to remove the buildup of crystallized DEF. Automatic cleaning occurs any time during machine operation as long as the INHIBIT SCR CONDITIONING switch is OFF. Turn on the INHIBIT SCR CONDITIONING switch if the environment is not suitable for high exhaust temperatures (e.g., inside a building). The INHIBIT SCR CONDITIONING switch is intended as a temporary measure. If the INHIBIT switch is left on for an extended period, the engine will derate until manual SCR conditioning is performed.
Activate the MANUAL SCR CONDITIONING exhaust system cleaning if the automatic exhaust system cleaning was deactivated during normal operation. Engine speed may vary between 1000 and 1400 rpm during manual exhaust system cleaning.
OPERATION
16. Display flashes voltage reading with single loud tone. Repeats every 30 minutes until condition is fixed.
Page 193
214737 173 Revision A
4.3.7 Driving the Windrower Review the following list of dangers, warnings, and cautions before operating the windrower for the first time, or when training new operators.
DANGER NEVER move the ground speed lever or steering wheel until you are sure all bystanders have cleared
the area.
Make sure area is clear before making turns, as the ends of a header travel in a large arc.
Check the operation of all controls in a safe, clear area before starting work.
Understand the capacity and operating characteristics of your machine.
Do NOTallow riders in or on the machine.
Do NOToperate unless seated in the operator's position.
Do NOTattempt to get on or off a moving windrower.
AVOID sudden starts and stops.
AVOID inclines, ditches, and fences.
Do NOT rapidly accelerate or decelerate when turning.
REDUCE your speed before turning, crossing slopes, or travelling over rough ground.
Do NOTallow anyone to stand behind the machine while operating. Foreign objects may be forcibly ejected.
WARNING Seat belts can help ensure your safety when properly used and maintained.
Before starting the engine, fasten your seat belt, and ensure that the training seat occupants seat belt is securely fastened.
Never wear a seat belt loosely or with slack in the belt system. Never wear the belt in a twisted condition or pinched between the seat structural members.
WARNING Avoid driving the machine with header removed. Removing header decreases the weight on drive wheels, reducing steering control. If you must drive the machine with header removed, or without a MacDon weight system.
Use transmission low speed range, do NOTexceed 1500 rpm engine speed, and avoid loose gravel and slopes.
Never use windrower as a towing vehicle when header is removed, except as instructed in . There is insufficient weight on the drive wheels to provide steering control.
If control of machine is lost, immediately pull ground speed lever (GSL) to NEUTRAL.
Be aware that cab structure will NOTwithstand a roll-over. Because of windrower shape characteristics, a roll-over protected (ROPS) cab is not required.
OPERATION
Page 194
214737 174 Revision A
WARNING When travelling on steep slopes:
Lower header and reduce speed.
Move GROUND SPEED RANGE switch to L (low range).
If the ground speed is greater than or equal to 40 km/h (25 mph), the CDM will display a warning message (SLOW DOWN) with an audible alert. Move GSL closer to NEUTRAL to reduce speed.
CAUTION Hydrostatic Steering control is different from conventional steering mechanisms:
Hydrostatic steering is more sensitive than mechanical steering. Do NOT make abrupt changes in steering direction.
Steering is opposite to normal when driving in reverse.
With the engine running, moving the ground speed lever out of N-DETENTunlocks steering. Any movement of steering wheel will then cause the machine to move, even if the ground speed lever has not been moved forward or rearward from the NEUTRAL position.
The brakes are only on when the ground speed lever (GSL) is in N-DETENT and the steering wheel is centered and locked.
Entering and Exiting the Windrower
CAUTION To prevent slipping and possible injury, ALWAYS face the windrower and use the hand rail when dismounting (or mounting). NEVER attempt to get on or off a moving windrower. Before leaving the operator's seat for any reason:
Park on a flat, level surface with the ground speed lever in N-DETENT position and the steering wheel in locked position (centered). Wait for the CDM to beep and display an In Park message to confirm the park brakes have engaged.
Fully lower header and reel.
Disengage header drives.
To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of machine, always stop engine and remove key from ignition.
Turn off lights unless required for inspection purposes.
Release seat belt.
Turn off wipers.
Raise armrest and steering wheel for easier exit and re-entry.
Lock the cab door when leaving the windrower unattended. (When the door is locked, it can still be opened from inside the cab.)
OPERATION
Page 195
214737 175 Revision A
Figure 4.14: Platforms and Doors
Swing-away platforms and stairs (A) are provided on both sides of the windrower to accommodate cab-forward and engine-forward access to the operators station, as well as several maintenance tasks.
The left cab-forward side platform is shown in the rearward (cab-forward) position.
Two doors (B) are provided for cab entry and exit in either cab-forward mode or engine-forward mode. Enter the cab using the door opposite the operators console.
NOTE:
When the engine is shut down, rear field lights turn on for 60 seconds to illuminate the platform and stairs.
Driving Forward in Cab-Forward Mode
CAUTION Operate both steering wheel and ground speed lever (GSL) slowly for familiarization. Avoid the common tendency of new Operators to oversteer.
Figure 4.15: Cab-Forward Mode
WARNING Do NOT drive windrower on road in cab-forward configuration, unless it is equipped with the proper lighting and markings for cab-forward road travel.
In cab-forward mode, the operators station is facing away from the engine. If necessary, swivel operators seat to cab-forward position as follows:
OPERATION
Page 196
214737 176 Revision A
Figure 4.16: Operator Console
1. Place ground speed lever (GSL) (A) in N-DETENT. Engine can be running.
IMPORTANT:
If GSL is NOT in N-DETENT, damage to the GSL cable may result when swivelling operators station.
2. Pull up on knob (B) and hold to release latch (C) at base of steering column.
3. Turn steering wheel counterclockwise to pivot operators station clockwise 180 until pin engages latch to secure operators station in new position.
4. Ensure seat belt is fastened.
5. Start the engine if not running. Refer to Starting the Engine, page 168.
Figure 4.17: Operator Console
6. There are two cab-forward speed ranges. Set GROUND SPEED RANGE switch (A) to either H (025.7 km/h [16 mph]), or L (017.7 km/h [11 mph]).
7. Slowly push throttle (B) to full forward (operating speed). The cab display module (CDM) should display 23202350 rpm at location (C).
CAUTION Check again to be sure all bystanders have cleared the area.
8. Move the GSL (E) out of N-DETENTand slowly forward to desired speed which will be displayed at location (D).
Driving Reverse in Cab-Forward Mode
WARNING Back up slowly. Steering is opposite to normal when reversing. Hold steering wheel at the bottom and turn wheel in direction you want the rear (cab-forward) of the machine to travel.
OPERATION
Page 197
214737 177 Revision A
Figure 4.18: Operators Console
1. Move GROUND SPEED RANGE switch (A) to L (low- range position).
2. Move throttle lever (B) to a mid-range position.
NOTE:
Steering will be less sensitive in low-speed range; reduced engine speed.
CAUTION Check again to be sure all bystanders have cleared the area.
3. Move the ground speed lever (GSL) rearward to desired speed.
Figure 4.19: Cab-Forward Mode
4. Steer as shown.
Driving Forward in Engine-Forward Mode
Figure 4.20: Engine-Forward Seat Faces Engine
In the engine-forward mode, the operators station is facing toward the engine. If necessary, swivel operators station to engine-forward position as follows:
OPERATION
Page 198
214737 178 Revision A
Figure 4.21: Engine-Forward Seat Faces Engine
1. Place ground speed lever (GSL) (A) in N-DETENTand lock steering wheel. Engine can be running.
IMPORTANT:
If GSL is NOT in N-DETENT, damage to the GSL cable may result when swivelling operators station.
2. Pull up on knob (B) and hold to release latch (C) at base of steering column.
3. Turn steering wheel clockwise to pivot operators station counterclockwise 180 until pin engages latch to secure operators station in new position.
4. Start the engine if not running.
Figure 4.22: Operator Console
5. Set GROUND SPEED RANGE switch (A) to H for road speed (037 km/h [23 mph]). Cab display module (CDM) will display ROAD GEAR at location (F) and an alarm will briefly sound.
6. Slowly push throttle (B) to full forward (operating speed). CDM should display 23202350 rpm at location (C).
CAUTION Check to be sure all bystanders have cleared the area.
7. Slowly move the GSL (E) forward to desired speed which will be displayed at location (D).
CAUTION Operate both steering wheel and ground speed lever slowly while becoming familiar with the machine. Remember that steering is more sensitive when speed-range control is in high road speed position. Avoid the common tendency of new Operators to oversteer.
Figure 4.23: Operator Console
8. If more tractive (lugging) power is required (for example, when driving up a ramp, up a hill, or up out of a ditch):
a. Move the GSL (E) closer to NEUTRAL.
b. Switch speed-range control (A) to L (low range).
9. Once the lugging condition no longer exists:
a. Set GSL (E) to NOT MORE THAN HALFmaximum forward speed.
b. Move speed-range switch (A) to H (high range). Steering is more sensitive in this speed range.
OPERATION
Page 199
214737 179 Revision A
Driving in Reverse in Engine-Forward Mode
WARNING Back up slowly. Steering is opposite to normal when reversing. Hold steering wheel at the bottom and turn wheel in direction you want the rear (cab-forward) of the machine to travel.
Figure 4.24: Operator Console
1. Move speed-range switch (A) to L (low-range position).
2. Move throttle lever (B) to a mid-range position.
NOTE:
Reversing in low-speed range and at reduced engine speed is recommended since steering will be less sensitive than at higher speed settings.
CAUTION Check to be sure all bystanders have cleared the area.
3. Move the ground speed lever (GSL) (C) rearward to desired speed.
Figure 4.25: Steering the Windrower
4. Steer as shown.
Spin Turning
Hydrostatic steering provides significantly more maneuverability than mechanical steering.
CAUTION Be sure area is clear before making turns. Although windrower pivots on the spot, the ends of the header travel faster and in a large arc.
OPERATION
Page 200
214737 180 Revision A
Figure 4.26: Operator Console
1. Move the ground speed lever (GSL) (A) out of N-DETENT towards the seat and hold.
2. Slowly turn the steering wheel in the desired direction of turn. The windrower will pivot between the drive wheels.
3. To increase the turn radius, slowly move the GSL away from NEUTRAL. Remember that this will increase ground speed as well.
4. To stop the turn, slowly turn the steering wheel back to its centered position.
Stopping
WARNING Do NOT move ground speed lever rapidly back to NEUTRAL. You may be thrown forward by a sudden stop and wheels may skid, reducing steering control. Always wear a seat belt when operating windrower.
CAUTION Park on a flat, level surface with the ground speed lever in N-DETENT position and the steering wheel in locked position (centered). Wait for the CDM to beep and display an In Park message to confirm the park brakes have engaged.
To stop the windrower:
Figure 4.27: Operator Console
1. SLOWLY return the ground speed lever (GSL) (A) to NEUTRAL and into N-DETENT.
2. Turn steering wheel until it locks.
3. Move throttle lever (B) to low idle position.
NOTE:
Avoid unnecessary idling. Stop engine if it will be idling for longer than 5 minutes.
NOTE:
Brakes are automatically engaged when steering wheel is locked in NEUTRAL position.
IMPORTANT:
Before stopping engine, run at low idle for approximately 5 minutes to cool hot engine parts (and allow turbocharger to slow down while engine oil pressure is available).
4. Turn ignition key counterclockwise to OFF position.
OPERATION
Page 201
214737 181 Revision A
4.3.8 Adjusting Caster Tread Width The rear casters can be adjusted to a narrow tread width to allow loading and shipping without having to remove them.
A narrow tread width also suits smaller headers by allowing more space to the uncut crop and provides more maneuverability around poles, irrigation inlets, or other obstacles.
A wider tread width is useful in heavy crops that produce large windrows so that runover is reduced.
WARNING To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operators seat for any reason.
CAUTION Park on a flat, level surface with the header on the ground, the ground speed lever in N-DETENT position, and the steering wheel in locked position (centered). Wait for the CDM to beep and display an In Park message to confirm the park brakes have engaged.
Adjust the caster tread width as follows:
Figure 4.28: Caster Wheel Extensions
1. Raise rear of windrower slightly so that most of the weight is off the casters, using a jack or other lifting device under the frame at location (A).
NOTE:
Lifting device should have a lifting capacity of at least 2270 kg (5000 lb.).
2. Remove six bolts (B) (four on backside, two on underside) and washers from left and right side of walking beam.
Figure 4.29: Caster Wheel Extensions
3. Slide extensions inboard or outboard equal amounts and align holes at desired location.
NOTE:
Use the caster wheels to assist in moving the extensions by rotating the caster until the wheel is parallel to the walking beam.
OPERATION
Page 202
214737 182 Revision A
Figure 4.30: Adjustable Caster Wheels
IMPORTANT:
Caster wheels must be equidistant (A) from center of windrower.
Figure 4.31: Caster Wheel Extensions
4. Line up holes, then install shorter bottom bolts (B).
5. Position bracket (A) and install back bolts (C).
6. Tighten bolts as follows:
a. Snug bottom bolts (B), then snug back bolts (C).
b. Tighten and torque back bolts (C) to 447 Nm (330 lbfft).
c. Tighten and torque bottom bolts (B) to 447 Nm (330 lbfft).
7. Lower windrower to ground.
IMPORTANT:
Torque bolts after first 5 and 10 hours of operation.
4.3.9 Transporting
Driving on the Road
The M155E4 Self-Propelled Windrower is designed to be driven on the road with the engine facing forward to provide better visibility for the Operator and improved stability for the machine. The windrower can also be driven on the road in cab-forward mode, but at a reduced speed and under restricted conditions.
WARNING Collision between windrower and other vehicles may result in injury or death.
WARNING When driving windrower on public roadways:
Obey all highway traffic regulations in your area. Use pilot vehicles in front and rear of windrower if required by law.
Use slow-moving vehicle emblem and flashing warning lights unless prohibited by law.
If width of attached header impedes other vehicle traffic, remove header and install a MacDon approved weight box.
OPERATION
Page 203
214737 183 Revision A
WARNING Do NOT drive windrower on the road in the cab-forward mode, unless the optional lighting and marking
kit is installed, as lighting/reflector visibility will not be compliant with road regulations. Refer to 6.4.1 Lighting and Marking for Cab-Forward Road Travel, page 432.
Do NOT drive windrower on a road or highway at night or in conditions that reduce visibility, such as fog or rain. The width of the windrower may not be apparent under these conditions.
CAUTION Operate both steering wheel and ground speed lever slowly while becoming familiar with the machine. Remember that steering is more sensitive when speed-range control is in high road speed position. Avoid the common tendency of new Operators to oversteer.
CAUTION Check local laws for width regulations and lighting and marking requirements before transporting on roads.
Before driving windrower on a roadway:
Figure 4.32: Header Drive Switch
1. Ensure HEADER DRIVE switch (A) is pushed to OFF position (down).
2. Clean flashing amber lamps, red tail and head lamps, and check that they work properly.
3. Clean all reflective surfaces and slow moving vehicle emblems.
4. Adjust interior rear view mirror and clean windows.
Figure 4.33: Light Switches
5. Push LIGHTswitch to ROAD position (A) to activate lamps. Always use these lamps on roads to provide warning to other vehicles. Refer to 3.6 Exterior Lighting, page 49.
NOTE:
If the auto-road light feature is activated (i.e., windrower is in engine- or cab-forward mode, out of park, high range switch position, and header off), only the two front corner field lights will turn on; the remaining field lights are disabled.
6. Use HIGH/LOW LIGHTS (B) as required when other vehicles are approaching.
7. Push BEACON switch (C) ON to activate beacons.
OPERATION
Page 204
214737 184 Revision A
Figure 4.34: CDM
8. Press switch (A) on cab display module (CDM) to activate hazard lights.
IMPORTANT:
Switch ON the beacon and hazard lights when travelling on the road with the transmission in low range.
Figure 4.35: Operator Console
9. Set GROUND SPEED RANGE switch (A) for ROAD speed. CDM will display ROAD GEAR at location (F) if windrower is in engine-forward mode.
NOTE:
Windrower can be moving, but speed must be less than 8 km/h (5 mph) for road gear to engage.
10. Slowly push throttle (B) to full forward (operating speed). CDM should display 23202350 rpm (C).
11. Slowly move the ground speed lever (GSL) (E) forward to desired speed which will be displayed at location (F).
12. If towing a header, refer to Towing Header with Windrower, page 184.
Towing Header with Windrower
The windrower can be used to tow a MacDon draper header that has the slow speed transport option installed. Ensure the optional weight box or an approved header transporter is installed on the windrower to transfer weight to the lift arms.
Figure 4.36: Towing a Header
WARNING A windrower without a header or weight box must
NOT be used to tow headers due to reduced traction and possible loss of control.
For towed equipment without brakes, do NOTexceed 32 km/h (20 mph).
OPERATION
Page 205
214737 185 Revision A
CAUTION To tow a header with an M155E4 Self-Propelled Windrower, the header must be equipped with the
appropriate equipment to comply with local regulations.
Before towing, conduct a pretrip inspection to verify signal lighting and safety equipment is installed and functioning properly.
Do NOTexceed the Combined Gross Vehicle Weight (CGVW) specified in table 4.1, page 185.
To prevent damage and/or loss of control, ensure the machine and attached equipment are within the following weight limits:
Figure 4.37: M Series Windrower
Table 4.1 Maximum Weight
kg lb.
Maximum GVW (includes mounted implements) 9750 21,500
Maximum CGVW (includes towed and mounted implements) 10,480 23,100
Weight (A) on both drive wheels Maximum 8500 18,750
Minimum 4570 10,070
Maximum weight (B) on both caster tires 2750 6050
Converting from Field to Transport Mode
WARNING To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operators seat for any reason.
DANGER To avoid bodily injury from fall of raised header, always engage safety props when working on or around raised header, and before going under header for any reason.
1. Set header on the ground (field position).
2. Disconnect the following hydraulic and electrical connections:
OPERATION
Page 206
214737 186 Revision A
a. Left Side Store hydraulic hoses and electrical cable into the storage position. Refer to header operators manual.
b. Right Side Release the multi-link and place into storage on windrower. Refer to header operators manual.
Figure 4.38: Lift Arms
3. Retrieve temporary lift pin from storage location on weight box and install into rear hole (A) at the top of the lift arms. This provides additional lift height for transport wheel deployment.
CAUTION Check to be sure all bystanders have cleared the area.
4. Start the engine and raise the header to full height.
5. Stop the engine and engage safety props on the lift cylinders.
Figure 4.39: Header in Transport Mode
6. Deploy header slow speed transport system. Refer to header operators manual.
Figure 4.40: Lift Arms
7. Remove float pin from engaged position (A) and insert in storage location (B). Secure with lynch pin.
OPERATION
Page 207
214737 187 Revision A
Figure 4.41: Lift Arms
8. Remove pins (A) from lower end of lift linkages.
NOTE:
Pins (A) are also used to secure weight box to windrower linkage.
9. Release the safety props on the header lift cylinders. Refer to 4.4.1 Engaging and Disengaging Header Safety Props: M Series Self-Propelled Windrower, page 197.
10. Start the engine and lower header down onto the transport wheels.
Figure 4.42: Ground Speed Lever (GSL) A - Header Tilt Down B - Header Tilt Up
11. Use the HEADER TILTswitches to release load on the center-link if necessary.
12. Shut down the engine and remove the key from ignition.
Disconnect the center-link as follows:
Figure 4.43: Hydraulic Link
13. If using hydraulic link, disconnect the center-link as follows:
a. Pull up on latch (A), and position latch into notch (B) on top of hook.
b. Release the safety props on the header lift cylinders. For instructions, refer to 4.4.1 Engaging and Disengaging Header Safety Props: M Series Self-Propelled Windrower, page 197.
c. Lower the header down onto the transport wheels.
d. Disengage top-link from the header. If necessary, use the HEADER TILTswitch to release load on the cylinder.
14. To unlock the center-link, pull up on latch (A) and position latch into notch (B) on top of hook.
OPERATION
Page 208
214737 188 Revision A
15. Lift center-link off header pin.
NOTE:
If center-link self-alignment kit is installed, start engine and raise center-link with the REEL UP switch on the ground speed lever (GSL).
16. Slowly back the windrower away from the header, shut the engine OFF, and remove the key from the ignition.
Attaching Header Transport Hitch to Header
Attach header transport hitch to header as follows:
Figure 4.44: Transport Hitch
1. Position end (A) of the aft section onto front wheel hook (B).
2. Push down until latch (C) captures the end (A).
3. Secure latch (C) with clevis pin (D).
Figure 4.45: Transport Hitch
4. Remove the L-pin from end (A) of aft section (if installed).
OPERATION
Page 209
214737 189 Revision A
Figure 4.46: Transport Hitch
5. Position end (B) of the forward section into end (A) of the aft section. Lower forward section into aft section.
Figure 4.47: Transport Hitch
6. Fully insert L-pin (A) in upper hole and turn pin to lock it. Secure with ring pin (B).
7. Make electrical connection at the joint (C).
Figure 4.48: Header Transport Wheel
8. Make the electrical connection at the header wheel (A).
OPERATION
Page 210
214737 190 Revision A
Figure 4.49: Lift Linkage
IMPORTANT:
To prevent damage to the lift system when lowering header lift linkages without a header or weight box attached to windrower, ensure that float engagement pin is installed in storage location (B) and NOT installed at hole location (A).
Figure 4.50: Windrower Lift Linkage
9. Drive windrower so that windrower lift arms are positioned into the weight box pockets.
10. Raise lift arms slightly, install locking pins (A) into pockets, and through windrower header lift linkages. Secure with hairpin.
NOTE:
Pins (A) were previously removed from the header lift linkage lower end.
Figure 4.51: Weight Box
11. Route the weight box harness (A) to the electrical connector at the left side lift linkage and connect harness to connector on windrower (B).
12. Raise lift arms fully, shut engine OFF, and remove key from ignition.
OPERATION
Page 211
214737 191 Revision A
Figure 4.52: Lift Linkage
13. Move float pins from storage location (A) to engaged position (B).
Figure 4.53: GSL
14. Start engine and press HEADER DOWN switch (A) on ground speed lever (GSL) to lower lift arms until the rear of the arms lift away from the linkage.
Figure 4.54: Weight Box
15. Attach slow speed transport hitch to the weight box tongue with drawbar pin. Secure using lynch pin (A). Attach safety chain (B).
16. Connect hitch harness (C) to electrical socket at front of weight box.
OPERATION
Page 212
214737 192 Revision A
Figure 4.55: Lift Arms
17. Remove the temporary lift pins (A) (should be loose in lift arm) and place into storage holes on weight box.
Converting from Transport Mode to Field Operation
WARNING To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operators seat for any reason.
Figure 4.56: Electrical Harness
1. Stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition.
2. Disconnect electrical harness at connector (B) from the windrower and store harness (A) on weight box.
OPERATION
Page 213
214737 193 Revision A
Figure 4.57: Header Transport Wheel
3. Disconnect wiring connector (A) at front wheel.
Figure 4.58: Header Transport Wheel
4. Remove clevis pin (D).
5. Push latch (C) and lift tow-bar (A) from hook. Release latch and replace clevis pin.
6. Unhook tow-bar from weight box.
Figure 4.59: Lift Arms
CAUTION Check to be sure all bystanders have cleared the area.
7. Start the engine and lower lift arms until rear of lift arms floats up and away from the lift arm mechanism.
8. Stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition.
9. Remove temporary lift pins (A) from weight box and install pins into holes at rear of lift arms.
10. Start the engine and fully raise lift arms. Stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition.
11. Engage lift cylinder safety props. Refer to 4.4.1 Engaging and Disengaging Header Safety Props: M Series Self-Propelled Windrower, page 197.
OPERATION
Page 214
214737 194 Revision A
Figure 4.60: Float Pins
12. Move float pins from working hole location (A) to disengage the float and store pins at storage hole location (B).
IMPORTANT:
To prevent damage to the lift system when lowering header lift linkages without a header or weight box attached to windrower, ensure that float engagement pin is installed in storage hole location and NOT installed in working hole location.
Figure 4.61: Weight Box
13. Remove pins (A) securing lift linkages to weight box, and retain pins for attaching header to windrower. Disengage lift cylinder safety props. Refer to 4.4.1 Engaging and Disengaging Header Safety Props: M Series Self-Propelled Windrower, page 197.
14. Start the engine, lower weight box onto blocks, and back away.
15. Attach the header to the windrower. Refer to 4.5 Attaching and Detaching Headers, page 218.
16. Convert header into field position. Refer to header operators manual for procedure.
Towing the Windrower (Emergency)
Towing the windrower is NOT recommended. If the windrower gets stuck, or must be towed onto a truck or trailer, follow these steps:
IMPORTANT:
NEVER attempt to start the windrower by towing it. Serious damage to the final drives may occur.
Failure to disengage final drives before towing will result in serious transmission damage.
Only tow the windrower for a short distance, on level ground, and at slow speed.
DANGER Uncontrolled heavy equipment. With final drives disengaged (turned inward), brakes and steering do NOT work. After towing, place blocks under front and rear wheels to prevent uncontrolled movement.
OPERATION
Page 215
214737 195 Revision A
Figure 4.62: Emergency Towing
1. Before towing the vehicle, disengage the final drives. Refer to Engaging and Disengaging Final Drives, page 195.
2. Use attachment point (A) to tow if windrower gets stuck, or when pulling onto a truck or trailer for transport.
3. When towing is complete, place blocks under front and rear wheels to prevent uncontrolled movement.
4. Engage final drives. Refer to Engaging and Disengaging Final Drives, page 195.
Engaging and Disengaging Final Drives
Disengage and engage final drives as follows:
WARNING Park on a flat, level surface, and chock wheels to prevent unexpected rolling when disengaging final drive.
Figure 4.63: Final Drives
1. Remove the two bolts (A) at the center of drive wheel.
2. Remove cap (B) and flip over so that dished side faces in. The cap presses a pin that disengages the gearbox.
3. Reinstall bolts (A) to secure cap (B).
4. Repeat for the other drive wheel.
5. After towing, reverse cap (B) to engage final drives. Be sure plunger at center of wheel pops out to engage drive.
NOTE:
Engaging the final drives may require rocking the wheels slightly.
OPERATION
Page 216
214737 196 Revision A
4.3.10 Storing the Windrower At the end of each operating season, you need to store your windrower properly.
WARNING Never use gasoline, naphtha, or any volatile material for cleaning purposes. These materials are toxic and can be flammable.
CAUTION Never operate engine in a closed building. Proper ventilation is required to avoid exhaust gas hazards.
CAUTION Remember when working around storage batteries that all of the exposed metal parts are live. Never lay a metal object across the terminals because a spark and short circuit will result.
1. Clean the windrower thoroughly.
2. Store windrower in a dry protected place.
3. Remove and store your batteries properly. Refer to Removing Batteries, page 365.
4. Charge batteries, store in a cool, dry area in an upright position. Do NOTstack batteries on top of each other unless they are in cartons.
5. If stored outside, cover windrower with a waterproof tarpaulin or other protective material. This will protect the switches, instruments, tires, etc. from inclement weather.
6. If no cover is available, seal air cleaner intake and exhaust pipe with plastic bags and/or waterproof tape.
7. If possible, store the windrower on blocks to take weight off tires. If blocking up the machine is not possible, increase tire pressure by 25% for storage. Adjust to recommended operating pressure before next use.
8. Repaint all worn or chipped painted surfaces to prevent rust.
9. Lubricate the windrower thoroughly, leaving excess grease on fittings to keep moisture out of bearings. Apply grease to exposed threads and sliding surfaces of components.
10. Check for worn components and repair. Tighten loose hardware and replace any missing hardware. Refer to 8.2 Recommended Torques, page 455.
11. Check for broken components and order replacements from your Dealer. Attention to these items right away will save time and effort at beginning of next season.
12. Add approved rust inhibitor to the engine oil in accordance with the manufacturers instructions. Run engine to operating temperature to mix inhibitor with oil, unless otherwise specified.
13. To prevent condensation, fill hydraulic oil reservoir to filler neck with approved hydraulic system oil. Refer to 5.10.1 Checking and Filling Hydraulic Oil, page 397.
14. Test engine coolant antifreeze concentration to ensure it is sufficient to protect engine against lowest expected temperature.
15. Before storing the machine in temperatures below 0C (32F), ensure the diesel exhaust fluid (DEF) tank is lower than 75 percent full.
16. If storing the machine for periods of time greater than six months, drain the DEF to prevent degradation of fluid.
OPERATION
Page 217
214737 197 Revision A
4.4 Operating with a Header The M155E4 Self-Propelled Windrower is designed to operate with a MacDon A Series Auger Header, R and R1 Series Rotary Disc Header, or D and D1 Series Rigid Draper Header with or without a Hay Conditioner.
This section describes the attachment and detachment procedures and operating instructions for these header types.
4.4.1 Engaging and Disengaging Header Safety Props: M Series Self-Propelled Windrower Safety props are located on both header lift cylinders on the windrower. Follow these steps to engage or disengage the header safety props:
DANGER To avoid bodily injury from fall of raised header, always engage safety props when working on or around raised header, and before going under header for any reason.
Engage safety props as follows:
Figure 4.64: Ground Speed Lever (GSL)
1. Start engine and press HEADER UP switch (A) to raise header to maximum height.
2. Rephase cylinders if one end of the header does not raise fully. If rephasing is required, proceed as follows:
a. Press and hold the HEADER UP switch (A) until both cylinders stop moving.
b. Continue to hold the switch for 34 seconds. Cylinders are now phased.
OPERATION
Page 218
214737 198 Revision A
Figure 4.65: Safety Prop
3. Pull lever (A) and rotate toward header to lower safety prop (B) onto cylinder. Repeat for opposite cylinder.
Disengage safety props as follows:
DANGER To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operators seat for any reason.
Figure 4.66: Safety Prop
1. Turn lever (A) away from header to raise safety prop until lever locks into vertical position. Repeat for opposite cylinder.
2. Start the engine, choose a level area, and lower the header to the ground.
3. Stop the engine, and remove the key.
OPERATION
Page 219
214737 199 Revision A
4.4.2 Using Header Float The header float feature allows the header to closely follow ground contours and to respond quickly to sudden changes or obstacles. The float setting is ideal when the cutterbar is on the ground with minimal bouncing, or scooping, or pushing soil.
IMPORTANT:
Set header float as light as possiblewithout excessive bouncingto avoid frequent breakage of knife components, scooping soil, or soil build-up at the cutterbar in wet conditions.
Avoid excessive bouncing (resulting in a ragged cut) by operating at a slower ground speed when the float setting is light.
Before setting header float, install header options (upper cross auger, skid shoes, transport kit, etc.). If the Slow Speed Transport (SST) tow bar will be stored on the header during operation, set float with tow bar in place.
Adjust the float when adding or removing optional attachments that affect the weight of the header.
Float Operating Guidelines
When working with the cutterbar on the ground:
Set center-link to mid-range position (5.0 on cab display module [CDM]). Refer to 4.4.5 Adjusting Header Angle, page 208.
When operating at the flattest header angle, minimize scooping rocks by adjusting the header skid shoes downward to raise guards.
To minimize pushing soil, adjust header height or adjust header angle.
When working with the cutterbar off the ground (draper header only):
Set center-link to mid-range position (5.0 on CDM). Refer to 4.4.5 Adjusting Header Angle, page 208.
Balance the amount of header weight carried by the float and stabilizer wheels. Refer to your draper header operators manual.
Use the CDM controls to automatically maintain cutting height. Refer to 4.4.6 Controlling Cutting Height, page 211.
Checking Float
The M155E4 is equipped with primary (coarse) and secondary (fine) float adjustment systems. The primary adjustment uses drawbolts to change the tension on the springs in the lift linkages. The secondary adjustment uses hydraulic cylinders to change the spring tension.
OPERATION
Page 220
214737 200 Revision A
Figure 4.67: Cab Display Module (CDM) Float Adjustment
A - CDM Display B - Left Float Adjustment C - Right Float Adjustment D - Header Tilt Down E - Header Lower F - Header Tilt Up
Check header float as follows:
WARNING To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operators seat for any reason.
CAUTION Check to be sure all bystanders have cleared the area.
1. Start the engine.
2. Lower header to ground.
3. Using HEADER TILTswitches (D) and (F), set center-link to mid-range position (5.0 on CDM [A]).
NOTE:
If equipped with the optional draper header reel drive (MD #B5496), adjust reel fore-aft to your normal operating position.
4. Using HEADER DOWN switch (E), lower header fully with lift cylinders fully retracted.
5. Set left (B) and right (C) float fine adjustments on CDM to approximately 5.0 as follows:
a. Using FLOAT SELECTOR switch (B), push + to increase float or to decrease float on left side of header. CDM display (A) will indicate selected float for left side, for example, (5.0 L FLOAT R XX.X).
OPERATION
Page 221
214737 201 Revision A
b. Repeat for right side float with switch (C). Display will indicate float for both sides, for example, (5.0 L FLOAT R 5.0).
6. Shut down engine, and remove key.
7. Grasp the end of the header and lift. The force to lift should be as noted in the following table and should be approximately the same at both ends.
Header Force Required to Lift Header at the Ends with Lift Cylinder Fully Retracted
Auger 335380 N (7585 lbf)
Rotary disc 426471 N (95105 lbf)
Draper 335380 N (7585 lbf) with stabilizer/transport wheels raised (if equipped)
Adjusting Float Using Drawbolts
Coarse float adjustment is done using the drawbolts located on either side of the windrower.
If necessary, coarse adjust the float with the drawbolts as follows:
CAUTION Check to be sure all bystanders have cleared the area.
Figure 4.68: GSL
1. Start the engine.
2. Using HEADER UP (A) switch on the ground speed lever (GSL), raise the header fully, shut down the engine, and remove the key.
OPERATION
Page 222
214737 202 Revision A
Figure 4.69: Header Float Adjustment
3. Turn drawbolt (A) clockwise to increase float (makes header lighter) or counterclockwise to decrease float (makes header heavier).
4. Recheck the header float.
Float Options
For draper headers without the deck shift option, auger headers, and rotary headers, the float disc can be preprogrammed for three types of windrowing conditions.
Example:
Position 1: Border
Position 2: Normal
Position 3: Rocky
Set float presets as follows:
1. Engage header.
Figure 4.70: Float Preset Switch
2. Push FLOAT PRESET SWITCH (A) to Position 1 (B).
OPERATION
Page 223
214737 203 Revision A
Figure 4.71: Cab Display Module (CDM) Float Adjustment
A - CDM Display B - Left Float Adjustment C - Right Float Adjustment D - Header Tilt Down E - Header Lower F - Header Tilt Up
3. Using HEADER TILTswitches (D) and (F), set center-link to mid-range position (5.0 on CDM [A]).
NOTE:
If equipped with the optional draper header reel drive (MD #B5496), adjust reel fore-aft to your normal operating position.
4. Using HEADER DOWN switch (E), lower header fully with lift cylinders fully retracted.
5. Set left (B) and right (C) float fine adjustments on CDM to approximately 5.0 as follows:
a. Using FLOAT SELECTOR switch (B), push + to increase float or to decrease float on left side of header. CDM display (A) will indicate selected float for left side, for example, (5.0 L FLOAT R XX.X).
b. Repeat for right side float with switch (C). Display will indicate float for both sides, for example, (5.0 L FLOAT R 5.0).
OPERATION
Page 224
214737 204 Revision A
Figure 4.72: Float Preset Switch
6. Select a second preset with the FLOAT PRESET 2 SWITCH (C).
7. Repeat Steps 1, page 202 and 2, page 202 to set the float.
8. Select a third preset with the FLOAT PRESET 3 SWITCH (D).
9. Repeat Steps 1, page 202 and 2, page 202 to set the float.
NOTE:
For draper headers with the deck shift option, the float can be preprogrammed to compensate for weight distribution when the decks are shifted. Refer to Setting Float Options with Deck Shift, page 273.
4.4.3 Levelling the Header The windrower linkages are factory-set to provide the proper level for the header and should not normally require adjustment.
WARNING To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operators seat for any reason.
If the header is not level, check the windrower tire pressures before adjusting the levelling linkages.
NOTE:
The float springs are NOT used to level the header.
To level the header, follow these steps:
Figure 4.73: Float Pins Disengaged
1. Place float pins in locked out location (A).
OPERATION
Page 225
214737 205 Revision A
Figure 4.74: Ground Speed Lever (GSL)
2. Park windrower on level ground.
3. Raise header fully with HEADER UP button (A) and hold momentarily to allow lift cylinders to rephase.
Figure 4.75: Lift Linkage
4. Set header approximately 150 mm (6 in.) off ground and check that member (A) is against link (B). Stop engine and remove key from ignition.
5. Measure distance to ground at both ends of header and determine the end that is higher.
6. If adjustment is necessary, start the engine and raise the header fully. Turn off the engine and remove the key from the ignition.
Figure 4.76: Float Pins Engaged
7. Move float pins to engaged position (A).
OPERATION
Page 226
214737 206 Revision A
Figure 4.77: Lift Linkage
8. Start the engine and lower the header onto the ground until member (A) lifts off link (B) on both sides.
9. Stop the engine and remove the key.
Figure 4.78: Lift Linkage
10. On high side, remove nut, washer, and bolt (A) that attaches shims (B) to link.
11. Remove one or both shims (B), and reinstall the hardware (A).
Figure 4.79: Lift Linkage
12. Start the engine and raise the header fully.
13. Stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition.
14. Move float pins to disengaged position.
15. Start the engine and set the header approximately 150 mm (6 in.) off ground and check that member (A) is against link (B). Stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition.
16. Measure distance to ground at both ends of the header.
17. If additional levelling is required, repeat Steps 6, page 205 to 9, page 206 and install the removed shim on the opposite linkage.
NOTE:
If required, additional shims are available from your Dealer.
OPERATION
Page 227
214737 207 Revision A
Figure 4.80: Float Pins Engaged
18. Once the header is level, return float pins to their engaged position (A).
NOTE:
Float does NOT require adjustment after levelling the header.
4.4.4 Header Drive All header controls are conveniently located on the operators console and on the ground speed lever (GSL) handle.
NOTE:
Some controls are optional equipment and may not be present in your unit. Some controls may be installed, but will be nonfunctional for certain headers.
Engaging and Disengaging the Header
IMPORTANT:
Always move throttle lever back to idle before engaging header drive. Do NOTengage header with engine at full rpm.
CAUTION Check to be sure all bystanders have cleared the area.
Figure 4.81: Operator Console
1. To engage header:
a. Move throttle (A) to adjust engine speed to idle.
b. Push the center down and pull up the HEADER DRIVE switch (B) to engage header drive. A slight delay between switch ON and operating speed is normal.
2. To disengage header:
a. Push HEADER DRIVE switch (B) down to disengage header drive.
Reversing the Header
Reverse the header as follows:
OPERATION
Page 228
214737 208 Revision A
Figure 4.82: Operator Console
1. Push down and hold HEADER DRIVE REVERSE button (A) and pull up the HEADER DRIVE switch (B). CDM will display HEADER REVERSE.
2. Release REVERSE button (A) to stop header.
3. Push down the HEADER DRIVE switch (B) to OFF, so that it can be restarted.
NOTE:
To engage header drive, push down, and pull up HEADER DRIVE knob.
4.4.5 Adjusting Header Angle Header angle is defined as the angle between the ground and the drapers/cutterbar. It is adjustable to accommodate crop conditions and/or soil type.
Refer to the appropriate header operators manual for the range of adjustment and recommended settings for your particular header.
The header angle can be hydraulically adjusted from the cab without shutting down the windrower when the windrower is equipped with the hydraulic center-link. A readout on the cab display module (CDM) allows you to establish settings for each crop condition.
IMPORTANT:
Changing header angle will affect float slightly because it has the effect of making the header lighter or heavier.
To prevent excessive guard breakage when conditions are not suited to heavier float (e.g., rocky or wet), do NOT use the TILT CONTROL. Instead, use the HEADER HEIGHTswitch.
OPERATION
Page 229
214737 209 Revision A
Figure 4.83: Operator Console
A - Program Button B - Display C - Header Tilt Down D - Header Tilt Up E - Display Selector
Adjust the header angle as follows:
To decrease (flatten) header angle, operate HEADER TILT UP switch (D) on ground speed lever (GSL) handle so that cylinder retracts. The CDM display will show a reading on the lower line of decreasing value between 00.0 and 10.0.
To increase (steepen) header angle, operate HEADER TILT DOWN switch (C) on the GSL handle so the cylinder extends. The CDM display will show a reading on the lower line of increasing value between 00.0 and 10.0.
NOTE:
The HEADER TILTswitch can be locked out to prevent inadvertent header angle changes when pressing the HEADER HEIGHTcontrol switches. Refer to Activating the Header Tilt Control Lockout, page 118.
Checking Self-Locking Center-Link Hook
Periodically check the operation of the hook locking mechanism and ensure that it is working properly as follows:
OPERATION
Page 230
214737 210 Revision A
Figure 4.84: Center-Link
1. If header is attached to windrower, disconnect center- link hook from header by pulling up on handle (A) to release the locking device and then lifting the hook off the header pin.
Figure 4.85: Center-Link Hook A - Handle B - Lock Pin C - Actuator Rod
2. Lower the handle (A) into the LOCK position.
3. Push up on lock pin (B) only. Handle should catch on casting and pin should NOT lift.
Figure 4.86: Center-Link Hook
4. Push up on actuator rod and lock pin should lift with the handle.
OPERATION
Page 231
214737 211 Revision A
4.4.6 Controlling Cutting Height
Figure 4.87: Operator Console
Cutting height is adjusted by raising or lowering the header with the HEADER UP (B) or HEADER DOWN (C) switches on the ground speed lever (GSL).
The cab display module (CDM) indicates header height with a reading on the DISPLAY (A) lower line between 00.0 and 10.0, with 00.0 being on the ground.
Use DISPLAY SELECTOR switch (D) to display the current setting.
Return to Cut
The monitoring system will assist you in maintaining the desired cutting height with the RETURN TO CUT feature. This feature can be turned OFF or ON with a switch on the cab display module (CDM).
The return to cut (RTC) feature provides preset cutting height and tilt angle settings for the header.
If desired, the CDM can be programmed so that only the cutting height feature is active.
The AUTO RAISE HEIGHT feature allows you to raise the header to a preselected height while in the RETURN TO CUT mode. Refer to Programming the Auto Raise Height Feature, page 214.
OPERATION
Page 232
214737 212 Revision A
Programming the Return to Cut Feature
Figure 4.88: Operator Console
Program the return to cut (RTC) feature as follows:
CAUTION Check to be sure all bystanders have cleared the area.
1. Start and windrower and engage the header.
2. Set RETURN TO CUTswitch (A) to OFF (indicator light is OFF).
3. Adjust the header to the desired cutting height with the HEADER UP (B) or HEADER DOWN (C) switches on the ground speed lever (GSL). The cab display module (CDM) displays between 00.0 and 10.0 at location (D).
4. Adjust the header angle with the HEADER TILT UP (E) or HEADER TILT DOWN (F) switches on the GSL. The CDM displays between 00.0 and 10.0. This step is not required when height only has been preselected.
5. Press the RETURN TO CUTswitch (A) on the CDM. The indicator light will illuminate and the settings are now programmed into the windrower control module (WCM).
OPERATION
Page 233
214737 213 Revision A
Using the Return to Cut Feature
Figure 4.89: Operator Console
A - Return to Cut B - Header Up C - Header Down D - Display E - Header Tilt Up F - Header Tilt Down
Use the return to cut feature as follows:
IMPORTANT:
Ensure the header is engaged and the RETURN TO CUTswitch (A) is illuminated.
NOTE:
The header can be raised or lowered by pressing and holding the HEADER UP (B) or HEADER DOWN (C) switches on the ground speed lever (GSL).
1. If header is above the preset cutting height,momentarily press HEADER DOWN switch (C) and the header will return to preset height.
2. If the header is below the preset height, press and hold the HEADER UP (B) switch to raise the header. Release switch to stop header. Alarm will sound when header rises past the preset height.
3. If the header angle changes, double-click (two clicks within 0.5 seconds) the HEADER TILT UP (E) or HEADER TILT DOWN switch (F) and the header will return to the preset angle.
NOTE:
If the header cannot return to the preset height or angle within 30 seconds, the return to cut feature will deactivate to prevent the hydraulic oil from overheating. Push the RETURN TO CUTswitch (A) to reactivate.
Auto Raise Height
The header can be raised to a preset height by enabling the auto raise height feature in the cab display module (CDM).
Refer to the following topics:
OPERATION
Page 234
214737 214 Revision A
Programming the Auto Raise Height Feature, page 214
Using the Auto Raise Height Feature, page 214
Programming the Auto Raise Height Feature
Figure 4.90: Operator Console
A - Return to Cut B - Program C - Select D - Right Arrow E - Left Arrow F - Header Up G - Header Down
Program the auto raise height feature as follows:
NOTE:
RETURN TO CUTswitch (A) can be OFF or ON.
1. Turn ignition ON or run engine.
2. Press PROGRAM (B) and SELECT (C) on cab display module (CDM) to enter programming mode.
3. Press SELECT (C). WINDROWER SETUP? is displayed on upper line.
4. Press right arrow (D), then SELECT. SET KNIFE SPEED? is displayed.
5. Press SELECT (C) until AUTO RAISE HEIGHT is displayed.
6. Press left arrow (E) or right arrow (D) to change value on lower line. Working range is 4.0 to 9.5. At 10.0, the feature is disabled and OFF is displayed.
7. When finished entering desired values, press PROGRAM to exit programming mode.
Using the Auto Raise Height Feature
IMPORTANT:
The windrower must be running with the header engaged at the cutting height and the RETURN TO CUT switch (A) activated.
OPERATION
Page 235
214737 215 Revision A
Use the auto raise height feature as follows:
Figure 4.91: Operators Station
1. To raise the header to the auto raise height set-point, double-click (two clicks within 0.5 seconds) the HEADER UP switch (B) on the ground speed lever (GSL).
NOTE:
With AUTO RAISE HEIGHT turned ON, the ACRE counter will be disabled when header height greater than preset cutting height.
2. If desired, press HEADER UP switch while header is being raised to disable auto raise height and maintain current height.
NOTE:
With AUTO RAISE HEIGHT turned OFF, the ACRE counter will be disabled when header height value is greater than 9.5. OFF is displayed on the cab display module (CDM).
3. To return the header to the preset cutting height, momentarily press HEADER DOWN switch (C).
Header Drop Rate
The header should lower gradually when the HEADER DOWN switch is pressed. From full height to ground should take 34 seconds.
If the drop rate requires adjustment, refer to Adjusting Header Drop Rate, page 403.
4.4.7 Using the Double Windrowing Attachment The double windrow attachment (DWA) deposits two windrows of conditioned material close together to be picked up by a forage chopper.
Figure 4.92: DWA on SP Windrower
1. The system is for use with the A Series Auger Headers, R Series Rotary Disc Headers, and D65 Draper Headers with HC10 Hay Conditioner.
Raising the side delivery system shuts off the draper and allows the crop to be deposited between the windrower wheels as it would be without the side delivery system.
Refer to MacDon M Series Windrower Double Windrow Attachment Manual for complete operating and maintenance instructions. The manual is shipped with the DWA kit.
OPERATION
Page 236
214737 216 Revision A
Figure 4.93: Double Windrowing
2. The conditioned crop is deposited onto the side delivery system draper and delivered to the side of the windrower when required. Cutting up and down shown.
Engaging and Disengaging the Double Windrow Attachment (DWA)
The DWA system is engaged with controls in the cab.
Figure 4.94: Ground Speed Lever (GSL)
Figure 4.95: Operators Console
The deck is lowered and raised with the DWA DOWN (B) and DWA UP (A) switches on the ground speed lever (GSL) or with the rocker switch on the operators console, depending on operator preference. The windrower cab display module (CDM) is programmed during the installation of the double windrow attachment (DWA) but the controls can be swapped at any time. Refer to Activating the Double Windrow Attachment (DWA), page 106. The draper is activated during deck lowering and deactivated during raising.
NOTE:
The same switch is used for raising and lowering a swath compressor (if installed).
OPERATION
Page 237
214737 217 Revision A
Adjusting Double Windrow Attachment (DWA) Draper Speed
Figure 4.96: Operators Console
The DWA draper speed is controlled with the rotary switch (A) on the operators console.
4.4.8 Swath Roller Operation
Figure 4.97: GSL
The swath roller is raised and lowered with the DWA UP (A) and DWA DOWN (B) switches on the ground speed lever (GSL) or with the rocker switch (C) on the operators console. This depends on how the windrower cab display module (CDM) is programmed during the installation of the Swath Roller kit.
To swap controls from the console to the GSL, refer to Activating the Double Windrow Attachment (DWA), page 106.
Figure 4.98: Rocker Switch
OPERATION
Page 238
214737 218 Revision A
4.5 Attaching and Detaching Headers
4.5.1 Attaching Header Boots Header boots are required to attach a D Series or D1 Series Draper Header to the windrower. Attach header boots (supplied with header) to windrower lift linkage if not already installed.
Figure 4.99: Header Float Linkage
IMPORTANT:
To prevent damage to the lift system when lowering header lift linkages without a header or weight box attached to the windrower, ensure the float engagement pin is installed in storage position (B) and NOT in engaged position (A).
Figure 4.100: Header Boot
1. Remove pin (B) from boot (A).
Figure 4.101: Header Boot
2. Position boot (B) onto lift linkage (A) and reinstall pin (C). Pin may be installed from either side of boot.
3. Secure pin (C) with hairpin (D).
4. Repeat for opposite side.
OPERATION
Page 239
214737 219 Revision A
4.5.2 Attaching a D Series or D1 Series Header D50, D60, D65, and D1 Series headers can be attached to an M155E4 Self-Propelled Windrower.
Refer to the following instructions based on the type of center-link installed on your windrower:
Attaching a D Series or D1 Series Header: Hydraulic Center-Link with Optional Self-Alignment, page 219
Attaching a D Series or D1 Series Header: Hydraulic Center-Link without Self-Alignment, page 224
Attaching a D Series or D1 Series Header: Hydraulic Center-Link with Optional Self-Alignment
NOTE:
Draper header boots must be installed onto the windrower lift linkage before starting this procedure. Refer to 4.5.1 Attaching Header Boots, page 218.
WARNING To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operators seat for any reason.
Figure 4.102: Header Leg
1. Remove hairpin (A) from pins (B), and remove pins from both header legs.
Figure 4.103: Ground Speed Lever
CAUTION Check to be sure all bystanders have cleared the area.
IMPORTANT:
Before starting engine, remove protective cover from exhaust stack.
2. Start the engine and activate the HEADER DOWN button (A) on the ground speed lever (GSL) to fully retract header lift cylinders.
OPERATION
Page 240
214737 220 Revision A
Figure 4.104: Ground Speed Lever
3. Activate the REEL UP switch (A) on the GSL to raise the center-link until the hook is above the attachment pin on the header.
IMPORTANT:
If the center-link is too low, it may contact the header as the windrower approaches the header for hookup.
Figure 4.105: Header Leg and Boot
4. Drive the windrower slowly forward until the boots (A) enter the header legs (B). Continue driving slowly forward until lift linkages contact the support plates in the header legs and the header nudges forward.
5. Ensure the lift linkages are properly engaged in the header legs and are contacting the support plates.
Figure 4.106: Ground Speed Lever
6. Use the following GSL functions to position the center-link hook above the header attachment pin:
REEL UP (A) to raise the center-link
REEL DOWN (B) to lower the center-link
HEADER TILT UP (C) to retract the center-link
HEADER TILT DOWN (D) to extend the center-link
OPERATION
Page 241
214737 221 Revision A
Figure 4.107: Hydraulic Center-Link
7. Adjust position of the center-link cylinder (A) with the REEL UP, REEL DOWN, AND HEADER TILTswitches on the GSL until the hook is above the header attachment pin.
IMPORTANT:
Hook release must be down to enable self-locking mechanism. If the release is open (up), manually push it down after hook engages header pin.
8. Lower center-link (A) onto the header with the REEL DOWN switch on the GSL until it locks into position (hook release [B] is down).
9. Check that center-link is locked onto header by pressing the REEL UP switch on the GSL.
CAUTION Check to be sure all bystanders have cleared the area.
Figure 4.108: Ground Speed Lever
10. Press HEADER UP switch (A) to raise the header to maximum height.
11. If one end of the header does NOT fully raise, rephase the lift cylinders as follows:
a. Press and hold the HEADER UP switch until both cylinders stop moving.
b. Continue to hold the switch for 34 seconds. Cylinders are now phased.
NOTE:
It may be necessary to repeat this procedure if there is air in the system.
OPERATION
Page 242
214737 222 Revision A
Figure 4.109: Safety Prop
12. Engage the safety props on both lift cylinders as follows:
a. Stop engine and remove key from ignition.
b. Pull lever (A) and rotate towards the header to release and lower safety prop (B) onto the lift cylinder.
c. Repeat for opposite lift cylinder.
Figure 4.110: Header Leg
13. Install pin (B) through the header leg (engaging U-bracket in lift linkage) on both sides and secure with hairpin (A).
14. Raise header stand (D) to storage position by pulling spring pin (C) and lifting stand into uppermost position. Release spring pin.
OPERATION
Page 243
214737 223 Revision A
Figure 4.111: Header Float Linkage
15. Remove the clevis pin from storage position (B) in linkage and insert into hole (A) to engage the float springs. Secure with hairpin.
Figure 4.112: Safety Prop Lever
16. Disengage the safety prop by turning lever (A) downwards until lever locks into vertical position.
17. Repeat for opposite safety prop.
Figure 4.113: Ground Speed Lever
CAUTION Check to be sure all bystanders have cleared the area.
18. Start the engine and press HEADER DOWN switch (A) on the GSL to fully lower the header.
19. Stop engine and remove key from ignition.
OPERATION
Page 244
214737 224 Revision A
Figure 4.114: Header Drive Hoses and Harness
20. Connect header drive hoses (A) and electrical harness (B) to header. Refer to the header operators manual.
Figure 4.115: Reel Hydraulics
21. Connect reel hydraulics (A) at right cab-forward side of windrower. Refer to the draper header operators manual.
Attaching a D Series or D1 Series Header: Hydraulic Center-Link without Self-Alignment
NOTE:
Draper header boots must be installed onto the windrower lift linkage before starting this procedure. Refer to 4.5.1 Attaching Header Boots, page 218.
WARNING To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operators seat for any reason.
OPERATION
Page 245
214737 225 Revision A
Figure 4.116: Header Leg
1. Remove hairpin (A) from pins (B), and remove pins from both header legs.
Figure 4.117: Ground Speed Lever
CAUTION Check to be sure all bystanders have cleared the area.
IMPORTANT:
Before starting engine, remove protective cover from exhaust stack.
2. Start the engine and activate the HEADER DOWN button (A) on the ground speed lever (GSL) to fully retract header lift cylinders.
Figure 4.118: Hydraulic Center-Link without Self-Alignment Kit
3. Remove pin (A) pin in frame linkage and raise center- link (B) until hook is above the attachment pin on header. Replace pin (A) to hold center-link in place.
IMPORTANT:
If the center-link is too low, it may contact the header as the windrower approaches the header for hookup.
OPERATION
Page 246
214737 226 Revision A
Figure 4.119: Header Leg and Boot
4. Drive the windrower slowly forward until the boots (A) enter the header legs (B). Continue driving slowly forward until lift linkages contact the support plates in the header legs and the header nudges forward.
5. Ensure the lift linkages are properly engaged in the header legs and are contacting the support plates.
Figure 4.120: Ground Speed Lever
6. Use the following GSL functions to position the center-link hook above the header attachment pin:
HEADER TILT UP (A) to retract the center-link
HEADER TILT DOWN (B) to extend the center-link
7. Stop engine and remove key from ignition.
Figure 4.121: Hydraulic Center-Link
8. Push down on rod end of link cylinder (A) until hook (B) engages and locks onto header pin.
IMPORTANT:
The hook release must be down to enable the self- locking mechanism. If the release is open (up), manually push it down after hook engages header pin.
9. Check that center-link (A) is locked onto the header by pulling upward on rod end (B) of cylinder.
OPERATION
Page 247
214737 227 Revision A
Figure 4.122: Ground Speed Lever
CAUTION Check to be sure all bystanders have cleared the area.
10. Start the engine.
11. Press the HEADER UP switch (A) to raise the header to maximum height.
12. If one end of the header does NOT fully raise, rephase the lift cylinders as follows:
a. Press and hold the HEADER UP switch until both cylinders stop moving.
b. Continue to hold the switch for 34 seconds. Cylinders are now phased.
NOTE:
It may be necessary to repeat this procedure if there is air in the system.
Figure 4.123: Safety Prop
13. Engage the safety props on both lift cylinders as follows:
a. Stop engine and remove key from ignition.
b. Pull lever (A) and rotate towards the header to release and lower safety prop (B) onto the lift cylinder.
c. Repeat for opposite lift cylinder.
OPERATION
Page 248
214737 228 Revision A
Figure 4.124: Header Leg
14. Install pin (B) through the header leg (engaging U-bracket in lift linkage) on both sides and secure with hairpin (A).
15. Raise header stand (D) to storage position by pulling spring pin (C) and lifting stand into uppermost position. Release spring pin.
Figure 4.125: Header Float Linkage
16. Remove the clevis pin from storage position (B) in linkage and insert into hole (A) to engage the float springs. Secure with hairpin.
Figure 4.126: Safety Prop Lever
17. Disengage the safety prop by turning lever (A) downwards until lever locks into vertical position.
18. Repeat for opposite safety prop.
OPERATION
Page 249
214737 229 Revision A
Figure 4.127: Ground Speed Lever
CAUTION Check to be sure all bystanders have cleared the area.
19. Start the engine and press HEADER DOWN switch (A) on the GSL to fully lower the header.
20. Stop engine and remove key from ignition.
Figure 4.128: Header Drive Hoses and Harness
21. Connect header drive hoses (A) and electrical harness (B) to header. Refer to the header operators manual.
Figure 4.129: Reel Hydraulics
22. Connect reel hydraulics (A) at right cab-forward side of windrower. Refer to the draper header operators manual.
OPERATION
Page 250
214737 230 Revision A
4.5.3 Detaching a D Series or D1 Series Header
Detaching a D Series or D1 Series Header: Hydraulic Center-Link
WARNING To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operators seat for any reason.
Figure 4.130: Ground Speed Lever (GSL)
1. Start engine and press HEADER UP switch (A) to raise header to maximum height.
2. Rephase cylinders if one end of the header does not raise fully. If rephasing is required, proceed as follows:
a. Press and hold the HEADER UP switch (A) until both cylinders stop moving.
b. Continue to hold the switch for 34 seconds. Cylinders are now phased.
3. Stop engine, and remove key.
Figure 4.131: Safety Prop
4. Pull lever (A) and rotate toward header to lower safety prop (B) onto cylinder. Repeat for opposite cylinder.
OPERATION
Page 251
214737 231 Revision A
Figure 4.132: Header Stand
5. Remove the pin (B) by removing the hairpin (A) from header leg on both sides.
6. Lower header stand (D) by pulling spring loaded pin (C). Release spring pin to lock stand.
Figure 4.133: Header Float Linkage
7. Remove clevis pin from location (A) to disengage float springs and insert in storage hole (B). Secure with lynch pin.
CAUTION To prevent damage to the lift system when lowering header lift linkages without a header or weight box attached to the windrower, ensure the float engagement pin is installed in storage position (B) and NOT in engaged position (A).
Figure 4.134: Safety Prop
8. Turn lever (A) away from header to raise safety prop until lever locks into vertical position. Repeat for opposite cylinder.
9. Start the engine, choose a level area, and lower the header to the ground.
10. Stop the engine, and remove the key.
OPERATION
Page 252
214737 232 Revision A
Figure 4.135: Header Drive Hydraulics
11. Disconnect header drive hydraulics (A) and electrical harness (B) from header and store in support on windrower left cab-forward side. Refer to the draper header operators manual for further information.
Figure 4.136: Reel Hydraulics
12. Disconnect reel hydraulics (A) from header and store on bracket at windrower left cab-forward side. Refer to the draper header operators manual for further information.
Figure 4.137: Ground Speed Lever
CAUTION Check to be sure all bystanders have cleared the area.
13. Start the engine, and activate HEADER TILT UP (A) and HEADER TILT DOWN (B) cylinder switches on the ground speed lever (GSL) to release load on the center- link cylinder.
OPERATION
Page 253
214737 233 Revision A
Figure 4.138: Hydraulic Center-Link
14. Disconnect center-link by lifting release (B) and hook (A) off header.
NOTE:
If optional center-link self-alignment kit is installed, lift release (B) and then operate the link lift cylinder with REEL UP switch on the GSL to disengage the center- link from the header.
NOTE:
If hay conditioner is installed, watch clearances on both sides.
Figure 4.139: Header Stand
15. Reinstall pin (A) into header leg and secure with a hairpin (B).
4.5.4 Attaching an A Series Header A30D, A30S, and A40D headers can be attached to an M155E4 Self-Propelled Windrower.
Refer to the following instructions based on the type of center-link installed on your windrower:
Attaching an A Series Header: Hydraulic Center-Link with Optional Self-Alignment, page 233
Attaching an A Series Header: Hydraulic Center-Link without Self-Alignment, page 239
Attaching an A Series Header: Hydraulic Center-Link with Optional Self-Alignment
WARNING To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operators seat for any reason.
OPERATION
Page 254
214737 234 Revision A
Figure 4.140: Header Boot
1. Remove hairpin (A) from clevis pin (B) and remove clevis pin from the header boots (C) on both sides of the header.
Figure 4.141: Header Float Linkage
IMPORTANT:
To prevent damage to the lift system when lowering header lift linkages without a header or weight box attached to the windrower, ensure the float engagement pin is installed in storage position (B) and NOT in engaged position (A).
Figure 4.142: Ground Speed Lever
CAUTION Check to be sure all bystanders have cleared the area.
IMPORTANT:
Before starting engine, remove protective cover from exhaust stack.
2. Start the engine and activate the HEADER DOWN button (A) on the ground speed lever (GSL) to fully retract header lift cylinders.
OPERATION
Page 255
214737 235 Revision A
Figure 4.143: Ground Speed Lever
3. Activate the REEL UP switch (A) on the GSL to raise the center-link until the hook is above the attachment pin on the header.
IMPORTANT:
If the center-link is too low, it may contact the header as the windrower approaches the header for hookup.
Figure 4.144: Header Support
4. Drive the windrower slowly forward until the windrower feet (A) enter the header supports (B). Continue driving slowly forward until the feet engage the supports and the header nudges forward.
Figure 4.145: Ground Speed Lever
5. Use the following GSL functions to position the center-link hook above the header attachment pin:
REEL UP (A) to raise the center-link
REEL DOWN (B) to lower the center-link
HEADER TILT UP (C) to retract the center-link
HEADER TILT DOWN (D) to extend the center-link
OPERATION
Page 256
214737 236 Revision A
Figure 4.146: Hydraulic Center-Link
6. Adjust center-link cylinder (A) position with the REEL UP and REEL DOWN switches on the GSL until the hook is positioned above the header attachment pin.
IMPORTANT:
The hook release (B) must be down to enable the self- locking mechanism. If the release is open (up), manually push it down after hook engages header pin.
7. Lower center-link (A) onto the header with the REEL DOWN switch until the center-link locks into position and the hook release (B) is down.
8. Check that center-link is locked onto header by pressing the REEL UP switch on the GSL.
CAUTION Check to be sure all bystanders have cleared the area.
Figure 4.147: Ground Speed Lever
9. Press HEADER UP switch (A) to raise the header to maximum height.
10. If one end of the header does NOT fully raise, rephase the lift cylinders as follows:
a. Press and hold the HEADER UP switch until both cylinders stop moving.
b. Continue to hold the switch for 34 seconds. Cylinders are now phased.
NOTE:
It may be necessary to repeat this procedure if there is air in the system.
OPERATION
Page 257
214737 237 Revision A
Figure 4.148: Safety Prop
11. Engage the safety props on both lift cylinders as follows:
a. Stop engine and remove key from ignition.
b. Pull lever (A) and rotate towards the header to release and lower safety prop (B) onto the lift cylinder.
c. Repeat for opposite lift cylinder.
Figure 4.149: Header Support
12. Install clevis pin (A) through support and foot and secure with hairpin. Repeat for opposite support.
IMPORTANT:
Ensure clevis pin (A) is fully inserted and hairpin is installed behind bracket.
OPERATION
Page 258
214737 238 Revision A
Figure 4.150: Header Stand
13. Remove lynch pin from clevis pin (A) in stand (B).
14. Hold stand (B) and remove pin (A).
15. Move stand (B) to storage position by inverting and relocating onto bracket as shown. Reinsert clevis pin (A) and secure with lynch pin.
Figure 4.151: Header Float Linkage
16. Remove the clevis pin from storage position (B) in linkage and insert into hole (A) to engage the float springs. Secure with hairpin.
Figure 4.152: Safety Prop Lever
17. Disengage the safety prop by turning lever (A) downwards until lever locks into vertical position.
18. Repeat for opposite safety prop.
OPERATION
Page 259
214737 239 Revision A
Figure 4.153: Ground Speed Lever
CAUTION Check to be sure all bystanders have cleared the area.
19. Start the engine and press HEADER DOWN switch (A) on the GSL to fully lower the header.
20. Stop engine and remove key from ignition.
Figure 4.154: Header Drive Hoses and Harness
21. Connect header drive hoses (A) and electrical harness (B) to header. Refer to the header operators manual.
Attaching an A Series Header: Hydraulic Center-Link without Self-Alignment
WARNING To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operators seat for any reason.
Figure 4.155: Header Boot
1. Remove hairpin (A) from clevis pin (B) and remove clevis pin from the header boots (C) on both sides of the header.
OPERATION
Page 260
214737 240 Revision A
Figure 4.156: Header Float Linkage
IMPORTANT:
To prevent damage to the lift system when lowering header lift linkages without a header or weight box attached to the windrower, ensure the float engagement pin is installed in storage position (B) and NOT in engaged position (A).
Figure 4.157: Ground Speed Lever
CAUTION Check to be sure all bystanders have cleared the area.
IMPORTANT:
Before starting engine, remove protective cover from exhaust stack.
2. Start the engine and activate the HEADER DOWN button (A) on the ground speed lever (GSL) to fully retract header lift cylinders.
Figure 4.158: Hydraulic Center-Link without Self-Alignment Kit
3. Remove pin (A) pin in frame linkage and raise center- link (B) until hook is above the attachment pin on header. Replace pin (A) to hold center-link in place.
IMPORTANT:
If the center-link is too low, it may contact the header as the windrower approaches the header for hookup.
OPERATION
Page 261
214737 241 Revision A
Figure 4.159: Header Support
4. Drive the windrower slowly forward until the windrower feet (A) enter the header supports (B). Continue driving slowly forward until the feet engage the supports and the header nudges forward.
Figure 4.160: Ground Speed Lever
5. Use the following ground speed lever functions to position the center-link hook above the header attachment pin:
HEADER TILT UP (A) to retract center-link
HEADER TILT DOWN (B) to extend center-link
6. Stop engine and remove key from ignition.
Figure 4.161: Hydraulic Center-Link
7. Push down on rod end of link cylinder (A) until hook (B) engages and locks onto header pin.
IMPORTANT:
The hook release must be down to enable the self- locking mechanism. If the release is open (up), manually push it down after hook engages header pin.
8. Check that center-link (A) is locked onto the header by pulling upward on rod end (B) of cylinder.
OPERATION
Page 262
214737 242 Revision A
Figure 4.162: Ground Speed Lever
CAUTION Check to be sure all bystanders have cleared the area.
9. Start the engine.
10. Press the HEADER UP switch (A) to raise header to maximum height.
11. If one end of the header does NOT fully raise, rephase the lift cylinders as follows:
a. Press and hold the HEADER UP switch until both cylinders stop moving.
b. Continue to hold the switch for 34 seconds. Cylinders are now phased.
NOTE:
It may be necessary to repeat this procedure if there is air in the system.
Figure 4.163: Safety Prop
12. Engage the safety props on both lift cylinders as follows:
a. Stop engine and remove key from ignition.
b. Pull lever (A) and rotate towards the header to release and lower safety prop (B) onto the lift cylinder.
c. Repeat for opposite lift cylinder.
OPERATION
Page 263
214737 243 Revision A
Figure 4.164: Header Support
13. Install clevis pin (A) through support and foot and secure with hairpin. Repeat for opposite support.
IMPORTANT:
Ensure clevis pin (A) is fully inserted and hairpin is installed behind bracket.
Figure 4.165: Header Stand
14. Remove lynch pin from clevis pin (A) in stand (B).
15. Hold stand (B) and remove pin (A).
16. Move stand (B) to storage position by inverting and relocating onto bracket as shown. Reinsert clevis pin (A) and secure with lynch pin.
Figure 4.166: Header Float Linkage
17. Remove the clevis pin from storage position (B) in linkage and insert into hole (A) to engage the float springs. Secure with hairpin.
OPERATION
Page 264
214737 244 Revision A
Figure 4.167: Safety Prop Lever
18. Disengage the safety prop by turning lever (A) downwards until lever locks into vertical position.
19. Repeat for opposite safety prop.
Figure 4.168: Ground Speed Lever
CAUTION Check to be sure all bystanders have cleared the area.
20. Start the engine and press HEADER DOWN switch (A) on the GSL to fully lower the header.
21. Stop engine and remove key from ignition.
Figure 4.169: Header Drive Hoses and Harness
22. Connect header drive hoses (A) and electrical harness (B) to header. Refer to the header operators manual.
OPERATION
Page 265
214737 245 Revision A
4.5.5 Detaching an A Series Header
Detaching an A Series Header: Hydraulic Center-Link
WARNING To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operators seat for any reason.
Figure 4.170: Ground Speed Lever
1. Start the engine and press HEADER UP switch (A) on the ground speed lever (GSL) to raise the header to maximum height.
2. If one end of the header does NOT raise fully, rephase the cylinders as follows:
a. Press and hold the HEADER UP switch (A) until both cylinders stop moving.
b. Continue to hold the switch for 34 seconds. Cylinders are now phased.
3. Stop the engine and remove the key.
DANGER To avoid bodily injury from fall of raised header, always engage safety props when working on or around raised header, and before going under header for any reason.
Figure 4.171: Safety Prop
4. Pull lever (A) and rotate toward header to lower safety prop (B) onto cylinder. Repeat for opposite cylinder.
OPERATION
Page 266
214737 246 Revision A
Figure 4.172: Header Boot
5. Remove the hairpin from clevis pin (A), and remove clevis pin from header boots (B) on both sides.
Figure 4.173: Header Stand
6. Lower stand (A) by pulling clevis pin (B), inverting stand, and relocating on bracket. Reinsert pin (B) and secure with hairpin.
Figure 4.174: Header Float Linkage
CAUTION To prevent damage to the lift system when lowering header lift linkages without a header or weight box attached to the windrower, ensure the float engagement pin is installed in storage position (B) and NOT in engaged position (A).
7. Remove the lynch pin from the clevis pin, and remove the clevis pin from linkage (A) to disengage float springs, and insert clevis pin into storage hole (B). Secure with lynch pin. Repeat for opposite linkage.
CAUTION Check to be sure all bystanders have cleared the area.
OPERATION
Page 267
214737 247 Revision A
Figure 4.175: Safety Props
8. Disengage safety props by turning lever (A) away from header to raise safety prop until lever locks into vertical position. Repeat for opposite cylinder.
9. Start the engine, choose a level area, and lower the header to the ground.
Figure 4.176: Ground Speed Lever
10. Activate HEADER TILT UP (A) and HEADER TILT DOWN (B) cylinder switches on the GSL to release load on center-link cylinder.
Figure 4.177: Hydraulic Center-Link
11. Stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition.
12. Lift hook release (C) and lift hook (B) off header pin.
NOTE:
If optional center-link self-alignment kit is installed, lift release (C) and then operate the link lift cylinder (A) with REEL UP switch on the GSL to disengage the center-link from the header.
OPERATION
Page 268
214737 248 Revision A
Figure 4.178: Header Drive Hydraulics
13. Disconnect header drive hydraulics (A) and electrical harness (B). Refer to the auger header operators manual.
14. Back the windrower slowly away from the header.
Figure 4.179: Header Boots
15. Reinstall clevis pin (B) into header boot (C) and secure with hairpin (A). Repeat for opposite side.
4.5.6 Attaching to an R/R1 Series Header R and R1 Series Rotary Disc Header can be attached to an M155E4 Self-Propelled Windrower.
NOTE:
The 18.4 x 26 drive tire is recommended on the M155E4 Self-Propelled Windrower when operated with a 4 m (13 ft.) R80 and R85 Disc Header. These drive tires are reversible and should be mounted inset at 3792 mm (149.3 in.) to provide maximum clearance to uncut crop. Mounting these tires outset or mounting all other drive tire options will result in windrower tires slightly wider than the header width. This may cause some uncut crop to be trampled by tires in turns and corners during windrower operation, and may leave some uncut strips of crop in the windrowers next pass.
Refer to the procedure that is appropriate for the center-link installed on the windrower:
Attaching an R/R1 Series Header: Hydraulic Center-Link with Optional Self-Alignment, page 248
Attaching an R/R1 Series Header: Hydraulic Center-Link without Optional Self-Alignment, page 254
Attaching an R/R1 Series Header: Hydraulic Center-Link with Optional Self-Alignment
CAUTION To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of machine, always stop engine and remove key from ignition before leaving operators seat for any reason.
OPERATION
Page 269
214737 249 Revision A
Figure 4.180: Header Support
1. Remove hairpin (B) from clevis pin (A) and remove clevis pin from the header supports (C) on both sides of the header.
Figure 4.181: Float Linkage
IMPORTANT:
To prevent damage to the lift system when lowering header lift linkages without a header or weight box attached to the windrower, ensure the float engagement pin is installed in storage position (B) and NOT in engaged position (A).
2. Remove the clevis pin from linkage (A) to disengage float springs, and insert clevis pin into storage hole (B). Secure with lynch pin. Repeat for opposite linkage.
Figure 4.182: Ground Speed Lever
CAUTION Check to be sure all bystanders have cleared the area.
3. Start the engine and press the HEADER DOWN button (A) on the ground speed lever (GSL) to fully retract header lift cylinders.
IMPORTANT:
If the center-link is too low, it may contact the header as the windrower approaches the header for hookup.
OPERATION
Page 270
214737 250 Revision A
Figure 4.183: Ground Speed Lever
4. Press the REEL UP switch (A) on the GSL to raise the center-link until the hook is above the attachment pin on the header.
Figure 4.184: Header Support
5. Slowly drive the windrower forward until the windrower feet (A) enter the header supports (B). Continue driving slowly forward until the feet engage the supports and the header nudges forward.
Figure 4.185: Ground Speed Lever
6. Use the following GSL functions to position the center-link hook above the header attachment pin:
REEL UP (A) to raise the center-link
REEL DOWN (B) to lower the center-link
HEADER TILT UP (C) to retract the center-link
HEADER TILT DOWN (D) to extend the center-link
OPERATION
Page 271
214737 251 Revision A
Figure 4.186: Hydraulic Center-Link
7. Adjust center-link cylinder (A) position with the REEL UP and REEL DOWN switches on the GSL until the hook is positioned above the header attachment pin.
IMPORTANT:
The hook release (B) must be down to enable the self- locking mechanism. If the release is open (up), manually push it down after hook engages header pin.
8. Lower center-link (A) onto the header with the REEL DOWN switch until the center-link locks into position and the hook release (B) is down.
9. Check that center-link is locked onto header by pressing the REEL UP switch on the GSL.
CAUTION Check to be sure all bystanders have cleared the area.
Figure 4.187: Ground Speed Lever
10. Press HEADER UP switch (A) to raise the header to maximum height.
11. If one end of the header does NOT fully raise, rephase the lift cylinders as follows:
a. Press and hold the HEADER UP switch until both cylinders stop moving.
b. Continue to hold the switch for 34 seconds. Cylinders are now phased.
NOTE:
It may be necessary to repeat this procedure if there is air in the system.
OPERATION
Page 272
214737 252 Revision A
Figure 4.188: Safety Prop
12. Engage the safety props on both lift cylinders as follows:
a. Stop engine and remove key from ignition.
b. Pull lever (A) and rotate towards the header to release and lower safety prop (B) onto the lift cylinder.
c. Repeat for opposite lift cylinder.
Figure 4.189: Header Support
13. Install clevis pin (A) through support and windrower lift member, and secure with hairpin (B). Repeat for opposite side.
IMPORTANT:
Ensure clevis pin (A) is fully inserted and hairpin is installed behind bracket.
OPERATION
Page 273
214737 253 Revision A
Figure 4.190: Header Float Linkage
14. Remove the clevis pin from storage position (B) in linkage and insert into hole (A) to engage the float springs. Secure with hairpin.
Figure 4.191: Safety Prop Lever
15. Disengage the safety prop by turning lever (A) downwards until lever locks into vertical position.
16. Repeat for opposite safety prop.
Figure 4.192: Ground Speed Lever
CAUTION Check to be sure all bystanders have cleared the area.
17. Start the engine and press HEADER DOWN switch (A) on the GSL to fully lower the header.
18. Stop engine and remove key from ignition.
OPERATION
Page 274
214737 254 Revision A
Figure 4.193: Header Drive Hoses and Harness
19. Connect header drive hoses (A) and electrical harness (B) to header. Refer to the disc header operators manual.
Attaching an R/R1 Series Header: Hydraulic Center-Link without Optional Self-Alignment
WARNING To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operators seat for any reason.
Figure 4.194: Header Support
1. Remove hairpin (B) from clevis pin (A), and then remove clevis pin from header supports (C) on both sides of the header.
Figure 4.195: Header Float Linkage
IMPORTANT:
To prevent damage to the lift system when lowering header lift linkages without a header or weight box attached to the windrower, ensure the float engagement pin is installed in storage position (B) and NOT in engaged position (A).
2. Remove the clevis pin from linkage (A) to disengage float springs, and insert clevis pin into storage hole (B). Secure with lynch pin. Repeat for opposite linkage.
OPERATION
Page 275
214737 255 Revision A
Figure 4.196: Ground Speed Lever
CAUTION Check to be sure all bystanders have cleared the area.
3. Start the engine, and press HEADER DOWN button (A) on the ground speed lever (GSL) to fully retract header lift cylinders.
Figure 4.197: Hydraulic Center-Link without Self-Alignment Kit
4. Remove pin (A) pin in frame linkage and raise center- link (B) until hook is above the attachment pin on header. Replace pin (A) to hold center-link in place.
IMPORTANT:
If the center-link is too low, it may contact the header as the windrower approaches the header for hookup.
Figure 4.198: Header Support
5. Slowly drive the windrower forward until the windrower feet (A) enter the header supports (B). Continue driving slowly forward until the feet engage the supports and the header nudges forward.
OPERATION
Page 276
214737 256 Revision A
Figure 4.199: Ground Speed Lever
6. Use the following GSL functions to position the center-link hook above the header attachment pin:
HEADER TILT UP (A) to retract the center-link
HEADER TILT DOWN (B) to extend the center-link
7. Stop the engine, and remove key from ignition.
Figure 4.200: Hydraulic Center-Link
8. Push down on rod end of link cylinder (A) until hook (B) engages and locks onto header pin.
IMPORTANT:
The hook release must be down to enable the self- locking mechanism. If the release is open (up), manually push it down after hook engages header pin.
9. Check that center-link (A) is locked onto the header by pulling upward on rod end (B) of cylinder.
Figure 4.201: Ground Speed Lever
CAUTION Check to be sure all bystanders have cleared the area.
10. Start the engine.
11. Press HEADER UP switch (A) to raise the header to maximum height.
12. If one end of the header does NOT fully raise, rephase the lift cylinders as follows:
a. Press and hold the HEADER UP switch until both cylinders stop moving.
b. Continue to hold the switch for 34 seconds. Cylinders are now phased.
NOTE:
It may be necessary to repeat this procedure if there is air in the system.
OPERATION
Page 277
214737 257 Revision A
Figure 4.202: Safety Prop
13. Engage the safety props on both lift cylinders as follows:
a. Stop engine and remove key from ignition.
b. Pull lever (A) and rotate towards the header to release and lower safety prop (B) onto the lift cylinder.
c. Repeat for opposite lift cylinder.
Figure 4.203: Header Support
14. Install clevis pin (A) through the support and windrower lift member, and secure with hairpin (B). Repeat for opposite side.
IMPORTANT:
Ensure clevis pin (A) is fully inserted and hairpin is installed behind bracket.
OPERATION
Page 278
214737 258 Revision A
Figure 4.204: Header Float Linkage
15. Remove the clevis pin from storage position (B) in linkage and insert into hole (A) to engage the float springs. Secure with hairpin.
Figure 4.205: Safety Prop Lever
16. Disengage the safety prop by turning lever (A) downwards until lever locks into vertical position.
17. Repeat for opposite safety prop.
Figure 4.206: Ground Speed Lever
CAUTION Check to be sure all bystanders have cleared the area.
18. Start the engine and press HEADER DOWN switch (A) on the GSL to fully lower the header.
19. Stop engine and remove key from ignition.
OPERATION
Page 279
214737 259 Revision A
Figure 4.207: Header Drive Hoses and Harness
20. Connect header drive hoses (A) and electrical harness (B) to header. Refer to the disc header operators manual.
4.5.7 Detaching an R Series or R1 Series Header
Detaching an R/R1 Series Header: Hydraulic Center-Link
WARNING To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operators seat for any reason.
Figure 4.208: Ground Speed Lever (GSL)
1. Start engine and press HEADER UP switch (A) to raise header to maximum height.
2. Rephase cylinders if one end of the header does not raise fully. If rephasing is required, proceed as follows:
a. Press and hold the HEADER UP switch (A) until both cylinders stop moving.
b. Continue to hold the switch for 34 seconds. Cylinders are now phased.
OPERATION
Page 280
214737 260 Revision A
3. Stop engine and remove key from ignition.
Figure 4.209: Safety Prop
4. Pull lever (A) and rotate toward header to lower safety prop (B) onto cylinder. Repeat for opposite cylinder.
Figure 4.210: Header Boots
5. Remove hairpin (B) from clevis pin (A) and remove clevis pin from header boot (C) on both sides of header.
OPERATION
Page 281
214737 261 Revision A
Figure 4.211: Header Float Linkage
CAUTION To prevent damage to the lift system when lowering header lift linkages without a header or weight box attached to the windrower, ensure the float engagement pin is installed in storage position (B) and NOT in engaged position (A).
6. Remove hairpin and clevis pin from location (A) to disengage float springs, and insert into storage hole (B). Secure with hairpin.
CAUTION Check to be sure all bystanders have cleared the area.
Figure 4.212: Safety Props
7. Disengage safety props by turning lever (A) away from header to raise safety prop until lever locks into vertical position. Repeat for opposite cylinder.
8. Start the engine, choose a level area, and lower the header to the ground.
Figure 4.213: Ground Speed Lever
9. Press HEADER TILT UP (A) and HEADER TILT DOWN (B) cylinder switches on the GSL to release load on center-link cylinder.
OPERATION
Page 282
214737 262 Revision A
Figure 4.214: Hydraulic Center-Link
10. Stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition.
11. Lift hook release (C) and lift hook (B) off header pin.
NOTE:
If optional center-link lift cylinder is installed, lift release (C) and then operate the link lift cylinder from the cab to disengage the center-link (A) from the header.
Figure 4.215: Header Drive Hydraulics
12. Disconnect header drive hydraulics (A) and electrical harness (B). Refer to the header operators manual.
13. Back the windrower slowly away from the header.
Figure 4.216: Header Boot
14. Reinstall clevis pin (A) through boot (C) and secure with hairpin (B). Repeat for opposite side.
OPERATION
Page 283
214737 263 Revision A
4.6 Operating with a D Series or D1 Series Header
Figure 4.217: Draper Header Hydraulics
The M155E4 Self-Propelled Windrower is factory-equipped to run a D or D1 Series Draper Header.
If installing a HC10 Hay Conditioner, Reverser kit MD #B4656 is recommended. If necessary, obtain the recommended kit from your MacDon Dealer and install it in accordance with the instructions supplied with the kit.
Refer to the procedures below for the center-link installed on your windrower:
Attaching a D Series or D1 Series Header: Hydraulic Center-Link with Optional Self-Alignment, page 219
Attaching a D Series or D1 Series Header: Hydraulic Center-Link without Self-Alignment, page 224
4.6.1 Configuring Hydraulics The windrower must be fitted with a draper drive basic kit to operate a D or D1 Series Draper Headers.
Figure 4.218: Draper Header Drive Hydraulics
Windrowers equipped with D or D1 Series hydraulics have four header drive hoses on the left cab-forward side.
Figure 4.219: Draper Header Reel Hydraulics
There are also up to five reel drive hoses on the right cab-forward side.
OPERATION
Page 284
214737 264 Revision A
4.6.2 Header Position Refer to 4.4 Operating with a Header, page 197 for procedures for controlling header height, header tilt, and float.
4.6.3 Adjusting the Reel Fore-Aft Position
Figure 4.220: Ground Speed Lever
The reel fore-aft position can be hydraulically adjusted with the optional reel position system and is controlled with multi- function switches on the ground speed lever (GSL).
Press and hold the switch for the desired FORWARD (A) or AFT (B) movement of the reel.
NOTE:
The switches also control adjustments to the optional double windrow attachment (DWA) conveyor and can be activated when programming the cab display module (CDM).
4.6.4 Adjusting the Reel Height
Figure 4.221: Ground Speed Lever (GSL)
Press and hold the switch for the desired movement of the reel REEL UP (A) or REEL DOWN (B).
IMPORTANT:
Under certain conditions, with the reel raised to full height, the reel tines may contact the cab roof. Exercise care to avoid damage to the machine.
4.6.5 Reel Speed Reel speed is controlled with switches on the ground speed lever (GSL) in the cab. On D and D1 Series draper headers, reel speed can run independently, or be set relative to the ground speed of the windrower using the header index feature. Refer to your headers operator manual for specific windrowing guidelines and recommended speeds.
Setting Reel to Ground Speed
Setting the speed of the reel relative to ground speed (using the header index function) allows you to run the engine at lower rpm while maintaining the desired ground and reel speed. Reducing engine speed saves fuel and reduces noise in the cab.
Setting the reel to ground speed requires setting the minimum reel speed and the reel index.
OPERATION
Page 285
214737 265 Revision A
Figure 4.222: Operator Console
A - Display B - Header Index C - Fast D - Slow E - Display Selector
CAUTION Check to be sure all bystanders have cleared the area.
1. Set the minimum reel speed as follows:
IMPORTANT:
Set the minimum reel speed while stationary with the ground speed lever (GSL) in the N-DETENT position.
a. Engage header.
b. Set HEADER INDEX switch (B) to ON.
c. Press the DISPLAY SELECTOR button (E) on the GSL to display ##.## MIN REEL at location (A) or press the FAST (C) or SLOW (D) switch
The displayed value (##.##) = rpm or mph or km/h17
d. Press FAST (C) or SLOW (D) until the desired minimum reel speed is achieved.
2. Set the reel index as follows:
IMPORTANT:
Reel index can only be adjusted while operating at a ground speed faster than minimum reel speed plus header index value.
a. Set HEADER INDEX switch (B) to ON.
OPERATION
17. Depending on CDM programming.
Page 286
214737 266 Revision A
b. Press the DISPLAY SELECTOR button (E) on the GSL to display ##.## ##.# REEL IND18 or press FAST (C) or SLOW (D) switch.
The displayed value (##.##) = reel speed (rpm or mph or km/h17 )
The displayed value (#.##) = reel index value
c. Press FAST (C) or SLOW (D) until the desired reel index is achieved.
NOTE:
The reel will continue operating at the minimum reel speed setting when the ground speed drops below the set value.
The cab display module (CDM) display (A) will flash ##.## MIN REEL (RPM or MPH or KPH) prompting you to change the minimum set-point or increase your ground speed if the total of the ground speed, plus the index value is LESS THAN the minimum reel speed set-point.
Setting the Reel Only Speed
Figure 4.223: Operator Console
A - Display B - Header Index C - Reel Fast D - Reel Slow E - Display Selector
CAUTION Check to be sure all bystanders have cleared the area.
OPERATION
18. REEL IND will only be displayed when operating at a ground speed faster than minimum reel speed plus header index value.
Page 287
214737 267 Revision A
Set the speed of the reel independently of ground speed as follows while operating the windrower:
NOTE:
This procedure is similar to changing the draper speed using the draper speed control switch while in motion. Refer to Setting Draper Speed Independent of Ground Speed, page 270. These changes become the new set-points.
1. Set HEADER INDEX (B) to OFF.
2. Press REEL FAST (C) or REEL SLOW (D) on the ground speed lever (GSL) until display (A) shows ##. ## REEL MPH with desired reel speed.
The displayed value (##.##) = reel speed (rpm or mph or km/h19)
4.6.6 Draper Speed Draper speed affects the orientation of stalks in the windrow. For information on draper speed guidelines and windrow types, refer to your header operators manual. The draper speed can be set to run independently, or relative to the ground speed of the windrower with the header index function.
Setting Draper to Ground Speed
Setting the speed of the draper relative to ground speed (using the header index function) allows you to run the engine at lower rpm while maintaining the desired ground and draper speed. Reducing engine speed saves fuel and reduces noise in the cab.
Setting draper to ground speed requires setting both the minimum draper speed and the draper index.
Setting Minimum Draper Speed
Figure 4.224: Operator Console
OPERATION
19. Depending on cab display module (CDM) programming.
Page 288
214737 268 Revision A
Figure 4.224 Operator Console (continued)
A - Display B - Header Index C - Draper Fast D - Draper Slow E - Display Selector
CAUTION Check to be sure all bystanders have cleared the area.
Set draper minimum speed as follows:
IMPORTANT:
Set the minimum draper speed while stationary with the ground speed lever (GSL) in the N-DETENT position.
1. Engage header.
2. Set HEADER INDEX (B) switch to ON.
3. Press DISPLAY SELECTOR button (E) until display (A) shows ##.## DRAPER MIN.
The displayed value (##.##) = draper speed (mph or km/h20).
4. Use the FAST (C) and SLOW (D) buttons to set the desired minimum draper speed.
Setting Draper Index
Figure 4.225: Operator Console
CAUTION Check to be sure all bystanders have cleared the area.
OPERATION
20. Depending on cab display module (CDM) programming.
Page 289
214737 269 Revision A
Set draper index as follows:
IMPORTANT:
Draper Index can only be adjusted while operating at a ground speed faster than minimum draper speed plus header index value.
1. Engage header.
2. Set HEADER INDEX switch (B) to ON.
3. Press DISPLAY SELECTOR (E) on the ground speed lever (GSL) to display DRAPER INDX21 at (A) on the cab display module (CDM).
4. Press DRAPER FAST (C) or SLOW (D) on the CDM until display (A) shows ##.## ##.# DRAP IND with the desired index value.
The displayed value (##.##) = draper speed (mph or km/h22)
The displayed value (##.#) = the index value
Examples:
Windrower is operating at 13 km/h (8 mph) with header index ON and set at 1.5. Display shows: 9.5 1.5 DRAP INDX where 9.5 (8 + 1.5) is the draper speed in mph and 1.5 is the header index setting.
Windrower speed drops to 12 km/h (7.5 mph) at same header index setting. Display shows: 9.0 1.5 DRAP INDX where 9.0 (7.5 + 1.5) is the draper speed in mph and 1.5 is the header index setting.
Windrower is operating at 13 km/h (8 mph) with header index ON and set at 0.9. Display shows: 8.9 0.9 DRAP INDX where 8.9 (8 + 0.9) is the draper speed in mph and 0.9 is the header index setting.
OPERATION
21. DRAPER INDX will only be displayed when operating at a ground speed faster than minimum draper speed plus the header index value.
22. Depending on CDM programming.
Page 290
214737 270 Revision A
Setting Draper Speed Independent of Ground Speed
Figure 4.226: Operator Console
Set the speed of the draper independent of ground speed as follows:
NOTE:
This procedure can also be used to change the draper speed while in motion.
CAUTION Check to be sure all bystanders have cleared the area.
1. Engage header.
2. Set HEADER INDEX switch (B) to OFF.
3. Press DISPLAY SELECTOR button (E) to show ##.# DRAPER SPEED on the cab display module (CDM) (A).
Displayed value (##.#) = draper speed (mph or km/h23).
4. Press FAST (C) or SLOW (D) on the CDM until desired draper speed is displayed at location (A).
OPERATION
23. Depending on CDM programming.
Page 291
214737 271 Revision A
4.6.7 Knife Speeds The ideal knife speed should achieve a clean cut. Crop types and conditions usually influence the knife and ground speeds.
Table 4.2 Knife Speed Table
Header Description Knife Speed
Type Size Minimum Maximum
rpm24 spm25 rpm24 spm25
Draper with double knife
4.6 m (15 ft.)
750 1500 950 1900
Draper with double knife
6.1 and 7.6 m (20 and 25 ft.)
700 1400 850 1700
Draper with double knife
9.1 m (30 ft.)
600 1200 800 1600
Draper with double knife
10.6 m (35 ft.)
600 1200 700 1400
Draper with double knife
12.2 m (40 ft.)
550 1100 700 1400
Draper with single knife
6.1 and 7.6 m (20 and 25 ft.)
600 1200 750 1500
Draper with single knife
9.1 m (30 ft.)
600 1200 700 1400
Draper with single knife
10.6 m (35 ft.)
550 1100 700 1400
Draper with single knife
12.2 m (40 ft.)
525 1050 600 1200
When the header is first attached to the windrower, the windrower control module (WCM) receives a code from the header that determines the knife speed range and the minimum speed.
The desired speed can be programmed on the cab display module (CDM) and stored in the WCM memory so the knife will operate at the original set-point after the header is detached and reattached to the windrower.
If no header code is detected, the CDM displays NO HEADER and the knife speed reverts to the operators selection from a range of 8001000 strokes per minute.
Refer to Header Settings in the header operators manual for the suggested knife speed for a variety of crops and conditions.
NOTE:
Knife speed cannot be programmed outside the range specified for each header.
NOTE:
Knife speed can be adjusted without shutting down the machine; however, the windrower should be stopped before adjusting CDM settings.
OPERATION
24. Revolutions per minute is the speed of knife drive box pulley. 25. Strokes per minute of knife (rpm x 2).
Page 292
214737 272 Revision A
To adjust the knife speed, refer to Setting the Header Knife Speed, page 99.
Setting Knife Speed: Windrower in Motion
Figure 4.227: Operator Console
CAUTION Check to be sure all bystanders have cleared the area.
Display and set knife speed while in motion as follows:
1. Engage header.
2. Press PROGRAM (D) and SELECT (E) on cab display module (CDM) to show #### KNIFE SPM at (A).
Displayed value (####) = strokes per minute.
3. Press LEFTARROW (B) or RIGHTARROW (C) until desired knife speed is displayed at (A).
4.6.8 Deck Shift Control When connected to a draper header with the deck shift option, hydraulic deck shift control allows you to select the deck position and draper rotation of the header from the operators station. Deck shift allows you to select crop delivery from the left side, center, or right side of the header.
Deck Shift
CAUTION Check to be sure all bystanders have cleared the area.
Shift decks as follows:
OPERATION
Page 293
214737 273 Revision A
Figure 4.228: Header Drive Button
1. Engage header by pushing down on the yellow HEADER DRIVE button (A) while pulling up on the black ring (B) at the base of the switch.
Figure 4.229: Deck Shift Switch A - Deck Shift Switch B - Left-Side Delivery C - Center Delivery D - Right-Side Delivery
2. Push switch (A) to desired delivery position. Deck(s) will move and direction of drapers will change accordingly.
3. Operate windrower.
Setting Float Options with Deck Shift
For draper headers equipped with the deck shift option, the header float can be set for each deck position. Float is maintained when the decks are shifted.
CAUTION Check to be sure all bystanders have cleared the area.
Program the float as follows:
1. Engage header.
OPERATION
Page 294
214737 274 Revision A
Figure 4.230: Operator Console A - Header Tilt Down B - Header Tilt Up C - Header Down D - Left Float E - Display F - Right Float
2. Using HEADER TILT SWITCHES (A) and (B) on the ground speed lever (GSL), set center-link to mid-range position (05.0 on display [E]).
Figure 4.231: Deck Shift Switch
3. Select a deck position with DECK SHIFTswitch (A) from one of the following delivery options:
B - Left-side delivery
C - Center delivery
D - Right-side delivery
Figure 4.232: Operator Console
4. Using HEADER DOWN switch (A) on the GSL, lower header fully with lift cylinders fully retracted.
5. Using LEFT FLOAT SWITCH (B), push + to increase float or to decrease float on left side of header. Display (D) will indicate selected float value for left side, for example (8.0 L FLOAT R ##.#).
6. Repeat for right side float with RIGHTswitch (C). Display (D) will indicate float value for both sides, for example (8.0 L FLOAT R 3.0).
OPERATION
Page 295
214737 275 Revision A
Figure 4.233: Deck Shift Switch A - Deck Shift Switch B - Left-Side Delivery C - Center Delivery D - Right-Side Delivery
7. Select a second deck position with the DECK SHIFT switch (A).
8. Repeat Step 5, page 274 and Step 6, page 274 to set the float for the second deck position.
9. Select a third deck position with the DECK SHIFT switch (A).
10. Repeat Step 5, page 274 and Step 6, page 274 to set the float for the third deck position.
OPERATION
Page 296
214737 276 Revision A
4.7 Operating with an A Series Header The M155E4 is factory-equipped to run an A Series Auger Header.
4.7.1 Auger Speed
Auger Speed on A30D Headers
On A30D Auger Headers, the auger speed is fixed to the knife speed. The auger speed is NOT monitored and cannot be displayed.
Setting the Auger Speed on A40D Headers
Figure 4.234: Operator Console
CAUTION Check to be sure all bystanders have cleared the area.
To set the auger speed, follow these steps:
1. Engage header.
2. Set the HEADER INDEX switch (B) to OFF.
3. Set the REEL SPEED to the minimum setting. For instructions, refer to Reel and Disc Speed Switches, page 76.
4. Press DISPLAY SELECTOR switch (E) on the ground speed lever (GSL) or press FAST (C) or SLOW (D) on the cab display module (CDM) until ##.# AUGER SPEED is displayed at location (A).
OPERATION
Page 297
214737 277 Revision A
The displayed value (##.#) = auger speed setting.
NOTE:
Changes to reel speed will affect the auger speed directly. However, when adjusting reel speed, the auger speed value displayed on the CDM will not change.
5. Press FAST (C) or SLOW (D) on the CDM until the desired auger speed is achieved.
4.7.2 Reel Speed Refer to your header operators manual for recommended reel speed settings for your particular crop.
Displaying Reel Speed: A30S and A30D Headers
The reel is driven by the auger, and both are dependent on the main header drive speed. The auger and reel speeds can be changed by installing a different size auger and reel drive sprockets (contact your MacDon Dealer), or by varying the windrower engine rpm.
Figure 4.235: Operator Console
A - Display B - Header Index C - Auger Fast D - Auger Slow E - Fast F - Slow G - Display Selector
Display the reel speed as follows:
1. Engage header.
2. Set HEADER INDEX (B) to OFF.
3. On the ground speed lever (GSL), press DISPLAY SELECTOR (G) or SELECT SWITCH on the cab display module (CDM) until ##.## REEL RPM displays at (A).
##.## = 15.00 85.00
OPERATION
Page 298
214737 278 Revision A
Reel Speed on A40D Headers
The A40D Auger Header features a hydraulic direct drive reel with an operating speed range of 1585 rpm. Reel speed is controlled by the cab display module (CDM) and the ground speed lever (GSL) in the operators station.
NOTE:
Adjusting the reel speed will result in a change to auger speed unless the auger speed has been preset.
Adjusting Reel Only Speed
The A40D reel drive is hydraulically driven. Adjusting reel speed also changes auger speed, unless the auger speed is initially set at a predetermined value. The following procedure sets the auger speed so that subsequent reel speed adjustments will only affect the reel.
Figure 4.236: Operator Console
A - Display B - Header Index C - Auger Fast D - Auger Slow E - Fast F - Slow G - Display Selector
To prevent overspeeding the auger, initially set the speed of the reel and auger as follows:
NOTE:
Subsequent adjustments to reel speed do NOTaffect auger speed.
1. Engage header.
2. Set HEADER INDEX SWITCH (B) to OFF.
3. On ground speed lever (GSL) press REEL SLOW switch (F) until a beep is heard.
4. Display (A) shows ##.## REEL RPM.
5. On cab display module (CDM) press AUGER SLOW (D) or FAST (C) switch to set desired auger speed.
6. Display (A) shows ##.# AUGER SPEED.
OPERATION
Page 299
214737 279 Revision A
7. On the GSL, press REEL SLOW (F) or FAST (E) switch to set desired reel speed.
8. Display (A) shows ##.## REEL RPM.
NOTE:
The auger speed will NOT change if the reel speed is adjusted.
Adjusting Reel Speed: Windrower in Motion
Figure 4.237: Operator Console
A - Display B - Header Index C - Auger Fast D - Auger Slow E - Reel Fast F - Reel Slow G - Display Selector
The reel speed adjustment range is from 15 to 85 rpm. Adjust the reel speed while the machine is in operation as follows:
1. Set HEADER INDEX switch (B) to OFF.
2. Press REEL SLOW (F) or REEL FAST (E) on the ground speed lever (GSL) until display (A) shows ##.## REEL RPM with desired reel speed.
The displayed value (##.##) = reel speed (rpm or mph or km/h26).
NOTE:
Adjusting reel speed will alter auger speed unless the auger speed has been preset.
Setting Reel to Ground Speed
Setting the speed of the reel relative to ground speed (using the header index function) automatically adjusts the reel speed with changes to ground speed. Benefits may include improved crop flow and reduced operator fatigue.
Setting the reel to ground speed requires setting the minimum reel speed and the reel index.
OPERATION
26. Depending on CDM programming.
Page 300
214737 280 Revision A
Figure 4.238: Operator Console
CAUTION Check to be sure all bystanders have cleared the area.
1. Set the minimum reel speed as follows:
IMPORTANT:
Set the minimum reel speed while stationary with the ground speed lever (GSL) in the N-DETENT position.
a. Engage header.
b. Set HEADER INDEX switch (B) to ON.
c. Press the DISPLAY SELECTOR button (E) on the GSL to display ##.## MIN REEL at location (A) or press the FAST (C) or SLOW (D) switch.
The displayed value (##.##) = reel speed (rpm or mph or km/h27).
d. Press FAST (C) or SLOW (D) until the desired minimum reel speed is achieved.
2. Set the reel index as follows:
IMPORTANT:
Reel index can only be adjusted while operating at a ground speed faster than minimum reel speed plus header index value.
OPERATION
27. Depending on CDM programming.
Page 301
214737 281 Revision A
Figure 4.239: Operator Console
a. Set the HEADER INDEX switch (B) to ON.
b. Press the DISPLAY SELECTOR button (E) on the GSL to display ##.## ##.# REEL IND28 or press the FAST (C) or SLOW (D) switch.
The displayed value (##.##) = reel speed (mph or km/h or rpm27 )
The displayed value (##.#) = reel index value
c. Press FAST (C) or SLOW (D) until the desired reel index value is achieved.
NOTE:
The reel will continue operating at the minimum reel speed setting when ground speed drops below the set value.
The cab display module (CDM) display (A) will flash ##.## MIN REEL (RPM or MPH or KPH27 ) prompting you to change the minimum set-point or increase ground speed if the total of ground speed, plus the index value is LESS THAN the minimum reel speed set-point.
Examples:
Windrower is operating at 8 mph with HEADER INDEX ON, and set at -1.0. Display shows: 7.0 -1.0 REEL IND where 7.0 (8.0-1.0) is the reel speed in mph and -1.0 is the header index setting.
Windrower speed drops to 7.5 mph at same HEADER INDEX setting. Display shows: 6.5 -1.0 REEL IND where 6.5 (7.5-1.0) is the reel speed in mph and -1.0 is the header index setting.
Windrower is operating at 8 mph with HEADER INDEX ON, and set at 2.0.
OPERATION
28. REEL IND will only be displayed when operating at a ground speed faster than minimum reel speed plus header index value.
Page 302
214737 282 Revision A
Display shows: 10.0 2.0 REEL IND where 10.0 (8+2.0) is the reel speed in mph and 2.0 is the header index setting.
4.7.3 Knife Speed The ideal cutting speed should achieve a clean cut. Crop types and conditions usually influence the knife and ground speeds.
When the header is first attached to the windrower, the windrower control module (WCM) receives a code from the header that determines the knife speed range and the minimum speed. The desired speed can be programmed on the cab display module (CDM) and stored in the WCM memory so the knife will operate at the original set-point after the header is detached and reattached to the windrower. If no header code is detected, the CDM displays NO HEADER and the knife speed reverts to the operators selection from a range of 8001000 strokes per minute. Refer to the header operators manual for the suggested knife speed for a variety of crops and conditions.
NOTE:
The knife speed cannot be programmed outside the range specified for each header.
NOTE:
The knife speed can be adjusted without shutting down the machine; however, the windrower should be stopped before adjusting CDM settings.
To adjust the knife speed, refer to Setting the Header Knife Speed, page 99.
Setting Knife Speed While in Motion
Figure 4.240: Operator Console
CAUTION Check to be sure all bystanders have cleared the area.
OPERATION
Page 303
214737 283 Revision A
Display and set knife speed while the windrower is moving as follows:
1. Engage header.
2. Press PROGRAM (D) and SELECT (E) on cab display module (CDM) until display (A) shows #### KNIFE SPM.
The displayed value (####) = strokes per minute.
3. Press LEFTARROW (B) or RIGHTARROW (C) until desired knife speed is displayed at (A).
OPERATION
Page 304
214737 284 Revision A
4.8 Operating with an R Series or R1 Series Header
Figure 4.241: Kit MD #B5510
The R80 and R85 4.0 m (13 ft.) headers are shipped without the motor and hoses installed. The installation of a separate motor and hose bundle is necessary.
If required, obtain kit (MD #B5510) from your MacDon Dealer, and install it in accordance with the instructions supplied with the kit.
NOTE:
Hydraulic Coupler kit (MD #B5497) is also available for quick attachment and removal of multiple header types.
R1 Series headers come from the Dealer with the required completion package (MD #B6272).
A Disc Drive kit (MD #B4657) is also required in order for the windrower to operate the header.
4.8.1 Disc Speed The ideal disc speed should achieve a clean cut. Crop types and conditions affect disc and ground speeds.
Refer to the header operators manual for the suggested disc speed for a variety of crops and conditions.
Setting Disc Speed
Figure 4.242: Operator Console
A - Display B - Header Index C - Fast D - Slow E - Display Selector
OPERATION
Page 305
214737 285 Revision A
CAUTION Check to be sure all bystanders have cleared the area.
Follow these steps to set the disc speed:
1. Engage header.
2. Set HEADER INDEX switch (B) to OFF.
3. Press FAST (C) or SLOW (D) on ground speed lever (GSL) until display (A) shows #### DISC RPM with desired disc speed.
Displayed value (####) = disc speed (rpm).
OPERATION
Page 307
214737 287 Revision A
5 Maintenance and Servicing The following section will guide you through the windrowers basic maintenance and service requirements.
5.1 Preparation for Servicing
WARNING To avoid personal injury, before servicing adapter/header or opening drive covers:
Fully lower the header. If necessary to service in the raised position, always engage lift safety props.
Disengage drives.
Stop engine, and remove key.
Wait for all moving parts to stop.
Page 308
214737 288 Revision A
5.2 Engine Compartment Hood The engine compartment hood has two open positions. The lowest is for general maintenance such as checking and adding fluid, servicing the cooling box, etc. The highest position provides full access to the engine compartment.
5.2.1 Opening Hood (Lower Position)
WARNING To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operators seat for any reason.
1. Stop the engine and remove the key.
Figure 5.1: Hood Open (Lower Position)
2. Locate latch (A) behind the grill and lift to release the hood.
3. Raise hood until strap (B), which should be looped under hooks (C) and (D), stops at approximately a 40 angle.
4. Remove strap (B) from hook (C) and allow the hood to rise slightly farther.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
Page 309
214737 289 Revision A
5.2.2 Closing Hood (Lower Position)
Figure 5.2: Hood Open (Lower Position)
1. Grasp the strap at location (B) and loop under upper hook (C).
IMPORTANT:
Failure to hook strap may result in it becoming entangled with the screen cleaners or the latch.
2. Pull down on strap, grasp the hood when within reach, and lower until hood engages latch (A).
5.2.3 Opening Hood (Highest Position)
WARNING To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operators seat for any reason.
1. Stop the engine and remove the key.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
Page 310
214737 290 Revision A
Figure 5.3: Hood Open (Highest Position)
2. Locate latch (A) behind the grill and lift to release the hood.
3. Raise hood until strap (B), which should be looped under hooks (C) and (D), stops at approximately a 40 angle.
4. Remove strap (B) from hook (C) and allow hood to rise slightly farther.
5. Remove the strap from hook (D) and allow the hood to rise fully to approximately 65.
5.2.4 Closing Hood (Highest Position)
Figure 5.4: Hood Open (Highest Position)
1. Pull down on strap (B) and loop under lower hook (D).
2. Grasp strap (B) and loop under upper hook (C).
IMPORTANT:
Failure to hook strap may result in it becoming entangled with the screen cleaners or the latch.
3. Pull down on strap (B), grasp the hood when within reach, and lower until hood engages latch (A).
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
Page 311
214737 291 Revision A
5.3 Maintenance Platforms Swing-away platforms and stairs are provided on both sides of the windrower for access to the operators station and engine bay. The platforms can be swung away from the windrower to allow access to the hydraulics plumbing or battery.
The maintenance platforms have three positions:
Closed position
Open standard position
Open major servicing position
5.3.1 Opening Platforms (Standard Position)
CAUTION Do NOTstand on an unlocked platform. It is unstable and may cause you to fall.
Figure 5.5: Platforms
This procedure describes how to open the cab-forward left platform (A). The same procedure is used for the right platform (B).
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
Page 312
214737 292 Revision A
Figure 5.6: Platform Latch
1. Push latch (A) and pull platform (B) toward walking beam until it stops and latch engages in open position.
NOTE:
Ensure the platform is latched before using.
5.3.2 Closing Platforms (Standard Position)
CAUTION Do NOTstand on an unlocked platform. It is unstable and may cause you to fall.
Figure 5.7: Platforms
This procedure describes how to close the cab-forward left platform (A). The same procedure is used for the right platform (B).
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
Page 313
214737 293 Revision A
Figure 5.8: Platform Latch
1. If platform is latched in the open position, push latch (A) to unlock it.
2. Grasp handle (B) on platform and push forward until it stops and latch (A) engages.
NOTE:
Ensure the platform is latched properly before using.
5.3.3 Opening Platforms (Major Service Position) To improve access to the hydraulics plumbing or battery, the platforms can be swung away from the windrower.
CAUTION Do NOTstand on an unlocked platform. It is unstable and may cause you to fall.
Figure 5.9: Platforms
This procedure describes how to open the cab-forward left platform (A). The same procedure is used for the right platform (B).
Open the hood. Refer to 5.2.1 Opening Hood (Lower Position), page 288.
IMPORTANT:
Failure to open hood will result in damage to the hood when the platform is moved.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
Page 314
214737 294 Revision A
Figure 5.10: Platform Latch
1. Unlock latch (A) and move platform (B) toward open position. Do NOT lock in full aft position.
Figure 5.11: Platform
2. Remove the nut and bolt that secure link (A) to the frame. Swing link (A) out of the way.
3. Pull the front (cab-forward) end of platform away from frame while moving it towards the walking beam. The aft corner of platform (B) should project slightly into the engine bay when the opening is optimum.
5.3.4 Closing Platforms (Major Service Position)
CAUTION Do NOTstand on an unlocked platform. It is unstable and may cause you to fall.
NOTE:
This procedure is applicable to both platforms. Left side is shown.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
Page 315
214737 295 Revision A
Figure 5.12: Platform
1. Swing link (A) all the way forward.
2. Push the front (cab-forward) end (B) of platform towards the frame while moving the platform forward (cab-forward).
3. Position link (A) on bracket and install bolt and nut. Tighten enough so that link can still swivel on bracket.
Figure 5.13: Platform Latch
4. Move platform (B) forward (cab-forward) until it stops and latch (A) engages.
5. Close the hood. Refer to 5.2.2 Closing Hood (Lower Position), page 289.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
Page 316
214737 296 Revision A
5.4 Windrower Lubrication WARNING
To avoid personal injury, before servicing windrower or opening drive covers, follow procedures in the SAFETY chapter.
Figure 5.14: Lubrication Interval Decal
The greasing points are marked on the machine by decals showing a grease gun and grease interval in hours of operation.
Log hours of operation and use the Maintenance Checklist provided to keep a record of scheduled maintenance. Refer to 5.12.1 Maintenance Schedule/Record, page 422.
5.4.1 Lubricating the Windrower
WARNING To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operators seat for any reason.
1. To avoid injecting dirt and grit, wipe grease fitting with a clean cloth before greasing.
2. Inject grease through fitting with grease gun until grease overflows fitting, except where noted. Refer to 8.1.3 Lubricants, Fluids, and System Capacities, page 452.
3. Leave excess grease on fitting to keep out dirt.
4. Replace any loose or broken fittings immediately.
5. If fitting will NOT take grease, remove and clean thoroughly. Also clean lubricant passageway. Replace fitting if necessary.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
Page 317
214737 297 Revision A
5.4.2 Lubrication Points
Figure 5.15: Lubrication Points
A - Forked Caster Wheel Bearing (Two Places) (Outer Both Wheels) B - Top-Link (Two Places) (Both Sides) C - Lubrication Decal (MD #183411) D - Caster Pivot (Both Sides) E - Forked/Formed Caster Wheel Bearing (Two Places) (Inner Both Wheels) (50 Hrs/250 Hrs)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
Page 318
214737 298 Revision A
5.5 Operators Station
5.5.1 Seat Belts Seat belts are an important component of the windrowers operator safety system. The following checks and service points will ensure that seat belts are functioning properly:
Keep sharp edges and items that can cause damage away from the belts.
Check belts, buckles, retractors, tethers, slack take-up system, and mounting bolts for damage.
Check that bolts are tight on the seat bracket or mounting.
Replace all parts that have damage or wear.
Replace belts that have cuts that can weaken the belt.
Keep seat belts clean and dry. Clean only with a soap solution and warm water. Do NOT use bleach or dye on the belts, as this may weaken the material.
5.5.2 Safety Systems Perform the following checks on the operators presence and engine lock-out systems every year or every 500 hours of operationwhichever occurs first.
Checking Operator Presence System
The operator presence system is a safety feature designed to deactivate or alert selected systems when the Operator is not seated at the operators station.
CAUTION Check to be sure all bystanders have cleared the area.
CAUTION Park on a flat, level surface with the header on the ground, the ground speed lever in N-DETENT position, and the steering wheel in locked position (centered). Wait for the CDM to beep and display an In Park message to confirm the park brakes have engaged.
1. With the windrower engine running, place the ground speed lever (GSL) in NEUTRAL and turn the steering wheel until it locks.
2. With everyone clear of the machine, engage header drive. Refer to 3.17.1 Header Drive Switch, page 73.
3. With header drive running, stand up out of the seat. In approximately 5 seconds, the header should shut off. If NOT, the Operator Presence System requires adjustment. See your MacDon Dealer.
4. To restart the header, move the HEADER DRIVE switch to OFF position and back to the ON position again.
5. With the engine running, position the GSL in NEUTRAL and in N-DETENT. Refer to 3.16 Windrower Controls, page 71.
6. Swivel the operators station, but do NOT lock into position.
7. Move GSL out of N-DETENT. The engine should shut down and the display will flash LOCK SEAT BASE CENTER STEERING WHEEL NOT IN NEUTRAL.
8. Swivel and lock the operators station, and the display should return to normal. If the engine does NOT shut down, the seat position switches require adjustment. See your MacDon Dealer.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
Page 319
214737 299 Revision A
9. With the windrower moving at less than 8 km/h (5 mph), stand up out of the seat. The cab display module (CDM) will flash NO OPERATOR on the upper line and ENGINE SHUT DOWN 543210 on the lower line accompanied by a steady tone. At 0, the engine shuts down. If the engine does NOT shut down, the Operator Presence System requires adjustment. See your MacDon Dealer.
10. With the windrower moving at more than 8 km/h (5 mph), stand up out of the seat. The CDM should beep once and display NO OPERATOR on the lower line. If NOT, the Operator Presence System requires adjustment. See your MacDon Dealer.
Checking Engine Interlock
CAUTION Check to be sure all bystanders have cleared the area.
1. With the engine shut down and the header drive switch engaged, try to start the engine. If the engine turns over, the system requires adjustment. See your MacDon Dealer.
2. With the engine shut down, steering wheel NOTcentered, and the ground speed lever (GSL) in NEUTRAL, but NOT in N-DETENT, try to start the engine. The cab display module (CDM) will flash NOT IN NEUTRAL on the display upper line and CENTER STEERING WHEEL on the lower line, accompanied by a short beep with each flash and the engine should NOT start. If the engine starts, the system requires adjustment. See your MacDon Dealer.
A properly functioning system should operate as follows:
The engine should start ONLY when the GSL is in N-DETENT, steering wheel is locked in the CENTER position, seat base is latched in either engine-forward or cab-forward direction, and header drive switch is in the OFF position.
The brake should engage and the machine should NOT move after engine start-up, under the above conditions.
The steering wheel should NOT lock with the engine running and the GSL out of the N-DETENT.
The machine should NOT move with the engine running and with the steering wheel still centered, when the GSL is pulled straight out of N-DETENT (NOT in forward or reverse).
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
Page 320
214737 300 Revision A
5.5.3 Ground Speed Lever (GSL) Adjustments
Adjusting Ground Speed Lever (GSL) Lateral Movement
DANGER To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of machine, always stop engine and remove key from ignition before leaving operators seat for any reason.
The ground speed lever (GSL) should easily move into the N-DETENT by itself.
In the cab, adjust the lateral pivot resistance as follows:
Figure 5.16: Control Panel
1. Remove the five screws (A) securing control panel (B) to console, remove panel, and store in the tray.
Figure 5.17: Control Panel Removed
2. Back off the jam nut (A) and turn nut (B) to either tighten or loosen the pivot. The nut should be tightened to snug and then backed off 1/2 turn.
3. Tighten jam nut (A).
4. Check movement of GSL.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
Page 321
214737 301 Revision A
Figure 5.18: Control Panel
5. Reinstall control panel (B) with five screws (A).
Adjusting Ground Speed Lever (GSL) Fore-Aft Movement
The GSL should remain as positioned by the Operator yet be movable without excessive force.
Adjust as follows:
Figure 5.19: Seat Adjustment Handle
1. Pull handle (A) toward the operators seat and move the console fully forward to ease accessibility from the underside of the console.
Figure 5.20: GSL Adjustment Spring
2. Set spring dimension (B) to 32 mm (1-1/4 in.).
3. To increase the pivot resistance, turn the nut (A) clockwise to compress the spring.
4. To decrease the resistance, turn the nut (A) counterclockwise to release the spring tension.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
Page 322
214737 302 Revision A
5.5.4 Steering Adjustments
Checking Steering Link Pivots
The following checks should be performed every year:
WARNING To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operators seat for any reason.
Figure 5.21: Operator Console
1. Place ground speed lever (GSL) (A) in N-DETENT.
2. Shut down the engine, and remove the key.
Figure 5.22: Steering Rods
3. Check steering rod bolts (A) for looseness and ball joints (B) for any perceptible movement.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
Page 323
214737 303 Revision A
Figure 5.23: Steering Rods (Pump End)
Figure 5.24: Steering Link
4. Check steering link bolts (A) for looseness and ball joints (B) for any perceptible movement.
Figure 5.25: Steering Link
5. If bolts are loose:
a. Back off jam nut (A).
b. Tighten inside nut (B) to 95108 Nm (7080 lbfft).
c. Hold inside nut (B) and tighten jam nut (A) to 8195 Nm (6070 lbfft).
6. To replace loose steering link ball joints or steering rod ball joints, contact your MacDon Dealer.
7. After replacing parts or making adjustments, perform checks for neutral interlock and steering lock. Refer to 5.5.2 Safety Systems, page 298.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
Page 324
214737 304 Revision A
Checking and Adjusting Steering Chain Tension
WARNING To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operators seat for any reason.
1. Check steering for binding or excessive play which may be the result of the steering chain being too tight or too loose. If the steering chain does NOT require adjustment, skip the following steps.
2. If the chain tension requires adjustment, swivel the operators station to position steering column close to the door.
Figure 5.26: Steering Tension Adjuster
3. At the base of the steering column, check dimension (C) at spring. It should be 16 mm (5/8 in.).
4. Adjust dimension as follows:
a. Loosen nut (A) and turn nut (B) to achieve 16 mm (5/8 in.) dimension (C).
b. Tighten nut (A) against nut (B) to secure position.
c. Check that steering chain is taut and steering shaft is free to rotate.
5.5.5 Cab Suspension Limit Straps The cab suspension limit straps are located next to the front suspension on both sides of the cab. These straps protect cab suspension components by preventing the cab shocks from fully extending. The straps do not require regular maintenance, but they should be inspected every 100 hours.
Figure 5.27: Cab Suspension
1. Inspect the material on straps (A) for fraying or tearing.
2. If material is torn or frayed, contact your MacDon Dealer for replacement straps.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
Page 325
214737 305 Revision A
5.6 Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning (HVAC) System
5.6.1 Fresh Air Intake Filter The fresh air filter is located outside the right rear of the cab and should be serviced every 50 hours under normal conditions and more frequently in severe conditions.
Removing Fresh Air Filter
WARNING To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operators seat for any reason.
1. Open the right cab-forward platform. Refer to 5.3.1 Opening Platforms (Standard Position), page 291.
Figure 5.28: Filter Tray
2. Rotate latch (A) and slide filter tray (B) out of the housing.
Figure 5.29: Fresh Air Filter
3. Remove filter (A) from tray (B).
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
Page 326
214737 306 Revision A
Inspecting and Cleaning Fresh Air Filter Element
Figure 5.30: Fresh Air Filter Element
1. Tap the sides of filter element (A) gently to loosen dirt. Do NOT tap element against a hard surface.
2. Using a dry element cleaner gun, clean element with compressed air.
IMPORTANT:
Air pressure must NOTexceed 414 kPa (60 psi). Do NOT direct air against outside of element, as dirt might be forced through to inside.
3. Hold the air nozzle next to the filter elements inner surface and move up and down pleats.
4. Repeat Steps 1, page 306 to 3, page 306 to remove remaining dirt as required.
5. Hold a bright light inside the element and check carefully for holes. Discard any element that shows the slightest hole.
6. Check outer screen for dents. Vibration would quickly wear a hole in the filter.
7. Check filter gasket for cracks, tears, or other signs of damage. If gasket is damaged or missing, replace element.
Installing Fresh Air Filter
Refer to 8.1.4 Filter Part Numbers, page 453 for part number.
Figure 5.31: Fresh Air Filter
1. Clean tray (B) and interior of filter housing.
2. Place filter (A) onto tray (B).
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
Page 327
214737 307 Revision A
Figure 5.32: Cab Fresh Air Filter Access
3. Slide filter tray (B) into housing.
NOTE:
If necessary, move the Global Positioning System (GPS) wiring harnesses to the left (engine side) of the housing before inserting the filter tray.
4. Close and latch housing door (A).
5.6.2 Cleaning Return Air Filter The return air filter is located behind the operators seat on the cab wall and should be serviced every 100 hours.
Servicing the Return Air Cleaner/Filter
WARNING To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operators seat for any reason.
If replacing the return air filter, refer to 8.1.4 Filter Part Numbers, page 453 for the part number.
Figure 5.33: Return Air Filter
1. Unscrew the two knobs (A) attaching cover and filter to cab wall, and remove the cover and filter assembly (B).
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
Page 328
214737 308 Revision A
Figure 5.34: Return Air Filter
2. Separate the filter (B) from the cover (A).
3. Clean or replace the filter. If cleaning filter, refer to Cleaning Return Air Cleaner/Filter, page 308.
4. Assemble the cleaner (B) and cover (A), and position on cab wall over opening.
Figure 5.35: Return Air Filter
5. Secure filter assembly (B) to cab wall with knobs (A).
Cleaning Return Air Cleaner/Filter
Clean the electrostatic filter as follows:
Figure 5.36: Return Air Filter
1. Mix a solution of warm water and detergent in a suitable container and soak the filter (A) for a few minutes.
2. Agitate to flush out the dirt.
3. Rinse with clean water, and then dry with compressed air.
4. Inspect filter for damage, separation, and holes. Replace if damaged.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
Page 329
214737 309 Revision A
5.6.3 Air Conditioning Condenser The air conditioning condenser should be cleaned daily with compressed air. More frequent cleaning may be necessary in severe conditions.
Cleaning the condenser can be done at the same time as the radiator, oil cooler, and charge air cooler. Refer to 5.8 Maintaining Engine Cooling Box, page 355.
5.6.4 Air Conditioning (A/C) Evaporator Core The A/C evaporator should be checked annually for cleanliness. If the A/C system produces insufficient cooling, a possible cause is clogged evaporator fins. Fins will clog up from the side opposite the blowers. The evaporator is located inside the heating air conditioning unit under the cab.
Removing Air Conditioning (A/C) Cover
WARNING To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operators seat for any reason.
1. Stop the engine, and remove the key.
Figure 5.37: HVAC System
2. Loosen clamps (A) on the two drain hoses connected to the A/C drain tubes, and pull the hoses off the A/C drain tubes.
Figure 5.38: A/C Cover
3. Remove the fasteners (A) that attach the cover to the housing. Remove the cover.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
Page 330
214737 310 Revision A
Cleaning Air Conditioning (A/C) Evaporator Core
WARNING To avoid cuts from evaporator fins, do NOTuse bare hands to brush away clogs.
Figure 5.39: HVAC System
1. Use a vacuum cleaner or compressed air to remove dirt from inside the A/C unit.
2. Blow compressed air through the evaporator fins from blower side (A) first. Direct the air straight into the evaporator to prevent fin damage. A nozzle extension makes this procedure easier.
3. Repeat Step 2, page 310 at the side (B) opposite the blowers.
Figure 5.40: HVAC System
4. If you cannot feel the compressed air blowing through the evaporator core, proceed as follows:
a. Protect blower motor (A) from water.
b. Soak evaporator core (B) with warm water using a low pressure hose. Let soak for several minutes.
c. Blow compressed air through the core from blower side (C).
d. Repeat the soaking procedure until air blows through the evaporator freely.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
Page 331
214737 311 Revision A
Installing Air Conditioning (A/C) Cover
Figure 5.41: A/C Cover
1. Straighten any bent fins.
2. Position cover (B) onto A/C unit, and attach with eight screws (A).
Figure 5.42: A/C Drains
3. Reattach drain hoses to drain tubes and secure with hose clamps (A).
5.6.5 Air Conditioning (A/C) Compressor The compressor is protected from excessively low suction and high discharge pressures by two switches that shut down the compressor to prevent damage to the system. These switches do not require regular maintenance. Contact your MacDon Dealer if you suspect a problem with the switches.
The low pressure switch
The low pressure switch is closed when there is sufficient refrigerant in the system and the pressure is above 234 kPa (34 psi). The system remains pressurized at about 414483 kPa (6070 psi) with the compressor off.
When the A/C system is turned on, the compressor starts because the system pressure is above 234 kPa (34 psi). As the system gets colder, the suction pressure (low side) drops. At 2486 kPa (3.512.5 psi) (for 2014 and prior: 1455 kPa [28 psi]), the switch opens and shuts down the compressor.
When the pressure rises above 172 kPa (25 psi), the switch closes and the compressor restarts. The low pressure switch is located at the outlet of the evaporator (under cab in the A/C box).
The high pressure switch
The high pressure switch is closed when there is sufficient refrigerant in the system. The system remains pressurized at about 414483 kPa (6070 psi) with the compressor off.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
Page 332
214737 312 Revision A
If the pressure exceeds 24822620 kPa (360380 psi) during operation, the valve opens. It will close when pressure falls below 15171931 kPa (220280 psi). The high pressure switch is located on the receiver drier (right cab-forward frame rail, behind the fuse panel).
If the compressor cycles rapidly due to rapid pressure changes, the cab display module (CDM) displays a warning CHECK A/C SYSTEM. Contact your Dealer.
Servicing the Air Conditioning Compressor
Refer to Replacing Air Conditioner (A/C) Compressor Belt, page 354 for belt replacement procedure.
See your MacDon Dealer for all other servicing procedures.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
Page 333
214737 313 Revision A
5.7 Engine
CAUTION NEVER operate engine in a closed building. Proper ventilation is required to avoid exhaust gas hazards.
Keep the engine clean. Straw and chaff on a hot engine are a fire hazard.
NEVER use gasoline, naphtha, or any other volatile material for cleaning purposes. These materials are toxic and/or flammable.
5.7.1 General Engine Inspection Engine inspection should be performed by your MacDon Dealer.
Refer to your engine manual for further information (Owners Manual QSB 4.5 and QSB 6.7 Engine Cummins #4021531 are supplied with your machine).
5.7.2 Turning the Engine Manually To manually turn the engine with the flywheel, an access hole is provided on the left cab-forward side for a barring tool that is available from Cummins.
WARNING To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operators seat for any reason.
1. Stop engine and remove ignition key.
2. Open the hood to the lowest position. For instructions, refer to 5.2.1 Opening Hood (Lower Position), page 288.
3. Open left cab-forward side platform. For instructions, refer to 5.3.1 Opening Platforms (Standard Position), page 291.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
Page 334
214737 314 Revision A
Figure 5.43: Batteries
4. Remove positive (red) cables (A) from battery posts first, then remove negative (black) cables (B) from remaining battery posts.
Figure 5.44: Access Hole Location for Barring Tool
5. Clean the area around the plastic cap on access hole (A). Remove the cap.
IMPORTANT:
Ensure nothing falls into gearbox oil reservoir.
6. Insert barring tool (B) into the flywheel housing until it engages the ring gear.
7. Attach a 1/2 in. square drive ratchet or breaker bar and turn.
8. Remove barring tool (B), and then clean oil from around access hole (A).
9. Clean plastic cap and reinstall in access hole (A) with silicone sealant.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
Page 335
214737 315 Revision A
Figure 5.45: Batteries
IMPORTANT:
Batteries are negative grounded. Always connect starter cable to the positive (+) terminal of battery and battery ground cable to negative () terminal of battery. Reversed polarity in battery or alternator may result in permanent damage to electrical system.
10. Attach negative (black) cables (B) to negative posts on batteries, and tighten clamps. Then attach positive (red) cables (A) to positive post on batteries and tighten clamps.
11. Position plastic covers onto clamps.
12. Close the hood. Refer to 5.2.2 Closing Hood (Lower Position), page 289.
13. Close the platform. Refer to 5.3.2 Closing Platforms (Standard Position), page 292.
5.7.3 Checking Engine Oil Level Check engine oil level daily (every 10 hours) and watch for any signs of leakage.
CAUTION To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of machine, always stop engine and remove key from ignition before leaving operators seat for any reason.
NOTE:
During the break-in period, a higher than usual oil consumption should be considered normal.
1. Open the hood to the lowest position. Refer to 5.2.1 Opening Hood (Lower Position), page 288.
2. Operate the engine at low idle and check for leaks at the filter and drain plug.
3. Stop the engine and remove the key. Wait about 5 minutes.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
Page 336
214737 316 Revision A
Figure 5.46: Engine Oil Level
4. Remove dipstick (A) by turning it counterclockwise to unlock.
5. Wipe the dipstick clean and reinsert it into the engine.
6. Remove the dipstick again and check the oil level.
Figure 5.47: Engine Oil Level
7. Add oil if level is below low (L) mark. Refer to Adding Engine Oil, page 318.
IMPORTANT:
Oil level should be maintained between low (L) and high (H) mark on the dipstick.
Figure 5.48: Engine Oil Level
8. Replace dipstick (A) and turn it clockwise to lock.
9. Close the hood. Refer to 5.2.2 Closing Hood (Lower Position), page 289.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
Page 337
214737 317 Revision A
5.7.4 Changing Engine Oil
Draining Engine Oil
WARNING To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operators seat for any reason.
NOTE:
The engine should be warm when you change the oil.
1. Stop the engine and remove the key.
2. Place a drain pan with a capacity of about 24 liters (6 US gallons) under the engine oil drain.
Figure 5.49: Engine Oil Drain Plug
3. Remove oil drain plug (A) and allow the oil to drain.
4. When all of the oil has drained out of the tank, replace drain plug (A).
5. Check the condition of the used oil. If either of the following is evident, have your Dealer correct the problem before starting the engine:
Thin black oil indicates fuel dilution.
Milky discoloration indicates coolant dilution.
6. Properly dispose of used oil.
NOTE:
Replace oil filter each time engine oil is changed. Refer to Replacing Engine Oil Filter, page 317.
IMPORTANT:
Do NOT run engine without oil in the crankcase. Refer to Adding Engine Oil, page 318.
Replacing Engine Oil Filter
NOTE:
Replace oil filter each time engine oil is changed. Refer to 8.1.4 Filter Part Numbers, page 453 for recommended oil filter to use.
1. Open the hood. Refer to 5.2.1 Opening Hood (Lower Position), page 288.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
Page 338
214737 318 Revision A
Figure 5.50: Engine Oil Filter
2. Clean around filter head (A).
3. Remove filter (B).
4. Clean gasket mating surface.
5. Apply a thin film of clean oil to the gasket on the new filter.
6. Screw the new filter onto the filter mount until the gasket contacts the filter head.
7. Tighten the filter an additional 1/2 to 3/4 turn by hand.
IMPORTANT:
Do NOT use a filter wrench to install the oil filter. Overtightening can damage the gasket and filter.
8. Properly dispose of used filter.
Adding Engine Oil
Refer to 8.1.3 Lubricants, Fluids, and System Capacities, page 452 for recommended lubricants.
DANGER To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of machine, always stop engine and remove key from ignition before leaving operator's seat for any reason.
1. Stop the engine and remove the key. Wait about 5 minutes.
2. Open the hood. Refer to 5.2.1 Opening Hood (Lower Position), page 288.
Figure 5.51: Oil Filler Cap
3. Remove filler cap (A) by turning it counterclockwise.
4. Carefully pour in the new oil. Use a funnel to avoid spillage.
CAUTION Do NOT fill above the HIGH mark.
5. Replace oil filler cap (A) and turn it clockwise until snug.
6. Check the oil level. Refer to 5.7.3 Checking Engine Oil Level, page 315.
7. Close the hood. Refer to 5.2.2 Closing Hood (Lower Position), page 289.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
Page 339
214737 319 Revision A
5.7.5 Air Intake System IMPORTANT:
Do NOT run engine with air cleaner disconnected or disassembled.
Figure 5.52: Air Intake System
Engine intake air is drawn through a duct (A) from the cooling box that precleans the air and then through a dual element filter (B).
The air cleaner canister is equipped with an aspirator (C) that removes dust continuously from the air cleaner housing.
Figure 5.53: Air Restriction Indicator
The air cleaner is also equipped with a restriction switch (A) that activates a warning display and tone on the cab display module (CDM) when the filter system requires servicing.
After servicing the filter, the restriction switch must be reset by pushing the button at the end of the switch.
If you need to replace filters, refer to 8.1.4 Filter Part Numbers, page 453.
IMPORTANT:
Do NOT run engine with air cleaner disconnected or disassembled.
Over-servicing the filter element increases the risk of dirt being ingested by the engine and severely damaging the engine.
Filter servicing should only be performed when the CDM indicates ENGINE AIR FILTER or at the specified interval. Refer to 5.12.1 Maintenance Schedule/Record, page 422.
Removing Primary Air Filter
1. Open the hood. Refer to 5.2.1 Opening Hood (Lower Position), page 288.
2. Open the maintenance platform on right cab-forward side. Refer to 5.3.1 Opening Platforms (Standard Position), page 291.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
Page 340
214737 320 Revision A
Figure 5.54: Air Cleaner Housing and Cover
3. Unlatch the clips (A) that secure the cover (B) and plenum (C) to the air cleaner housing (D).
Figure 5.55: Air Cleaner Housing
4. Carefully move the cover (A) to dislodge it from the notches (B) at the bottom of the air cleaner housing (C).
Figure 5.56: Air Cleaner
5. Check the aspirator duct opening (A) for obstructions or damage. Clean if necessary.
6. Place cover (B) on windrower frame.
NOTE:
Hoses (C) can be left connected to the cover.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
Page 341
214737 321 Revision A
Figure 5.57: Air Cleaner Primary Filer
7. Pull out the primary filter (A).
8. If necessary, also change the secondary filter. Refer to Replacing the Secondary Air Filter, page 323.
IMPORTANT:
Do NOT remove the secondary filter unless it needs replacing. It must never be cleaned.
Replace secondary filter annually or after every third primary filter change, even if it looks clean.
If the secondary filter looks dirty, a further inspection will be required. Examine filter canister for cracks and replace as necessary. Ensure canister retaining latches are secure.
IMPORTANT:
Clean the inside of the housing and cover carefully. Dirt left in the air cleaner housing may be harmful to your engine.
Use a clean, water-dampened cloth to wipe every surface clean.
Check the housing visually to make sure it is clean before putting in a new filter.
Always clean the gasket sealing surfaces of the housing. An improper gasket seal is one of the most common causes of engine contamination.
Make sure that all hardened dirt ridges are completely removed wherever filter gaskets contact the cleaner housing.
Check for uneven dirt patterns on your old filter. Your old filter is a valuable clue to potential dust leakage or gasket sealing problems. A pattern on the filter clean side is a sign that the old filter was not firmly sealed or that a dust leak exists.
Make certain the cause of that leak is identified and rectified before replacing the filter.
Recheck to see if the sealing surface in the housing is clean.
Installing Primary Air Filter
NOTE:
For the primary air filter replacement part number, refer to 8.1.4 Filter Part Numbers, page 453.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
Page 342
214737 322 Revision A
Figure 5.58: Air Cleaner Primary Filter
1. Insert new primary filter (A) into canister and push into place, ensuring that element is firmly seated in canister.
Figure 5.59: Air Cleaner
2. Seat the tabs at the bottom of the cover (A) to the notches (B) at the bottom of the air cleaner housing (C).
Figure 5.60: Air Cleaner Cover and Housing
3. Secure cover (B) and plenum (C) to the air cleaner housing (D) using the four clips (A).
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
Page 343
214737 323 Revision A
Figure 5.61: Air Cleaner Restriction Switch
4. Reset the restriction switch by pressing the button at the end of the switch (A).
5. Close the hood. Refer to 5.2.2 Closing Hood (Lower Position), page 289.
6. Close the maintenance platform. Refer to 5.3.2 Closing Platforms (Standard Position), page 292.
Cleaning the Engine Air Cleaners Primary Filter
The air cleaners primary filter should be replaced after three cleanings or at the specified interval. The secondary element should be replaced every third time the primary element is changed. Refer to 5.12 Maintenance Schedule, page 422 for the required interval.
IMPORTANT:
The secondary filter element should NEVER be cleaned, only replaced.
Air filter element cleaning is NOT recommended due to the possible degradation of the element material. If cleaning is performed, there are several risks involved and the following steps should be followed. If any of the conditions described in these steps are found, the filter element MUST be replaced.
1. Hold a bright light inside element and check carefully for holes. Vibration would quickly wear a hole in the filter.
2. Check filter gasket for cracks, tears, or other signs of damage.
3. Check element for oil or soot contamination.
4. Check the secondary element for cleanliness. If there is visible dirt on the secondary element, replace both primary and secondary elements. Do NOT clean.
5. If secondary element passes inspection, use compressed air not exceeding 270 kPa (40 psi) and a dry element cleaner gun to clean the primary element. Hold nozzle next to inner surface only and move up and down on pleats.
NOTE:
After three cleanings (or at the specified interval), replace the primary element.
6. Repeat inspection before installing.
Replacing the Secondary Air Filter
For secondary filter replacement part number, refer to 8.1.4 Filter Part Numbers, page 453.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
Page 344
214737 324 Revision A
Figure 5.62: Secondary Air Filter
Replace the secondary filter annually or after every third primary filter change, even if it appears clean. If you are changing the secondary filter because it looks dirty, further inspection is required. Examine the filter canister for cracks and replace as necessary. Ensure the canisters retaining latches (B) are secure. Ensure filter sealing surfaces are soft, flexible, and sealing properly. Poor seal performance will allow debris through to the secondary filter.
IMPORTANT:
The secondary filter (A) should never be cleaned, only replaced. Do NOT remove the secondary filter unless it needs replacing.
1. Remove the primary filter. Refer to Removing Primary Air Filter, page 319.
IMPORTANT:
When replacing secondary filter, reinsert new filter as soon as possible to prevent dirt and dust from entering the engine intake.
Figure 5.63: Secondary Air Filter
2. Pull handle (A) on each end of the secondary filter (B) until filter (B) is removed from the housing.
Figure 5.64: Secondary Air Filter
3. Insert new secondary filter (A) into the housing and push until filter is seated inside housing.
4. Install the primary filter. Refer to Installing Primary Air Filter, page 321.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
Page 345
214737 325 Revision A
5.7.6 Charge Air Cooling
Figure 5.65: Engine Air Intake System
Charge air is routed through a cooler that is located in the cooling box (A), prior to entering the engine intake. The cooler should be cleaned daily with compressed air. Refer to 5.8.2 Cleaning Screens and Coolers, page 355 and 5.8.3 Cleaning Cooler Box Components, page 357.
5.7.7 Fuel System
Replacing Fuel Tank Vent Filter
The fuel tank is vented by a hose that is connected to the filler tube. The hose is connected to a filter that should be changed every year.
For fuel tank vent filter replacement part number, refer to 8.1.4 Filter Part Numbers, page 453.
WARNING To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operators seat for any reason.
WARNING To avoid personal injury or death from explosion or fire, do NOT smoke or allow flame or sparks near windrower when servicing.
1. Stop the engine and remove the key.
2. Open the hood. Refer to 5.2.3 Opening Hood (Highest Position), page 289.
3. Open the left cab-forward side maintenance platform. Refer to 5.3.1 Opening Platforms (Standard Position), page 291.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
Page 346
214737 326 Revision A
Figure 5.66: Fuel Tank Vent
4. Locate filter (A) on vent line against hydraulic oil reservoir.
5. Release hose tension clamps (B) and slide away from filter. Pull hoses off filter.
6. Position new filter through hole in frame and attach top hose onto filter. The IN marking on the filter should face down.
NOTE:
If filter has an arrow instead of an IN marking, arrow should point up.
7. Attach lower hose to filter and secure both hoses with tension clamps (B).
8. Close hood. Refer to 5.2.4 Closing Hood (Highest Position), page 290.
9. Close the maintenance platform. Refer to 5.3.2 Closing Platforms (Standard Position), page 292.
Maintaining Fuel Filters
Figure 5.67: Fuel System Filters
The windrower fuel system is equipped with primary (A) and secondary (B) screw-on cartridge type filters. The primary filter (A) is equipped with a separator that separates sediment and water from the fuel.
Refer to the following procedures:
Removing Primary Fuel Filter, page 326
Installing Primary Fuel Filter, page 328
Removing Secondary Fuel Filter, page 328
Installing Secondary Fuel Filter, page 329
Removing Primary Fuel Filter
1. Stop the engine and remove the key.
2. Open the hood. Refer to 5.2.3 Opening Hood (Highest Position), page 289.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
Page 347
214737 327 Revision A
Figure 5.68: Fuel Shut-off Valve
3. On the bottom of the fuel tank, locate fuel supply valve (A) and move it to the closed position.
Figure 5.69: Primary Fuel Filter Location
4. Locate primary fuel filter (A) on the right cab-forward side of the windrower.
Figure 5.70: Primary Fuel Filter
5. Clean around primary filter (A) head.
6. Disconnect the water in fuel (WIF) sensor (B) from the bottom of the filter.
7. Turn valve (C) by hand counterclockwise and drain filter into a container.
8. Remove filter (A) with a 25.4 mm (1 in.) wrench using the drive feature located on the bottom of the filter.
9. Clean gasket mating surface.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
Page 348
214737 328 Revision A
Installing Primary Fuel Filter
For primary fuel filter replacement part number, refer to 8.1.4 Filter Part Numbers, page 453.
IMPORTANT:
If possible, prefill new filters with clean fuel prior to assembly using the clean side block-off plug packed with the filter. To prevent unfiltered fuel from entering the system and damaging fuel system components, do NOT pour fuel directly in the center of the filter.
1. Lubricate the fuel filter O-ring with clean oil.
Figure 5.71: Primary Fuel Filter
2. Screw the new filter (A) onto the filter mount until the gasket contacts the filter head.
3. Tighten the filter an additional 3/4 turn by hand. Use a 25.4 mm (1 in.) wrench and torque it to 38 Nm (28 lbfft).
4. Tighten the filter an additional 1/2 to 3/4 turn by hand.
IMPORTANT:
Do NOT use a filter wrench to install the filter. Overtightening can damage the gasket and filter.
5. Reconnect water in fuel (WIF) sensor (B).
Removing Secondary Fuel Filter
WARNING To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operators seat for any reason.
1. Stop the engine and remove the key.
2. Open the hood. Refer to 5.2.3 Opening Hood (Highest Position), page 289.
Figure 5.72: Secondary Fuel Filter
3. Clean around secondary filter head (A).
4. Place a container under the filter to catch spilled fluid.
5. Remove filter (B) with a filter wrench.
6. Clean gasket mating surface.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
Page 349
214737 329 Revision A
Installing Secondary Fuel Filter
For secondary fuel filter replacement part number, refer to 8.1.4 Filter Part Numbers, page 453.
IMPORTANT:
If available, pre-fill new filters with clean fuel prior to assembly using the clean side block-off plug packed with the filter. Do NOT pour fuel directly in the center of the filter, since this will allow unfiltered fuel to enter the system and can cause damage to fuel system components.
Figure 5.73: Secondary Fuel Filter
1. Screw the new secondary filter (A) onto the filter mount until the gasket contacts the filter head.
2. Tighten the filter an additional 1/2 to 3/4 turn by hand.
IMPORTANT:
Do NOT use a filter wrench to install the filter. Overtightening can damage the gasket and filter.
Figure 5.74: Fuel Shut-off Valve
3. Open fuel valve (A) under fuel tank.
4. Prime the fuel system. Refer to Priming Fuel System, page 333.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
Page 350
214737 330 Revision A
Draining Fuel Tank
Draining the fuel tank is necessary to remove old or contaminated fuel.
WARNING To avoid personal injury or death from explosion or fire, do NOTsmoke or allow flame or sparks near
fuel tank when refueling.
NEVER refuel the windrower when the engine is hot or running.
To avoid electric discharge and the risk of a fire or explosion, ensure that the fuel delivery system is properly bonded and grounded. A bonded fuel delivery system has an electrically conductive and unbroken connection between all components of the fuel delivery system (fuel supply tank, transfer pump, transfer hose, nozzle, and others). A wire connection from the fuel delivery system to the machine chassis will equalize the static electric potential between the two machines, further reducing the chance of a static electric discharge. A properly grounded fuel delivery system has an electrically conductive connection from the fuel delivery system tank to earth ground to allow static and electrical charge dissipation.
WARNING To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operators seat for any reason.
1. Stop the engine and remove the key.
2. Open the hood. Refer to 5.2.1 Opening Hood (Lower Position), page 288.
Figure 5.75: Fuel Shut-off Valve
3. Close fuel supply valve (A) located on the bottom of the fuel tank.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
Page 351
214737 331 Revision A
Figure 5.76: Fuel System (View from outside Frame)
4. Place a 20 liter (5 US gallon) drain pan under the fuel supply hose (A) at the primary filter.
5. Loosen clamp (B) and pull fuel supply hose (A) off fitting.
Figure 5.77: Bottom of Fuel Tank
6. Route hose to drain pan and open valve (A) to drain tank.
Figure 5.78: Fuel System (View from outside Frame)
7. Add some clean fuel to the tank to flush out any remaining contaminants.
8. Reattach fuel supply hose (A) to fitting. Install clamp (B) and tighten.
NOTE:
Do NOT refill the fuel tank if performing additional maintenance on fuel system. Refill it once work is completed. Refer to Filling the Fuel Tank, page 332.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
Page 352
214737 332 Revision A
Filling the Fuel Tank
Fill the fuel tank daily, preferably at the end of the days operation to help prevent condensation in the tank.
WARNING To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operators seat for any reason.
WARNING To avoid personal injury or death from explosion or fire, do NOTsmoke or allow flame or sparks near
fuel tank when refueling.
NEVER refuel the windrower when the engine is hot or running.
To avoid electric discharge and the risk of a fire or explosion, ensure that the fuel delivery system is properly bonded and grounded. A bonded fuel delivery system has an electrically conductive and unbroken connection between all components of the fuel delivery system (fuel supply tank, transfer pump, transfer hose, nozzle, and others). A wire connection from the fuel delivery system to the machine chassis will equalize the static electric potential between the two machines, further reducing the chance of a static electric discharge. A properly grounded fuel delivery system has an electrically conductive connection from the fuel delivery system tank to earth ground to allow static and electrical charge dissipation.
CAUTION Do NOTallow tank to empty. Running out of fuel can cause air locks and/or contamination of the fuel system. Refer to System Priming, page 333.
1. Stop windrower and remove key.
2. Stand on either platform to access the fuel tank filler pipe.
Figure 5.79: Fuel Filler Cap
3. Clean the area around filler cap (A).
4. Turn cap handle (B) counterclockwise until loose and then remove cap.
5. Fill tank with approved fuel. Refer to inside back cover for recommended fuel.
IMPORTANT:
Do NOT fill tank completelyspace is required for expansion. A filled tank could overflow if exposed to a rise in temperature, such as direct sunlight.
6. Replace fuel tank cap (A) and turn cap handle (B) clockwise until snug.
Fuel/Water Separator
A fuel/water separator is incorporated into the primary fuel filter. The separator is equipped with a drain and a sensor that triggers a warning on the cab display module (CDM) if water is detected in the fuel. Drain the water and sediment from the separator daily or at any time the CDM water in fuel (WIF) light illuminates.
To remove water from the fuel system, refer to Removing Water from Fuel System, page 333.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
Page 353
214737 333 Revision A
Removing Water from Fuel System
Drain the water and sediment from the separator daily, or at any time the cab display module (CDM) water in fuel (WIF) light illuminates.
WARNING To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operators seat for any reason.
1. Stop the engine and remove the key.
2. Open the hood. Refer to 5.2.1 Opening Hood (Lower Position), page 288.
Figure 5.80: Primary Fuel Filter
3. Place a container under filter (A) to catch spilled fluid.
4. Turn drain valve (B) by hand 1-1/2 to 2 turns counterclockwise until fluid drains out of the filter.
5. Drain the filter sump of water and sediment until clear fuel is visible.
6. Turn the valve clockwise to close the drain.
7. Dispose of fluid safely.
8. Close the hood. Refer to 5.2.2 Closing Hood (Lower Position), page 289.
System Priming
Controlled venting of air is provided at the injection pump through the fuel drain manifold. Small amounts of air, introduced by changing filters or injection pump supply line, will be vented automatically if the fuel filters are changed in accordance with instructions.
IMPORTANT:
Bleeding the fuel system is NOT recommended or required. Manual priming will be required if:
Fuel filter is replaced
Injection pump is replaced
High-pressure fuel lines are replaced
Engine is run until fuel tank is empty
Priming Fuel System
To prime the fuel system, follow these steps:
WARNING To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operators seat for any reason.
WARNING The fuel pump high-pressure fuel lines and fuel rail contain extremely high pressure fuel. Never loosen any fittings. Personal injury and property damage can result.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
Page 354
214737 334 Revision A
1. Stop the engine and remove the key.
2. Open the hood to lowest position. Refer to 5.2.1 Opening Hood (Lower Position), page 288.
Figure 5.81: Primary Fuel Filter
3. Turn priming knob (A) counterclockwise to unlock the plunger on the primary filter head.
4. Pump approximately 120 times to pressurize the fuel system.
5. Lock the plunger by turning knob (A) clockwise until snug.
6. Try starting engine. If engine does NOT start, repeat priming.
7. Close the hood. Refer to 5.2.2 Closing Hood (Lower Position), page 289.
5.7.8 Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) System IMPORTANT:
If the windrower is going to be in storage for periods longer than six months, the DEF tank should be drained to avoid damaging the tank. Refer to Draining the Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Tank, page 334.
IMPORTANT:
If the windrower temperature is going to be below 0C (32F), do NOT fill the DEF tank to a full level. It should be less than 75% full. When freezing, the DEF fluid will expand by approximately seven percent.
NOTE:
For DEF fluid specifications, refer to 8.1 Recommended Fuel, Fluids, and Lubricants, page 451this manuals inside back cover.
Draining the Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Tank
Drain the DEF tank when it is contaminated or when the windrower is going to be stored for longer than six months.
WARNING To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operators seat for any reason.
1. Stop the engine and remove the key.
2. Open the maintenance platform on right cab-forward side. Refer to 5.3.1 Opening Platforms (Standard Position), page 291.
3. Place a drain pan under the DEF tank. Use a sufficiently large drain pan; tank capacity is 29 L (7.5 US gal).
IMPORTANT:
Any spilled DEF must be contained and absorbed by non-combustible absorbent material like sand, and then shoveled to a suitable container for disposal. DEF is corrosive. If spilled on tank or any surface of the vehicle, rinse thoroughly with water.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
Page 355
214737 335 Revision A
WARNING Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) contains urea. Do NOT get the substance in your eyes. In case of contact, immediately flush eyes with water for a minimum of 15 minutes. Do NOTswallow. In the event the DEF is ingested, contact doctor immediately.
Figure 5.82: View from beneath Tank
4. Remove the drain plug (A) from under the tank (B) and drain.
5. Add some DEF to the tank (B) to flush out remaining contaminants.
6. Drain the DEF that was used to clean the tank.
7. Reinstall drain plug (A) in the tank (B).
8. Before operating the windrower, refill DEF tank. Refer to Refilling the Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Tank, page 335.
NOTE:
If windrower is going to be in storage for periods longer than 6 months, do not refill at this time.
9. Close the maintenance platform. Refer to 5.3.2 Closing Platforms (Standard Position), page 292.
Refilling the Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Tank
WARNING Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) contains urea. Do NOT get the substance in your eyes. In case of contact, immediately flush eyes with water for a minimum of 15 minutes. Do NOTswallow. In the event the DEF is ingested, contact doctor immediately.
Take the following precautions when handling DEF to prevent contamination:
Avoid using funnels and containers that have been used with fuels or lubricants.
Use only distilled water to rinse the components that store or deliver DEF; tap water can contaminate DEF.
If distilled water is not available, use clean tap water, then rinse components with DEF.
1. Stop the engine and remove the key.
2. Open the maintenance platform on right cab-forward side. Refer to 5.3.1 Opening Platforms (Standard Position), page 291.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
Page 356
214737 336 Revision A
Figure 5.83: DEF Tank
IMPORTANT:
Before refilling the DEF tank, read the following instructions from decal (A) located on the tank cover:
Before storing machine for periods of time greater than six months, drain DEF tank to prevent degradation of fluid.
Before storing the machine in temperatures below 0C (32F), ensure level of fluid in DEF tank is 75 % or lower.
Figure 5.84: DEF Tank
3. Clean around filler cap (A).
4. Turn cap (A) counterclockwise until loose and remove cap.
5. Fill the tank with an approved DEF. Refer to 8.1.3 Lubricants, Fluids, and System Capacities, page 452.
IMPORTANT:
Any spilled DEF must be contained and absorbed by non-combustible absorbent material like sand, and then shoveled to a suitable container for disposal. DEF is corrosive. If spilled on tank or any surface of the vehicle, rinse thoroughly with water.
6. Replace filler cap (A) and turn clockwise until tight.
7. Close the maintenance platform. Refer to 5.3.2 Closing Platforms (Standard Position), page 292.
Replacing the Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Vent Hose Filter
The DEF vent hose filter should be replaced every 2000 hours. Refer to 8.1.4 Filter Part Numbers, page 453 for replacement filter.
WARNING To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operators seat for any reason.
1. Shut down the engine and remove the key.
2. Under the right side of the windrower, locate the DEF tank vent hose (A) behind the DEF tank (B).
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
Page 357
214737 337 Revision A
Figure 5.85: DEF Vent Hose Location
Figure 5.86: Vent Hose Filter (behind DEF Tank)
3. Remove cable tie (A) securing vent hose filter to DEF vent hose.
4. Undo the two lined clamps (B) securing the filter to the vent hose (C).
5. Pull filter from vent hose (C).
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
Page 358
214737 338 Revision A
Figure 5.87: Vent Hose Filter
6. Install the new vent hose filter (A) onto the end of the DEF head hose and secure with a lined clamp (B).
NOTE:
Ensure arrow on the vent hose filter (A) points toward the DEF tank head.
7. Secure the vent hose (C) to the filter with a lined clamp (B).
Figure 5.88: Vent Hose Filter
8. Secure vent hose filter (A) to the DEF suction hose (B) using a cable tie (C).
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
Page 359
214737 339 Revision A
DEF Supply Module Filter
The supply module filter is designed to prevent debris that may be suspended in the diesel exhaust fluid (DEF) from entering the dosing system. Permanent damage to and premature failure of the DEF supply module can result from fluid debris.
Checking the Supply Module Filter
Figure 5.89: DEF Supply Module
1. Locate the aftertreatment diesel exhaust fluid (DEF) supply module (A) behind the DEF tank.
Figure 5.90: DEF Supply Module Filter Cap
2. Inspect the area around the seal and vent of the aftertreatment DEF supply module filter cap (A) for signs of leakage.
NOTE:
DEF fluid leaves a white deposit when dry. If there is evidence of leaking, remove the supply module filter, clean and inspect before replacing. For instructions, refer to Cleaning and Inspecting the Supply Module Filter, page 341.
Removing the Supply Module Filter
WARNING Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) contains urea. Do NOT get the substance in your eyes. In case of contact, immediately flush eyes with water for a minimum of 15 minutes. Do NOTswallow. In the event the DEF is ingested, contact doctor immediately.
WARNING Batteries can emit explosive gases. To reduce the possibility of personal injury, always ventilate the compartment before servicing the batteries. To reduce the possibility of arcing, remove the negative (-) battery cable first and attach the negative (-) battery cable last.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
Page 360
214737 340 Revision A
WARNING The DEF line connecting the aftertreatment DEF supply module to the aftertreatment DEF dosing module is under low pressure and should not be disconnected while the engine is running or before the system has completed the purge process after engine shutdown. Disconnecting the DEF line while under low pressure could cause DEF to spray.
WARNING Wear appropriate eye and face protection when using compressed air. Flying debris and dirt can cause personal injury.
IMPORTANT:
Do NOT disconnect the windrower batteries until the DEF dosing system has completed the purge cycle. Before beginning to remove and/or disconnect any components, wait at least five minutes after the key switch is turned OFF for the aftertreatment DEF dosing system to purge the DEF from the system. The purge cycle is an automatic process and does not require intervention to occur. The aftertreatment DEF supply module will create an audible pumping noise during the purging process.
NOTE:
DO NOT power wash or steam clean this unit. Use compressed air to remove any loose debris.
1. Set battery switch to OFF. Refer to Battery Main Disconnect Switch, page 361.
2. Place a catch basin that can hold 29 liters (7.5 US gallons) under DEF filter cap to collect the remaining DEF in the filter housing.
IMPORTANT:
Any spilled DEF must be contained and absorbed by non-combustible absorbent material like sand, and then shoveled to a suitable container for disposal. DEF is corrosive. If spilled on tank or any surface of the vehicle, rinse thoroughly with water.
Figure 5.91: DEF Supply Module Filter
3. Unscrew the filter cap (A).
4. Remove the aftertreatment DEF filter equalizing element (B).
5. Remove the old aftertreatment DEF supply module filter element (D).
NOTE:
A disposable service tool (C) is included with the filter to aid in filter removal. Use the appropriate end of the tool to remove filter. When inserting the tool, a click sound can be heard which indicates proper engagement with the filter.
6. Discard and replace the filter and equalizing element if removed from the aftertreatment dosing unit.
7. Clean and inspect the supply module. Refer to Cleaning and Inspecting the Supply Module Filter, page 341.
8. Install new supply module filter. Refer to Installing the Supply Module Filter, page 341.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
Page 361
214737 341 Revision A
Cleaning and Inspecting the Supply Module Filter
WARNING Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) contains urea. Do NOT get the substance in your eyes. In case of contact, immediately flush eyes with water for a minimum of 15 minutes. Do NOTswallow. In the event the DEF is ingested, contact doctor immediately.
NOTE:
If there is the possibility that contaminated diesel exhaust fluid (DEF) has gone through the DEF dosing system, check the DEF filter prior to discarding the filter.
1. Check the DEF filter for evidence of contaminated DEF. Use visual and aroma characteristics of the filter to determine if contaminated fluid has passed through the dosing system.
2. Inspect the DEF filter for debris.
3. Discard the filter element and the equalizing element.
4. Inspect the aftertreatment DEF supply module filter cap for cracks or holes.
5. Check the condition of the threads on the aftertreatment DEF supply module cap.
6. If threads are damaged, replace the aftertreatment DEF supply module cap.
7. If cap threads are damaged, inspect the aftertreatment DEF supply module threads.
8. If threads of aftertreatment DEF supply module are damaged, replace the entire aftertreatment DEF supply module.
9. Clean the aftertreatment DEF supply module cap and threads on the supply module with warm water and clean cloth.
Installing the Supply Module Filter
For replacement supply module filter part numbers, refer to 8.1.4 Filter Part Numbers, page 453.
WARNING Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) contains urea. Do NOT get the substance in your eyes. In case of contact, immediately flush eyes with water for a minimum of 15 minutes. Do NOTswallow. In the event the DEF is ingested, contact doctor immediately.
Figure 5.92: DEF Supply Module Filter
1. Slide the diesel exhaust fluid (DEF) filter equalizing element (A) into the DEF filter cartridge (B).
2. Insert the assembly into the aftertreatment DEF dosing unit (C).
3. Install cap (D) and torque to 20 Nm (15 lbfft).
WARNING Batteries can emit explosive gases. To reduce the possibility of personal injury, always ventilate the compartment before servicing the batteries. To reduce the possibility of arcing, remove the negative (-) battery cable first and attach the negative (-) battery cable last.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
Page 362
214737 342 Revision A
4. Connect the batteries. Refer to Connecting Batteries, page 368.
5. Start the engine and check for leaks.
NOTE:
The aftertreatment DEF dosing system will not prime until the correct Selective Catalytic Reduction (SCR) temperatures are reached. To verify that there are no DEF leaks, test drive the windrower for a minimum of 15 minutes to get the SCR system up to temperature.
5.7.9 Engine Cooling System The engine cooling system is designed to maintain the engine operating temperature within the recommended operating range.
NOTE:
Antifreeze is essential in any climate. It broadens the operating temperature range by lowering the coolant freezing point and by raising its boiling point. Antifreeze also contains rust inhibitors and other additives to prolong engine life.
IMPORTANT:
If antifreeze strength is not adequate, do NOT drain cooling system to protect against freezing. The system may not drain completely, and damage from freezing could still result.
Refer to 8.1 Recommended Fuel, Fluids, and Lubricants, page 451 for detailed information.
Checking Coolant Level
WARNING To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operators seat for any reason.
Check coolant level in the pressurized coolant tank daily.
NOTE:
Ensure the engine has cooled down prior to checking.
1. Stop the engine, and remove the key.
2. Open the hood. Refer to 5.2.3 Opening Hood (Highest Position), page 289.
3. Open the platform. Refer to 5.3.1 Opening Platforms (Standard Position), page 291.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
Page 363
214737 343 Revision A
Figure 5.93: Engine Coolant Tank
4. The coolant level should be between the maximum (B) and minimum (C) line marker when cold. To add coolant, refer to Adding Coolant, page 347.
5. Close the platform. Refer to 5.3.2 Closing Platforms (Standard Position), page 292.
6. Close the hood. Refer to 5.2.4 Closing Hood (Highest Position), page 290.
Checking Engine Coolant Strength
Check the antifreeze in the pressurized coolant tank with a tester every year, preferably before off-season storage.
WARNING To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operators seat for any reason.
CAUTION To avoid personal injury from hot coolant, do NOT turn pressurized coolant tank cap until engine cools.
1. Stop the engine and remove the key.
2. Open the hood. Refer to 5.2.3 Opening Hood (Highest Position), page 289.
3. Open the platform. Refer to 5.3.1 Opening Platforms (Standard Position), page 291.
Figure 5.94: Engine Cooling System
4. Turn the pressurized coolant tank cap (A) counterclockwise to the first notch to relieve pressure before removing cap completely.
5. Turn cap (A) again and remove.
6. Check the coolant in the pressurized coolant tank using an antifreeze tester. Tester should indicate protection to temperatures of -34C (-30F).
7. Inspect the pressurized coolant tank cap before reinstalling. Refer to Inspecting Pressurized Coolant Tank Cap, page 344.
8. Reinstall pressurized coolant tank cap (A).
9. Close the platform. Refer to 5.3.2 Closing Platforms (Standard Position), page 292.
10. Close the hood. Refer to 5.2.4 Closing Hood (Highest Position), page 290.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
Page 364
214737 344 Revision A
Inspecting Pressurized Coolant Tank Cap
The pressurized coolant tank cap must fit tightly and the cap gasket must be in good condition to maintain the 97124 kPa (1418 psi) pressure in the cooling system. Check the condition of the cap every year when checking the engine coolant strength.
WARNING To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operators seat for any reason.
CAUTION To avoid personal injury from hot coolant, do NOT turn pressurized coolant tank cap until engine cools.
1. Stop the engine and remove the key.
2. Open the hood. Refer to 5.2.3 Opening Hood (Highest Position), page 289.
3. Open the platform. Refer to 5.3.1 Opening Platforms (Standard Position), page 291.
Figure 5.95: Engine Cooling System
4. Turn cap (A) counterclockwise to the first notch to relieve pressure before removing cap completely.
5. Turn cap (A) again and remove.
6. Check the gasket for cracks or deterioration and replace the cap if necessary.
7. Check that the spring in the cap moves freely.
8. Replace cap if spring is stuck.
9. Close the platform. Refer to 5.3.2 Closing Platforms (Standard Position), page 292.
10. Close the hood. Refer to 5.2.4 Closing Hood (Highest Position), page 290.
Changing Coolant
Coolant should be drained and the system flushed and filled with new coolant every 2000 hours or 2 years.
Refer to the following procedures:
Draining and Cleaning the Coolant Tank, page 344
Adding Coolant, page 347
Draining and Cleaning the Coolant Tank
WARNING To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operators seat for any reason.
CAUTION To avoid personal injury from hot coolant, do NOT turn pressurized coolant tank cap until engine cools.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
Page 365
214737 345 Revision A
1. Stop the engine and remove the key. Let the engine cool.
2. Open the hood. Refer to 5.2.3 Opening Hood (Highest Position), page 289.
3. Open the platform. Refer to 5.3.1 Opening Platforms (Standard Position), page 291.
Figure 5.96: Coolant Recovery Tank
4. Turn the pressurized coolant tank cap (A) to the first notch to relieve pressure before removing cap completely.
IMPORTANT:
Place a drain pan (about 30 liters [8 US gallons] capacity) under the engine and radiator, and use a deflector or hose to prevent coolant running onto frame.
Figure 5.97: Radiator Drain Valve
5. Remove the pressurized coolant tank cap and open radiator drain valve (A), located at the bottom of the engine side of the radiator lower tank.
NOTE:
Part of the lower left frame made transparent to show radiator drain valve location.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
Page 366
214737 346 Revision A
Figure 5.98: Heater Shut-Off Valve (2016 and Prior)
Figure 5.99: Heater Shut-Off Valve (2017)
6. Close the heater shut-off valve (A) and disconnect hose on heater side of valve.
7. Open valve to drain the block.
8. When system is drained, reattach hose on valve (A).
Figure 5.100: Radiator Drain Valve
9. Close radiator drain valve (A) at the bottom of the engine side of the radiator lower tank.
NOTE:
Part of the lower left frame made transparent to show radiator drain valve location.
10. Fill system with clean water through the pressurized coolant tank and replace the pressurized coolant tank cap.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
Page 367
214737 347 Revision A
Figure 5.101: Heater Shut-Off Valve (2016 and Prior)
Figure 5.102: Heater Shut-Off Valve (2017)
11. Open heater shut-off valve (A).
12. Start engine and turn temperature control knob to HIGH. Run engine until normal operating temperature is reached.
13. Stop the engine and drain water out before rust or sediment settles. Repeat coolant removal procedure.
14. Close drain valves and fill system with a solution of clean water and a heavy duty radiator cleaner. Follow instructions provided with cleaner.
15. After using the cleaner solution, flush system with clean water again. Inspect radiator, hoses, and fittings for leaks.
16. Close drain valves and fill system. Refer to Adding Coolant, page 347.
Figure 5.103: Coolant Recovery Tank
17. Replace cap (B) on coolant recovery tank (A).
18. Close the platform. Refer to 5.3.2 Closing Platforms (Standard Position), page 292.
19. Close the hood. Refer to 5.2.4 Closing Hood (Highest Position), page 290.
Adding Coolant
Check the coolant level in the pressurized coolant tank daily. Add coolant if the tank is less than one-half full.
NOTE:
For coolant specifications, refer to the inside back cover.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
Page 368
214737 348 Revision A
WARNING To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operators seat for any reason.
CAUTION To avoid personal injury from hot coolant, do NOT turn pressurized coolant tank cap until engine cools.
To add coolant to the pressurized coolant tank, follow these steps:
1. Stop the engine and remove the key.
2. Open the hood. Refer to 5.2.3 Opening Hood (Highest Position), page 289.
3. Open the platform. Refer to 5.3.1 Opening Platforms (Standard Position), page 291.
Figure 5.104: Coolant Recovery Tank
4. Remove cap (B) from coolant recovery tank (A).
5. Add coolant at a rate not exceeding 3 gallons per minute until the recovery tank is one-half full.
CAUTION Before starting the machine, check to be sure all bystanders have cleared the area.
6. Start engine and run at high idle for approximately 20 minutes or until the engine temperature reaches 85C (185F).
7. Check the coolant level again and add coolant until the recovery tank is one-half full.
8. Replace cap (B).
9. Close the platform. Refer to 5.3.2 Closing Platforms (Standard Position), page 292.
10. Close the hood. Refer to 5.2.4 Closing Hood (Highest Position), page 290.
5.7.10 Gearbox
Checking Lubricant Level and Adding Lubricant
Lubricant level should be checked every 50 hours.
CAUTION Park on a flat, level surface with the header on the ground, the ground speed lever in N-DETENT position, and the steering wheel in locked position (centered). Wait for the CDM to beep and display an In Park message to confirm the park brakes have engaged.
WARNING To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operators seat for any reason.
Check and add lubricant as follows:
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
Page 369
214737 349 Revision A
Figure 5.105: Gearbox Lubricant Check Plug
1. Park the windrower on level ground, shut down engine, and remove key.
2. Remove check plug (A). The lubricant should be visible through the hole or slightly running out.
3. If required, add lubricant through the check plug hole (A) using a squeeze bottle.
NOTE:
To view lubricant specifications, refer to 8.1.3 Lubricants, Fluids, and System Capacities, page 452.
4. Add lubricant as follows:
a. Remove breather cap and add lubricant until it runs out the check port. If refilling, add approximately 2.1 liters (2.2 US quarts).
b. Replace check plug and breather cap and tighten.
c. Operate the engine at low idle and check for leaks at the check plug and drain plug.
Changing Lubricant
Change gearbox lubricant after the first 50 hours, and then every 500 hours as follows:
CAUTION Park on a flat, level surface with the header on the ground, the ground speed lever in N-DETENT position, and the steering wheel in locked position (centered). Wait for the CDM to beep and display an In Park message to confirm the park brakes have engaged.
WARNING To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operators seat for any reason.
NOTE:
The engine should be warm when changing the oil.
1. Stop engine and remove key.
2. Place a 4 liter (1 US gallon) drain pan under the gearbox.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
Page 370
214737 350 Revision A
Figure 5.106: Gearbox Lubricant Drain Plug
3. Remove drain plug (B) and allow oil to completely finish draining.
4. Install drain plug (B) and remove check plug (A).
Figure 5.107: Gearbox Breather Cap
5. Add lubricant as follows:
a. Remove breather cap (A) and add lubricant until it runs out the check port. If refilling, add approximately 2.1 liters (2.2 US quarts).
b. Replace check plug and breather cap and tighten.
c. Operate the engine at low idle and check for leaks at the check plug and drain plug.
5.7.11 Inspecting Exhaust System The system consists of a two main canisters for exhaust treatment. In between the two exhaust canisters is a tube with a dosing module (DM) for diesel exhaust fluid (DEF).
CAUTION Engine exhaust stack may be hot. To avoid burns, do NOT touch exhaust canister when engine is running. Allow sufficient cooling time after shut-down.
The exhaust system requires no regular maintenance, but should be inspected periodically as follows:
1. Open the hood to its highest position. For instructions, refer to 5.2.3 Opening Hood (Highest Position), page 289.
IMPORTANT:
Ensure the exhaust system is secure to eliminate vibration.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
Page 371
214737 351 Revision A
Figure 5.108: Exhaust System
2. Check the following:
Exhaust canisters (A) and bellows tube (B) for dents, cracks, and wear
NOTE:
A damaged bellows tube may cause safety issues and derate the engine.
Straps (C) for tightness
U-bolt (D) and Marman clamps (E) for breakage, cracks, and rust
Figure 5.109: Exhaust Canister
3. Check the four Marman clamps (A) securing the tubes in between the two exhaust canisters.
IMPORTANT:
Do NOTchange exhaust canister type, piping sizes, or exhaust configuration. See your Dealer for proper replacement parts.
4. Inspect the area around clamps (A) for breakage, cracks, and rust-through.
IMPORTANT:
If exhaust is leaking, tighten clamps to 1215 Nm (911 lbfft). If leaking at Marman connection, replace seals (refer to the M155E4 Parts Catalog). Contact your Dealer if the exhaust leak persists.
5. Check tubing for dents or crushed areas. Dents or crushed tubing creates exhaust flow restriction and increases back pressure significantly. Even relatively small dents will cause decreased fuel economy and increased turbo wear. If dents are relatively large, the higher exhaust temperature will increase bearing and cylinder wear.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
Page 372
214737 352 Revision A
5.7.12 Belts
Tensioning Alternator/Fan Belt
The alternator, water pump, and fan belt are automatically tightened. Manual adjustment is NOT required.
Replacing Fan Belt
WARNING To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operators seat for any reason.
1. Shut down the engine and remove the key.
2. Open the left cab-forward platform. Refer to 5.3.1 Opening Platforms (Standard Position), page 291.
3. Open the hood. Refer to 5.2.1 Opening Hood (Lower Position), page 288.
Figure 5.110: A/C Compressor
4. Loosen compressor mounting hardware (B) and push compressor towards engine to release tension.
5. Remove belt (A) from compressor.
Figure 5.111: Engine Belts
6. Insert the drive end of a 1/2 in. drive ratchet wrench into the belt tensioner (B).
7. Rotate tensioner counterclockwise until fan belt (A) can be slipped off pulley (C). Release tensioner and remove wrench.
8. Remove belt in order 123 as shown. Route fan belt around fan and remove belt.
9. Install new belt (A) around fan and onto pulleys in order 321.
10. Insert the drive end of a 1/2 in. drive ratchet wrench into the belt tensioner (B).
11. Rotate tensioner counterclockwise until belt (A) can be slipped onto pulley (C). Release tensioner and remove wrench.
12. Check that belt is properly seated in all pulley grooves.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
Page 373
214737 353 Revision A
Figure 5.112: A/C Compressor
13. Reinstall compressor belt (A).
14. Pry compressor away from engine so that a force of 3555 N (812 lbf) deflects belt (A) 5 mm (3/16 in.) at mid-span.
15. Tighten compressor mounting hardware (B).
16. Recheck tension and adjust as required.
17. Close the hood. Refer to 5.2.2 Closing Hood (Lower Position), page 289.
18. Close the platform. Refer to 5.3.2 Closing Platforms (Standard Position), page 292.
Tensioning Air Conditioner (A/C) Compressor Belt
WARNING To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operators seat for any reason.
1. Shut down the engine and remove the key.
2. Open the hood. Refer to 5.2.1 Opening Hood (Lower Position), page 288.
Figure 5.113: A/C Compressor
3. Loosen compressor mounting hardware (B).
4. Pry compressor away from engine so that a force of 3555 N (812 lbf) deflects belt (A) 5 mm (3/16 in.) at mid-span.
5. Tighten compressor mounting hardware (B).
6. Recheck tension and adjust as required.
7. Close the hood. Refer to 5.2.2 Closing Hood (Lower Position), page 289.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
Page 374
214737 354 Revision A
Replacing Air Conditioner (A/C) Compressor Belt
WARNING To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operators seat for any reason.
1. Shut down the engine and remove the key.
2. Open the hood. Refer to 5.2.1 Opening Hood (Lower Position), page 288.
Figure 5.114: A/C Compressor
3. Loosen compressor mounting hardware (B) and push compressor towards engine to release tension.
4. Remove belt (A) from compressor.
5. Install new compressor belt (A).
6. Pry compressor away from engine so that a force of 3555 N (812 lbf) deflects belt (A) 5 mm (3/16 in.) at mid-span.
7. Tighten compressor mounting hardware (B).
8. Recheck tension and adjust as required.
9. Close the hood. Refer to 5.2.2 Closing Hood (Lower Position), page 289.
5.7.13 Engine Speed The maximum and idle engine speeds are factory set.
Refer to 2.2 Specifications, page 30 for detailed information. If specified speeds cannot be maintained, see your MacDon Dealer.
IMPORTANT:
Do NOT remove any seals from injector pump. Removal of seals will void the engine warranty.
Refer to Engine Intermediate Speed Control (ISC), page 170 for additional information about engine speed.
Throttle Adjustment
The engine speed is controlled by a throttle lever connected to an electronic sensor inside the console.
The throttle lever in the cab should move the throttle sensor the full range between slow speed stop and full rpm stop without contacting the console at either position.
If the throttle lever is contacting the console and interferes with specified engine speeds, the sensor position may need adjustment. See your MacDon Dealer.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
Page 375
214737 355 Revision A
5.8 Maintaining Engine Cooling Box The engine cooling box components should be cleaned dailymore frequently in severe dust conditions. Refer to the following list of procedures before attempting to service the engine cooling box components:
5.8.1 Opening Cooler Box Screen, page 355
5.8.2 Cleaning Screens and Coolers, page 355
5.8.3 Cleaning Cooler Box Components, page 357
5.8.4 Adjusting Screen Cleaner Rotor to Screen Clearance, page 359
5.8.5 Closing Cooler Box Screen, page 359
5.8.1 Opening Cooler Box Screen 1. Open the hood. Refer to 5.2.3 Opening Hood (Highest Position), page 289.
Figure 5.115: Engine Cooling System
2. Push latch (A) and open screen assembly access door (B). Secure with rod, stored inside screen door.
5.8.2 Cleaning Screens and Coolers When the engine is running, two electrically-driven rotors and suction from the engines cooling fan sweep and vacuum debris away from the cooling box screen. If the screen is not being cleaned, the rotors or ducts may be plugged. Follow these steps to clear plugged rotors:
NOTE:
The following procedure is performed on one side, procedure also applies to the other side.
1. Open the hood. Refer to 5.2.3 Opening Hood (Highest Position), page 289.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
Page 376
214737 356 Revision A
Figure 5.116: Screen Cleaner Assembly
2. Remove nuts (B).
3. Pivot screen cleaner assembly (C) away from screen.
4. Blow out debris from cleaner duct (A) with compressed air.
5. If duct is plugged, open the cooler box screen. Refer to 5.8.1 Opening Cooler Box Screen, page 355.
Figure 5.117: Cooler Box Screen
6. Blow debris out of duct (A) with compressed air.
7. Clean screen with compressed air.
Figure 5.118: Screen Cleaner Assembly
8. Move screen cleaner assembly (C) back into position and secure with bolts and nuts (B).
9. Check duct (A) clearance to screen. Refer to 5.8.4 Adjusting Screen Cleaner Rotor to Screen Clearance, page 359.
10. Close the cooler box screen. Refer to 5.8.5 Closing Cooler Box Screen, page 359.
11. Close the hood. Refer to 5.2.4 Closing Hood (Highest Position), page 290.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
Page 377
214737 357 Revision A
5.8.3 Cleaning Cooler Box Components The radiator and oil cooler should be cleaned daily with compressed air. More frequent cleaning may be necessary in severe conditions. The charge air cooler and air conditioning (A/C) condenser may also be cleaned at the same time.
To clean these components, proceed as follows:
1. Open cooler box screen. Refer to 5.8.1 Opening Cooler Box Screen, page 355.
Figure 5.119: Right Cooler Access Door
2. Lift latch (A) and open right access door (B).
Figure 5.120: A/C Condenser Assembly
3. Slide out the oil cooler / air conditioning (A/C) condenser assembly (A).
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
Page 378
214737 358 Revision A
Figure 5.121: Left Cooler Access Door
4. Lift latch (A) and open left access door (B).
Figure 5.122: Cooling Box Access Door
5. Remove wing nut (A) and open access door (B) at top of cooling box.
NOTE:
Fins on coolers can be very easily bent which may interfere with its function. Exercise caution when cleaning.
Figure 5.123: Engine Cooling System
6. Clean radiator (A) through access hole in cooling box with compressed air.
7. Clean oil cooler / air conditioning condenser (B), charge air cooler (C), and cooling box (D) with compressed air.
8. Inspect all lines and coolers for evidence of leaks and damage.
9. Slide oil cooler / air conditioning condenser (B) back into cooling box (D).
10. Close side access door and lock with lever.
11. Close access door on top of the cooling box and secure with wing nut.
12. Close cooler box screen. Refer to 5.8.5 Closing Cooler Box Screen, page 359.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
Page 379
214737 359 Revision A
5.8.4 Adjusting Screen Cleaner Rotor to Screen Clearance The clearance between trailing edge of screen cleaner rotor and screen should be 18 mm (0.0390.314 in.) at all locations when rotating.
WARNING To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operators seat for any reason.
1. Shut down the engine and remove the key.
2. Open the hood. Refer to 5.2.1 Opening Hood (Lower Position), page 288.
Figure 5.124: Screen Cleaner
NOTE:
Screen cleaner rotors rotate counterclockwise and may touch screen as long as they continue to rotate.
3. Loosen nut (B) on motor support (C).
4. Move support in or out until duct (A) is 26 mm (0.0790.236 in.) from screen near the center.
5. Tighten nut (B).
6. Loosen the two motor mount bolts (D).
7. Move motor/duct assembly (E) to obtain 18 mm (0.0390.314 in.) gap to screen at full rotation of the rotor.
8. Tighten nuts (D) on motor mount.
9. Close the hood. Refer to 5.2.2 Closing Hood (Lower Position), page 289.
5.8.5 Closing Cooler Box Screen
Figure 5.125: Engine Cooling System
1. Unhook the support rod and store it in the screen door. Close screen access door (B) and engage latch (A).
2. Close the hood. Refer to 5.2.4 Closing Hood (Highest Position), page 290.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
Page 380
214737 360 Revision A
5.9 Electrical System
5.9.1 Preventing Electrical System Damage
Figure 5.126: Alternator A - Negative Terminal B - Positive Terminal
To prevent electrical system damage, take the following precautions:
Carefully observe polarity when attaching booster battery.
Do NOT short across battery or alternator terminals, or allow battery positive (+) cable or alternator wire to become grounded.
Be sure alternator connections are correct before cables are connected to battery.
When welding on any part of the machine, disconnect battery cables and alternator wire. Refer to 1.8 Welding Precautions, page 9.
Always disconnect battery ground cable when working with the alternator or regulator.
Never attempt to polarize alternator or regulator.
If wires are disconnected from the alternator, ensure that terminals (A) and (B) are connected properly.
Never ground the alternator field terminal or field.
Never connect or disconnect alternator or regulator wires with battery connected or alternator operating.
Always disconnect cables from the battery when using a charger to charge battery in windrower.
Ensure all cables are securely connected before operating engine.
To avoid damage to circuit boards by static electricity, disconnect negative battery terminal when replacing electronic control modules. Additionally, when handling electronic control modules, avoid touching the connector pins directly.
5.9.2 Battery
Maintaining Batteries
CAUTION Do NOTattempt to service battery unless you have the proper equipment and experience to perform the job. Have it done by a qualified Dealer.
Check battery charge once a year, or more often if operating in cold weather. Hydrometer readings should be 1.260 to 1.300. Readings below 1.250 indicate charging is required. Refer to Charging the Batteries, page 361. Add electrolyte if necessary. Refer to Adding Electrolyte to the Battery, page 364.
Keep batteries clean by wiping with a damp cloth.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
Page 381
214737 361 Revision A
Keep all connections clean and tight; remove any corrosion and wash terminals with a solution of baking soda and water. A light coating of grease on terminals (after cables are attached) will reduce corrosion.
To prolong battery life, store batteries in a cool, dry area, in an upright position, fully charged at -7 to +26C (+20 to +80F).
Do NOT stack batteries on top of each other unless they are in cartons.
Test wet batteries every 46 months and recharge if necessary.
Battery Main Disconnect Switch
Figure 5.127: Batteries
A battery main disconnect switch (A) is located on the right cab-forward side frame rail, just behind the batteries. It can be easily accessed by moving the maintenance platform.
Ensure the switch is in the POWER OFF position when servicing electrical components and to prevent loss of battery charge when the windrower will not be used for periods longer than 1 week.
Charging the Batteries
Figure 5.128: Charging Battery
CAUTION Ventilate the area where batteries are being charged.
Do NOTcharge a frozen battery. Warm to 16C (60F) before charging.
Do NOTconnect or disconnect live circuits. To prevent sparks, turn off charger and connect positive cable first. PROTECT YOUR EYES.
If charging battery in windrower, disconnect POSITIVE battery cable before connecting charger cable, then connect ground cable last, away from battery.
Stop or cut back charging rate if battery feels hot, or is venting electrolyte. Battery temperature must NOT exceed 52C (125F).
The maximum charge rate in amperes should be NO MORE than 1/3 of the batterys reserve capacity minute rating. If the terminal voltage exceeds 16.0 volts while charging, reduce the charge rate.
Continue charging and reduce the rate as needed until a 2-hour period results in no increase in voltage or decrease in current.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
Page 382
214737 362 Revision A
Table 5.1 Voltage Chart
Voltage State of Charge
(%) Approximate Battery Charging Time29 to Full Charge at
27C/80F (Minutes)
Standard Battery Maximum Rate at (Amps)
12 Volts 50 30 20 10
12.6 100 FULL CHARGE
12.4 75 20 35 48 90
12.2 50 45 75 95 180
12.0 25 65 115 145 280
11.8 0 85 150 195 370
WARNING Gel and AGM (Absorbed Glass Mat) batteries require a voltage-limited charger. Charging a Gel or AGM
battery on a typical shop chargereven one timemay greatly shorten its life.
If the electrolyte is accessible, verify that plates are covered before beginning to charge. At the end of charge, add distilled water as needed to bring levels to the proper height. If water is added, charge for an additional 30 minutes to mix. If electrolyte levels are low, but battery is not accessible, remove battery from service.
CAUTION Follow all instructions and precautions furnished by the battery charger manufacturer, including the following:
Charge at recommended rates and times.
Turn off charger prior to hook up to avoid dangerous sparks. Wear proper eye protection.
Reduce charge rate if the terminal voltage is higher than 16.0 volts while charging. The maximum charge rate in amperes should NOTexceed 1/3 of the batterys reserve capacity minute rating.
Continue charging if there is no change in voltage or current for a period of 2 hours and reduce the rate as needed.
If the battery case gets hot during charging or spews large amount of gasses, temporarily stop charging.
IMPORTANT:
NEVER overcharge batteries. Excessive charging will shorten battery life.
To charge battery, follow these steps:
WARNING To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operators seat for any reason.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
29. Charging time depends upon battery capacity, condition, age, temperature, and efficiency of charger.
Page 383
214737 363 Revision A
1. Stop the engine and remove the key.
2. Move platform on right cab-forward side of machine to open position to allow access to the batteries. Refer to 5.3.1 Opening Platforms (Standard Position), page 291.
Figure 5.129: Battery Terminal Location
3. Remove red plastic covers (A) from positive cable clamps.
4. Remove black plastic covers (B) from negative terminals.
5. If charging battery in windrower, disconnect positive battery cable (A), then connect charger cable to positive post. Connect charger ground cable to the engine block last, away from battery.
6. Charge batteries in accordance with charger manufacturers instructions.
7. Close platform. Refer to 5.3.2 Closing Platforms (Standard Position), page 292.
Boosting the Batteries
A 12-volt battery can be connected in parallel (+ to +) with the windrower battery. Use heavy-duty battery cables.
CAUTION Gas given off by batteries is explosive. Keep sparks and flames away from batteries.
Make last connection and first disconnection at the point furthest away from the batteries.
Wear protective eye-wear when using a booster battery.
Be sure everyone is clear of machine when starting engine. Start engine from operators station only.
1. Open the hood. Refer to 5.2.1 Opening Hood (Lower Position), page 288.
Figure 5.130: Battery Boost Posts
2. Remove red rubber cover from boost post (A) on windrower frame.
3. Attach one end of battery cable to positive (+) terminal of booster battery, and other end to positive boost post (A) on windrower frame.
4. Attach second cable to negative (-) terminal of booster battery, and then to ground post (B) on windrower frame.
5. Turn ignition switch in cab as with normal start up.
6. After engine starts, disconnect cable from windrower ground first, and then disconnect the other cables.
7. Replace rubber cover on boost post (A).
8. Close the hood. Refer to 5.2.2 Closing Hood (Lower Position), page 289.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
Page 384
214737 364 Revision A
Adding Electrolyte to the Battery
Before servicing batteries, consult the battery manufacturers instructions for proper procedures and safety precautions.
CAUTION Do not attempt to service battery unless you have the proper equipment and experience to perform the job. Have it done by a qualified Dealer.
Figure 5.131: Battery Safety Hazard
WARNING Keep all smoking materials, sparks, and flames away from electrolyte container and battery. Gas given off by electrolyte is explosive.
Figure 5.132: Battery Safety
WARNING Battery electrolyte causes severe burns. Avoid
contact with skin, eyes, or clothing. Wear protective eyewear and heavy gloves.
If electrolyte is spilled or splashed on clothing or on the body, neutralize it immediately with a solution of baking soda and water, then rinse with clean water.
Electrolyte splashed into the eyes is extremely dangerous. Should this occur, force the eye open, and flood with cool, clean water for 5 minutes. Call a doctor immediately.
WARNING To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operators seat for any reason.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
Page 385
214737 365 Revision A
Figure 5.133: Platform Location
1. If the batteries are installed in the windrower, stop the engine and remove the key.
2. Open the platform (A) on the right side of the cab. Refer to 5.3.1 Opening Platforms (Standard Position), page 291.
3. Add electrolyte in accordance with the battery manufacturers instructions.
4. Close the platform. Refer to 5.3.2 Closing Platforms (Standard Position), page 292.
Removing Batteries
WARNING To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operators seat for any reason.
CAUTION Do not attempt to service battery unless you have the proper equipment and experience to perform the job. Have it done by a qualified Dealer.
1. Stop the engine and remove the key.
2. Open the right cab-forward platform to expose the batteries. Refer to 5.3.1 Opening Platforms (Standard Position), page 291.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
Page 386
214737 366 Revision A
Figure 5.134: Battery Main Disconnect Switch
3. Ensure the battery main disconnect switch (A) is turned to the POWER OFF position (the battery main disconnect switch is located on the right frame rail beside the batteries).
Figure 5.135: Batteries
4. Remove bolt (A) that secures the platform arm to the platform. Swing arm (B) out of the way.
5. Remove the black plastic covers from the negative cable clamps (D). Loosen clamps and remove cable from batteries.
6. Remove the red plastic covers from positive cable clamps (C). Loosen the clamps and remove cable from batteries.
7. Remove bolts (E) securing strap (F) to frame, and remove strap.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
Page 387
214737 367 Revision A
Figure 5.136: Battery Holder
8. Lift batteries off holder (A).
IMPORTANT:
Store batteries in a cool, dry area in an upright position.
Do NOT stack batteries on top of each other unless they are in cartons.
Test wet batteries every 46 months and recharge if necessary.
NOTE:
Dual battery support can be removed from frame by simply lifting support, and pulling it away from frame.
Installing Batteries
Replacement batteries must meet the specifications shown in the following table:
Table 5.2 Battery Specification
Rating Group CCA (min) Volt Maximum Dimension
Heavy duty, off-road, vibration resistant
BCI 29H or 31A 650 12 334 x 188 x 232 mm
(13.25 x 7.37 x 9.44 in.)
Figure 5.137: Battery Main Disconnect Switch
1. Ensure the battery main disconnect switch (A) is turned to the POWER OFF position (the battery main disconnect switch is located on the right frame rail beside the batteries).
2. Open right cab-forward platform to expose batteries. Refer to 5.3.1 Opening Platforms (Standard Position), page 291.
3. Remove cable ties securing battery cables to battery clamp.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
Page 388
214737 368 Revision A
Figure 5.138: Battery
4. Position new batteries (G) on dual battery support.
NOTE:
Ensure that batteries are positioned so that the positive posts (C) face aft.
5. Install strap (F) with bolts (E).
6. Rotate bar (B) into position and secure with bolt (A).
7. Connect battery cables to positive (C) and negative (D) battery posts. Refer to Connecting Batteries, page 368.
8. Close the platform. Refer to 5.3.2 Closing Platforms (Standard Position), page 292.
Connecting Batteries
WARNING To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operators seat for any reason.
1. Open the right (cab-forward) maintenance platform. Refer to .
Figure 5.139: Battery Main Disconnect Switch
2. Ensure the battery main disconnect switch (A) is turned to the POWER OFF position (the battery main disconnect switch is located on the right frame rail beside the batteries).
3. Remove the cable ties securing the battery cables to the battery clamps.
IMPORTANT:
Batteries are negative grounded. Always connect red starter cables to the positive (+) terminals of the batteries and black ground cables to the negative () terminals of the batteries. Reversed polarity in the batteries or alternator may result in permanent damage to the electrical system.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
Page 389
214737 369 Revision A
Figure 5.140: Batteries
4. Remove the plastic caps from the battery posts.
5. Attach the red positive (+) cable terminals to the positive posts (A) on the batteries and tighten clamps. Reposition plastic covers onto clamps.
6. Attach the black negative () cable terminals to the negative posts (B) on the batteries and tighten clamps. Reposition plastic covers onto clamps.
7. Turn the battery switch to the POWER ON position.
8. Close the platform. Refer to 5.3.2 Closing Platforms (Standard Position), page 292.
5.9.3 Headlights: Engine-Forward
Aligning Headlights
WARNING To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operators seat for any reason.
NOTE:
Header should be attached and raised to maintain proper windrower stance.
1. Position windrower in engine-forward mode on level ground so that headlights are positioned 7.5 m (25 ft.) in front of a vertical surface.
2. Shut down engine and remove key.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
Page 390
214737 370 Revision A
Figure 5.141: Road Light Switch (except Russia)
Figure 5.142: Road Light Switch (Russia Only)
3. Turn on ROAD lights (A) and switch to low beam (B).
Figure 5.143: Headlights
4. Align the headlights to the following specifications by turning adjusting screws (A).
Adjustments are for low beam.
Light beams laterally centered on the direction of travel line from the headlights (that is, NOT skewed left or right).
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
Page 391
214737 371 Revision A
Figure 5.144: Headlight Beam Positioning A - 1263 mm (49-3/4 in.) Maximum B - 7.5 m (25 ft.) C - Top Edge of Beam D - Beam Centered on Direction of Travel Line E - Ground
Upper limit of the beam NOT higher than 1263 mm (49-3/4 in.) above ground at a distance of 7.5 m (25 ft.) from the headlight.
Replacing Headlight Bulb
Replacement bulb: MD #110267 (H4 12V 60/55W)
Figure 5.145: Headlight
1. Remove two screws (A) and remove headlight assembly from hood.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
Page 392
214737 372 Revision A
Figure 5.146: Headlight Assembly
2. Pull wiring harness connector off the headlight assembly and remove rubber insulator boot (A).
Figure 5.147: Headlight Assembly
3. Pinch wire retainer (A) and lift away from hooks.
4. Remove bulb (B) from body.
IMPORTANT:
Do NOT touch the glass of the halogen bulb as the oils or other chemicals from your skin will cause the bulb to fail prematurely.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
Page 393
214737 373 Revision A
Figure 5.148: Headlight Assembly
5. Align lugs (B) on new bulb with slots (C) in body and push into place.
6. Secure bulb with wire retainer (A).
Figure 5.149: Headlight Assembly
7. Replace rubber insulator boot (A).
8. Push connector onto light bulb.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
Page 394
214737 374 Revision A
Figure 5.150: Headlight
9. Position headlight into light receptacle, ensuring top is up, and secure with screws (A). To align the headlights, refer to Aligning Headlights, page 369.
5.9.4 Field Lights: Cab-Forward
Adjusting Field Lights
The field lights are best adjusted with the machine in the field (or equivalent) to suit Operator preference.
WARNING To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operators seat for any reason.
Figure 5.151: Windrower Cab-Forward
1. Hold onto handholds (A) on the cab front corners, and stand on header anti-slip strips.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
Page 395
214737 375 Revision A
Figure 5.152: Field Lights
2. Adjust lights with screws (A).
Replacing Field Light Bulb
Replacement bulb: MD #110267 (H4 12V 60/55W)
Figure 5.153: Field Lights
1. Remove two screws (A), and remove light assembly.
2. Replace bulb as described in Replacing Headlight Bulb, page 371.
5.9.5 Floodlights: Forward
Adjusting Forward Floodlights
The forward floodlights are NOTadjustable.
Replacing Bulb in Cab-Forward Flood Light
Replacement bulb: MD #109113 (H3 12V 55W)
WARNING To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operators seat for any reason.
Replace bulbs as follows:
1. Shut down engine and remove key. Turn lights OFF.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
Page 396
214737 376 Revision A
Figure 5.154: Forward Floodlights
2. Hold onto handholds (A) on the cab front corners and stand on the header anti-slip strips when removing the forward field lights.
3. Remove two screws (B) and remove light bezel (C).
4. Remove light from receptacle.
Figure 5.155: Floodlight Assembly
5. Pinch wire retainer (A) and lift away from hooks.
6. Remove bulb (B) from body and pull wire from connector (C).
IMPORTANT:
Do NOT touch the glass of the halogen bulb as the oils or other chemicals from your skin will cause the bulb to fail prematurely.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
Page 397
214737 377 Revision A
Figure 5.156: Floodlight Assembly
7. Match slots on new bulb (B) with lugs (D) in optical unit and insert bulb into unit.
8. Secure bulb with wire retainer (A).
9. Push wire into connector (C).
Figure 5.157: Forward Floodlight
10. Position light into light receptacle, ensuring top is up and secure with bezel (C) and screws (B).
5.9.6 High-Intensity Discharge (HID) Auxiliary Lighting (Optional MD #B5596) Two optional HID lights provide additional lighting during field operation. They operate only in cab-forward mode.
Replacing High-Intensity Discharge (HID) Auxiliary Lights (if Installed)
WARNING To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operators seat for any reason.
To remove and replace the lamp only, follow these steps:
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
Page 398
214737 378 Revision A
Figure 5.158: Cab-Forward Lights
1. Shut down engine and remove key. Turn lights OFF.
NOTE:
Hold onto the handholds (A) on the cab front corners and stand on the header anti-slip strips, or stand on the maintenance platform when accessing the HID auxiliary lights.
Figure 5.159: HID Auxiliary Lights
2. Remove the nut, spring washer, and bolt (A) that secure the lamp (B) to lamp bracket (C).
3. Remove lamp (B).
4. Position the new lamp (B) in lamp bracket (C) and secure with bolt (A), spring washer, and nut.
5. Adjust lamp (B) to desired position and tighten bolt (A).
To remove and replace the HID lamp assembly, follow these steps:
Figure 5.160: HID Auxiliary Light Harness
6. Disconnect lamp connector (A) from electrical harness (B).
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
Page 399
214737 379 Revision A
Figure 5.161: HID Light Assembly
7. Remove grommet (A) from light support (B).
8. Remove nut (C) and spring washer from inside light support (B).
9. Remove the lamp assembly.
Figure 5.162: HID Light Assembly
10. Locate light in center hole in light support (B) and secure with hardware (C) provided with light assembly.
11. Adjust light assembly to desired position and tighten nut (C).
12. Route lamp harness through grommet (A) and slot in light support (B).
13. Reinstall grommet (A) in light support (B).
Figure 5.163: HID Auxiliary Light Harness
14. Connect lamp plug (A) to main harness connector (B).
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
Page 400
214737 380 Revision A
Adjusting High-Intensity Discharge (HID) Auxiliary Lights (if Installed)
If installed, HID auxiliary lights are best adjusted with the machine in the field (or equivalent) to suit Operator preference.
WARNING To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operators seat for any reason.
Figure 5.164: HID Auxiliary Lights
1. Shut down engine and remove key. Turn lights ON.
2. Loosen bolt (A) and nut (C) (located inside the light/mirror support).
3. Position light (B) to desired position.
4. Tighten bolt and nut.
5.9.7 Floodlights: Rear
Adjusting Rear Floodlights
The rear floodlights are best adjusted with the machine in the field (or equivalent) to suit Operator preference.
WARNING To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operators seat for any reason.
Figure 5.165: Rear Flood Light
1. Shut down engine and remove key. Turn lights ON.
2. Loosen bolts (A) and (B).
3. Position light to desired position.
4. Tighten bolts (A) and (B).
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
Page 401
214737 381 Revision A
Replacing Bulb in Rear Flood Light
Replacement bulb: MD #109113 (H3 12V 55W)
WARNING To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operators seat for any reason.
Figure 5.166: Rear Flood Light
1. Shut down engine and remove key. Turn lights OFF.
2. Remove two screws (A) and remove light bezel (B).
3. Remove light from receptacle.
IMPORTANT:
Do NOT touch the glass of the halogen bulb as the oils or other chemicals from your skin will cause the bulb to fail prematurely.
Figure 5.167: Rear Flood Light Assembly
4. Pinch the wire retainer (A) and lift away from hooks.
5. Remove bulb (B) from body and pull wire from connector (D).
6. Match slots on new bulb (B) with lugs (C) in optical unit and insert bulb into unit.
7. Secure bulb with wire retainer (A).
8. Push wire into connector (D).
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
Page 402
214737 382 Revision A
Figure 5.168: Rear Flood Light
9. Position light into light receptacle, ensuring top is up.
10. Secure with bezel (B) and screws (A).
5.9.8 Replacing Bulbs in Red and Amber Lights To replace bulbs in red and amber lights, follow these steps:
WARNING To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operators seat for any reason.
Figure 5.169: Windrower Cab-Forward
1. Shut down engine and remove key. Turn lights OFF.
NOTE:
Hold onto handholds (A) on the cab front corners and stand on the header anti-slip strips, or stand on the maintenance platform when accessing the red and amber lights.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
Page 403
214737 383 Revision A
Figure 5.170: Red and Amber Lights
2. Remove two screws (A) from lens and remove lens.
3. Push and twist light bulb to remove from socket.
4. Install new bulb in socket ensuring that bulb base is properly engaged in socket.
Use Bulb Trade #1157 for red taillights
Use Bulb Trade #1156 for amber lights
5. Reinstall lens with screws (A).
5.9.9 Replacing Red Taillights Red taillights are included with the Lighting and Marking for Cab-Forward Road Travel Kit (MD #B5412). To replace the red taillights, follow these steps:
WARNING To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operators seat for any reason.
Figure 5.171: Red Taillights
1. Shut down the engine and remove the key.
2. Turn lights OFF.
3. In the grill of the hood, remove two screws (A) from light (B), and remove light.
4. Remove connector from light.
5. Connect wiring harness to new light (B) and install light with screws (A).
5.9.10 Replacing the Bulbs in Beacon Lights Replacement bulb: MD #160379 (H1 12V 55W)
WARNING To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operators seat for any reason.
To replace the halogen bulb inside the beacon warning lights, follow these steps:
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
Page 404
214737 384 Revision A
Figure 5.172: Warning Beacons
1. Shut down the engine and remove the key. Turn beacons OFF.
NOTE:
Hold onto handholds (B) on the cab front corners and stand on the header anti-slip strips, or stand on the maintenance platform when accessing beacons (A).
Figure 5.173: Warning Beacon
2. Turn lens (A) counterclockwise to unlock lens from base and remove lens.
Figure 5.174: Beacon Lamp Assembly
3. Pinch retainer (A) and remove it from lamp socket.
4. Pull lamp out of socket.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
Page 405
214737 385 Revision A
Figure 5.175: Beacon Lamp Assembly
5. Disconnect harness from lamp.
IMPORTANT:
Do NOT touch the glass (A) of the halogen bulb as the oils or other chemicals from your skin will cause the bulb to fail prematurely.
Figure 5.176: Beacon Lamp Assembly
6. Connect harness to new lamp, place lamp in socket, and line up the flat side on lamp with recess in socket (A).
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
Page 406
214737 386 Revision A
Figure 5.177: Beacon Lamp Assembly
7. Place retainer (A) over lamp and pinch tabs to secure retainer to socket.
Figure 5.178: Beacon Lamp Assembly
8. Line up the three lugs (one is longer) in the base with slots in lens, and seat the lens against the rubber seal.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
Page 407
214737 387 Revision A
Figure 5.179: Warning Beacon
9. Turn the lens (A) clockwise to lock it in place.
5.9.11 Replacing the Cabin Dome Light To replace a cabin dome light in the headliner switch panel, follow these steps:
Figure 5.180: Cabin Dome Light
1. Remove two screws (A) from the dome light assembly and remove the assembly.
2. Disconnect the old dome light assembly from the wiring harness.
3. Connect the new dome light (MD #183413) to the wiring harness.
4. Install the new dome light with two screws (A).
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
Page 408
214737 388 Revision A
5.9.12 Replacing the Ambient Light Fixture To replace the ambient light fixture, follow these steps:
Figure 5.181: Ambient Light Fixture
1. Locate ambient light fixture (A) in the roof liner.
Figure 5.182: Ambient Light Fixture
2. Push against tabs (A) with a screwdriver and pull ambient light fixture out of cab roof.
3. Remove wires from connectors (B).
4. Connect wires to new light fixture.
5. Push into place in cab roof until tabs hold fixture in place.
5.9.13 Turn Signal Indicators If the turn signal indicators on the operator console do not function, contact your MacDon Dealer.
5.9.14 Accessing Circuit Breakers and Fuses
WARNING To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operators seat for any reason.
Access the breakers and fuses as follows:
1. Stop engine and remove key.
2. Move right (cab-forward) side platform rearward. Refer to 5.3.1 Opening Platforms (Standard Position), page 291.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
Page 409
214737 389 Revision A
Figure 5.183: Fuse Box
3. Remove wing nut (A) and remove fuse box cover (B).
4. A cover may be installed over the circuit breaker. Remove it to access the breaker.
Checking and Replacing Fuses
WARNING To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operators seat for any reason.
1. Stop the engine and remove the key.
2. Open the right (cab-forward) side platform. Refer to 5.3.1 Opening Platforms (Standard Position), page 291.
3. Remove fuse box cover. Refer to 5.9.14 Accessing Circuit Breakers and Fuses, page 388.
Figure 5.184: Fuses and Circuit Breakers
4. Refer to the decal on inside of cover for identification of fuses and circuit breakers.
5. To check fuse, pull fuse out of receptacle and visually examine.
6. To replace fuse, insert new fuse into receptacle.
IMPORTANT:
Replacement fuses should match rating on decal shown on Fuse Box Decal, page 391.
7. Reinstall cover and secure with wing nut.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
Page 410
214737 390 Revision A
Replacing Circuit Breakers and Relays
WARNING To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operators seat for any reason.
Replace breakers and relays as follows:
1. Stop engine and remove key.
2. Move right cab-forward side platform rearward (cab-forward).
3. Remove fuse box cover. Refer to 5.9.14 Accessing Circuit Breakers and Fuses, page 388.
Figure 5.185: Relays and Breakers
4. To replace circuit breaker (A), pull breaker out of receptacle and install new circuit breaker.
5. To replace relay (B), pull relay out of receptacle and install new relay.
6. Reinstall cover and secure with wing nut.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
Page 411
214737 391 Revision A
Fuse Box Decal Figure 5.186: Fuse Decal
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
Page 412
214737 392 Revision A
Accessing T4 Specific Fuses
The M155E4 carries a separate fuse and breaker box and an electronic control unit (ECU) power fuse dedicated to the diesel exhaust fluid (DEF) system.
The fuse box (A) and the electronic control unit (ECU) power fuse (B) are located below the exhaust canister on the right cab-forward side and secured above the side frame.
DANGER To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of machine, always stop engine and remove key from ignition before leaving operators seat for any reason.
Access the breakers and fuses as follows:
Figure 5.187: Fuse Box and ECU Power Fuse
1. Stop engine and remove key.
2. Move right cab-forward side platform rearward (cab- forward). Refer to 5.3.3 Opening Platforms (Major Service Position), page 293.
3. Raise hood to the highest position. Refer to 5.2.3 Opening Hood (Highest Position), page 289.
Figure 5.188: Fuse Box
4. Undo clips (A) on both sides of the fuse and breaker box.
5. Remove cover (B).
NOTE:
Refer to the decal on inside of cover for identification of fuses and relays.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
Page 413
214737 393 Revision A
Figure 5.189: ECU Power Fuse
6. Undo clip (A) on the ECU power fuse and pull cover (B) away.
Checking and Replacing T4 Specific Fuses and Relays
Figure 5.190: Fuses and Relays
1. To Check and Replace Fuse
a. Pull fuse out of receptacle and visually examine.
b. To replace fuse, insert new fuse into receptacle.
2. To Replace Relay
a. Pull relay out of receptacle and install new relay.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
Page 414
214737 394 Revision A
Inspecting and Replacing 125A Main Fuses
The 125A main fuse holders are located on the frame under the right cab-forward side platform beside the battery.
WARNING To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operators seat for any reason.
1. Stop engine and remove key.
2. Move right (cab-forward) side platform rearward.
Figure 5.191: 125A Main Fuses
NOTE:
There are three main fuses, two (A) are secured on the right cab-forward front frame and one is behind the frame secured by the two bolts and nuts (B).
Figure 5.192: 125A Main Fuses
3. To check condition of fuse, pull tab (A) and open cover (B).
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
Page 415
214737 395 Revision A
Figure 5.193: 125A Main Fuse
4. Visually examine fuse (B) for indications of melting.
5. To remove fuse (B), remove two nuts (C) and pull fuse free from holder (existing wiring may need to be pulled off the stud first).
6. Install new fuse on studs and any existing wiring that was removed.
7. Secure with nuts (C).
Figure 5.194: 125A Main Fuses
8. Close cover (B) and secure with tab (A).
9. Return platform to operating position. Ensure lock engages.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
Page 416
214737 396 Revision A
5.10 Hydraulic System The M155E4 windrower hydraulic system provides oil pressure for the header lift, the windrower drive, and header drive systems.
Figure 5.195: Hydraulic Pressure Hazard
WARNING Avoid high pressure fluids. Escaping fluid can
penetrate the skin causing serious injury. Relieve pressure before disconnecting hydraulic lines.
Tighten all connections before applying pressure. Keep hands and body away from pin-holes and nozzles which eject fluids under high pressure.
Figure 5.196: Checking Hydraulic Leaks
WARNING Use a piece of cardboard or paper to search for leaks.
If ANY fluid is injected into the skin, it must be surgically removed within a few hours by a doctor familiar with this type of injury or gangrene may result.
IMPORTANT:
Foreign materials such as dirt, dust, and water are the major cause of damage in the hydraulic system.
If hydraulic system components must be disconnected for service, protect the ends of hoses, tubing, and ports of components from contamination with clean, lint-free towels, or clean plastic bags.
Before installing any replacement hose, flush the inside with unused diesel fuel or unused commercial petroleum cleaning solvent for 10 seconds minimum. Do NOT use water, water soluble cleaners, or compressed air.
The hydraulic system components are built to very close tolerances and have been adjusted at the factory. Do NOT attempt to service these components except to maintain proper oil level, change oil and filters, and to adjust relief pressures as described in this manual.
See your MacDon Dealer for all other service.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
Page 417
214737 397 Revision A
5.10.1 Checking and Filling Hydraulic Oil
WARNING To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operators seat for any reason.
1. Park windrower on level ground and lower header and reel so that lift cylinders are fully retracted.
2. Stop the engine and remove the key.
3. Open the hood. Refer to 5.2.1 Opening Hood (Lower Position), page 288.
Figure 5.197: Hydraulic Oil Sight Glass
NOTE:
A sight glass (A) is provided under the hood on the right side of the tank. It indicates oil level and signs of contamination. No oil in the sight glass indicates oil level is below the add mark on the dipstick.
Figure 5.198: Engine Hood
4. Stand on left (cab-forward side) platform to access the filler pipe.
5. Clean cap (A) and surrounding area.
6. Turn filler cap (A) counterclockwise to unlock cap and remove dipstick.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
Page 418
214737 398 Revision A
Figure 5.199: Hydraulic Oil Levels
7. If necessary, add oil to maintain a level between the low (L) and high (H) marks. Refer to inside back cover for hydraulic oil specifications and quantity.
NOTE:
When dipstick is showing low (L), approximately 4 liters (1 US gallon) is required to reach the full (H) mark.
IMPORTANT:
Use new, good quality, prefiltered clean oil
Exercise care to prevent debris from falling into tank
8. Reinstall dipstick and filler cap, and turn clockwise to tighten and lock.
9. Close the hood. Refer to 5.2.2 Closing Hood (Lower Position), page 289.
5.10.2 Hydraulic Oil Cooler The hydraulic oil cooler is located inside the cooling box behind the radiator.
It should be cleaned daily with compressed air. Refer to 5.8.3 Cleaning Cooler Box Components, page 357.
5.10.3 Changing the Hydraulic Oil
WARNING To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operators seat for any reason.
Hydraulic oil should be changed every 1500 hours or every 2 years.
To drain hydraulic oil, follow these steps:
1. Park the windrower on level ground, and lower the header and reel so that the lift cylinders are fully retracted.
2. Stop the engine and remove the key.
3. Open the hood. Refer to 5.2.3 Opening Hood (Highest Position), page 289.
4. Place a clean container (at least 75 liters [20 US gallons]) under drain at the bottom of the hydraulic reservoir to collect the oil.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
Page 419
214737 399 Revision A
Figure 5.200: Hydraulic Oil Drain Plug (Some Parts Removed for Clarity)
5. Remove drain plug (A) and allow oil to drain.
6. Inspect plug and clean off any metal debris that may have accumulated on magnetic plug. Wipe plug with a clean cloth. Check O-ring condition. Look for cracking, breakage, or deformation that may impede sealing ability and replace as required.
7. Install drain plug (A), and torque to 80 Nm (59 lbfft).
8. Fill hydraulic oil reservoir. Refer to 5.10.1 Checking and Filling Hydraulic Oil, page 397.
5.10.4 Changing Hydraulic Oil Filters
Figure 5.201: Hydraulic Oil Filters
Change hydraulic oil filters after the first 50 hours of operation, and every 500 hours thereafter. Filter (A) (MD #112419) and service kit for filter (B) (MD #183620) can be obtained from your Dealer.
The charge oil filter (A) and return oil filter (B) are located just inside the frame on the left side and are accessible from under the windrower.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
Page 420
214737 400 Revision A
Charge Oil Filter
The charge oil filter cleans the oil in the hydraulic charge circuit. The charge circuit replenishes oil losses that occur normally at the motor and pump case drains and associated circuits.
Removing Charge Oil Filter
WARNING To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operators seat for any reason.
Figure 5.202: Charge Oil Filter
1. Stop the engine and remove the key.
2. Clean around head of the filter (A).
3. Place a container beneath the filter to collect any oil that may leak out.
4. Unscrew filter (A) with a filter wrench.
5. Dispose of used oil and filter in accordance with local legislation.
Installing Charge Oil Filter
NOTE:
For charge oil filter replacement part number, refer to 8.1.4 Filter Part Numbers, page 453.
Figure 5.203: Charge Oil Filter
1. Clean the gasket surface of the filter head.
2. Apply a thin film of clean oil to the filter gasket.
3. Screw the new filter (A) onto the mount until the gasket contacts the filter head.
4. Tighten filter an additional 1/2 turn by hand.
IMPORTANT:
Do NOT use a filter wrench to install oil filter. Overtightening can damage gasket and filter.
5. Check hydraulic fluid levels and add fluid if needed. Refer to 5.10.1 Checking and Filling Hydraulic Oil, page 397.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
Page 421
214737 401 Revision A
Return Oil Filter
The return oil filter filters the oil in the header drive systems and should be changed after the first 50 hours of operation, and then at 500 hour intervals.
Removing Return Oil Filter
WARNING To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operators seat for any reason.
1. Stop the engine and remove the key.
Figure 5.204: Return Oil Filter
2. Clean around head of filter (A).
3. Place a container beneath filter (A) to collect any oil that may leak out.
4. Unscrew filter (A) with a filter wrench.
5. Dispose of used oil and filter in accordance with local legislation.
Figure 5.205: Return Oil Filter
NOTE:
Filter head removed to show component clarity.
6. Remove gasket (C) from groove (B) in filter head (A). Filter (D) shown for context.
Installing Return Oil Filter
NOTE:
For filter specifications, refer to 8.1.4 Filter Part Numbers, page 453.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
Page 422
214737 402 Revision A
Figure 5.206: Return Oil Filter
1. Clean the gasket groove (B) in the filter head (A). If O-ring is installed in groove, remove and discard it.
2. Apply a thin film of clean oil to the filter square cut gasket (C).
3. Install new square cut gasket (C) into the groove (B) in the filter head (A).
4. Screw the new filter (D) onto the filter head until the gasket contacts the filter.
Figure 5.207: Return Oil Filter
5. Tighten filter (A) an additional 3/4 turn by hand.
IMPORTANT:
Do NOT use a filter wrench to install oil filter. Overtightening can damage gasket and filter.
6. Check hydraulic fluid levels. Refer to 5.10.1 Checking and Filling Hydraulic Oil, page 397.
5.10.5 Header and Reel Hydraulics
Pressure Compensator Valve
The pressure compensator valve protects the header drive pumps from overheating under very heavy loads.
When the operating pressure reaches the absolute pressure limit setting (refer to 5.3, page 403) the compensator valve in the pump is activated and the header drive will slow down to avoid overheating the drive pumps. At this point, reduce the ground speed to maintain the correct system load and header drive operation.
NOTE:
An optional pressure sensor is available to monitor the knife or reel drive hydraulic pressure and provide a warning tone from the cab display module (CDM) if the system pressure approaches a preset limit. The system pressure limit is set during CDM programming. Refer to 6.3.6 Pressure Sensor Kit, page 430. The warning tone is only heard if the pressure sensor is installed and enabled.
NOTE:
A warning tone is normal when the operating pressure is close to the compensator valves pressure setting.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
Page 423
214737 403 Revision A
Table 5.3 Header Hydraulic Pressures
Header Model
Application/System Windrower Absolute Pressure
Limit Setting kPa (psi)
Suggested Overload Warning Setting kPa (psi)
R/R1 Series Disc pressure 28,958 (4200) 27,579 (4000)
D/D1 Series Reel/draper pressure 22,063 (3200) 20,684 (3000)
A Series Knife/conditioner pressure
28,958 (4200) 27,579 (4000)
If lift and drive capacity problems develop, the pressure compensator valve may require adjusting. Contact your MacDon Dealer for assistance.
Flow Control Blocks
Figure 5.208: Hydraulic Valve Blocks
Two hydraulic valve blocks with multiple cartridges are used for the various windrower functions and are controlled by the windrower control module (WCM) according to the inputs from the Operator. The valve blocks are located behind the left cab-forward side platform.
The valve blocks do not require any scheduled maintenance other than to check for leaking fittings or loose electrical connections. If service is required, contact your MacDon Dealer.
Adjusting Header Drop Rate
The header should lower gradually when the lower header switch is pressed. From fully raised to ground position, it should take approximately 34 seconds.
IMPORTANT:
Drop rate should NOT be less than 34 seconds as structural damage may result.
NOTE:
If drop rate is too slow (over 30 seconds), return to cut height, tilt, or float presets will deactivate to prevent overheating the hydraulic system.
WARNING To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operators seat for any reason.
1. Lower header to ground, stop the engine, and remove the key.
2. Open left cab-forward side platform. Refer to 5.3.1 Opening Platforms (Standard Position), page 291.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
Page 424
214737 404 Revision A
Figure 5.209: Multifunction Control Manifold
3. Loosen inner knob (B) on needle valve, and refer to the following options:
Turn outer knob (A) clockwise to decrease the drop rate
Turn outer knob (A) counterclockwise to increase the drop rate
4. Tighten inner knob (B).
5. Check the drop rate and readjust as required.
6. Close the platform. Refer to 5.3.2 Closing Platforms (Standard Position), page 292.
Adjusting Reel Drop Rate
The reel should lower gradually when the lower reel switch is pressed. From fully raised to fully lowered should take approximately 34 seconds. Drop rate is a customer preference and will vary based on crop type and cutting condition.
IMPORTANT:
Drop rate should NOT be less than 34 seconds as structural damage may result.
WARNING To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operators seat for any reason.
1. Lower header to ground, stop the engine, and remove the key.
2. Open the left cab-forward side maintenance platform. Refer to 5.3.1 Opening Platforms (Standard Position), page 291.
Figure 5.210: Multifunction Control Manifold
3. Locate valve (A) that controls the reel drop rate, installed at port D on the manifold.
NOTE:
This valve is installed on draper-ready windrowers and only affects draper headers.
4. Loosen setscrew (B), then refer to the following options:
Turn cap (C) clockwise to decrease the drop rate.
Turn cap (C) counterclockwise to increase the drop rate.
5. Check the drop rate and adjust as required.
NOTE:
To reset to factory specifications, fully close the needle valve and open it four turns counterclockwise.
6. Tighten setscrew (B).
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
Page 425
214737 405 Revision A
Figure 5.211: Decal
NOTE:
Decal (A) is provided on frame for easy reference.
7. Close the platform. Refer to 5.3.2 Closing Platforms (Standard Position), page 292.
5.10.6 Traction Drive Hydraulics The windrower transmission consists of two variable-displacement axial-piston hydraulic pumpsone for each drive wheel.
The pumps are driven through a gearbox from the engine. Each pump requires charge flow in order to:
Make up for internal leakage
Maintain positive pressure in the main circuit
Provide flow for cooling
Replace any leakage losses from external valving or auxiliary systems
The charge pressure is monitored. The cab display module (CDM) sounds a tone and displays a flashing warning if charge pressure drops below 1725 kPa (250 psi). Refer to Display Warnings and Alarms, page 90.
Checking Transmission Oil Pressure
IMPORTANT:
Rated charge pressure MUST be maintained under all conditions of operation to prevent damage to the transmission.
If the TRANS OIL PRESSURE warning is displayed, shut down the engine, and proceed as follows:
1. Check the hydraulic fluid level in the tank. Refer to 5.10.1 Checking and Filling Hydraulic Oil, page 397.
2. Check the hoses and lines for leakage.
3. Check the charge pressure relief valve. Refer to Checking Charge Pump Pressure, page 406.
4. If charge pressure still cannot be maintained, do NOToperate the windrower. Contact your MacDon Dealer.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
Page 426
214737 406 Revision A
Checking Charge Pump Pressure
WARNING To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operators seat for any reason.
Incorrect charge pressure settings may result in the inability to build required system pressure and/or inadequate loop flushing flows.
Correct charge pressure MUST be maintained under all conditions to maintain pump control performance and to operate the brake release.
Check charge pump pressure as follows:
1. Open hood fully. Refer to 5.2.3 Opening Hood (Highest Position), page 289.
2. Attach a 04000 kPa (0600 psi) pressure gauge to a hose that is long enough to allow pressure gauge to be read from the operators seat.
Figure 5.212: Charge Pump Test Port
3. Locate test port (A) on the charge filter head. Clean the test port fitting, and then attach hose to the fitting.
4. Start engine and leave at idle. Pressure should be 16552241 kPa (240325 psi) with the hydraulic oil at 40C (100F) minimum.
5. Make note of the reading and shut down the windrower.
6. If pressure is NOTwithin this range, contact your MacDon Dealer.
7. If pressure is within range, remove the hose from the test port and close the hood. Refer to 5.2.4 Closing Hood (Highest Position), page 290.
5.10.7 Hoses and Lines Check hydraulic hoses and lines daily for signs of leaks.
Figure 5.213: Hydraulic Pressure Hazard
WARNING Avoid high-pressure fluids. Escaping fluid can
penetrate the skin causing serious injury.
Relieve pressure before disconnecting hydraulic lines. Tighten all connections before applying pressure.
Keep hands and body away from pin-holes and nozzles which eject fluids under high pressure.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
Page 427
214737 407 Revision A
Figure 5.214: Checking Hydraulic Leaks
WARNING Use a piece of cardboard or paper to search for leaks.
If ANY fluid is injected into the skin, it must be surgically removed within a few hours by a Doctor familiar with this type of injury or gangrene may result.
IMPORTANT:
Keep hydraulic coupler tips and connectors clean. Dust, dirt, water, and foreign material are the major causes of hydraulic system damage.
DO NOTattempt to service hydraulic system in the field. Precision fits require WHITE ROOM CARE during overhaul.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
Page 428
214737 408 Revision A
5.11 Wheels and Tires
5.11.1 Drive Wheels
Inflating Drive Wheel Tire
Figure 5.215: Drive Tire Inflation
DANGER Use a safety cage if available.
Do NOTstand over tire. Use a clip-on chuck and extension hose.
NEVER install a tube in a cracked wheel rim.
NEVER weld a wheel rim.
Do NOTexceed maximum inflation pressure as per label on tire.
Make sure all the air is removed from a tire before removing the tire from the rim.
DANGER NEVER use force on an inflated or partially inflated tire. Make sure the tire is correctly seated before
inflating to operating pressure.
Do NOT remove, install, or make repairs to a tire on a rim unless you have the proper equipment and experience to perform the job. Take the tire and rim to a qualified tire repair shop.
If the tire is NOT in the correct position on the rim or if overinflated, the tire bead can loosen on one side, causing air to leak at high speed and with great force. An air leak of this nature can thrust the tire in any direction, endangering anyone in the area.
WARNING To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operators seat for any reason.
Visually check daily that tires have not lost pressure. Adjust pressure as required. Underinflated drive tires can cause sidewall cracks. Check tire pressure every year.
Maintain tire pressure as follows:
1. Shut down the engine and remove key.
2. Determine the type and size of tire that is installed on your machine.
3. Refer to the following table to determine the appropriate tire pressure:
Table 5.4 Drive Wheel Tire Options (Ten Bolt)
18.4-26 Bar 600-65 R28 Bar 18.4-26 Turf 23.1-26 Turf
317 kPa (46 psi)
241 kPa (35 psi)
317 kPa (46 psi)
234 kPa (34 psi)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
Page 429
214737 409 Revision A
4. Adjust tire pressure as required.
IMPORTANT:
Check maximum inflation rating on tire sidewall. Do NOTexceed recommendation on tire.
Tightening Drive Wheel Nuts
At first use, or when a wheel is removed, torque drive wheel nuts after 1 hour of operation. Continue with torque procedure every hour until two consecutive checks produce no movement of the nuts.
IMPORTANT:
To avoid damage to wheel rims and studs, tighten nuts by hand, do NOT use an impact gun, do NOT use lubricant or Never-Seez compound (or equivalent), and do NOTovertighten wheel nuts.
Ensure only the manufactures specified wheel nuts are used.
Follow these steps to tighten the drive wheel nuts:
Figure 5.216: Wheel Nut Tightening Sequence
1. Tighten drive wheel nuts (A). Ensure nuts and studs are dry with NO lubricant or Never-Seez compound (or equivalent). Torque each nut to 510 Nm (375 lbfft) using the tightening sequence shown at right.
2. Repeat tightening sequence two additional times at specified torque.
3. Repeat torque procedure every hour until two consecutive checks produce no movement of the nuts.
Servicing Drive Wheels
Raising Drive Wheel
This procedure can be used on both drive wheels.
WARNING To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operators seat for any reason.
CAUTION Header MUST be removed and NO weight box installed. Use a hydraulic jack with minimum lifting capacity of 2268 kg (5000 lb.) to provide adequate support for the machine.
1. Remove the header.
2. Park windrower on level ground and block all wheels.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
Page 430
214737 410 Revision A
Figure 5.217: Ground Speed Lever
3. Place ground speed lever (A) in N-DETENT (B), shut down engine, and remove key.
CAUTION Jack stand must be capable of supporting a minimum of 2268 kg (5000 lb.).
Figure 5.218: Drive Wheel Jack Point
4. Place a jack under leg jack point (A), and raise the drive wheel until it is slightly off the ground. Place a jack stand beneath lift cylinder mount (B).
NOTE:
Do NOT place jack stand under the cylinder. Use a small metal plate on top of the jack stand.
5. Lower the windrower onto the jack stand.
Removing Drive Wheel
CAUTION Use a suitable lifting device capable of supporting a minimum of 907 kg (2000 lb.) to lift the wheel assembly away from the windrower.
Figure 5.219: Drive Wheel
1. Raise windrower drive wheel (A) off the ground. Refer to Raising Drive Wheel, page 409.
2. Remove wheel nuts (B).
3. Use a suitable lifting device to remove drive wheel (A).
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
Page 431
214737 411 Revision A
Installing Drive Wheel
CAUTION Use a suitable lifting device capable of supporting a minimum of 907 kg (2000 lb.) to lift the wheel assembly away from the windrower.
Figure 5.220: Drive Wheel
1. Position drive wheel (A) against wheel drive hub (B) so air valve (C) is on the outside and tire tread (D) points in cab-forward direction.
NOTE:
For turf tires (diamond tread), be sure arrow on sidewall points in cab-forward rotation.
2. Lift wheel onto hub using a suitable lifting device.
3. Remove the lifting device.
Figure 5.221: Drive Wheel Nuts
4. Line up the holes in the rim with the studs on the wheel drive hub and install wheel nuts (A).
IMPORTANT:
To avoid damage to wheel rims and studs, tighten nuts by hand. Do NOT use an impact gun, do NOT use lubricant or Never-Seez compound, and do NOT overtighten wheel nuts.
5. Torque drive wheel nuts. Refer to Tightening Drive Wheel Nuts, page 409.
6. Lower the windrower, and remove jack. Refer to Lowering Drive Wheel, page 411.
Lowering Drive Wheel
This procedure is for lowering the drive wheel when it is raised on a jack stand. This procedure can be used on both drive wheels.
CAUTION Jack stand must be capable of supporting a minimum of 2268 kg (5000 lb.).
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
Page 432
214737 412 Revision A
Figure 5.222: Drive Wheel Leg Jack Point
1. Place a jack under leg jack point (A), and raise the drive wheel slightly off the jack stand.
2. Remove the jack stand from under cylinder lift mount (B), and lower the drive wheel to the ground.
3. Remove the jack.
Lubrication
Checking Wheel Drive Lubricant Level
Check the wheel drive lubricant level every 250 hours or annually.
WARNING To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operators seat for any reason.
CAUTION Park on a flat, level surface with the header on the ground, the ground speed lever in N-DETENT position, and the steering wheel in locked position (centered). Wait for the CDM to beep and display an In Park message to confirm the park brakes have engaged.
1. Park the windrower on level ground.
Figure 5.223: Drive Wheel Hub
2. Position windrower so plugs (A) and (B) are horizontally aligned with the center (C) of the hub.
3. Stop the engine, and remove the key.
4. Remove plug (A) or (B). The lubricant should be visible through the port or running out slightly. If lubricant needs to be added, refer to Adding Wheel Drive Lubricant, page 413.
NOTE:
The type of lubricant used after the first lubricant change is different from the factory supplied lubricant.
5. Reinstall plugs and tighten.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
Page 433
214737 413 Revision A
Adding Wheel Drive Lubricant
WARNING To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operators seat for any reason.
CAUTION Park on a flat, level surface with the header on the ground, the ground speed lever in N-DETENT position, and the steering wheel in locked position (centered). Wait for the CDM to beep and display an In Park message to confirm the park brakes have engaged.
IMPORTANT:
Do NOTmix lubricants of different brands or characteristics.
Figure 5.224: Drive Wheel Hub
1. Rotate the wheel drive so plugs (A) and (B) are horizontal with the center of the hub (C).
2. Stop windrower and remove key from ignition.
3. Remove the 2 plugs (A) and (B). The oil should be visible through the hole, or slightly running out.
4. If lubricant needs to be added, remove the second plug (B), and add lubricant until lubricant runs out at location (A). Refer to inside back cover.
NOTE:
The type of lubricant used after first lubricant change is different from factory-supplied lubricant.
5. Reinstall and tighten plugs (A) and (B).
6. Start up and operate the windrower for a few minutes, then stop and check the oil level. If necessary, add more oil.
Changing Wheel Drive Lubricant
The wheel drive lubricant should be changed after the first 50 hours and then changed after every 1000 hours. Change the lubricant when it is warm.
Check the level every 200 hours or annually.
WARNING To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operators seat for any reason.
CAUTION Park on a flat, level surface with the header on the ground, the ground speed lever in N-DETENT position, and the steering wheel in locked position (centered). Wait for the CDM to beep and display an In Park message to confirm the park brakes have engaged.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
Page 434
214737 414 Revision A
Figure 5.225: Drive Wheel Hub
1. Park windrower on level ground and position windrower so that one of the drain plugs (A) or (B) is at the lowest point on the drive wheel hub.
2. Shut down the windrower and remove key from ignition.
3. Place a container that can contain at least 2 liters (2 quarts) under the lower drain plug (B).
4. Remove both plugs (A) and (B), and drain lubricant into container.
CAUTION Dispose of oil in a manner that complies with local rules and regulations.
Figure 5.226: Drive Wheel Hub
5. After the lubricant has drained completely, start the windrower and position it so that ports (A) and (B) on wheel are level with the center of the hub (C) as shown.
6. Shut down the windrower and remove the key from the ignition.
7. Add lubricant. Refer to Adding Wheel Drive Lubricant, page 413.
5.11.2 Caster Wheels
Inflating Caster Tire
Figure 5.227: Safely Filling a Tire with Air
DANGER Do NOTexceed maximum inflation pressure as per
label on tire.
Use a safety cage if available.
Do NOTstand over tire. Use a clip-on chuck and extension hose.
NEVER install a tube in a cracked wheel rim.
NEVER weld a wheel rim.
Make sure all the air is removed from a tire before removing the tire from the rim.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
Page 435
214737 415 Revision A
DANGER NEVER use force on an inflated or partially inflated tire. Make sure the tire is correctly seated before
inflating to operating pressure.
Do NOT remove, install, or make repairs to a tire on a rim, unless you have the proper equipment and experience to perform the job. Take the tire and rim to a qualified tire repair shop.
If the tire is NOT in the correct position on the rim or if too full of air, the tire bead can loosen on one side, causing air to leak at high speed and with great force. An air leak of this nature can thrust the tire in any direction, endangering anyone in the area.
To avoid severe personal injury or death caused by machine runaway, shut off engine and remove key before performing any of the following checks and/or adjustments.
Check tire pressure every year. Caster tire pressure should be 69 kPa (10 psi).
To maintain pressure, visually check daily that tires have not lost pressure, and adjust pressure as needed. Underinflation of tires can cause sidewall cracks.
NOTE:
Overinflation may cause caster wheels to shimmy.
Table 5.5 Caster Tire Options
Formed Caster Forked Caster
7.516SL single rib, 1016 front steer tire
16.5L16.1 rib implement flotation, 1016 front steer tire
69 kPa (10 psi) 69 kPa (10 psi)
Tightening Caster Wheel Nuts
At first use or when a wheel is removed, check wheel nut/bolt torque every 15 minutes on the road or 1 hour in the field until the specified torque is maintained.
Once specified torque is maintained, check wheel nut/bolt torque after 10 and 50 hours (field or road operation) and then at 200 hour intervals thereafter.
To tighten the caster wheel nuts on either forked or formed caster wheels, follow these steps:
Figure 5.228: Forked Caster Wheel Nut Tightening Sequence
1. Position wheel assembly on hub and install wheel bolts (A).
2. Tighten wheel nuts (A) to 163 Nm (120 lbfft) using the tightening sequence for the type of caster wheel shown in the illustrations at right. Repeat the tightening sequence 3 times.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
Page 436
214737 416 Revision A
Figure 5.229: Formed Caster Wheel Nut Tightening Sequence
NOTE:
Wheel bolt (A) tightening sequence for a formed caster wheel (B) shown in Figure 5.229, page 416.
Servicing Caster Wheels
Raising Caster Wheel (Formed and Forked)
This procedure is the same for forked and formed caster wheels.
WARNING To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operators seat for any reason.
CAUTION Jack stand must be capable of supporting a minimum of 2268 kg (5000 lb.).
1. Park windrower on level ground and block the drive wheels.
Figure 5.230: GSL Position
2. Place the ground speed lever (GSL) (A) in N-DETENT (B), stop the engine, and remove the key.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
Page 437
214737 417 Revision A
Figure 5.231: Caster Wheels and Walking Beam (Engine-Forward View)
3. Raise the end of walking beam (A) until the caster wheel assembly (B) is slightly off the ground. Use a suitable lifting device, capable of lifting 2268 kg (5000 lb.) minimum.
4. Place a jack stand beneath the walking beam and lower the beam until resting on the stand.
Lowering Caster Wheel (Formed and Forked)
This procedure is for lowering the caster wheel when it is raised on a jack stand. This procedure is the same for forked and formed caster wheels.
CAUTION Jack stand must be capable of supporting a minimum of 2268 kg (5000 lb.).
Figure 5.232: Caster Wheels and Walking Beam (Engine-Forward View)
1. Raise the end of walking beam (A) slightly, using a suitable lifting device capable of lifting minimum 2268 kg (5000 lb.).
2. Remove the jack stand and lower the end of the walking beam until the caster wheel assembly (B) is on the ground.
Removing Forked Caster Wheel
CAUTION Wheel assemblies are heavy. Support wheel assembly before removing axle bolts.
1. Raise caster wheel. Refer to Raising Caster Wheel (Formed and Forked), page 416.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
Page 438
214737 418 Revision A
Figure 5.233: Forked Caster Wheel
2. Remove the 8 bolts (A) (4 on each side of caster) attaching axle (B) and cover (C) to forked caster (E), and remove wheel assembly (D) from caster (E).
Figure 5.234: Forked Caster Wheel
3. Remove the 8 wheel nuts (A) that secure axle (B) to wheel (C).
4. Separate axle (B) and wheel (C).
Installing Forked Caster Wheel
CAUTION Wheel assemblies are heavy. Support wheel assembly before removing axle bolts.
Figure 5.235: Forked Caster Wheel
1. Position wheel assembly (C) on axle assembly (B) and install wheel nuts (A).
2. Torque wheel nuts (A). Refer to Tightening Caster Wheel Nuts, page 415.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
Page 439
214737 419 Revision A
Figure 5.236: Forked Caster Wheel
3. Position wheel assembly (D) in forked caster (E).
4. Position cover plates (C) and install 8 bolts (A) (four on each side of caster) to secure axle (B) to caster (E). Torque bolts to 97107 Nm (7579 lbfft).
5. Lower caster wheel. Refer to Lowering Caster Wheel (Formed and Forked), page 417.
Removing Formed Caster Wheel
CAUTION Wheel assemblies are heavy. Support wheel assembly before removing axle bolts.
1. Raise caster wheel. Refer to Raising Caster Wheel (Formed and Forked), page 416.
Figure 5.237: Formed Caster Wheel
2. Remove the 6 bolts (A) that secure wheel (B) to the hub.
3. Remove wheel (B).
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
Page 440
214737 420 Revision A
Installing Formed Caster Wheel
CAUTION Wheel assemblies are heavy. Support wheel assembly before removing axle bolts.
Figure 5.238: Formed Caster Wheel
1. Position wheel assembly (B) on hub, and install 6 wheel bolts (A).
2. Refer to the tightening sequence at right, and torque bolts (A) to 163 Nm (120 lbfft).
3. Lower caster wheel. Refer to Lowering Caster Wheel (Formed and Forked), page 417.
Tightening Caster Wheel Anti-Shimmy Dampeners
Figure 5.239: Anti-Shimmy Dampener
Each caster is equipped with a fluid-filled anti-shimmy dampener (A).
The mounting bolts (B) need to be checked periodically for security. Refer to 5.12 Maintenance Schedule, page 422.
Inboard bolt should be tightened to 135 Nm (100 lbfft)
Outboard bolt should be tightened to 115 Nm (85 lbfft)
Ballast Requirements
Fluid ballasting of rear caster tires is recommended to provide adequate machine stability when using large headers on the windrower. The stability of the machine varies with different attachments, windrower options, terrain, and the operators driving technique.
Ballast capability per tire is at a maximum fill of 75%, or when fluid is level with valve stem when the stem is positioned at 12 oclock. Fluid can be added to any level up to maximum fill. Always add an equal amount of fluid on both sides.
Table 5.6 Recommended Ballast Weight
Header Description Recommended Ballast
Level Ground Hills
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
Page 441
214737 421 Revision A
Table 5.6 Recommended Ballast Weight (continued)
Per Tire Both Tires Per Tire Both Tires Recommended
Tire Size
Type Size liters (US Gal)
kg (lb.)30 liters
(US Gal) kg (lb.)30
A Series All
R Series 4.0 m (13-ft.)
ONLY 0
7.6 m (25-ft.) and smaller
7.5 x 16 10 x 16
9.1 m (30-ft.) single or
double reel without
conditioner 10.7 m (35-ft.) single reel
0 0 38 (10) 91 (200)
16.5 x 16.1
D Series 9.1 m (30-ft.) double reel steel fingers
and conditioner
10.7 m (35-ft.) double reel (5 or 6-bat)
69 (18) 170 (380) 115 (30) 288 (630)
Level ground: 10 x 16
Level ground: 16.5 x 16.1
Hills: 16.5 x 16.1
12.1 m (40-ft.) 115 (30) 288 (630) 158 (41) 377 (830) 16.5 x 16.1
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
30. Weights are given for typical calcium chloride and water mixtures. Weight is reduced by 20% if only water is used (for areas that do not require antifreeze protection).
Page 442
214737 422 Revision A
5.12 Maintenance Schedule The Maintenance Schedule specifies the recommended periodic maintenance procedures and service intervals. Regular maintenance is the best insurance against early wear and untimely breakdowns. Follow this schedule to maximize machine life.
For detailed instructions, refer to the various procedures in this chapter. Use the fluids and lubricants specified in 8.1 Recommended Fuel, Fluids, and Lubricants, page 451.
Service Intervals: The recommended service intervals are in hours of operation. Where a service interval is given in more than one time frame, for example 100 hours or annually, service the machine at whichever interval is reached first.
IMPORTANT:
Recommended intervals are for average conditions. Service the machine more often if operated under adverse conditions (severe dust, extra heavy loads, etc.).
CAUTION Carefully follow safety messages given in 1 Safety, page 1.
5.12.1 Maintenance Schedule/Record Windrower Serial Number: ___________________
Combine this record with the record in the header operators manual. Make copies of this page to continue the record.
Action: Check S Lubricate Change Clean
! Hour meter reading
! Service date
! Serviced by
Preseason or Annual. Refer to 4.3.3 Preseason Checks / Annual Service, page 166.
First hour31
Drive wheel nuts
Refer to Tightening Drive Wheel Nuts, page 409.
First 5 hours31
A/C compressor belt
Refer to Tensioning Air Conditioner (A/C) Compressor Belt, page 353.
Caster wheel nuts
Refer to Tightening Caster Wheel Nuts, page 415.
Caster wheel anti-shimmy dampener
bolts. Refer to Tightening Caster Wheel Anti-Shimmy Dampeners, page 420.
Walking beam width adjustment bolts
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
31. Begins from first use of machine.
Page 443
214737 423 Revision A
Action: Check S Lubricate Change Clean
Refer to 4.3.8 Adjusting Caster Tread Width, page 181.
First 10 hours32
Walking beam width adjustment bolts
Refer to 4.3.8 Adjusting Caster Tread Width, page 181.
Neutral adjustment33
Every 10 hours or daily32
A/C condenser34
Refer to 5.8.3 Cleaning Cooler Box Components, page 357.
Charge air cooler34
Refer to 5.8.3 Cleaning Cooler Box Components, page 357.
Engine oil level34
Refer to 5.7.3 Checking Engine Oil Level, page 315.
Engine coolant level34
Refer to Checking Coolant Level, page 342.
Fuel tank34
Refer to Filling the Fuel Tank, page 332.
Fuel filter water trap34
Refer to Removing Water from Fuel System, page 333.
Hydraulic hoses and lines34
Refer to 5.10.7 Hoses and Lines, page 406.
Hydraulic oil cooler34
Refer to 5.10.2 Hydraulic Oil Cooler, page 398.
Hydraulic oil level34
Refer to 5.10.1 Checking and Filling Hydraulic Oil, page 397.
Radiator34
Refer to 5.8 Maintaining Engine Cooling Box, page 355.
Tire inflation34
Refer to Inflating Drive Wheel Tire, page 408.
Diesel exhaust fluid (DEF) level34
Refer to 3.15.1 Fuel and Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Display Module, page 67.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
32. Begins from first use of machine. 33. Dealer adjusted. 34. A record of daily maintenance is not normally required but is at the Owner/Operators discretion.
Page 444
214737 424 Revision A
Action: Check S Lubricate Change Clean
First 50 hours35
Hose clamps: air intake/radiator/
heater/hydraulic36. Refer to specific hose clamp section.
Walking beam width adjustment bolts
Refer to 4.3.8 Adjusting Caster Tread Width, page 181.
Caster wheel anti-shimmy dampener
bolts (if installed). Refer to Tightening Caster Wheel Anti-Shimmy Dampeners, page 420.
p Main gearbox oil
Refer to Changing Lubricant, page 349.
p Drive wheel lubricant
Refer to Changing Wheel Drive Lubricant, page 413.
p Charge system oil filter
Refer to Charge Oil Filter, page 400.
p Return oil filter
Refer to Return Oil Filter, page 401.
Every 50 hours35
Cab fresh air intake filter
Refer to Inspecting and Cleaning Fresh Air Filter Element, page 306.
S Caster pivots
Refer to 5.4.2 Lubrication Points, page 297.
S Forked caster spindle bearings
Refer to 5.4.2 Lubrication Points, page 297.
Gearbox oil level
Refer to Checking Lubricant Level and Adding Lubricant, page 348.
S Top lift link pivots
Refer to 5.4.2 Lubrication Points, page 297.
S Walking beam center pivot37
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
35. Begins from first use of machine. 36. Hand-tighten unless otherwise noted. 37. 2014 and previous.
Page 445
214737 425 Revision A
Action: Check S Lubricate Change Clean
Once a year38 39
A/C blower
Refer to Air Conditioning (A/C) Compressor Coolant Cycling, page 167.
Antifreeze concentration
Refer to Checking Engine Coolant Strength, page 343.
Battery charge
Refer to Maintaining Batteries, page 360.
Battery fluid level
Refer to Charging the Batteries, page 361.
p Fuel tank vent line filter
Refer to Replacing Fuel Tank Vent Filter, page 325.
Steering linkages
Refer to Checking Steering Link Pivots, page 302.
Every 100 hours or once a year40 39
Cab air return filter
Refer to Cleaning Return Air Cleaner/Filter, page 308.
Cab suspension limit straps
Refer to 5.5.5 Cab Suspension Limit Straps, page 304.
Every 250 hours or once a year40 39
Engine oil and filter
Refer to 5.7.4 Changing Engine Oil, page 317.
Engine air cleaner primary filter
element. Refer to Removing Primary Air Filter, page 319 and Installing Primary Air Filter, page 321.
S Formed caster wheel hub bearings
Refer to 5.4.2 Lubrication Points, page 297.
Drive wheel lubricant
Refer to Checking Wheel Drive Lubricant Level, page 412.
Exhaust system
Refer to 5.7.11 Inspecting Exhaust System, page 350.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
38. Begins from first use of machine. 39. It is recommended that annual maintenance be done prior to start of operating season. 40. Whichever occurs first, begins from first use of machine.
Page 446
214737 426 Revision A
Action: Check S Lubricate Change Clean
Every 500 hours or once a year41 42
Fuel filters
Refer to Maintaining Fuel Filters, page 326.
Gearbox lubricant
Refer to Changing Lubricant, page 349.
Charge system and return oil filters
Refer to 5.10.4 Changing Hydraulic Oil Filters, page 399.
Safety systems
Refer to 5.5.2 Safety Systems, page 298.
Every 1000 hours41
p Drive wheel lubricant
Refer to Changing Wheel Drive Lubricant, page 413.
Diesel exhaust fluid (DEF) supply module filter
Refer to Cleaning and Inspecting the Supply Module Filter, page 341.
1500 hours or every two years41
p Hydraulic oil
Refer to 5.10.3 Changing the Hydraulic Oil, page 398.
2000 hours41
Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) vent
hose filter. Refer to Replacing the Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Vent Hose Filter , page 336.
p Engine crank case filter
Refer to Replacing Engine Oil Filter, page 317.
4500 hours or every 3 years41
p
Diesel exhaust fluid (DEF) supply module filter
Refer to DEF Supply Module Filter, page 339.
5000 hours or every two years41
Engine valve tappet clearance
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
41. Begins from first use of machine. 42. It is recommended that annual maintenance be done prior to start of operating season.
Page 447
214737 427 Revision A
6 Options and Attachments
6.1 Cab
6.1.1 AM/FM Radio The cab is pre-wired for easy installation of a single DIN audio component available from your MacDon Dealer. Speakers are factory-installed.
In order to retain radio settings and preset memory with the battery disconnect turned off, select a radio with non-volatile memory.
For installation details, refer to the unloading and assembly instructions supplied with your windrower.
6.1.2 Automated Steering Systems A MacDon-approved automated steering system is available from MacDon Dealers that provide Trimble GPS installation and support services.
MacDon windrowers are partially pre-wired for either the Trimble AutoPilot hydraulically integrated steering system or the Trimble EZ-Pilot wheel/column-based assisted steering system. The windrowers ground speed lever (GSL) has an automated steering (autosteer) engage switch and the Trimble display mounting kit (MD #183348) is supplied in the cab.
The Trimble AutoPilot system requires the MacDon automated steering hydraulic interface kit (MD #B5589). Installation instruction (MD #169539) is included in the bundle.
Other GPS providers may supply parts in their vehicle-specific installation packages or make installation kits available through MacDon Dealers.
6.1.3 High Intensity Discharge (HID) Auxiliary Lighting This kit includes two cab-mounted high intensity discharge (HID) lamps that provide additional field lighting.
MD #B5596
Instruction MD #169621 is included in the bundle.
6.1.4 Windshield Shades This kit includes retractable sun shades for front and rear windows. Attachment hardware is also included in the kit.
MD #B4866
Instruction MD #169218 is included in the bundle.
Page 448
214737 428 Revision A
6.2 Engine
6.2.1 Engine Block Heater Contact your nearest Cummins Engine Distributor, and provide your engine model and serial numbers to ensure the proper heater is supplied.
6.2.2 Engine Fan Air Baffle The Engine Fan Air Baffle kit prevents the windrow from being disturbed by engine cooling fan air blast.
MD #B5440
Instruction MD #169443 is included in the bundle.
OPTIONS AND ATTACHMENTS
Page 449
214737 429 Revision A
6.3 Header Operation
6.3.1 Double Windrow Attachment (DWA) This kit allows headers to lay a double windrow when installed on a windrower. The kit includes a draper deck, linkage assembly, hydraulics, and installation instructions.
MD #C1987 consists of:
MD #B4655 Deck
MD #B5270 Linkage assembly
MD #B5301 Hydraulic kit
Double Windrow Attachment (DWA) manual
6.3.2 Draper Header Case Drain Kit The Draper Header Case Drain kit must be installed when attaching a MacDon D50, D60, or D65 draper header with an upper cross auger (UCA), but without double draper drive. Case Drain kit (MD #B5842) is NOT required for double-draper drive headers equipped with kits MD #B5606 and MD #B5653.
MD #B5842
6.3.3 Draper Header Reel Drive and Lift Plumbing This base kit is required to run a draper header. It includes draper header reel drive and lift plumbing (less valve) and reel fore-aft hydraulics.
NOTE:
If the last digit of windrower code is B, this bundle is already installed.
MD #B5577
Instruction MD #169537 is included in the bundle.
6.3.4 Header Drive Reverser This kit allows the conditioner, knife, auger, and reel to reverse on the auger header, and the conditioner and knife to reverse on the draper header.
MD #B4656 43, 44, 45, 46
Instruction MD #169213 is included with the bundle.
6.3.5 Light Header Flotation This kit is available for headers that do not require as much spring tension for header float.
MD #B4664
Instruction MD #169033 is included in the bundle.
OPTIONS AND ATTACHMENTS
43. If installed on a windrower equipped with a D Series draper header, only the knife circuit will reverse. 44. If installed on a windrower equipped with an A Series auger header, the knife, reel, auger, and conditioner will
reverse. Grass seed auger headers are not equipped with conditioners. 45. If installed on a windrower equipped with a D Series draper header and HC10 Hay Conditioner, knife and
conditioner will reverse. 46. R Series disc headers cannot use the reversing feature.
Page 450
214737 430 Revision A
6.3.6 Pressure Sensor Kit This kit provides enhanced monitoring of the knife drive (or reel drive) hydraulic pressure, and warns of overload conditions.
MD #B5574
Instruction MD #169031 is included in the bundle.
6.3.7 R1 Disc Drive Kit This kit includes a valve required to run an R1 Series Rotary Disc Header on an M155E4 SP Windrower.
MD #B4657
6.3.8 R80 and R85 Rotary Header Drive Hydraulics (4.0 m [13 ft.]) This kit is required to allow operation of a 4.0 m (13 ft.) R80 or R85 Rotary Disc Header. The kit includes header drive plumbing and installation instructions.
MD #B5510
Instructions are included in the bundle.
MD #169544 4.0 m (13 ft.) R80 and R85 attached to M150, M155, or M155E4
6.3.9 Self-Aligning Center-Link This kit allows the center-link cylinder to be hydraulically positioned and connected to the header without leaving the operators station.
Hydraulic center-link (MD #B4650) must be installed.
MD #B4802
Instruction MD #169004 included in the bundle.
6.3.10 Spring with External Booster Spring This kit is available for headers over 2724 kg (6000 lb.) to increase the float capacity.
The Spring with External Booster Spring kit (MD #B4659) includes two springs (one for each side) and mounting brackets. Instruction MD #169032 is included in the bundle.
6.3.11 Spring with Internal Booster Spring MacDon windrowers have two large diameter springs on each sideone is the outboard spring, and the other is the inboard spring. This kit (MD #B5303) replaces ONE of the large diameter springs (that does not already have an inner booster spring installed) with a new inboard spring assembly that comes with an internal booster spring inside.
The Spring with Internal Booster Spring kit (MD #B5303) includes one spring and castings for one side of the windrower.
Instruction MD #169316 is included in the bundle.
OPTIONS AND ATTACHMENTS
Page 451
214737 431 Revision A
6.3.12 Swath Compressor The MacDon Swath Compressor is a large, formed polyethylene sheet which is designed to mount to the underside of a MacDon M Series Self-Propelled Windrower. The MacDon Swath Compressor is designed for use with D Series Draper Headers cutting canola.
When lowered, the swath compressor helps prevent wind damage by shaping the windrow and anchoring it into the stubble behind the header using a smooth, gradual transition that helps prevent shelling in ripe conditions.
The Swath Compressor height is adjusted using a rocker switch on the operators console and monitored on the Cab Display Module (CDM).
MD #C2061
Instruction MD #214752 and MD #214732 are included.
6.3.13 Swath Roller An axle-mounted swath roller increases the windrows resistance to wind disturbance, especially in canola or similar crops. It can be fitted with a hydraulic lift with in-cab controls.
Contact your MacDon Dealer for information.
OPTIONS AND ATTACHMENTS
Page 452
214737 432 Revision A
6.4 Transport
6.4.1 Lighting and Marking for Cab-Forward Road Travel This kit allows the windrower to be compliant with vehicle lighting regulations when travelling in the cab-forward mode on public roads. The kit includes red taillights, slow moving vehicle (SMV) markings, hardware, and installation instructions.
MD #B5412
Instruction MD #169426 is included in the bundle.
6.4.2 Towing Harness The towing harness is used together with the weight box (refer to 6.4.3 Weight Box, page 432) when towing a D Series Draper Header equipped with slow speed transport option behind the windrower.
MD #B5280 Weight box harness only. Includes hitch pin and wiring for use with slow speed header transport option.
Instruction MD #169278 is included in the bundle.
6.4.3 Weight Box A weight box installed onto the windrower header lift system is required to transport a header behind the windrower.
MD #B5238 Weight box without harness
A towing harness is required to use the weight box. Refer to 6.4.2 Towing Harness, page 432 for more information.
OPTIONS AND ATTACHMENTS
Page 453
214737 433 Revision A
7 Troubleshooting
7.1 Engine Troubleshooting
Symptom Problem Solution Section
Engine hard to start or will not start
Controls not in NEUTRAL
Move GSL to NEUTRAL. Starting the Engine, page 168Move steering wheel to locked
position (centered).
Disengage header drive switch. 4.4.4 Header Drive, page 207
NEUTRAL Interlock misadjusted
Contact Dealer. Contact Dealer
No fuel to engine Fill empty fuel tank. Replace clogged filter.
Filling the Fuel Tank, page 332 andMaintaining Fuel Filters, page 326
Old fuel in tank Drain tank. Refill with fresh fuel. 5.7.7 Fuel System, page 325Water, dirt, or air in fuel
system Drain, flush, fill, and prime system.
Improper type of fuel Use proper fuel for operating conditions.
8.1.2 Fuel Specifications, page 451
Crankcase oil too heavy Use recommended oil.
8.1.3 Lubricants, Fluids, and System Capacities, page 452
Low battery output Have battery tested. Check battery electrolyte level. 5.9.2 Battery, page
360 Poor battery connection Clean and tighten loose connections.
Faulty starter Contact Dealer. Contact Dealer
Loose electrical connection at fuel pump
Ensure connector at pump is fully pushed in.
Contact Dealer
Wiring shorted, circuit breaker open
Check continuity of wiring and breaker (manual reset).
Checking and Replacing Fuses, page 389
ECM fuse (1 of 2) blown
Replace.ECM Ignition relay faulty
NEUTRAL Logic relay faulty
Faulty injectors Contact Dealer. Contact Dealer
Engine knocks
Engine out of time Contact Dealer. Contact Dealer
Insufficient oil Add oil. Adding Engine Oil, page 318
Page 454
214737 434 Revision A
Symptom Problem Solution Section
Low or high coolant temperature
Contact Dealer. Contact Dealer
Improper fuel Use proper fuel. 8.1.2 Fuel Specifications, page 451
Low oil pressure
Low oil level Add oil. Adding Engine Oil, page 318
Improper type of oil Drain and fill crankcase with proper oil.
8.1.3 Lubricants, Fluids, and System Capacities, page 452
Worn components Contact Dealer. Contact Dealer
High oil consumption
Internal parts worn
Crankcase oil too light Use recommended oil.
8.1.3 Lubricants, Fluids, and System Capacities, page 452
Oil leaks Check for leaks around gaskets, seals, and drain plugs.
5.7.3 Checking Engine Oil Level, page 315
Engine runs irregularly or stalls frequently
Unsteady fuel supply Change filter on fuel tank vent line. Replace clogged fuel filter.
Replacing Fuel Tank Vent Filter, page 325 and 5.7.7 Fuel System, page 325
Water or dirt in fuel system Drain, flush, and fill fuel system.
8.1.3 Lubricants, Fluids, and System Capacities, page 452
Low coolant temperature Remove and check thermostat.
Contact DealerAir in fuel system Contact Dealer.
Dirty or faulty injectors
Lack of power
Incorrect timing Contact Dealer. Contact Dealer
Engine oil viscosity too high Use recommended oil.
8.1.3 Lubricants, Fluids, and System Capacities, page 452
Intake air restriction Service air cleaner. 5.7.5 Air Intake System, page 319
Clogged fuel filter Replace primary fuel filter, and if necessary, replace secondary fuel filter.
Maintaining Fuel Filters, page 326
TROUBLESHOOTING
Page 455
214737 435 Revision A
Symptom Problem Solution Section
High back pressure Clean out or replace exhaust canisters.
5.7.11 Inspecting Exhaust System, page 350
Improper type of fuel Use proper fuel. 8.1.2 Fuel Specifications, page 451
High or low engine temperature
Remove and check thermostat.
Contact Dealer
Improper valve clearance Contact Dealer.
Faulty injectors
Engine temperature below normal
Defective thermostat Remove and check thermostat.
Warning alarm sounds
Engine overheated Check coolant level.
Checking Coolant Level, page 342
Check thermostat. Contact Dealer
Low engine oil pressure
Check oil level.
5.7.3 Checking Engine Oil Level, page 315
Low transmission oil pressure
5.10.1 Checking and Filling Hydraulic Oil, page 397
Engine overheats
Low coolant level Fill reserve tank to proper level. Check system for leaks.
5.7.9 Engine Cooling System, page 342Water only for coolant Replace with antifreeze.
Engine overloaded Reduce ground speed. Driving Forward in Cab-Forward Mode, page 175
Defective pressurized coolant tank cap
Replace cap.
Inspecting Pressurized Coolant Tank Cap, page 344
Defective fan belt Replace belt Replacing Fan Belt, page 352
Dirty radiator screen, rotors turning
Check for obstructions in ducting from screen to fan shroud. 5.8 Maintaining
Engine Cooling Box, page 355Dirty radiator screen, rotors
not turning Check connections to rotor electric motor.
Dirty radiator core Clean radiator. 5.7.9 Engine Cooling System, page 342Cooling system dirty Flush cooling system.
TROUBLESHOOTING
Page 456
214737 436 Revision A
Symptom Problem Solution Section
Defective thermostat Remove and check thermostat.
Contact Dealer Defective temperature gauge or sender
Check coolant temperature with thermometer. Replace gauge if necessary.
Defective water pump Contact Dealer.
High fuel consumption
Clogged or dirty air cleaner Service air cleaner. 5.7.5 Air Intake System, page 319
Engine overloaded Reduce ground speed. Driving Forward in Cab-Forward Mode, page 175
Improper valve clearance
Contact Dealer. Contact Dealer
Engine out of time
Dirty injector nozzles
Low engine temperature Check thermostat.
Improper type of fuel Use proper fuel. 8.1.2 Fuel Specifications, page 451
Starter cranks slowly or will not operate
Low battery output Check battery charge. Maintaining Batteries, page 360
Loose or corroded battery connections
Clean and tighten loose connections.
Controls not in NEUTRAL
Move GSL to NEUTRAL. Driving Forward in Cab-Forward Mode, page 175
Move steering wheel to CENTER position.
Driving Reverse in Cab-Forward Mode, page 176
Disengage header. Engaging and Disengaging the Header, page 207
Relay not functioning Check relay and wire connections. 5.9 Electrical System, page 360
Main fuse defective/blown Replace main fuse.
Key power fuse blown Replace.
Key switch worn or terminals loose
Contact Dealer.
Contact Dealer Switch at Interlock not closed or defective
Adjust switch or replace. Contact your Dealer.
Crankcase oil too high viscosity
Use recommended oil.
8.1.3 Lubricants, Fluids, and System Capacities, page 452
Air filters require frequent cleaning
Aspirator plugged Clean out aspirator. 5.7.5 Air Intake System, page 319
TROUBLESHOOTING
Page 457
214737 437 Revision A
7.2 Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) System Troubleshooting
Symptom Problem Solution
Engine cranks, but fails to run No fuel No power
Check fuel level.
Check fuel supply to pump inlet.
Verify air intake is clear of debris.
Confirm 12V between ignition pin 5 and ground when key is in the ON position.
DEF supply module fails to prime or purge
No DEF supply
Check DEF tank level.
Check connection on DEF supply module. Detach and inspect connection for contamination or damage.
Check DEF lines to and from the DEF dosing module for signs of leakage. DEF forms a white deposit around leaking fittings. Replace if necessary.
Remove and inspect DEF lines for clogging. Soak in warm water to remove blockages.
Aftertreatment DEF supply module mechanical system not responding
Supply module injector Remove the DEF injector, and clean gently with warm water, removing crystallized DEF.
Aftertreatment sensor (NOx level, DOC temp, SCR temp)
Sensor failure
Ensure connector to the sensor in question is plugged in and locking tabs are locked.
Contact your MacDon Dealer.
Confirm power supply and ground to sensor in question.
If continuity check fails, locate discontinuity and repair/replace harness (MD #202550).
TROUBLESHOOTING
Page 458
214737 438 Revision A
Symptom Problem Solution
Several simultaneous aftertreatment codes on the CDM
CAN communication error Electronics system
Contact your MacDon Dealer.
System derate DEF tank empty Fill tank using approved DEF. Refer to Refilling the Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Tank, page 335.
System derate DEF tank sensor wiring damage or unplugged
Check sensor connection on the DEF Tank. Inspect connection for contamination or damage.
DEF quality inadequate, causing system derate
DEF contamination DEF too old
Ensure diesel exhaust fluid meets ISO 22241-1 / DIN 70070 standards and has not been contaminated.
System out NOX high, causing system derate
No DEF supply
Fill tank using approved DEF. Refer to Refilling the Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Tank, page 335.
Urea flow inadequate. Inspect tank and supply module filters, replace if necessary. Refer to DEF Supply Module Filter, page 339.
Inspect DEF lines for clogging. Soak in warm water to remove blockages.
TROUBLESHOOTING
Page 459
214737 439 Revision A
7.3 Electrical Troubleshooting
Problem Solution Reference
Symptom: Low voltage and/or battery will not charge
Defective battery Have battery tested. 5.9.2 Battery, page 360
Loose or corroded connections Clean and tighten battery connections. Maintaining Batteries, page 360
Defective alternator belt Replace worn belt. Replacing Fan Belt, page 352
Alternator or voltage regulator not connected properly
Connect properly. 5.9.2 Battery, page 360
Dirty or defective alternator, defective voltage regulator, or high resistance in circuit
Contact Dealer. Contact Dealer
Symptom: Lights dim
Defective light switch Contact Dealer. Contact Dealer
High resistance in circuit or poor ground on lights
Check the wiring circuit for a break in a wire or a poor ground.
Symptom: Lights do not light
Burned out or defective light bulb Replace light bulb. Replacing Headlight Bulb, page 371
Burned out or defective light bulb Replace light bulb. Replacing Bulb in Cab- Forward Flood Light, page 375
Burned out or defective light bulb Replace light bulb. Replacing Bulb in Rear Flood Light, page 381
Broken wiring Check wiring for broken wire or shorts.
Poor ground on lights Clean and tighten ground wires.
Open or defective circuit breaker Check circuit breaker. 5.9.14 Accessing Circuit Breakers and Fuses, page 388
Defective relay Replace relay. Replacing Circuit Breakers and Relays, page 390
Defective light switch Contact Dealer. Contact Dealer
Symptom: Turn signals or indicators showing wrong direction
Reversed wires Contact Dealer. Contact Dealer
Symptom: No current to cab
Broken or disconnected wire Contact Dealer. Contact Dealer
Circuit breaker tripped Breaker automatically resets.
Battery disconnect switch is OFF Turn battery disconnect switch ON. Battery Main Disconnect Switch, page 361
TROUBLESHOOTING
Page 460
214737 440 Revision A
7.4 Hydraulics Troubleshooting
Problem Solution Reference
Symptom: Header or reel not lifting
Appropriate solenoids not being energized by activating switch
Contact Dealer. Contact Dealer
Contaminant in relief valve Clean relief valve at cylinder control valve.
Contact Dealer
Relief pressure too low or contaminant in relief valve
Check/adjust/clean relief valve at cylinder control valve.
Contact Dealer
Symptom: Reel and/or conveyor not turning
HEADER DRIVE switch not engaged Engage HEADER DRIVE switch. Engaging and Disengaging the Header, page 207
Flow controls adjusted too low Toggle speed controls on CDM to increase flow.
D Series and D1 SP Series: 4.6.6 Draper Speed, page 267, and 4.6.5 Reel Speed, page 264 A Series: 4.7.1 Auger Speed, page 276
Appropriate solenoid on flow control block not being energized
Contact Dealer. Contact Dealer
Symptom: Reel and/or conveyor turns but lacks power
Relief pressure too low Check/adjust/clean relief valve. Contact Dealer
Symptom: Hydraulic oil high-temperature alarm
Hydraulic oil cooling system not working properly
Check/clean cooling box. 5.8 Maintaining Engine Cooling Box, page 355
Faulty bypass valve Clean or replace. Contact Dealer
Symptom: Hydraulic oil low-temperature alarm
Hydraulic oil too cold Run engine until hydraulic oil warms up.
Symptom: Header or reel lifts unevenly
Air in system Fully raise header or reel and hold switch.
4.4.1 Engaging and Disengaging Header Safety Props: M Series Self-Propelled Windrower, page 197
TROUBLESHOOTING
Page 461
214737 441 Revision A
7.5 Header Drive Troubleshooting
Problem Solution Reference
Symptom: Header drive not engaging
HEADER DRIVE switch in cab not engaged
Engage HEADER DRIVE switch. Engaging and Disengaging the Header, page 207
Operator Presence switch not closed or faulty
Occupy operators seat or replace switch. Contact your Dealer.
Contact Dealer
Appropriate solenoid not being energized by activating switch
Contact Dealer. Contact Dealer
Symptom: Header drive lacks power
Relief valve setting too low Contact Dealer. Contact Dealer
Hydraulic couplers/unions not properly connected
Ensure hoses are connected correctly and hose couplers/unions are tight.
Refer to the header operators manual.
Header drive overload Reduce ground speed.
Symptom: Warning alarm sounds
Header drive overload Reduce ground speed.
Relief valve setting too low Contact Dealer. Contact Dealer
TROUBLESHOOTING
Page 462
214737 442 Revision A
7.6 Traction Drive Troubleshooting
Problem Solution Reference
Symptom: Warning alarm sounds and transmission oil light is on
Low hydraulic oil level Stop engine, and add oil to hydraulic system.
5.10.1 Checking and Filling Hydraulic Oil, page 397
Low hydraulic pressure Contact Dealer. Contact Dealer
Foreign material shorting sender Contact Dealer. Contact Dealer
Short in alarm wiring Contact Dealer. Contact Dealer
Faulty sender Contact Dealer. Contact Dealer
Symptom: Wheels lack pulling ability on a grade or pulling out of a ditch
Internal pump or motor damage Contact Dealer. Contact Dealer
Insufficient torque at drive wheels Move ground speed range control to field position, and reduce ground speed.
Driving Forward in Engine- Forward Mode, page 177
Loose or worn controls Check controls. 5.5.3 Ground Speed Lever (GSL) Adjustments, page 300
Air in system Use proper oil. 8.1.3 Lubricants, Fluids, and System Capacities, page 452
Air in system Check oil level and leaks. 5.10.1 Checking and Filling Hydraulic Oil, page 397
Air in system Check hydraulic oil filters. 5.10 Hydraulic System, page 396
Brakes binding or not releasing fully Check pressure on brake release valve (min. 1379 kPa [200 psi]).
Contact Dealer
Relief valve in tandem pump dirty or damaged
Replace relief valve. Contact Dealer
Symptom: With steering wheel centered, one wheel pulls more than the other
Leakage at pump or motor Contact Dealer. Contact Dealer
Wheels not in same speed range Contact Dealer. Contact Dealer
Faulty relief valve Repair or replace valve. Contact Dealer.
Contact Dealer
Symptom: Both wheels will not pull in forward or reverse
Pump arms have broken shaft or loose hardware
Repair or tighten. Contact Dealer
Brakes binding or not releasing fully Check pressure on brake release valve (min. 1379 kPa [200 psi]).
Contact Dealer
Low oil level Check oil reservoir level. 5.10.1 Checking and Filling Hydraulic Oil, page 397
TROUBLESHOOTING
Page 463
214737 443 Revision A
Problem Solution Reference
Power hubs disengaged Engage final drives. Engaging and Disengaging Final Drives, page 195
Damaged hydraulic lines preventing proper oil flow
Replace damaged lines. Contact Dealer
Ground speed range control not working
Contact Dealer. Contact Dealer
Steering controls worn or defective Check GSL and steering for loose, worn or damaged ball joints and connecting rods.
5.5.3 Ground Speed Lever (GSL) Adjustments, page 300 and 5.5.4 Steering Adjustments, page 302
Charge pressure relief valve misadjusted or damaged
Check the valve adjustment. Check valve parts and seat.
Checking Charge Pump Pressure, page 406
Failed pump or motor Contact Dealer. Contact Dealer
Symptom: One wheel does not pull in forward or reverse
Broken pump arm or shaft Contact Dealer. Contact Dealer
One final drive disengaged Engage final drive. Engaging and Disengaging Final Drives, page 195
Steering controls worn or defective Check GSL and steering for loose, worn or damaged ball joints and connecting rods.
5.5.3 Ground Speed Lever (GSL) Adjustments, page 300 and 5.5.4 Steering Adjustments, page 302
High pressure relief valve stuck open, damaged seat
Check valve, and clean or replace. Contact Dealer
Brakes binding or not releasing fully Check pressure on brake release valve (min. 1379 kPa [200 psi]).
Contact Dealer
Damaged hydraulic lines preventing proper oil flow
Contact Dealer. Contact Dealer
Ground speed range control not working
Contact Dealer. Contact Dealer
Failed pump, motor, or power hub Contact Dealer. Contact Dealer
Symptom: Excessive noise from drive system
Mechanical interference in steering or ground speed linkage
Adjust, repair, and replace.
5.5.3 Ground Speed Lever (GSL) Adjustments, page 300 and 5.5.4 Steering Adjustments, page 302
Brakes binding or not releasing fully Check pressure on brake release valve (min. 1379 kPa [200 psi]).
Contact Dealer
Faulty pump or motor Contact Dealer. Contact Dealer
Air in system Check lines for leakage.
Hydraulic line clamps loose Tighten clamps.
TROUBLESHOOTING
Page 464
214737 444 Revision A
Problem Solution Reference
Symptom: Hydraulic oil filter leaks at seal
Not properly tightened Tighten filter element. 5.10.4 Changing Hydraulic Oil Filters, page 399
Damaged seal or threads Replace filter or filter head. 5.10.4 Changing Hydraulic Oil Filters, page 399
TROUBLESHOOTING
Page 465
214737 445 Revision A
7.7 Steering and Ground Speed Control Troubleshooting
Problem Solution Reference
Symptom: Machine will not steer straight
Linkage worn or loose Adjust steering chain tension. Replace worn parts. Adjust linkage.
5.5.4 Steering Adjustments, page 302
Symptom: Machine moves on flat ground with controls in neutral
Neutral interlock misadjusted Contact Dealer. Contact Dealer
Parking brake not functioning Contact Dealer. Contact Dealer
GSL servo misadjusted Contact Dealer. Contact Dealer
GSL cable misadjusted Contact Dealer. Contact Dealer
Transmission interlock misadjusted Contact Dealer. Contact Dealer
Symptom: Steering wheel will not unlock
Transmission interlock cylinder not working
Contact Dealer. Contact Dealer
Symptom: Insufficient road speed
Ground speed range control in field position
Move to road position. Driving on the Road, page 182
Symptom: Steering is too stiff or too loose
Steering chain tension is out of adjustment
Adjust steering chain tension. 5.5.4 Steering Adjustments, page 302
TROUBLESHOOTING
Page 466
214737 446 Revision A
7.8 Cab Air Troubleshooting
Problem Solution Reference
Symptom: Blower fan will not run
Burned out motor Contact Dealer. Contact Dealer
Burned out switch Contact Dealer. Contact Dealer
Motor shaft tight or bearings worn Contact Dealer. Contact Dealer
Faulty wiringloose or broken Contact Dealer. Contact Dealer
Blower rotors in contact with housing Contact Dealer. Contact Dealer
Symptom: Blower fan operating but no air coming into cab
Dirty fresh air filter Clean fresh air filter. Inspecting and Cleaning Fresh Air Filter Element, page 306
Dirty recirculating air filter Clean recirculating filter. Cleaning Return Air Cleaner/ Filter, page 308
Evaporator clogged Clean evaporator. Cleaning Air Conditioning (A/C) Evaporator Core, page 310
Air flow passage blocked Remove blockage.
Symptom: Heater not heating
Heater shut-off valve at engine closed
Open valve. 3.9.1 Heater Shut-Off, page 57
Defective thermostat in engine water outlet manifold
Replace thermostat. Contact Dealer
Heater temperature control defective Replace control. Contact Dealer
No thermostat in engine water outlet manifold
Install thermostat. Contact Dealer
Symptom: Odor from air louvers
Plugged drainage hose Blow out hose with compressed air.
Dirty filters Clean filters. Cleaning Return Air Cleaner/ Filter, page 308
Symptom: Air conditioning not cooling
Low refrigerant level Add refrigerant. Contact Dealer. Contact Dealer
Clutch coil burned out or disconnected
Contact Dealer. Contact Dealer
Blower motor disconnected or burned out
Contact Dealer. Contact Dealer
Switch contacts in thermostat burned excessively, or sensing element defective
Replace thermostat. Contact Dealer.
Compressor partially or completely seized
Remove compressor for service or replacement.
Contact Dealer.
TROUBLESHOOTING
Page 467
214737 447 Revision A
Problem Solution Reference
Condenser fins plugged Clean condenser. 5.6.3 Air Conditioning Condenser, page 309
Loose or broken compressor drive belt
Replace drive belt and/or tighten to specifications.
Tensioning Air Conditioner (A/ C) Compressor Belt, page 353 and Replacing Air Conditioner (A/C) Compressor Belt, page 354
Dirty filters Clean fresh air and recirculation filters.
Cleaning the Engine Air Cleaners Primary Filter, page 323 and Cleaning Return Air Cleaner/Filter, page 308
Broken or disconnected electrical wire
Check all terminals for loose connections; check wiring for hidden breaks.
Broken or disconnected ground wire Check ground wire to see if loose, broken, or disconnected.
Expansion valve stuck in open or closed position
Contact Dealer. Contact Dealer
Broken refrigerant line Contact Dealer. Contact Dealer
Leak in system Contact Dealer. Contact Dealer
Compressor shaft seal leaking Contact Dealer. Contact Dealer
Clogged screen in receiver-drier; plugged hose or coil
Contact Dealer. Contact Dealer
Symptom: Air conditioning not producing sufficient cooling.47
Compressor clutch slipping Remove clutch assembly for service or replacement.
Contact Dealer
Thermostat defective or improperly adjusted
Replace thermostat. Contact Dealer
Clogged air filters Remove air filters, and clean or replace as necessary.
Cleaning the Engine Air Cleaners Primary Filter, page 323 and Cleaning Return Air Cleaner/Filter, page 308
Heater circuit is open Close temperature control in cab, and valve on engine.
3.9.3 Climate Controls, page 58 and 3.9.1 Heater Shut-Off, page 57
Insufficient air circulation over condenser coil; fins clogged with dirt or insects
Clean condenser. 5.6.3 Air Conditioning Condenser, page 309
Evaporator fins clogged Clean evaporator fins (under cab floor). Cleaning Air Conditioning (A/C) Evaporator Core, page 310
TROUBLESHOOTING
47. Sufficient cooling defined as when air temperature in cab, measured at louvered vent, can be maintained at 25F [14C] below ambient air temperature.
Page 468
214737 448 Revision A
Problem Solution Reference
Refrigerant low Contact Dealer. Contact Dealer
Clogged expansion valve Contact Dealer. Contact Dealer
Clogged receiver-drier Contact Dealer. Contact Dealer
Excessive moisture in system Contact Dealer. Contact Dealer
Air in system Contact Dealer. Contact Dealer
Blower motor sluggish in operation Contact Dealer. Contact Dealer
Symptom: Air conditioning cools intermittently
Unit icing up due to thermostat adjusted too low
Adjust thermostat. Contact Dealer
Unit icing up due to excessive moisture in system
Contact Dealer. Contact Dealer
Unit icing up due to incorrect super- heat adjustment in the expansion valve
Contact Dealer. Contact Dealer
Thermostat defective Contact Dealer. Contact Dealer
Defective blower switch or blower motor
Contact Dealer. Contact Dealer
Partially open, improper ground or loose connection in compressor clutch coil
Contact Dealer. Contact Dealer
Compressor clutch slipping Contact Dealer. Contact Dealer
Symptom: Air conditioning system too noisy
Defective winding or improper connection in compressor clutch coil or relay
Contact Dealer. Contact Dealer
Excessive charge in system Contact Dealer. Contact Dealer
Low charge in system Contact Dealer. Contact Dealer
Excessive moisture in system Contact Dealer. Contact Dealer
Loose or excessively worn drive belt Tighten or replace as required.
Tensioning Air Conditioner (A/ C) Compressor Belt, page 353 and Replacing Air Conditioner (A/C) Compressor Belt, page 354
Noisy clutch Remove clutch for service or replacement as required.
Contact Dealer
Noisy compressor Check mountings and repair. Remove compressor for service or replacement.
Contact Dealer
Compressor oil level low Add SP-15 PAG refrigerant oil. Contact Dealer
Blower fan noisy due to excessive wear
Remove blower motor for service or replacement as necessary.
Contact Dealer
TROUBLESHOOTING
Page 469
214737 449 Revision A
Problem Solution Reference
Symptom: Windows fog up
High humidity Run A/C to dehumidify air and heater to control temperature.
3.9.3 Climate Controls, page 58
TROUBLESHOOTING
Page 470
214737 450 Revision A
7.9 Operators Station Troubleshooting
Problem Solution Reference
Symptom: Rough ride
Seat suspension not adjusted for operators weight Adjust seat suspension.
3.3 Operators Seat Adjustments, page 42
High air pressure in tires Deflate to proper pressure. Inflating Drive Wheel Tire, page 408 and Inflating Caster Tire, page 414
Cab suspension too stiff Adjust suspension. Contact Dealer
TROUBLESHOOTING
Page 471
214737 451 Revision A
8 Reference
8.1 Recommended Fuel, Fluids, and Lubricants
8.1.1 Storing Lubricants and Fluids Your machine can only operate at top efficiency if clean fuel and lubricants are used.
Buy good quality, clean fuel from a reputable Dealer.
Use clean containers to handle fuel and lubricants.
Keep containers full to avoid condensation issues.
Store in an area protected from dust, moisture, and other contaminants.
Avoid storing fuel over long periods of time. If you have a slow fuel turnover in the windrower or supply tank, add fuel conditioner to avoid condensation problems.
Store fuel in a convenient place away from buildings.
Diesel exhaust fluid (DEF) should be stored in a cool, dry, well ventilated area, out of direct sunlight, on lower shelf or on floor. The shelf life of DEF depends on exposure to sunlight and temperature. If storage area temperature is between -12 and 32C (10 and 90F), the shelf life will be approximately one year. If the maximum temperature does not exceed 24C (75F) for extended periods, the shelf life will be two years.
Diesel exhaust fluid (DEF) should be drained if storing machine longer than 6 months to prevent degradation of fluid.
Machine should never be stored with a tank full of diesel exhaust fluid (DEF) in freezing conditions. Ensure level of fluid in DEF tank is 75% of lower.
Diesel exhaust fluid (DEF) is corrosive to some metals and should only be stored in polyethylene, polypropylene, or stainless steel containers.
DEF containers should be sealed to prevent contamination and the evaporation of water which will affect the specified water to urea ratio.
Diesel fuel should never be mixed with diesel exhaust fluid (DEF).
8.1.2 Fuel Specifications Use only ultra low sulphur diesel (ULSD) from a reputable supplier. For most year-round service, No.2 ULSD fuel meeting ASTM specification D975 Grade S15 will provide good performance.
If the vehicle is exposed to extreme cold (below 7C [20F]) or is required to operate at colder-than-normal conditions for prolonged periods, use climatized No.2 diesel fuel, or dilute the No.2 ULSD fuel with 50% No.1 ULSD fuel. This will provide better protection from fuel gelling or wax-plugging of the fuel filters.
Page 472
214737 452 Revision A
Table 8.1 Fuel Specification
Fuel Specification Sulphur
(by weight)
Water and Sediment
(by volume) Cetane No. Lubricity
ULSD Grade no. 2
ASTM D975 0.5% maximum 0.05% maximum 40C (104F) minimum
520 microns
ULSD Grade no. 1 and 2
mix48 n/a
1% maximum 0.5% maximum
preferred 0.1% maximum
4555C (113131F) cold weather / high altitude
460 microns
In extreme situations, when available fuels are of poor quality or problems exist which are peculiar to certain operations, additives can be used; however, the engine manufacturer recommends consultation with the fuel supplier or engine manufacturer before using fuel additives. Situations where additives are useful include:
A cetane improver additive can be used with low cetane fuels.
A wax crystal modifier can help with fuels with high cold filter plugging points (CFPP).
An anti-icer can help prevent ice formation in wet fuel during cold weather.
An antioxidant or storage stability additive can help with fuel system deposits and poor storage stability.
A lubricity enhancer can be used to increase the lubricity of fuels so that they meet the requirements given in the Table 8.1, page 452. Diesel fuel conditioner is available from your Dealer.
8.1.3 Lubricants, Fluids, and System Capacities
WARNING To avoid injury or death, do NOTallow ANY machine fluids to enter the body.
Table 8.2 System Capacities
Lubricant/Fluid Location Description Capacity
Diesel exhaust fluid (DEF)
Diesel exhaust fluid tank
Must meet ISO 22241 requirements 29 L
(7.5 US gal)
Grease As required unless otherwise specified
SAE multi-purpose high temperature extreme pressure (EP2) performance with 1% max Molybdenum Disulphide
(NLGI Grade 2) lithium base
Diesel fuel Fuel tank
Ultra low sulphur diesel (ULSD) Grade No. 2, or ULSD Grade No. 1 and 2 mix48; refer to 8.1.2 Fuel Specifications, page
451 for more information
378 L (97 US gal)
Hydraulic oil Hydraulic reservoir SAE 15W-40 compliant with SAE specs for API class SJ and CH-4 engine oil.
65 L (17.2 US gal)
Gear lubricant Gearbox SAE 80W-14049, API service class GL-5.
Fully synthetic gear lubricant, (SAE J2360 preferred)
2.1 L (2.2 US qt.)
REFERENCE
48. Optional when operating temperature is below 0C (32F). 49. SAE 75W-140 may be substituted for SAE 80W-140 if necessary.
Page 473
214737 453 Revision A
Table 8.2 System Capacities (continued)
Lubricant/Fluid Location Description Capacity
Gear lubricant Wheel drive50
SAE 75W-90, API service class GL-5. Fully synthetic gear lubricant,
(SAE J2360 preferred)
1.4 L (1.5 US qt.)
Antifreeze Engine cooling
system ASTM D-6210 and Fleetguard ES
Compleat. See below 27.5 L
(7.3 US gal)51
Engine oil Engine oil pan SAE 15W-40 compliant with SAE specs for API class SJ and CJ-4 engine oil
11 L (11.6 US qt.)
Air conditioning refrigerant
Air conditioning system
R134A 2.27 kg (5 lb.)
Air conditioning refrigerant oil52
Air conditioning system total capacity
PAG SP-15 240 cc (8.1 fl. oz.)
NOTE:
If Fleetguard ES Compleat is unavailable, use a coolant concentrate or prediluted coolant intended for use with heavy duty diesel engines. Ensure coolant meets a minimum of the following chemical and physical properties:
Provides cylinder cavitation protection according to fleet study run at or above 60% load capacity.
Protects the cooling system metals (cast iron, aluminum alloys, and copper alloys such as brass) from corrosion.
An additive package should contain one of the following coolant mixtures:
Ethylene glycol or propylene glycol base prediluted (4060%) heavy duty coolant.
Ethylene glycol or propylene glycol base heavy duty coolant concentrate in a 4060% mixture of concentrate with quality water.
Water quality is important to the performance of the cooling system. Distilled, deionized, or demineralized water is recommended for mixing with ethylene glycol and propylene glycol base engine coolant concentrate.
IMPORTANT:
Do NOT use cooling system sealing additives or antifreeze that contains sealing additives. Ethylene glycol and propylene glycol may alter the freeze temperature. Verify that the mixture meets the freeze protection criteria of its intended use.
8.1.4 Filter Part Numbers Table 8.3 M155E4 Filter Part Numbers
Filter Part Number
Engine oil filter MD #111974
Charge oil filter MD #112419
Return oil filter MD #183620
REFERENCE
50. SAE 85W-140 API Service Class GL-5. Extreme Pressure Gear Lubricant is used before initial change. 51. Equal parts with water, high quality, soft, de-ionized or distilled water as recommended by Supplier. 52. New compressor (MD #183515) comes filled.
Page 474
214737 454 Revision A
Table 8.3 M155E4 Filter Part Numbers (continued)
Filter Part Number
Primary fuel filter element MD #205028
Secondary fuel filter element MD #205029
Fuel strainer filter (breather) MD #207200
Fuel filler filter MD #163989
Primary element (cab) MD #111060
Primary air filter element MD #203621
Secondary air filter element MD #203622
Return air filter MD #109797
Diesel exhaust fluid (DEF) tank suction filter MD #207478
Diesel exhaust fluid (DEF) vent hose filter MD #111608
Diesel exhaust fluid (DEF) supply module filter kit MD #207510
REFERENCE
Page 475
214737 455 Revision A
8.2 Recommended Torques
8.2.1 Torque Specifications The following tables provide correct torque values for various bolts, cap screws, and hydraulic fittings.
Tighten all bolts to torque values specified in charts (unless otherwise noted throughout this manual).
Replace hardware with same strength and grade of bolt.
Use torque value tables as a guide and periodically check tightness of bolts.
Understand torque categories for bolts and cap screws by using their identifying head markings.
Jam nuts
When applying torque to finished jam nuts, multiply the torque applied to regular nuts by f=0.65.
Self-tapping screws
Standard torque is to be used (NOT to be used on critical or structurally important joints).
SAE Bolt Torque Specifications
Torque values shown in following tables are valid for non-greased, or non-oiled threads and heads; therefore, do NOT grease or oil bolts or cap screws unless otherwise specified in this manual.
Figure 8.1: Bolt Grades A - Nominal Size B - SAE-8 C - SAE-5 D - SAE-2
Table 8.4 SAE Grade 5 Bolt and Grade 5 Free Spinning Nut
Nominal Size (A)
Torque (Nm) Torque (lbfft)
(*lbfin)
Min. Max. Min. Max.
1/4-20 11.9 13.2 *106 *117
5/16-18 24.6 27.1 *218 *241
3/8-16 44 48 32 36
7/16-14 70 77 52 57
1/2-13 106 118 79 87
9/16-12 153 170 114 126
5/8-11 212 234 157 173
3/4-10 380 420 281 311
7/8-9 606 669 449 496
1-8 825 912 611 676
REFERENCE
Page 476
214737 456 Revision A
Figure 8.2: Bolt Grades A - Nominal Size B - SAE-8 C - SAE-5 D - SAE-2
Table 8.5 SAE Grade 5 Bolt and Grade F Distorted Thread Nut
Nominal Size (A)
Torque (Nm) Torque (lbfft)
(*lbfin)
Min. Max. Min. Max.
1/4-20 8.1 9 *72 *80
5/16-18 16.7 18.5 *149 *164
3/8-16 30 33 22 24
7/16-14 48 53 35 39
1/2-13 73 80 54 59
9/16-12 105 116 77 86
5/8-11 144 160 107 118
3/4-10 259 286 192 212
7/8-9 413 456 306 338
1-8 619 684 459 507
Figure 8.3: Bolt Grades A - Nominal Size B - SAE-8 C - SAE-5 D - SAE-2
Table 8.6 SAE Grade 8 Bolt and Grade G Distorted Thread Nut
Nominal Size (A)
Torque (Nm) Torque (lbfft)
(*lbfin)
Min. Max. Min. Max.
1/4-20 16.8 18.6 *150 *165
5/16-18 24 26 18 19
3/8-16 42 46 31 34
7/16-14 67 74 50 55
1/2-13 102 113 76 84
9/16-12 148 163 109 121
5/8-11 204 225 151 167
3/4-10 362 400 268 296
7/8-9 583 644 432 477
1-8 874 966 647 716
REFERENCE
Page 477
214737 457 Revision A
Figure 8.4: Bolt Grades A - Nominal Size B - SAE-8 C - SAE-5 D - SAE-2
Table 8.7 SAE Grade 8 Bolt and Grade 8 Free Spinning Nut
Nominal Size (A)
Torque (Nm) Torque (lbfft)
(*lbfin)
Min. Max. Min. Max.
1/4-20 16.8 18.6 *150 *165
5/16-18 35 38 26 28
3/8-16 61 68 46 50
7/16-14 98 109 73 81
1/2-13 150 166 111 123
9/16-12 217 239 160 177
5/8-11 299 330 221 345
3/4-10 531 587 393 435
7/8-9 855 945 633 700
1-8 1165 1288 863 954
Metric Bolt Specifications
Figure 8.5: Bolt Grades
Table 8.8 Metric Class 8.8 Bolts and Class 9 Free Spinning Nut
Nominal Size (A)
Torque (Nm) Torque (lbfft)
(*lbfin)
Min. Max. Min. Max.
3-0.5 1.4 1.6 *13 *14
3.5-0.6 2.2 2.5 *20 *22
4-0.7 3.3 3.7 *29 *32
5-0.8 6.7 7.4 *59 *66
6-1.0 11.4 12.6 *101 *112
8-1.25 28 30 20 23
10-1.5 55 60 40 45
12-1.75 95 105 70 78
14-2.0 152 168 113 124
16-2.0 236 261 175 193
20-2.5 460 509 341 377
24-3.0 796 879 589 651
REFERENCE
Page 478
214737 458 Revision A
Figure 8.6: Bolt Grades
Table 8.9 Metric Class 8.8 Bolts and Class 9 Distorted Thread Nut
Nominal Size (A)
Torque (Nm) Torque (lbfft)
(*lbfin)
Min. Max. Min. Max.
3-0.5 1 1.1 *9 *10
3.5-0.6 1.5 1.7 *14 *15
4-0.7 2.3 2.5 *20 *22
5-0.8 4.5 5 *40 *45
6-1.0 7.7 8.6 *69 *76
8-1.25 18.8 20.8 *167 *185
10-1.5 37 41 28 30
12-1.75 65 72 48 53
14-2.0 104 115 77 85
16-2.0 161 178 119 132
20-2.5 314 347 233 257
24-3.0 543 600 402 444
Figure 8.7: Bolt Grades
Table 8.10 Metric Class 10.9 Bolts and Class 10 Free Spinning Nut
Nominal Size (A)
Torque (Nm) Torque (lbfft)
(*lbfin)
Min. Max. Min. Max.
3-0.5 1.8 2 *18 *19
3.5-0.6 2.8 3.1 *27 *30
4-0.7 4.2 4.6 *41 *45
5-0.8 8.4 9.3 *82 *91
6-1.0 14.3 15.8 *140 *154
8-1.25 38 42 28 31
10-1.5 75 83 56 62
12-1.75 132 145 97 108
14-2.0 210 232 156 172
16-2.0 326 360 242 267
20-2.5 637 704 472 521
24-3.0 1101 1217 815 901
REFERENCE
Page 479
214737 459 Revision A
Figure 8.8: Bolt Grades
Table 8.11 Metric Class 10.9 Bolts and Class 10 Distorted Thread Nut
Nominal Size (A)
Torque (Nm) Torque (lbfft)
(*lbfin)
Min. Max. Min. Max.
3-0.5 1.3 1.5 *12 *13
3.5-0.6 2.1 2.3 *19 *21
4-0.7 3.1 3.4 *28 *31
5-0.8 6.3 7 *56 *62
6-1.0 10.7 11.8 *95 *105
8-1.25 26 29 19 21
10-1.5 51 57 38 42
12-1.75 90 99 66 73
14-2.0 143 158 106 117
16-2.0 222 246 165 182
20-2.5 434 480 322 356
24-3.0 750 829 556 614
Metric Bolt Specifications Bolting into Cast Aluminum
Figure 8.9: Bolt Grades
Table 8.12 Metric Bolt Bolting into Cast Aluminum
Nominal Size (A)
Bolt Torque
8.8 (Cast Aluminum)
10.9 (Cast Aluminum)
Nm lbfft Nm lbfft
M3 1
M4 4 2.6
M5 8 5.5
M6 9 6 12 9
M8 20 14 28 20
M10 40 28 55 40
M12 70 52 100 73
M14
M16
REFERENCE
Page 480
214737 460 Revision A
Flare-Type Hydraulic Fittings
Figure 8.10: Hydraulic Fitting
1. Check flare (A) and flare seat (B) for defects that might cause leakage.
2. Align tube (C) with fitting (D) and thread nut (E) onto fitting without lubrication until contact has been made between flared surfaces.
3. Torque fitting nut (E) to specified number of flats from finger tight (FFFT) or to a given torque value in Table 8.13, page 460.
4. Use two wrenches to prevent fitting (D) from rotating. Place one wrench on fitting body (D), and tighten nut (E) with other wrench to torque shown.
5. Assess final condition of connection.
Table 8.13 Flare-Type Hydraulic Tube Fittings
SAE Dash Size Thread Size (in.)
Torque Value53 Flats from Finger Tight (FFFT)
Nm lbfft Tube Swivel Nut or
Hose
-2 5/1624 45 34
-3 3/824 78 56
-4 7/1620 1819 1314 2-1/2 2
-5 1/220 1921 1415 2 2
-6 9/1618 3033 2224 2 1-1/2
-8 3/416 5763 4246 2 1-1/2
-10 7/814 8189 6066 1-1/2 1-1/2
-12 1-1/1612 113124 8391 1-1/2 1-1/4
-14 1-3/1612 136149 100110 1-1/2 1-1/4
-16 1-5/1612 160176 118130 1-1/2 1
-20 1-5/812 228250 168184 1 1
-24 1-7/812 264291 195215 1 1
-32 2-1/212 359395 265291 1 1
-40 312 1 1
REFERENCE
53. Torque values shown are based on lubricated connections as in reassembly.
Page 481
214737 461 Revision A
O-Ring Boss (ORB) Hydraulic Fittings (Adjustable)
Figure 8.11: Hydraulic Fitting
1. Inspect O-ring (A) and seat (B) for dirt or obvious defects.
2. Back off lock nut (C) as far as possible. Ensure that washer (D) is loose and is pushed toward lock nut (C) as far as possible.
3. Check that O-ring (A) is NOTon threads and adjust if necessary.
4. Apply hydraulic system oil to O-ring (A).
Figure 8.12: Hydraulic Fitting
5. Install fitting (B) into port until back up washer (D) and O-ring (A) contact part face (E).
6. Position angle fittings by unscrewing no more than one turn.
7. Turn lock nut (C) down to washer (D) and tighten to torque shown. Use two wrenches, one on fitting (B) and other on lock nut (C).
8. Check final condition of fitting.
REFERENCE
Page 482
214737 462 Revision A
Table 8.14 O-Ring Boss (ORB) Hydraulic Fittings (Adjustable)
SAE Dash Size Thread Size (in.) Torque Value54
Nm lbfft (*lbfin)
-2 5/1624 67 *5362
-3 3/824 1213 *106115
-4 7/1620 1921 1415
-5 1/220 2133 1524
-6 9/1618 2629 1921
-8 3/416 4650 3437
-10 7/814 7582 5560
-12 1-1/1612 120132 8897
-14 1-3/812 153168 113124
-16 1-5/1612 176193 130142
-20 1-5/812 221243 163179
-24 1-7/812 270298 199220
-32 2-1/212 332365 245269
REFERENCE
54. Torque values shown are based on lubricated connections as in reassembly.
Page 483
214737 463 Revision A
O-Ring Boss (ORB) Hydraulic Fittings (Non-Adjustable)
Figure 8.13: Hydraulic Fitting
1. Inspect O-ring (A) and seat (B) for dirt or obvious defects.
2. Check that O-ring (A) is NOTon threads and adjust if necessary.
3. Apply hydraulic system oil to O-ring.
4. Install fitting (C) into port until fitting is hand-tight.
5. Torque fitting (C) according to values in Table 8.15, page 463.
6. Check final condition of fitting.
Table 8.15 O-Ring Boss (ORB) Hydraulic Fittings (Non-Adjustable)
SAE Dash Size Thread Size (in.) Torque Value55
Nm lbfft (*lbfin)
-2 5/1624 67 *5362
-3 3/824 1213 *106115
-4 7/1620 1921 1415
-5 1/220 2133 1524
-6 9/1618 2629 1921
-8 3/416 4650 3437
-10 7/814 7582 5560
-12 1-1/1612 120132 8897
-14 1-3/812 153168 113124
-16 1-5/1612 176193 130142
-20 1-5/812 221243 163179
-24 1-7/812 270298 199220
-32 2-1/212 332365 245269
REFERENCE
55. Torque values shown are based on lubricated connections as in reassembly.
Page 484
214737 464 Revision A
O-Ring Face Seal (ORFS) Hydraulic Fittings
Figure 8.14: Hydraulic Fitting
1. Check components to ensure that sealing surfaces and fitting threads are free of burrs, nicks, scratches, or any foreign material.
Figure 8.15: Hydraulic Fitting
2. Apply hydraulic system oil to O-ring (B).
3. Align tube or hose assembly so that flat face of sleeve (A) or (C) comes in full contact with O-ring (B).
4. Thread tube or hose nut (D) until hand-tight. The nut should turn freely until it is bottomed out.
5. Torque fittings according to values in Table 8.16, page 464.
NOTE:
If applicable, hold hex on fitting body (E) to prevent rotation of fitting body and hose when tightening fitting nut (D).
6. Use three wrenches when assembling unions or joining two hoses together.
7. Check final condition of fitting.
Table 8.16 O-Ring Face Seal (ORFS) Hydraulic Fittings
SAE Dash Size Thread Size (in.) Tube O.D. (in.) Torque Value56
Nm lbfft
-3 Note57 3/16
-4 9/16 1/4 2528 1821
-5 Note57 5/16
-6 11/16 3/8 4044 2932
-8 13/16 1/2 5561 4145
-10 1 5/8 8088 5965
-12 1-3/16 3/4 115127 8594
REFERENCE
56. Torque values and angles shown are based on lubricated connection as in reassembly. 57. O-ring face seal type end not defined for this tube size.
Page 485
214737 465 Revision A
Table 8.16 O-Ring Face Seal (ORFS) Hydraulic Fittings (continued)
SAE Dash Size Thread Size (in.) Tube O.D. (in.) Torque Value58
Nm lbfft
-14 Note57 7/8
-16 1-7/16 1 150165 111122
-20 1-11/16 1-1/4 205226 151167
-24 12 1-1/2 315347 232256
-32 2-1/2 2 510561 376414
Tapered Pipe Thread Fittings
Assemble pipe fittings as follows:
1. Check components to ensure that fitting and port threads are free of burrs, nicks and scratches, or any form of contamination.
2. Apply pipe thread sealant (paste type) to external pipe threads.
3. Thread fitting into port until hand-tight.
4. Torque connector to appropriate torque angle. The Turns From Finger Tight (TFFT) values are shown in Table 8.17, page 465. Make sure that tube end of a shaped connector (typically 45 degree or 90 degree) is aligned to receive incoming tube or hose assembly. Always finish alignment of fitting in tightening direction. Never back off (loosen) pipe threaded connectors to achieve alignment.
5. Clean all residue and any excess thread conditioner with appropriate cleaner.
6. Assess final condition of fitting. Pay special attention to possibility of cracks to port opening.
7. Mark final position of fitting. If a fitting leaks, disassemble fitting and check for damage.
NOTE:
Overtorque failure of fittings may not be evident until fittings are disassembled.
Table 8.17 Hydraulic Fitting Pipe Thread
Tapered Pipe Thread Size Recommended TFFT Recommended FFFT
1/827 23 1218
1/418 23 1218
3/818 23 1218
1/214 23 1218
3/414 1.52.5 1218
111 1/2 1.52.5 915
1 1/411 1/2 1.52.5 915
1 1/211 1/2 1.52.5 915
211 1/2 1.52.5 915
REFERENCE
58. Torque values and angles shown are based on lubricated connection as in reassembly.
Page 486
214737 466 Revision A
8.3 Conversion Chart Table 8.18 Conversion Chart
Quantity SI Units (Metric) Factor US Customary Units (Standard)
Unit Name Abbreviation Unit Name Abbreviation
Area hectare ha x 2.4710 = acre acres
Flow liters per minute L/min x 0.2642 = US gallons per minute gpm
Force Newton N x 0.2248 = pound force lbf
Length millimeter mm x 0.0394 = inch in.
Length meter m x 3.2808 = foot ft.
Power kilowatt kW x 1.341 = horsepower hp
Pressure kilopascal kPa x 0.145 = pounds per square inch
psi
Pressure megapascal MPa x 145.038 = pounds per square inch
psi
Pressure bar (Non-SI) bar x 14.5038 = pounds per square inch
psi
Torque Newton meter Nm x 0.7376 = pound feet or foot pounds
lbfft
Torque Newton meter Nm x 8.8507 = pound inches or inch pounds
lbfin
Temperature degrees Celsius C (C x 1.8) + 32 = degrees Fahrenheit F
Velocity meters per minute m/min x 3.2808 = feet per minute ft/min
Velocity meters per second m/s x 3.2808 = feet per second ft/s
Velocity kilometers per hour km/h x 0.6214 = miles per hour mph
Volume liter L x 0.2642 = US gallon US gal
Volume milliliter ml x 0.0338 = ounce oz.
Volume cubic centimeter cm3 or cc x 0.061 = cubic inch in.3
Weight kilogram kg x 2.2046 = pound lb.
REFERENCE
Page 487
214737 467 Revision A
8.4 Engine Error Codes The following example explains the segments of an error code:
If the cab display module (CDM) displays the Error Code 629S 12F 28C
629S: S represents the J1939 SPN column. Locate code 629 in that column.
12F : F represents the FMI column. Locate code 12 in that column.
28C: C represents the occurrences (count); 28 is the quantity.
J1939 SPN description : Controller #1. The Cummins description of this is engine control module critical internal failureBad intelligent device or component.
The Cummins Dealer will request the fault code that corresponds with the number that you have located in the J1939 SPN column.
Table 8.19 Engine Error Codes
Fault Code
J1939 SPN
J1939 FMI
Lamp J1939 SPN Description
Cummins Description59
2272 27 4 Amber Engine exhaust gas recirculation 1 valve position
EGR valve position circuit - voltage below normal, or shorted to low source
6497 51 3 None
Engine intake throttle actuator position sensor circuit
Engine intake throttle actuator position sensor circuit - voltage above normal, or shorted to high source
6498 51 4 None
Engine intake throttle actuator position sensor circuit
Engine intake throttle actuator position sensor circuit - voltage above normal, or shorted to low source
241 84 2 Amber Wheel-based vehicle speed
Wheel-based vehicle speed - data erratic, intermittent or incorrect
148 91 0 Red Accelerator pedal position 1
Accelerator pedal or lever position sensor 1 - data valid but above normal operational range - most severe level
147 91 1 Red Accelerator pedal position 1
Accelerator pedal or lever position 1 sensor circuit frequency - data valid but below normal operating range
1242 91 2 Red Accelerator pedal position 1
Accelerator pedal or lever position sensor 1 - data erratic, intermittent or incorrect
131 91 3 Red Accelerator pedal position 1
Accelerator pedal or lever position sensor 1 circuit - voltage above normal, or shorted to high source
1358 91 3 Amber Accelerator pedal position 1
Accelerator pedal or lever position sensor 1 circuit - voltage above normal, or shorted to high source
132 91 4 Red Accelerator pedal position 1
Accelerator pedal or lever position sensor 1 circuit - voltage below normal, or shorted to low source
REFERENCE
59. The descriptions of Cummins J1939 SPN codes are subject to change at their discretion.
Page 488
214737 468 Revision A
Table 8.19 Engine Error Codes (continued)
Fault Code
J1939 SPN
J1939 FMI
Lamp J1939 SPN Description
Cummins Description60
1359 91 4 Amber Accelerator pedal position 1
Accelerator pedal or lever position sensor 1 circuit - voltage below normal, or shorted to low source
3326 91 9 Red Accelerator pedal position 1
SAE J1939 multiplexed accelerator pedal or lever sensor system - abnormal update rate
1515 91 19 Red Accelerator pedal position 1
SAE J1939 multiplexed accelerator pedal or lever sensor system - received network data in error
546 94 3 Amber Engine fuel delivery pressure
Fuel delivery pressure sensor circuit - voltage above normal, or shorted to high source
547 94 4 Amber Engine fuel delivery pressure
Fuel delivery pressure sensor circuit - voltage below normal, or shorted to low source
2372 95 16 Amber Engine fuel filter differential pressure
Fuel filter differential pressure - data valid but above normal operating range - moderately severe level
428 97 3 Amber Water in fuel indicator
Water in fuel indicator sensor circuit - voltage above normal, or shorted to high source
429 97 4 Amber Water in fuel indicator
Water in fuel indicator sensor circuit - voltage below normal, or shorted to low source
418 97 15 Amber
(Blinking) Water in fuel indicator
Water in fuel indicator - data valid but above normal operating range - least severe level
1852 97 16 Amber Water in fuel indicator
Water in fuel indicator - data valid but above normal operating range - moderately severe level
415 100 1 Red Engine oil pressure Engine oil rifle pressure - data valid but below normal operational range - most severe level
435 100 2 Amber Engine oil pressure Engine oil rifle pressure - data erratic, intermittent or incorrect
135 100 3 Amber Engine oil pressure Engine oil rifle pressure 1 sensor circuit - voltage above normal, or shorted to high source
141 100 4 Amber Engine oil pressure Engine oil rifle pressure 1 sensor circuit - voltage below normal, or shorted to low source
143 100 18 Amber Engine oil pressure Engine oil rifle pressure - data valid but below normal operating range - moderately severe level
556 101 0 Red Engine crankcase pressure
Crankcase pressure - data valid but above normal operational range - most severe level
1942 101 2 Amber Engine crankcase pressure
Crankcase pressure - data erratic, intermittent or incorrect
1843 101 3 Amber Engine crankcase pressure
Crankcase pressure circuit - voltage above normal, or shorted to high source
1844 101 4 Amber Engine crankcase pressure
Crankcase pressure circuit - voltage below normal, or shorted to low source
REFERENCE
60. The descriptions of Cummins J1939 SPN codes are subject to change at their discretion.
Page 489
214737 469 Revision A
Table 8.19 Engine Error Codes (continued)
Fault Code
J1939 SPN
J1939 FMI
Lamp J1939 SPN Description
Cummins Description61
1974 101 15 Amber
(Blinking) Engine crankcase pressure
Crankcase pressure - data valid but above normal operating range - least severe level
555 101 16 Amber Engine crankcase pressure
Crankcase pressure - data valid but above normal operating range - moderately severe level
122 102 3 Amber Engine intake manifold #1 pressure
Intake manifold 1 pressure sensor circuit - voltage above normal, or shorted to high source
123 102 4 Amber Engine intake manifold #1 pressure
Intake manifold 1 pressure sensor circuit - voltage below normal, or shorted to low source
2288 103 15 None Engine turbocharger 1 speed
Turbocharger 1 speed - data valid but above normal operating range - least severe level
595 103 16 Amber Engine turbocharger 1 speed
Turbocharger 1 speed - data valid but above normal operating range - moderately severe level
687 103 18 Amber Engine turbocharger 1 speed
Turbocharger 1 speed - data valid but below normal operating range - moderately severe level
155 105 0 Red Engine intake manifold 1 temperature
Intake manifold 1 temperature - data valid but above normal operational range - most severe level
153 105 3 Amber Engine intake manifold 1 temperature
Intake manifold 1 temperature sensor circuit - voltage above normal, or shorted to high source
154 105 4 Amber Engine intake manifold 1 temperature
Intake manifold 1 temperature sensor circuit - voltage below normal, or shorted to low source
2964 105 15 None Engine intake manifold 1 temperature
Intake manifold 1 temperature - data valid but above normal operating range - least severe level
488 105 16 Amber Engine intake manifold temperature
Intake manifold 1 temperature - data valid but above normal operating range - moderately severe level
5576 107 15 Amber Engine air filter 1 differential pressure
Engine air filter differential pressure - data valid but above normal operating range - least severe level
3341 107 16 Amber Engine air filter 1 differential pressure
Engine air filter differential pressure - data valid but above normal operating range - moderately severe level
151 110 0 Red Engine coolant temperature
Engine coolant temperature - data valid but above normal operational range - most severe level
144 110 3 Amber Engine coolant temperature
Engine coolant temperature 1 sensor circuit - voltage above normal, or shorted to high source
REFERENCE
61. The descriptions of Cummins J1939 SPN codes are subject to change at their discretion.
Page 490
214737 470 Revision A
Table 8.19 Engine Error Codes (continued)
Fault Code
J1939 SPN
J1939 FMI
Lamp J1939 SPN Description
Cummins Description62
145 110 4 Amber Engine coolant temperature
Engine coolant temperature 1 sensor circuit - voltage below normal, or shorted to low source
146 110 16 Amber Engine coolant temperature
Engine coolant temperature - data valid but above normal operating range - moderately severe level
2646 110 31 Amber Engine coolant temperature
Engine coolant temperature - condition exists
2659 110 31 None Engine coolant temperature
Engine coolant temperature - condition exists
235 111 1 Red Engine coolant level Coolant level - data valid but below normal operational range - most severe level
195 111 3 Amber Engine coolant level Coolant level sensor 1 circuit - voltage above normal, or shorted to high source
6522 111 3 None Engine coolant level Coolant level sensor 1 circuit - voltage above normal, or shorted to high source
196 111 4 Amber Engine coolant level Coolant level sensor 1 circuit - voltage below normal, or shorted to low source
6523 111 4 None Engine coolant level Coolant level sensor 1 circuit - voltage below normal, or shorted to low source
2448 111 17 Amber
(Blinking) Engine coolant level
Coolant level - data valid but below normal operating range - least severe level
197 111 18 Amber Engine coolant level Coolant level - data valid but below normal operating range - moderately severe level
449 157 0 Red Engine injector metering rail 1 pressure
Injector metering rail 1 pressure - data valid but above normal operational range - most severe level
451 157 3 Amber Engine injector metering rail 1 pressure
Injector metering rail 1 pressure sensor circuit - voltage above normal, or shorted to high source
452 157 4 Amber Engine injector metering rail 1 pressure
Injector metering rail 1 pressure sensor circuit - voltage below normal, or shorted to low source
553 157 16 Amber Engine injector metering rail 1 pressure
Injector metering rail 1 pressure - data valid but above normal operating range - moderately severe level
559 157 18 Amber Engine injector metering rail 1 pressure
Injector metering rail 1 pressure - data valid but below normal operating range - moderately severe level
6256 168 15 None Battery potential / power input 1
Battery 1 voltage - data valid but above normal operating range - least severe level
REFERENCE
62. The descriptions of Cummins J1939 SPN codes are subject to change at their discretion.
Page 491
214737 471 Revision A
Table 8.19 Engine Error Codes (continued)
Fault Code
J1939 SPN
J1939 FMI
Lamp J1939 SPN Description
Cummins Description63
442 168 16 Amber Battery potential / power input 1
Battery 1 voltage - data valid but above normal operating range - moderately severe level
3724 168 17 Amber Battery potential / power input 1
Battery 1 voltage - data valid but below normal operating range - least severe level
6257 168 17 None Battery potential / power input 1
Battery 1 voltage - data valid but below normal operating range - moderately severe level
441 168 18 Amber Battery potential / power input 1
Battery 1 voltage - data valid but below normal operating range - moderately severe level
6524 175 3 None Engine oil temperature 1
Engine oil temperature sensor 1 circuit - voltage above normal, or shorted to high source
6525 175 4 None Engine oil temperature 1
Engine oil temperature sensor 1 circuit - voltage below normal, or shorted to low source
234 190 0 Red Engine speed Engine crankshaft speed/position - data valid but above normal operational range - most severe level
689 190 2 Amber Engine speed Engine crankshaft speed/position - data erratic, intermittent or incorrect
2321 190 2 None Engine speed Engine crankshaft speed/position - data erratic, intermittent or incorrect
2468 190 16 Amber Engine speed Engine crankshaft speed/position - data valid but above normal operating range - moderately severe level
4517 237 13 Amber Vehicle identification number
Vehicle identification number - out of calibration
1866 411 2 Amber Engine exhaust gas recirculation 1 differential pressure
Exhaust gas recirculation differential pressure - data erratic, intermittent or incorrect
2273 411 3 Amber Engine exhaust gas recirculation 1 differential pressure
Exhaust gas recirculation differential pressure sensor circuit - voltage above normal, or shorted to high source
2274 411 4 Amber Engine exhaust gas recirculation 1 differential pressure
Exhaust gas recirculation differential pressure sensor circuit - voltage below normal, or shorted to low source
2375 412 3 Amber Engine exhaust gas recirculation 1 temperature
Exhaust gas recirculation temperature sensor circuit - voltage above normal, or shorted to high source
2376 412 4 Amber Engine exhaust gas recirculation 1 temperature
Exhaust gas recirculation temperature sensor circuit - voltage below normal, or shorted to low source
REFERENCE
63. The descriptions of Cummins J1939 SPN codes are subject to change at their discretion.
Page 492
214737 472 Revision A
Table 8.19 Engine Error Codes (continued)
Fault Code
J1939 SPN
J1939 FMI
Lamp J1939 SPN Description
Cummins Description64
2961 412 15 None Engine exhaust gas recirculation 1 temperature
Exhaust gas recirculation temperature - data valid but above normal operating range - least severe level
2962 412 16 Amber Engine exhaust gas recirculation 1 temperature
Exhaust gas recirculation temperature - data valid but above normal operating range - moderately severe level
293 441 3 Amber Auxiliary temperature 1
Auxiliary temperature sensor input 1 circuit - voltage above normal, or shorted to high source
294 441 4 Amber Auxiliary temperature 1
Auxiliary temperature sensor input 1 circuit - voltage below normal, or shorted to low source
292 441 14 Red Auxiliary temperature 1
Auxiliary temperature sensor input 1 - special instructions
431 558 2 Amber Accelerator pedal 1 low idle switch
Accelerator pedal or lever idle validation switch - data erratic, intermittent or incorrect
432 558 13 Red Accelerator pedal 1 low idle switch
Accelerator pedal or lever idle validation switch circuit - out of calibration
3527 558 19 Red Accelerator pedal 1 low idle switch
Accelerator pedal or lever idle validation switch - received network data in error
3488 563 9 Amber Anti-lock braking (ABS) active
Anti-lock braking (ABS) controller - abnormal update rate
4215 563 31 None Anti-lock braking (ABS) active
Anti-lock braking (ABS) active - condition exists
115 612 2 Red System diagnostic code #2
Engine magnetic speed/position lost both of two signals - data erratic, intermittent or incorrect
291 625 9 Red Proprietary datalink Proprietary datalink error (OEM/vehicle datalink) - abnormal update rate
111 629 12 Red Controller #1 Engine control module critical internal failure - bad intelligent device or component
343 629 12 Amber Controller #1 Engine control module warning internal hardware failure - bad intelligent device or component
3697 630 12 Red Engine control module calibration memory
Engine control module calibration memory - bad intelligent device or component
2311 633 31 Amber Engine fuel actuator 1 control command
Electronic fuel injection control valve circuit - condition exists
REFERENCE
64. The descriptions of Cummins J1939 SPN codes are subject to change at their discretion.
Page 493
214737 473 Revision A
Table 8.19 Engine Error Codes (continued)
Fault Code
J1939 SPN
J1939 FMI
Lamp J1939 SPN Description
Cummins Description65
285 639 9 Amber
J1939 network #1, primary vehicle network (previously SAE J1939 data link)
SAE J1939 multiplexing PGN timeout error - abnormal update rate
286 639 13 Amber
J1939 network #1, primary vehicle network (previously SAE J1939 data link)
SAE J1939 multiplexing configuration error - out of calibration
2387 641 7 Amber
Engine variable geometry turbocharger actuator #1
VGTactuator driver circuit (motor) - mechanical system not responding or out of adjustment
1894 641 9 Amber
Engine variable geometry turbocharger actuator #1
VGTactuator driver circuit - abnormal update rate
2636 641 9 Red
Engine variable geometry turbocharger actuator #1
VGTactuator driver circuit - abnormal update rate
2198 641 11 Amber
Engine variable geometry turbocharger actuator #1
VGTactuator driver circuit - root cause not known
2634 641 12 Red
Engine variable geometry turbocharger actuator #1
VGTactuator controller - bad intelligent device or component
1898 641 13 Amber
Engine variable geometry turbocharger actuator #1
VGTactuator controller - out of calibration
2449 641 13 Red
Engine variable geometry turbocharger actuator #1
VGTactuator controller - out of calibration
1962 641 15 Amber
Engine variable geometry turbocharger actuator #1
VGTactuator driver over temperature (calculated) - data valid but above normal operating range - least severe level
REFERENCE
65. The descriptions of Cummins J1939 SPN codes are subject to change at their discretion.
Page 494
214737 474 Revision A
Table 8.19 Engine Error Codes (continued)
Fault Code
J1939 SPN
J1939 FMI
Lamp J1939 SPN Description
Cummins Description66
1976 641 15 None
Engine variable geometry turbocharger actuator #1
VGTactuator driver over temperature (calculated) - data valid but above normal operating range - least severe level
2635 641 31 Red
Engine variable geometry turbocharger actuator #1
VGTactuator driver circuit - condition exists
237 644 2 Amber Engine external speed command input
External speed command input (multiple unit synchronization) - data erratic, intermittent or incorrect
2377 647 3 Amber Engine fan clutch 1 output device driver
Fan control circuit - voltage above normal, or shorted to high source
6263 647 3 None Engine fan clutch 1 output device driver
Fan control circuit - voltage above normal, or shorted to high source
245 647 4 Amber Engine fan clutch 1 output device driver
Fan control circuit - voltage below normal, or shorted to low source
6264 647 4 None Engine fan clutch 1 output device driver
Fan control circuit - voltage below normal, or shorted to low source
322 651 5 Amber Engine injector cylinder #01
Injector solenoid driver cylinder 1 circuit - current below normal or open circuit
331 652 5 Amber Engine injector cylinder #02
Injector solenoid driver cylinder 2 circuit - current below normal or open circuit
1141 652 7 Amber Engine injector cylinder #02
Injector solenoid driver cylinder 2 - mechanical system not responding or out of adjustment
324 653 5 Amber Engine injector cylinder #03
Injector solenoid driver cylinder 3 circuit - current below normal or open circuit
1142 653 7 Amber Engine injector cylinder #03
Injector solenoid driver cylinder 3 - mechanical system not responding or out of adjustment
332 654 5 Amber Engine injector cylinder #04
Injector solenoid driver cylinder 4 circuit - current below normal or open circuit
1143 654 7 Amber Engine injector cylinder #04
Injector solenoid driver cylinder 4 - mechanical system not responding or out of adjustment
584 677 3 Amber Engine starter motor relay
Starter relay driver circuit - voltage above normal, or shorted to high source
585 677 4 Amber Engine starter motor relay
Starter relay driver circuit - voltage below normal, or shorted to low source
2557 697 3 Amber Auxiliary PWM driver #1
Auxiliary PWM driver 1 circuit - voltage above normal, or shorted to high source
REFERENCE
66. The descriptions of Cummins J1939 SPN codes are subject to change at their discretion.
Page 495
214737 475 Revision A
Table 8.19 Engine Error Codes (continued)
Fault Code
J1939 SPN
J1939 FMI
Lamp J1939 SPN Description
Cummins Description67
2558 697 4 Amber Auxiliary PWM driver #1
Auxiliary PWM driver 1 circuit - voltage below normal, or shorted to low source
4734 701 14 Red Auxiliary I/O #01 Auxiliary input/output 1 - special instructions
778 723 2 Amber Engine speed 2 Engine camshaft speed / position sensor - data erratic, intermittent or incorrect
2322 723 2 None Engine speed 2 Engine camshaft speed / position sensor - data erratic, intermittent or incorrect
731 723 7 Amber Engine speed 2 Engine speed / position camshaft and crankshaft misalignment - mechanical system not responding or out of adjustment
2555 729 3 Amber Engine intake air heater driver #1
Engine intake air heater 1 circuit - voltage above normal, or shorted to high source
6556 729 3 None Engine intake air heater driver #1
Engine intake air heater 1 circuit - voltage above normal, or shorted to high source
2556 729 4 Amber Engine intake air heater driver #1
Engine intake air heater 1 circuit - voltage below normal, or shorted to low source
6557 729 4 None Engine intake air heater driver #1
Engine intake air heater 1 circuit - voltage below normal, or shorted to low source
3641 748 9 Amber Transmission output retarder
Transmission output retarder - abnormal update rate
6336 862 3 None Crankcase breather heater circuit
Crankcase breather filter heater circuit - voltage above normal, or shorted to high source
6337 862 4 None Crankcase breather heater circuit
Crankcase breather filter heater circuit - voltage below normal, or shorted to low source
133 974 3 Red Remote accelerator pedal position
Remote accelerator pedal or lever position sensor 1 circuit - voltage above normal, or shorted to high source
134 974 4 Red Remote accelerator pedal position
Remote accelerator pedal or lever position sensor 1 circuit - voltage below normal, or shorted to low source
288 974 19 Red Remote accelerator pedal position
SAE J1939 multiplexing remote accelerator pedal or lever position sensor system - received network data in error
6563 976 2 None PTO governor state Auxiliary intermediate (PTO) speed switch validation - data erratic, intermittent or incorrect
6418 1072 3 None Engine (compression) brake output #1
Engine brake actuator driver 1 circuit - voltage above normal, or shorted to high source
REFERENCE
67. The descriptions of Cummins J1939 SPN codes are subject to change at their discretion.
Page 496
214737 476 Revision A
Table 8.19 Engine Error Codes (continued)
Fault Code
J1939 SPN
J1939 FMI
Lamp J1939 SPN Description
Cummins Description68
6419 1072 4 None Engine (compression) brake output #1
Engine brake actuator driver 1 circuit - voltage below normal, or shorted to low source
6421 1073 3 None Engine (compression) brake output #2
Engine brake actuator driver output 2 circuit - voltage above normal, or shorted to high source
6422 1073 4 None Engine (compression) brake output #2
Engine brake actuator driver output 2 circuit - voltage below normal, or shorted to low source
6258 1075 3 None Engine electric lift pump for engine fuel supply
Electric lift pump for engine fuel supply circuit - voltage above normal, or shorted to high source
6259 1075 4 None Engine electric lift pump for engine fuel supply
Electric lift pump for engine fuel supply circuit - voltage below normal, or shorted to low source
3555 1081 9 Amber Engine wait to start lamp Engine wait to start lamp - abnormal update rate
691 1172 3 Amber Engine turbocharger 1 compressor intake temperature
Turbocharger 1 compressor intake temperature circuit - voltage above normal, or shorted to high source
692 1172 4 Amber Engine turbocharger 1 compressor intake temperature
Turbocharger 1 compressor intake temperature circuit - voltage below normal, or shorted to low source
743 1176 2 Amber Engine turbocharger 1 compressor intake pressure
Turbocharger 1 compressor intake pressure - data erratic, intermittent or incorrect
741 1176 3 Amber Engine turbocharger 1 compressor intake pressure
Turbocharger 1 compressor intake pressure circuit - voltage above normal, or shorted to high source
742 1176 4 Amber Engine turbocharger 1 compressor intake pressure
Turbocharger 1 compressor intake pressure circuit - voltage below normal, or shorted to low source
3298 1194 13 Red Anti-theft encryption seed present indicator
Anti-theft encryption seed - out of calibration
2554 1209 2 Amber Engine exhaust gas pressure 1
Exhaust gas pressure 1 - data erratic, intermittent or incorrect
2373 1209 3 Amber Engine exhaust gas pressure 1
Exhaust gas pressure sensor 1 circuit - voltage above normal, or shorted to high source
REFERENCE
68. The descriptions of Cummins J1939 SPN codes are subject to change at their discretion.
Page 497
214737 477 Revision A
Table 8.19 Engine Error Codes (continued)
Fault Code
J1939 SPN
J1939 FMI
Lamp J1939 SPN Description
Cummins Description69
2374 1209 4 Amber Engine exhaust gas pressure 1
Exhaust gas pressure sensor 1 circuit - voltage below normal, or shorted to low source
3329 1231 2 None J1939 network #2 J1939 network #2 - data erratic, intermittent or incorrect
3331 1235 2 None J1939 network #3 J1939 network #3 - data erratic, intermittent or incorrect
1654 1323 31 Amber Engine misfire cylinder #1
Engine misfire cylinder 1 - condition exists
1655 1324 31 Amber Engine misfire cylinder #2
Engine misfire cylinder 2 - condition exists
1656 1325 31 Amber Engine misfire cylinder #3
Engine misfire cylinder 3 - condition exists
1657 1326 31 Amber Engine misfire cylinder #4
Engine misfire cylinder 4 - condition exists
272 1347 3 Amber Engine fuel pump pressurizing assembly #2
Engine fuel pump pressurizing assembly 1 circuit - voltage above normal, or shorted to high source
271 1347 4 Amber Engine fuel pump pressurizing assembly #1
Engine fuel pump pressurizing assembly 1 circuit - voltage below normal, or shorted to low source
281 1347 7 Amber Engine fuel pump pressurizing assembly #3
Engine fuel pump pressurizing assembly 1 - mechanical system not responding or out of adjustment
483 1349 3 Amber Engine injector metering rail 2 pressure
Injector metering rail 2 pressure sensor circuit - voltage above normal, or shorted to high source
649 1378 31 Amber
(Blinking) Engine oil change interval
Engine oil change interval - condition exists
297 1388 3 Amber Auxiliary pressure #2
Auxiliary pressure sensor input 2 circuit - voltage above normal, or shorted to high source
298 1388 4 Amber Auxiliary pressure #2
Auxiliary pressure sensor input 2 circuit - voltage below normal, or shorted to low source
296 1388 14 Red Auxiliary pressure #2
Auxiliary pressure sensor input 2 - special instructions
3714 1569 31 Amber Engine protection torque derate
Engine protection torque derate - condition exists
4789 1639 0 Amber Fan speed Fan speed - data valid but above normal operational range - most severe level
REFERENCE
69. The descriptions of Cummins J1939 SPN codes are subject to change at their discretion.
Page 498
214737 478 Revision A
Table 8.19 Engine Error Codes (continued)
Fault Code
J1939 SPN
J1939 FMI
Lamp J1939 SPN Description
Cummins Description70
4791 1639 1 Amber Fan speed Fan speed - data valid but below normal operational range - most severe level
6469 1639 2 None Fan speed Fan speed data erratic, intermittent, or incorrect
6467 1639 15 None Fan speed Fan speed - data valid but above normal operational range - least severe level
6468 1639 17 None Fan speed Fan speed - data valid but below normal operational range - most severe level
4437 1668 2 None J1939 network #4 - data erratic
J1939 network #4 - data erratic, intermittent or incorrect
3737 1675 31 None Engine starter mode Engine starter mode overcrank protection - condition exists
1673 1761 1 Amber Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust fluid tank level
Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust fluid tank level - data valid but below normal operational range - most severe level
1669 1761 3 Amber Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust fluid tank level
Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust fluid tank level sensor circuit - voltage above normal, or shorted to high source
1668 1761 4 Amber Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust fluid tank level
Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust fluid tank level sensor circuit - voltage below normal, or shorted to low source
4677 1761 9 Amber Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust fluid tank level
Sae J1939 multiplexing PGN timeout error - abnormal update rate
4769 1761 10 Amber Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust fluid tank level
Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust fluid tank level sensor - abnormal rate of change
4739 1761 11 Amber Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust fluid tank level
Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust fluid tank level sensor - root cause not known
6562 1761 11 None Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust fluid tank level
Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust fluid tank level sensor - root cause not known
6526 1761 13 None Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust fluid tank temperature
Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust fluid tank level sensor - out of calibration
3497 1761 17 Amber
(Blinking)
Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust fluid tank level
Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust fluid tank level - data valid but below normal operating range - least severe level
3498 1761 18 Amber
(Blinking)
Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust fluid tank level
Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust fluid tank level - data valid but below normal operating range - moderately severe level
REFERENCE
70. The descriptions of Cummins J1939 SPN codes are subject to change at their discretion.
Page 499
214737 479 Revision A
Table 8.19 Engine Error Codes (continued)
Fault Code
J1939 SPN
J1939 FMI
Lamp J1939 SPN Description
Cummins Description71
1239 2623 3 Amber Accelerator pedal #1 channel 2
Accelerator pedal or lever position sensor 2 circuit - voltage above normal, or shorted to high source
1241 2623 4 Amber Accelerator pedal #1 channel 2
Accelerator pedal or lever position sensor 2 circuit - voltage below normal, or shorted to low source
2346 2789 15 None Engine turbocharger 1 calculated turbine intake temperature
Turbocharger turbine intake temperature - data valid but above normal operating range - least severe
2349 2791 5 Amber
Engine exhaust gas recirculation 1 (EGR1) valve control
EGR valve control circuit - current below normal or open circuit
2353 2791 6 Amber
Engine exhaust gas recirculation 1 (EGR1) valve control
EGR valve control circuit - current above normal or grounded circuit
2357 2791 7 Amber
Engine exhaust gas recirculation 1 (EGR1) valve control
EGR valve control circuit - mechanical system not responding or out of adjustment
6555 2791 7 None
Engine exhaust gas recirculation 1 (EGR1) valve control
EGR valve control circuit - mechanical system not responding or out of adjustment
1896 2791 13 Amber
Engine exhaust gas recirculation 1 (EGR1) valve control
EGR valve controller - out of calibration
1961 2791 15 Amber
Engine exhaust gas recirculation 1 (EGR1) valve control
EGR valve control circuit over temperature - data valid but above normal operating range - least severe level
1679 3031 2 Amber Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust fluid tank temperature
Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust fluid tank temperature - data erratic, intermittent or incorrect
1678 3031 3 Amber Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust fluid tank temperature
Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust fluid tank temperature sensor - voltage above normal, or shorted to high source
1677 3031 4 Amber Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust fluid tank temperature
Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust fluid tank temperature sensor - voltage below normal, or shorted to low source
REFERENCE
71. The descriptions of Cummins J1939 SPN codes are subject to change at their discretion.
Page 500
214737 480 Revision A
Table 8.19 Engine Error Codes (continued)
Fault Code
J1939 SPN
J1939 FMI
Lamp J1939 SPN Description
Cummins Description72
6559 3031 4 None Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust fluid tank temperature
Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust fluid tank temperature sensor - voltage below normal, or shorted to low source
4572 3031 9 Amber Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust fluid tank temperature
Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust fluid tank temperature - abnormal update rate
3228 3216 2 Amber Aftertreatment 1 intake NOx
Aftertreatment 1 intake NOx sensor - data erratic, intermittent or incorrect
1885 3216 4 Amber Aftertreatment 1 intake NOx
Aftertreatment 1 intake NOx sensor circuit - voltage below normal, or shorted to low source
3232 3216 9 Amber Aftertreatment 1 intake NOx
Aftertreatment 1 intake NOx sensor - abnormal update rate
3725 3216 10 Amber Aftertreatment 1 intake NOx
Aftertreatment 1 intake NOx sensor - abnormal rate of change
6621 3216 10 None Aftertreatment 1 intake NOx
Aftertreatment 1 intake NOx sensor - abnormal rate of change
3718 3216 13 Amber Aftertreatment 1 intake NOx
Aftertreatment 1 intake NOx - out of calibration
3748 3216 20 Amber Aftertreatment 1 intake NOx
Aftertreatment 1 intake NOx sensor - data not rational - drifted high
6458 3216 20 None Aftertreatment 1 intake NOx
Aftertreatment 1 intake NOx sensor - data not rational - drifted high
6459 3216 21 None Aftertreatment 1 intake NOx
Aftertreatment 1 intake NOx sensor - data not rational - drifted high
3682 3218 2 Amber Aftertreatment 1 intake gas sensor power status
Aftertreatment 1 intake NOx sensor power supply - data erratic, intermittent or incorrect
1694 3226 2 Amber Aftertreatment 1 outlet NOx
Aftertreatment 1 outlet NOx sensor - data erratic, intermittent or incorrect
6464 3226 2 None Aftertreatment 1 outlet NOx
Aftertreatment 1 outlet NOx sensor - data erratic, intermittent or incorrect
1887 3226 4 Amber Aftertreatment 1 outlet NOx
Aftertreatment 1 outlet NOx sensor circuit - voltage below normal, or shorted to low source
6521 3226 4 None Aftertreatment outlet NOx sensor circuits
Aftertreatment 1 outlet NOx sensor circuit - voltage below normal, or shorted to low source
2771 3226 9 Amber Aftertreatment 1 outlet NOx
Aftertreatment 1 outlet NOx sensor - abnormal update rate
3545 3226 10 Amber Aftertreatment 1 outlet NOx
Aftertreatment 1 outlet NOx sensor - abnormal rate of change
REFERENCE
72. The descriptions of Cummins J1939 SPN codes are subject to change at their discretion.
Page 501
214737 481 Revision A
Table 8.19 Engine Error Codes (continued)
Fault Code
J1939 SPN
J1939 FMI
Lamp J1939 SPN Description
Cummins Description73
6565 3226 10 None Aftertreatment 1 outlet NOx
Aftertreatment 1 outlet NOx sensor - abnormal rate of change
3717 3226 13 Amber Aftertreatment 1 outlet NOx
Aftertreatment 1 outlet NOx sensor - out of calibration
3749 3226 20 Amber Aftertreatment 1 outlet NOx
Aftertreatment 1 outlet NOx sensor - data not rational - drifted high
6462 3226 20 None Aftertreatment 1 outlet NOx
Aftertreatment 1 outlet NOx sensor - data not rational - drifted high
6463 3226 21 None Aftertreatment 1 outlet NOx
Aftertreatment 1 outlet NOx sensor - data not rational - drifted high
3681 3228 2 Amber Aftertreatment 1 outlet gas sensor power status
Aftertreatment 1 outlet NOx sensor power supply - data erratic, intermittent or incorrect
2976 3361 2 Amber Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust fluid dosing unit
Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust fluid dosing unit temperature - data erratic, intermittent or incorrect
3558 3361 3 Amber Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust fluid dosing unit
Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust fluid dosing unit - voltage above normal, or shorted to high source
3559 3361 4 Amber Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust fluid dosing unit
Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust fluid dosing unit - voltage below normal, or shorted to low source
1682 3362 31 Amber
Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust fluid dosing unit input lines
Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust fluid dosing unit input lines - condition exists
1683 3363 3 Amber Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust fluid tank 1 heater
Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust fluid tank heater - voltage above normal, or shorted to high source
6479 3363 3 None Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust fluid tank 1 heater
Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust fluid tank heater - voltage above normal, or shorted to high source
1684 3363 4 Amber Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust fluid tank 1 heater
Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust fluid tank heater - voltage below normal, or shorted to low source
6481 3363 4 None Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust fluid tank 1 heater
Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust fluid tank heater - voltage below normal, or shorted to low source
3242 3363 7 Amber Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust fluid tank 1 heater
Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust fluid tank heater - mechanical system not responding or out of adjustment
REFERENCE
73. The descriptions of Cummins J1939 SPN codes are subject to change at their discretion.
Page 502
214737 482 Revision A
Table 8.19 Engine Error Codes (continued)
Fault Code
J1939 SPN
J1939 FMI
Lamp J1939 SPN Description
Cummins Description74
6475 3363 7 None Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust fluid tank 1 heater
Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust fluid tank heater - mechanical system not responding or out of adjustment
1713 3363 16 Amber Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust fluid tank 1 heater
Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust fluid tank heater - data valid but above normal operating range - moderately severe level
1712 3363 18 Amber Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust fluid tank 1 heater
Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust fluid tank heater - data valid but below normal operating range - moderately severe level
6476 3363 18 None Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust fluid tank 1 heater
Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust fluid tank heater - data valid but below normal operating range - moderately severe level
3866 3364 1 Amber Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust fluid tank 1 quality
Aftertreatment diesel exhaust fluid quality - data valid but below normal operational range - most severe level
3878 3364 2 Amber Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust fluid tank 1 quality
Aftertreatment diesel exhaust fluid quality - data erratic, intermittent or incorrect
1686 3364 3 Amber Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust fluid tank 1 quality
Aftertreatment diesel exhaust fluid quality sensor circuit - voltage above normal, or shorted to high source
6493 3364 3 None Electronic throttle control actuator driver circuit
Electronic throttle control actuator driver circuit -voltage above normal, or shorted to high source
1685 3364 4 Amber Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust fluid tank 1 quality
Aftertreatment diesel exhaust fluid quality sensor circuit - voltage below normal, or shorted to low source
6494 3364 4 None Electronic throttle control actuator driver circuit
Electronic throttle control actuator driver circuit -voltage above normal, or shorted to low source
6496 3364 5 None Electronic throttle control actuator driver circuit
Electronic throttle control actuator driver circuit - current below normal or open circuit
3876 3364 7 Amber Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust fluid tank 1 quality
Aftertreatment diesel exhaust fluid quality sensor - mechanical system not responding or out of adjustment
3868 3364 9 Amber Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust fluid tank 1 quality
Aftertreatment diesel exhaust fluid quality - abnormal update rate
REFERENCE
74. The descriptions of Cummins J1939 SPN codes are subject to change at their discretion.
Page 503
214737 483 Revision A
Table 8.19 Engine Error Codes (continued)
Fault Code
J1939 SPN
J1939 FMI
Lamp J1939 SPN Description
Cummins Description75
4277 3364 10 Amber Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust fluid tank 1 quality
Aftertreatment diesel exhaust fluid quality - abnormal rate of change
1715 3364 11 Amber Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust fluid tank 1 quality
Aftertreatment diesel exhaust fluid quality - root cause not known
1714 3364 13 Amber Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust fluid tank 1 quality
Aftertreatment diesel exhaust fluid quality - out of calibration
4842 3364 15 None Aftertreatment diesel exhaust fluid quality
Aftertreatment diesel exhaust fluid quality - data valid but above normal operating range - least severe level
3867 3364 18 Amber Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust fluid tank 1 quality
Aftertreatment diesel exhaust fluid quality - data valid but below normal operating range - moderate severe level
6752 3364 18 None Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust fluid tank 1 quality
Aftertreatment diesel exhaust fluid quality - data valid but below normal operating range - moderate severe level
386 3509 3 Amber Sensor supply voltage 1
Sensor supply 1 circuit - voltage above normal, or shorted to high source
352 3509 4 Amber Sensor supply voltage 1
Sensor supply 1 circuit - voltage below normal, or shorted to low source
227 3510 3 Amber Sensor supply voltage 2
Sensor supply 2 circuit - voltage above normal, or shorted to high source
187 3510 4 Amber Sensor supply voltage 2
Sensor supply 2 circuit - voltage below normal, or shorted to low source
239 3511 3 Amber Sensor supply voltage 3
Sensor supply 3 circuit - voltage above normal, or shorted to high source
238 3511 4 Amber Sensor supply voltage 3
Sensor supply 3 circuit - voltage below normal, or shorted to low source
2185 3512 3 Amber Sensor supply voltage 4
Sensor supply 4 circuit - voltage above normal, or shorted to high source
2186 3512 4 Amber Sensor supply voltage 4
Sensor supply 4 circuit - voltage below normal, or shorted to low source
1695 3513 3 Amber Sensor supply voltage 5
Sensor supply 5 - voltage above normal, or shorted to high source
1696 3513 4 Amber Sensor supply voltage 5
Sensor supply 5 - voltage below normal, or shorted to low source
REFERENCE
75. The descriptions of Cummins J1939 SPN codes are subject to change at their discretion.
Page 504
214737 484 Revision A
Table 8.19 Engine Error Codes (continued)
Fault Code
J1939 SPN
J1939 FMI
Lamp J1939 SPN Description
Cummins Description76
515 3514 3 Amber Sensor supply voltage 6
Sensor supply 6 circuit - voltage above normal, or shorted to high source
516 3514 4 Amber Sensor supply voltage 6
Sensor supply 6 circuit - voltage below normal, or shorted to low source
4743 3515 5 Amber Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust fluid temperature 2
Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust fluid temperature 2 sensor circuit - current below normal or open circuit
4744 3515 6 Amber Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust fluid temperature 2
Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust fluid temperature 2 sensor circuit - current above normal or grounded
4243 3515 10 Amber Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust fluid temperature 2
Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust fluid temperature 2 - abnormal rate of change
6619 3515 10 None Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust fluid temperature 2
Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust fluid temperature 2 - abnormal rate of change
4745 3515 11 Amber Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust fluid temperature 2
Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust fluid temperature 2 - root cause not known
4768 3521 11 Amber Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust fluid property
Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust fluid property - root cause not known
1117 3597 2 None ECU power output supply voltage #1
Power supply lost with ignition on - data erratic, intermittent or incorrect
351 3597 12 Amber ECU power output supply voltage #1
Injector power supply - bad intelligent device or component
6499 3597 17 None ECU power output supply voltage #1
ECU power output supply voltage 1 - data valid but below normal operating range - moderately severe level
1938 3597 18 Amber ECU power output supply voltage #1
ECU power output supply voltage 1 - data valid but below normal operating range - moderately severe level
4213 3695 2 Amber Aftertreatment regeneration inhibit switch
Aftertreatment regeneration inhibit switch - data erratic, intermittent or incorrect
6568 3695 2 None Aftertreatment regeneration inhibit switch
Aftertreatment regeneration inhibit switch - data erratic, intermittent or incorrect
5938 3750 14 Amber Diesel particulate filter 1 conditions not
Diesel particulate filter 1 conditions not met for active regeneration condition exists
REFERENCE
76. The descriptions of Cummins J1939 SPN codes are subject to change at their discretion.
Page 505
214737 485 Revision A
Table 8.19 Engine Error Codes (continued)
Fault Code
J1939 SPN
J1939 FMI
Lamp J1939 SPN Description
Cummins Description77
met for active regeneration
3547 4096 31 Amber
NOx limits exceeded due to empty diesel exhaust fluid tank
Aftertreatment diesel exhaust fluid tank empty - condition exists
1427 4185 31 Amber Overspeed shutdown relay driver
Overspeed shutdown relay driver diagnostic has detected an error - condition exists
1428 4186 31 Amber Low oil pressure shutdown relay driver
Low oil pressure (LOP) shutdown relay driver diagnostic has detected an error - condition exists
1429 4187 31 Amber
High engine temperature shutdown relay driver
High engine temperature (HET) shutdown relay driver diagnostic has detected an error - condition exists
1431 4188 31 Amber Pre-low oil pressure indicator relay driver
Pre-low oil pressure warning relay driver diagnostic has detected an error - condition exists
1432 4223 31 Amber Pre-high engine temperature warning relay driver
Pre-high engine temperature warning relay driver diagnostic has detected an error - condition exists
3596 4334 2 Amber
Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust fluid doser absolute pressure
Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust fluid pressure sensor - data erratic, intermittent or incorrect
3571 4334 3 Amber
Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust fluid doser absolute pressure
Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust fluid pressure sensor - voltage above normal, or shorted to high source
3572 4334 4 Amber
Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust fluid doser absolute pressure
Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust fluid pressure sensor - voltage below normal, or shorted to low source
3575 4334 16 Amber
Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust fluid doser absolute pressure
Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust fluid pressure sensor - data valid but above normal operating range
3574 4334 18 Amber
Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust fluid doser absolute pressure
Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust fluid pressure sensor - data valid but below normal operating range
REFERENCE
77. The descriptions of Cummins J1939 SPN codes are subject to change at their discretion.
Page 506
214737 486 Revision A
Table 8.19 Engine Error Codes (continued)
Fault Code
J1939 SPN
J1939 FMI
Lamp J1939 SPN Description
Cummins Description77
4249 4337 10 Amber Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust fluid dosing temperature
Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust fluid dosing temperature - abnormal rate of change
3237 4340 3 Amber Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust fluid line heater 1 state
Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust fluid line heater 1 circuit - voltage above normal, or shorted to high source
6531 4340 3 None Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust fluid line heater 1 state
Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust fluid line heater 1 circuit - voltage above normal, or shorted to high source
3238 4340 4 Amber Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust fluid line heater 1 state
Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust fluid line heater 1 circuit - voltage below normal, or shorted to low source
6532 4340 4 None Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust fluid line heater 1 state
Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust fluid line heater 1 circuit - voltage below normal, or shorted to low source
3258 4340 5 Amber Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust fluid line heater 1 state
Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust fluid line heater 1 circuit - current below normal or open circuit
6482 4340 5 None Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust fluid line heater 1 state
Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust fluid line heater 1 circuit - current below normal or open circuit
3239 4342 3 Amber Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust fluid line heater 2 state
Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust fluid line heater 2 circuit - voltage above normal, or shorted to high source
6533 4342 3 None Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust fluid line heater 2 state
Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust fluid line heater 2 circuit - voltage above normal, or shorted to high source
3241 4342 4 Amber Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust fluid line heater 2 state
Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust fluid line heater 2 circuit - voltage below normal, or shorted to low source
6534 4342 4 None Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust fluid line heater 2 state
Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust fluid line heater 2 circuit - voltage below normal, or shorted to low source
3261 4342 5 Amber Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust fluid line heater 2 state
Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust fluid line heater 2 circuit - current below normal or open circuit
6483 4342 5 None Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust fluid line heater 2 state
Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust fluid line heater 2 circuit - current below normal or open circuit
3422 4344 3 Amber Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust fluid line heater 3 state
Aftertreatment diesel exhaust fluid line heater 3 circuit - voltage above normal, or shorted to high source
REFERENCE
77. The descriptions of Cummins J1939 SPN codes are subject to change at their discretion.
Page 507
214737 487 Revision A
Table 8.19 Engine Error Codes (continued)
Fault Code
J1939 SPN
J1939 FMI
Lamp J1939 SPN Description
Cummins Description78
6535 4344 3 Amber Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust fluid line heater 3 state
Aftertreatment diesel exhaust fluid line heater 3 circuit - voltage above normal, or shorted to high source
3423 4344 4 Amber Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust fluid line heater 3 state
Aftertreatment diesel exhaust fluid line heater 3 circuit - voltage below normal, or shorted to low source
6536 4344 4 Amber Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust fluid line heater 3 state
Aftertreatment diesel exhaust fluid line heater 3 circuit - voltage below normal, or shorted to low source
3425 4344 5 Amber Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust fluid line heater 3 state
Aftertreatment diesel exhaust fluid line heater 3 circuit - current below normal or open circuit
6484 4344 5 None Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust fluid line heater 3 state
Aftertreatment diesel exhaust fluid line heater 3 circuit - current below normal or open circuit
3229 4360 0 Red Aftertreatment 1 SCR catalyst intake gas temperature
Aftertreatment 1 SCR intake temperature - data valid but above normal operational range - most severe level
3144 4360 2 Amber Aftertreatment 1 SCR catalyst intake gas temperature
Aftertreatment 1 SCR intake temperature sensor - data erratic, intermittent or incorrect
3142 4360 3 Amber Aftertreatment 1 SCR catalyst intake gas temperature
Aftertreatment 1 SCR intake temperature sensor circuit - voltage above normal, or shorted to high source
3143 4360 4 Amber Aftertreatment 1 SCR catalyst intake gas temperature
Aftertreatment 1 SCR intake temperature sensor circuit - voltage below normal, or shorted to low source
3164 4360 15 None Aftertreatment 1 SCR catalyst intake gas temperature
Aftertreatment 1 SCR intake temperature - data valid but above normal operating range - least severe
3231 4360 16 Red Aftertreatment 1 SCR catalyst intake gas temperature
Aftertreatment 1 SCR intake temperature - data valid but above normal operating range - moderately severe level
3165 4363 0 Red Aftertreatment 1 SCR catalyst outlet gas temperature
Aftertreatment 1 SCR outlet temperature - data valid but above normal operational range - most severe
3148 4363 2 Amber Aftertreatment 1 SCR catalyst outlet gas temperature
Aftertreatment 1 SCR outlet temperature sensor - data erratic, intermittent or incorrect
REFERENCE
78. The descriptions of Cummins J1939 SPN codes are subject to change at their discretion.
Page 508
214737 488 Revision A
Table 8.19 Engine Error Codes (continued)
Fault Code
J1939 SPN
J1939 FMI
Lamp J1939 SPN Description
Cummins Description79
3146 4363 3 Amber Aftertreatment 1 SCR catalyst outlet gas temperature
Aftertreatment 1 SCR outlet temperature sensor circuit - voltage above normal, or shorted to high source
6569 4363 3 None Aftertreatment 1 SCR catalyst outlet gas temperature
Aftertreatment 1 SCR outlet temperature sensor circuit - voltage above normal, or shorted to high source
3147 4363 4 Amber Aftertreatment 1 SCR catalyst outlet gas temperature
Aftertreatment 1 SCR outlet temperature sensor circuit - voltage below normal, or shorted to low source
6571 4363 4 None Aftertreatment 1 SCR catalyst outlet gas temperature
Aftertreatment 1 SCR outlet temperature sensor circuit - voltage below normal, or shorted to low source
3235 4363 16 Red Aftertreatment 1 SCR catalyst outlet gas temperature
Aftertreatment 1 SCR outlet temperature - data valid but above normal operating range - moderately severe level
6517 4364 17 None Aftertreatment 1 SCR conversion efficiency
Aftertreatment SCR catalyst conversion efficiency - data valid but below normal operating range - moderately severe level
3582 4364 18 Amber Aftertreatment 1 SCR conversion efficiency
Aftertreatment SCR catalyst conversion efficiency - data valid but below normal operating range - moderately severe level
3577 4376 3 Amber Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust fluid return valve
Aftertreatment diesel exhaust fluid return valve - voltage above normal, or shorted to high source
3578 4376 4 Amber Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust fluid return valve
Aftertreatment diesel exhaust fluid return valve - voltage below normal, or shorted to low source
4157 4376 7 Amber Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust fluid return valve
Aftertreatment diesel exhaust fluid return valve - mechanical system not responding or out of adjust
6527 4376 7 None Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust fluid return valve
Aftertreatment diesel exhaust fluid return valve - mechanical system not responding or out of adjust
3315 4765 2 Amber
Aftertreatment diesel oxidation catalyst intake temperature
Aftertreatment 1 diesel oxidation catalyst intake temperature - data erratic, intermittent or incorrect
6539 4765 2 None
Aftertreatment diesel oxidation catalyst intake temperature
Aftertreatment 1 diesel oxidation catalyst intake temperature - data erratic, intermittent or incorrect
REFERENCE
79. The descriptions of Cummins J1939 SPN codes are subject to change at their discretion.
Page 509
214737 489 Revision A
Table 8.19 Engine Error Codes (continued)
Fault Code
J1939 SPN
J1939 FMI
Lamp J1939 SPN Description
Cummins Description80
3314 4765 3 Amber
Aftertreatment diesel oxidation catalyst intake temperature
Aftertreatment 1 diesel oxidation catalyst intake temperature sensor circuit - voltage above normal, or shorted to high source
3313 4765 4 Amber
Aftertreatment diesel oxidation catalyst intake temperature
Aftertreatment 1 diesel oxidation catalyst intake temperature sensor circuit - voltage below normal, or shorted to low source
3251 4765 16 Red
Aftertreatment diesel oxidation catalyst intake temperature
Aftertreatment 1 diesel oxidation catalyst intake temperature - data valid but above normal operating range
5387 4766 0 Red
Aftertreatment 1 diesel oxidation catalyst outlet gas temperature
Aftertreatment 1 diesel oxidation catalyst outlet gas temperature - data valid but above normal operating range - most severe level
5386 4766 2 Amber
Aftertreatment 1 diesel oxidation catalyst outlet gas temperature
Aftertreatment 1 diesel oxidation catalyst outlet gas temperature - data erratic, intermittent, or incorrect
4533 4766 3 Amber
Aftertreatment 1 diesel oxidation catalyst outlet gas temperature sensor circuit
Aftertreatment 1 diesel oxidation catalyst outlet gas temperature sensor circuit - voltage above normal, or shorted to high source
4534 4766 4 Amber
Aftertreatment 1 diesel oxidation catalyst outlet gas temperature sensor circuit
Aftertreatment 1 diesel oxidation catalyst outlet gas temperature sensor circuit - voltage below normal, or shorted to low source
5389 4766 15 Amber
Aftertreatment 1 diesel oxidation catalyst outlet gas temperature
Aftertreatment 1 diesel oxidation catalyst outlet gas temperature - data valid but above normal operating range - least severe level
5388 4766 16 Red
Aftertreatment 1 diesel oxidation catalyst outlet gas temperature
Aftertreatment 1 diesel oxidation catalyst outlet gas temperature - data valid but above normal operating range - moderately severe level
3751 4792 7 None Aftertreatment SCR catalyst system
Aftertreatment SCR catalyst system - mechanical system not responding or out of adjustment
4585 4792 14 Red Aftertreatment SCR catalyst system
Aftertreatment 1 SCR catalyst system - special instructions
REFERENCE
80. The descriptions of Cummins J1939 SPN codes are subject to change at their discretion.
Page 510
214737 490 Revision A
Table 8.19 Engine Error Codes (continued)
Fault Code
J1939 SPN
J1939 FMI
Lamp J1939 SPN Description
Cummins Description81
3151 4794 31 Amber Aftertreatment 1 SCR catalyst system
Aftertreatment 1 SCR catalyst system missing - condition exists
1664 4796 31 Amber Aftertreatment 1 diesel oxidation catalyst missing
Aftertreatment 1 diesel oxidation catalyst missing - condition exists
6726 4796 31 None Aftertreatment 1 diesel oxidation catalyst missing
Aftertreatment 1 diesel oxidation catalyst missing - condition exists
2637 5018 11 None Aftertreatment diesel oxidation catalyst
Aftertreatment 1 diesel oxidation catalyst face plugged - root cause not known
3649 5024 10 Amber Aftertreatment 1 intake gas NOx sensor heater ratio
Aftertreatment 1 intake NOx sensor heater - abnormal rate of change
3583 5031 10 Amber Aftertreatment 1 outlet gas NOx sensor heater ratio
Aftertreatment 1 outlet NOx sensor heater - abnormal rate of change
6581 5031 10 None Aftertreatment 1 outlet gas NOx sensor heater ratio
Aftertreatment 1 outlet NOx sensor heater - abnormal rate of change
3419 5125 3 Amber Sensor supply voltage 7
Sensor supply 7 circuit - voltage above normal, or shorted to high source
3421 5125 4 Amber Sensor supply voltage 7
Sensor supply 7 circuit - voltage below normal, or shorted to low source
4863 5245 31 Amber
Aftertreatment selective catalytic reduction operator inducement active
Aftertreatment diesel exhaust fluid tank low level indicator
3712 5246 0 Red Aftertreatment SCR operator inducement severity
Aftertreatment SCR operator inducement - data valid but above normal operational range - most severe level
2638 5298 17 None
Amber QSF3.8
Aftertreatment 1 diesel oxidation catalyst conversion efficiency
Aftertreatment 1 diesel oxidation catalyst conversion efficiency - data valid but below normal operating range - moderately severe level
1691 5298 18 Amber
Aftertreatment 1 diesel oxidation catalyst conversion efficiency
Aftertreatment 1 diesel oxidation catalyst conversion efficiency - data valid but below normal operating range - moderately severe level
REFERENCE
81. The descriptions of Cummins J1939 SPN codes are subject to change at their discretion.
Page 511
214737 491 Revision A
Table 8.19 Engine Error Codes (continued)
Fault Code
J1939 SPN
J1939 FMI
Lamp J1939 SPN Description
Cummins Description82
3755 5394 2 None Aftertreatment diesel exhaust fluid dosing valve
Aftertreatment diesel exhaust fluid dosing valve - data erratic, intermittent or incorrect
3567 5394 5 Amber Aftertreatment diesel exhaust fluid dosing valve
Aftertreatment diesel exhaust fluid dosing valve - current below normal or open circuit
3568 5394 7 Amber Aftertreatment diesel exhaust fluid dosing valve
Aftertreatment diesel exhaust fluid dosing valve - mechanical system not responding or out of adjustment
3633 5484 3 Amber Engine fan clutch 2 output device driver
Engine fan clutch 2 control circuit - voltage above normal, or shorted to high source
6456 5484 3 None Engine fan clutch 2 output device driver
Engine fan clutch 2 control circuit - voltage above normal, or shorted to high source
3634 5484 4 Amber Engine fan clutch 2 output device driver
Engine fan clutch 2 control circuit - voltage below normal, or shorted to low source
6457 5484 4 None Engine fan clutch 2 output device driver
Engine fan clutch 2 control circuit - voltage below normal, or shorted to low source
3562 5491 3 Amber Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust fluid line heater relay
Aftertreatment diesel exhaust fluid line heater relay - voltage above normal, or shorted to high source
6477 5491 3 None Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust fluid line heater relay
Aftertreatment diesel exhaust fluid line heater relay - voltage above normal, or shorted to high source
3563 5491 4 Amber Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust fluid line heater relay
Aftertreatment diesel exhaust fluid line heater relay - voltage below normal, or shorted to low source
6478 5491 4 None Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust fluid line heater relay
Aftertreatment diesel exhaust fluid line heater relay - voltage below normal, or shorted to low source
6537 5491 7 None Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust fluid line heater relay
Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust fluid line heater relay - mechanical system not responding or out of adjustment
3741 5571 0 Amber High pressure common rail fuel pressure relief valve
High pressure common rail fuel pressure relief valve - data valid but above normal operational range
3727 5571 7 None High pressure common rail fuel pressure relief valve
High pressure common rail fuel pressure relief valve - mechanical system not responding or out of adjustment
REFERENCE
82. The descriptions of Cummins J1939 SPN codes are subject to change at their discretion.
Page 512
214737 492 Revision A
Table 8.19 Engine Error Codes (continued)
Fault Code
J1939 SPN
J1939 FMI
Lamp J1939 SPN Description
Cummins Description83
5585 5571 15 Amber High pressure common rail fuel pressure relief valve
High pressure common rail fuel pressure relief valve - data valid but above normal operating range - least severe level
4158 5742 12 Amber
Aftertreatment diesel particulate filter temperature sensor module
Aftertreatment diesel particulate filter temperature sensor module - bad intelligent device or component
4164 5743 3 Amber
Aftertreatment selective catalytic reduction temperature sensor module
Aftertreatment selective catalytic reduction temperature sensor module - voltage above normal, or shorted to high source
4165 5743 4 Amber
Aftertreatment selective catalytic reduction temperature sensor module
Aftertreatment selective catalytic reduction temperature sensor module - voltage below normal, or shorted to low source
4152 5743 9 Amber
Aftertreatment selective catalytic reduction temperature sensor module
Aftertreatment selective catalytic reduction temperature sensor module - abnormal update rate
4261 5743 11 Amber
Aftertreatment selective catalytic reduction temperature sensor module
Aftertreatment selective catalytic reduction temperature sensor module - root cause not known
4159 5743 12 Amber
Aftertreatment selective catalytic reduction temperature sensor module
Aftertreatment selective catalytic reduction temperature sensor module - bad intelligent device or component
4166 5743 16 Amber
Aftertreatment selective catalytic reduction temperature sensor module
Aftertreatment selective catalytic reduction temperature sensor module - data valid but above normal
4168 5745 3 Amber Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust fluid dosing unit heater
Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust fluid dosing unit heater - voltage above normal, or shorted to high
4169 5745 4 Amber Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust fluid dosing unit heater
Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust fluid dosing unit heater - voltage below normal, or shorted to low source
REFERENCE
83. The descriptions of Cummins J1939 SPN codes are subject to change at their discretion.
Page 513
214737 493 Revision A
Table 8.19 Engine Error Codes (continued)
Fault Code
J1939 SPN
J1939 FMI
Lamp J1939 SPN Description
Cummins Description84
6513 5745 17 None Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust fluid dosing unit heater
Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust fluid dosing unit heater - data valid but below normal operating range
4171 5745 18 Amber Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust fluid dosing unit heater
Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust fluid dosing unit heater - data valid but below normal operating range
4155 5746 3 Amber
Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust fluid dosing unit heater relay
Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust fluid dosing unit heater relay - voltage above normal, or shorted to high source
6529 5746 3 None
Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust fluid dosing unit heater relay
Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust fluid dosing unit heater relay - voltage above normal, or shorted to high source
4156 5746 4 Amber
Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust fluid dosing unit heater relay
Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust fluid dosing unit heater relay - voltage below normal, or shorted to low source
4251 5798 10 Amber
Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust fluid dosing unit heater temperature
Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust fluid dosing unit heater temperature - abnormal rate of change
6511 6655 3 None ECU power lamp Maintain ECU power lamp - voltage above normal, or shorted to high source
6512 6655 4 None ECU power lamp Maintain ECU power lamp - voltage below normal, or shorted to low source
6473 6799 2 None Engine fan blade pitch
Fan blade pitch data erratic, intermittent, or incorrect
5183 6799 3 Amber Engine fan blade pitch
Fan blade pitch position sensor circuit - voltage above normal, or shorted to high source
6471 6799 3 None Engine fan blade pitch
Fan blade pitch position sensor circuit - voltage above normal, or shorted to high source
5184 6799 4 Amber Engine fan blade pitch
Fan blade pitch position sensor circuit - voltage below normal, or shorted to low source
6472 6799 4 None Engine fan blade pitch
Fan blade pitch position sensor circuit - voltage below normal, or shorted to low source
5185 6799 7 Amber Engine fan blade pitch
Fan blade pitch - mechanical system not responding or out of adjustment
5278 6802 31 Amber Engine fan blade pitch
Aftertreatment 1 diesel exhaust fluid dosing system frozen - condition exists
REFERENCE
84. The descriptions of Cummins J1939 SPN codes are subject to change at their discretion.
Page 514
214737 494 Revision A
Table 8.19 Engine Error Codes (continued)
Fault Code
J1939 SPN
J1939 FMI
Lamp J1939 SPN Description
Cummins Description85
5653 6881 9 Amber SCR operator inducement override switch
SCR operator inducement override switch - abnormal update rate
5654 6881 13 Amber SCR operator inducement override switch
SCR operator inducement override switch - out of calibration
5393 6882 3 Amber
Aftertreatment diesel oxidation catalyst temperature sensor module
Aftertreatment diesel oxidation catalyst temperature sensor module - voltage above normal or shorted to high source
5394 6882 4 Amber
Aftertreatment diesel oxidation catalyst temperature sensor module
Aftertreatment diesel oxidation catalyst temperature sensor module - voltage below normal or shorted to low source
5391 6882 9 Amber
Aftertreatment diesel oxidation catalyst temperature sensor module
Aftertreatment diesel oxidation catalyst temperature sensor module - abnormal update rate
5395 6882 11 Amber
Aftertreatment diesel oxidation catalyst temperature sensor module
Aftertreatment diesel oxidation catalyst temperature sensor module - root cause not known
5392 6882 12 Amber
Aftertreatment diesel oxidation catalyst temperature sensor module
Aftertreatment diesel oxidation catalyst temperature sensor module - bad intelligent device or component
5396 6882 16 Amber
Aftertreatment diesel oxidation catalyst temperature sensor module
Aftertreatment diesel oxidation catalyst temperature sensor module - data valid but above normal operating range - moderately severe level
5632 6918 31 Mainte- nance
SCR system cleaning inhibited due to inhibit switch
SCR system cleaning inhibited due to inhibit switch - condition exists
5631 6928 31 None
SCR system cleaning inhibited due to system timeout
SCR system cleaning inhibited due to system timeout - condition exists
6597 6928 31 Amber
SCR system cleaning inhibited due to system timeout
SCR system cleaning inhibited due to system timeout - condition exists
REFERENCE
85. The descriptions of Cummins J1939 SPN codes are subject to change at their discretion.
Page 515
214737 495 Revision A
Table 8.19 Engine Error Codes (continued)
Fault Code
J1939 SPN
J1939 FMI
Lamp J1939 SPN Description
Cummins Description86
6634 7848 14 Amber
Aftertreatment 1 SCR system conditions not met for active cleaning
Aftertreatment 1 SCR system conditions not met for active cleaning - special instructions
5939 520968 9 Amber
Machine constrained operation - abnormal update rate. No communication or an invalid data transfer rate has been detected on the J1939 data link between the ECM and the machine electronic control unit.
5941 520968 19 None Machine constrained operation - received network data in error. The received J1939 datalink message was not valid.
5617 524286 31 Amber Aftertreatment 1 diesel oxidation catalyst system
Aftertreatment 1 diesel oxidation catalyst system - special instruction
REFERENCE
86. The descriptions of Cummins J1939 SPN codes are subject to change at their discretion.
Page 516
214737 496 Revision A
8.5 Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Supply Module Fault Codes
SPN FMI Description
3361 2 DEF dosing unit temperature Data erratic, intermittent, or incorrect
3361 3 DEF dosing unit Voltage above normal or shorted to high source
3559 4 DEF dosing unit Voltage below normal or shorted to low source
4094 31 Nox limits exceeded due to insufficient reagent quality condition exists
4334 3 DEF pressure sensor Voltage above normal or shorted to high source
4334 4 DEF pressure sensor Voltage below normal or shorted to low source
4334 16 DEF pressure sensor Data valid but above normal operating range
4334 18 DEF pressure sensor Data valid but below normal operating range
4337 3 DEF dosing temperature sensor
Voltage above normal or shorted to high
4337 4
DEF dosing temperature sensor
Voltage below normal or shorted to low
4337 10 DEF dosing temperature Abnormal rate of change
4376 3 DEF return valve Voltage above normal or shorted to high source
4376 4 DEF return valve Voltage below normal or shorted to low source
4376 7 DEF return valve Mechanical system not responding or out of adjustment
5394 7 DEF dosing valve Mechanical system not responding or out of adjustment
5745 3 DEF dosing unit heater Voltage above normal or shorted to high source
5745 4 DEF dosing unit heater Voltage below normal or shorted to low source
5745 18 DEF dosing unit heater Data valid but below normal operating range
5746 3 DEF dosing unit heater relay Voltage above normal or shorted to high source
5746 4 DEF dosing unit heater relay Voltage below normal or shorted to low source
5798 2 DEF dosing unit heater temperature
Data erratic, intermittent, or incorrect
5798 10
DEF dosing unit heater temperature Abnormal rate of change
REFERENCE
Page 517
214737 497 Revision A
8.6 Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Tank and Sensor Associated Fault Codes
SPN FMI Description
1761 1 DEF tank level data valid but below normal operating rangemost severe level
1761 2 DEF tank level data erratic, intermittent, or incorrect
1761 3 DEF tank level sensor circuit
voltage above normal or shorted to high source
1761 4 DEF tank level sensor circuit
voltage below normal or shorted to low source
1761 5 DEF tank level sensor circuit
current below normal or open circuit
1761 6 DEF tank level current above normal or grounded circuit
1761 10 DEF tank level abnormal rate of change
1761 11 DEF tank level root cause not known
1761 13 DEF tank level out of calibration
1761 17 DEF tank level data valid but below normal operating rangeleast severe level
1761 18 DEF tank level data valid but below normal operating rangemoderately severe level
3031 2 DEF tank temperature sensor
data erratic, intermittent, or incorrect
3031 3 DEF tank temperature sensor
voltage above normal or shorted to high source
3031 4 DEF tank temperature sensor
voltage below normal or shorted to low source
3031 5 DEF tank temperature sensor
current below normal or open circuit
3031 6 DEF tank temperature sensor
current above normal or grounded circuit
3031 9 DEF tank temperature sensor
abnormal update rate
3031 11 DEF tank temperature
root cause not known
3031 13 DEF tank temperature sensor
out of calibration
3363 3 DEF tank heater voltage above normal or shorted to high source
3363 4 DEF tank heater voltage below normal or shorted to low source
3363 7 DEF tank heater mechanical system not responding or out of adjustment
3363 16 DEF tank heater data valid but above normal operating rangemoderately severe level
REFERENCE
Page 518
214737 498 Revision A
SPN FMI Description
3363 18 DEF tank heater data valid but below normal operating rangemoderately severe level
3364 1 DEF tank quality sensor
data valid but below normal operating rangemost severe level
3364 2 DEF tank quality sensor
data erratic, intermittent, or incorrect
3364 3 DEF tank quality sensor
voltage above normal or shorted to high source
3364 4 DEF tank quality sensor
voltage below normal or shorted to low source
3364 5 DEF tank quality sensor
current below normal or open circuit
3364 6 DEF tank quality sensor
current above normal or grounded circuit
3364 7 DEF tank quality sensor
mechanical system not responding or out of adjustment
3364 9 DEF tank quality sensor
abnormal update rate
3364 10 DEF tank quality sensor
abnormal rate of change
3364 11 DEF tank quality sensor
root cause not known
3364 12 DEF tank quality sensor
bad intelligent device or component
3364 13 DEF tank quality sensor
out of calibration
3364 18 DEF tank quality sensor
data valid but below normal operating rangemoderately severe
4094 31 NOx limits exceeded due to insufficient regent qualitycondition exists
4096 31 DEF tank emptycondition exists
REFERENCE
Page 519
214737 499 Revision A
8.7 Cab Display Module (CDM) / Windrower Control Module (WCM) Error Codes
8.7.1 Cab Display Module (CDM) Error Codes The CDM displays error codes when there is a fault with one of the sensors that monitor and control windrower operation. Use the list of error codes to help identify a specific problem with the windrower.
NOTE:
In the case of dual codes being shown for an item (primarily the solenoid valves), the first code indicates a SHORT CIRCUITcondition, while the second code indicates an OPEN CIRCUITcondition. That is, E41 would be a SHORT in the reel aft solenoids (P55, P59), while E141 would indicate an OPEN circuit.
Codes CDM Display Description
E1
E2 RTCH NOTALLOWED Return to cut height activated with the header off.
E3 CDM CANBUS ERROR CANBUS error with CDM. Check electrical connections.
E4 HDR DRV NOTALLOWED Header engage switch activated while in engine-forward.
E5 CHECK HEADER ID Header ID change has been detected while the header was engaged.
E6 TEMP GAUGE SHORT Wiring/connection problem.
E7 SPEED STICK SHORT Wiring/connection problem.
E8 HEADER ENABLE SHORT Wiring/connection problem.
E9 WCM ENABLE SHORT Wiring/connection problem.
E10 CDMI NTERNAL ERROR Internal hardware or software problem.
E11 CDM POWER UP CDM did not power up correctly.
E12 WCM POWER UP WCM did not power up correctly.
E13 FUEL SOLENOID WCM fuel solenoid output fault detected.
E14
E15 KNIFE DRIVE PWM P68 Knife drivePWM solenoid P68 drive fault detected.
E16 DRAPER DRV PWM P69 Draper drivePWM solenoid P69 drive fault detected.
E17 REEL DRIVE PWM P70 Reel drivePWM solenoid P70 drive fault detected.
E18
E19 E119 LOAD SENSE P75 Disc block valveSolenoid P75 drive fault detectedshort circuit/open circuit
E20
E21 E121 REVERSER P106 Reverser solenoid P106 fault detectedshort circuit/open circuit
E22
E23 E123 REVERSER Reverser solenoids (P65,P66,P67) fault detectedshort circuit/open circuit
REFERENCE
Page 520
214737 500 Revision A
Codes CDM Display Description
E24 E124 DECK SHFT RIGHT P95 Right deck shift solenoid P95 fault detectedshort circuit/ open circuit
E25 E125 DECK SHFT LEFT P96 Left deck shift solenoid P96 fault detectedshort circuit/open circuit
E26 E126 DWA UP DWA raise solenoid P72, P73 fault detectedshort circuit/ open circuit
E27 E127 DWA DOWN DWA lower solenoid P72, P73 fault detectedshort circuit/ open circuit
E28 E128 TILT RETRACT Header tilt retract solenoid P54 fault detectedshort circuit/ open circuit
E29 E129 TILT EXTEND Header tilt extend solenoid P53, P54 fault detectedshort circuit/open circuit
E30 E130 4 WAY VALVE P62 Four-way valve solenoid P62 fault detectedshort circuit/ open circuit
E31 E131 BYPASS VALVE P52 Bypass valve solenoid P52 fault detectedshort circuit/open circuit
E32 E132 HEADER UP/DOWN P57 Header up/down solenoid P57 fault detectedshort circuit/ open circuit
E33 E133 SCREEN CLEANERS Screen cleaner output fault detectedshort circuit/open circuit
E34 E134 RIGHT STOP LAMP Right stop lamp output fault detectedshort circuit/open circuit
E35 E135 LEFT STOP LAMP Left stop lamp output fault detectedshort circuit/open circuit
E36 E136 RIGHT TURN LAMP Right turn lamp output fault detectedshort circuit/open circuit
E37 E137 LEFT TURN LAMP Left turn lamp output fault detectedshort circuit/open circuit
E38 E138 MAIND RIVE Main header drive solenoid P71 fault detectedshort circuit/ open circuit
E39 E139 LOW RANGE P61 Low range solenoid P61 fault detectedshort circuit/open circuit
E40 E140 HIGH RANGE P60 High range solenoid P60 fault detectedshort circuit/open circuit
E41 E141 REEL AFT Reel aft solenoid P55, P59 fault detectedshort circuit/open circuit
E42 E142 REEL FORE Reel fore solenoid P55, P59 fault detectedshort circuit/ open circuit
E43 E143 REEL UP/DOWN P58 Reel up/down solenoid P58 fault detectedshort circuit/open circuit
E44 E144 FLOAT RHS P64 Right float solenoid P64 fault detectedshort circuit/open circuit
E45 E145 FLOAT LHS P63 Left float solenoid P63 fault detectedshort circuit/open circuit
REFERENCE
Page 521
214737 501 Revision A
Codes CDM Display Description
E46 SENSOR VOLTS HIGH WCM's 9V sensor voltage output high (wire 5)
E47 SENSOR VOLTS LOW WCM's 9V sensor voltage output low (wire 5)
E48 WCM OVER TEMP WCM over temp fault.
E49 WCM LOW TEMP WCM low temp fault.
E50 BATT + OUT OF RANGE System voltage above 15.5 VDC.
E51 E151 DISK DRIVE PWM P68 Disk header drive solenoid P68 fault detectedshort circuit/ open circuit
E52
E53
E54
E55 DISK SPD OVERLOAD Low disk speed detected < setpoint
Error codes E56 to E63 not allocated
E64 HEADER OIL PRESSURE Header drive charge pressure low (switch 228 on hydraulic schematic)
E65 KNIFE OVERLOAD Low knife speed detected < setpoint
E66 ##.# LOW VOLTS Low system voltage <11.5 VDC
E67 TRANS OIL PRESSURE Supercharge pressure low (switch 202 on hydraulic schematic)
E68 HYDRAULIC OIL HOT Oil tank temp >230 deg F / 110 deg C
E69 ENGINE AIR FILTER Engine air filter plugged
E70 HYDRAULIC FILTER Hydraulic filture pressure too high (switch 227 on hydraulic schematic)
E71 LOW HYDRAULIC OIL Low hydraulic oil level sensor tripped (switch 225 on hydraulic schematic)
E72 ##.# HIGH VOLTS System voltage above 15.5 VDC.
Error codes E73 to E100 not allocated
E101 SPI ERROR Internal error
E102 CAN ERROR J1939 Can error
E103 EEPROM READ ERROR Internal error
E104 EEPROM WRITE ERROR Internal error
E105 TEMP SENSOR ERROR Internal temperature sensor error.
REFERENCE
Page 522
214737 502 Revision A
8.7.2 Miscellaneous Information / Error Codes
CDM Display Description
ENGINE OIL PRESSURE Engine oil pressure warning
ENGINE TEMPERATURE Engine coolant temperature warning
CANBUSS ERROR J1939 Can error
KNIFE SPD OVERLOAD Low knife speed detected (less than programmed overload speed)
NO OPERATOR Operator not detected in seat (~3 second delay before message)
NO HEADER No header ID detectednot hooked up or wiring error
LOCK SEAT BASE Seat base not detected in either cab- or engine-forward position
DISENGAGE HEADER Header engage switch ON when ignition turned ON
xxxxS xxF xxC Engine error code configuration (CANBUS)refer to 8.4 Engine Error Codes, page 467
CENTER STEERING GSL or pintle switches not closed with the key ON/engine OFF
NOT IN PARK GSL or pintle switches not closed with the key ON/engine OFF
BRAKE ON Engine running GSL out of PARK brake is still engaged
PLACE GSL INTO "N" GSL or pintle switches not closed with the key ON/engine OFF
BRAKE SW FAILURE Ignition on/engine not runningbrake switch and relay closed
BRAKE OFF Engine running, GSL in N-DETENT brake pressure switch or brake switch relay fault
CHECK SEAT SWITCHES System detects that both seat switches are active
CAB FORWARD SW ON If both switches are to be activated than the display
ENG FORWARD SW ON Will alternate between these messages
REFERENCE
Page 523
Index
A A Series headers
A30D auger speed ................................................ 276
A30S auger speed ................................................ 276
A40D auger speed ................................................ 276 reel only speed ............................................ 278 reel speed ................................................... 278 reel speed while moving ............................... 279 reel to ground speed .................................... 279
auger speed ................................................... 276 knife speed..................................................... 282
A-Series headers A30-D knife speed ................................................. 282
A30-S, A30-D reel speed ................................................... 277
A40-D knife speed while moving ............................. 282
air conditioning, See HVAC systems alarms
fuel and diesel exhaust fluid (DEF) display module ...........................................................70
antenna mountings...............................................63 API
definition ..........................................................27 ASTM
definition ..........................................................27 auger speeds ..................................................... 276
A30D header .................................................. 276 A30S header .................................................. 276 A40D header .................................................. 276
auto raise height feature ..................................... 213 programming auto raise height......................... 214 using auto raise height feature ......................... 214
automated steering systems................................ 427
B batteries
adding electrolyte to battery ............................. 364 battery safety......................................................8 boosting ......................................................... 363 charging ......................................................... 361 connecting...................................................... 368 installing......................................................... 367 main disconnect switch.................................... 361 maintaining..................................................... 360
removing ........................................................ 365 belts .................................................................. 352
A/C compressor belt replacing..................................................... 354 tensioning ................................................... 353
engine belts alternator/fan belt
replacing.................................................. 352 tensioning................................................ 352
bolts definition ..........................................................27
C cab display module (CDM)
CDM/WCM fault codes .................................... 160 configuring the CDM..........................................93 guidelines .....................................................92
configuring the windrower, See CanWin service tool display and sound options .................................94 backlighting...................................................97 buzzer volume...............................................96 display contrast .............................................98 display language ...........................................94 display units ..................................................95
engine and windrower functions .........................79 engine error codes ...................................160, 467 engine warning lights.........................................89 header functions ...............................................80 header sensors............................................... 129 header float sensor ...................................... 133 header height sensor ................................... 129 header tilt sensor ......................................... 131
locking CDM buttons auger speed ................................................ 123 displaying locked buttons ............................. 128 draper speed............................................... 121 header float ................................................. 119 header tilt .................................................... 118 knife speed ................................................. 124 reel fore-aft ................................................. 120 reel speed ................................................... 126 rotary disc speed ......................................... 125
operating screens .............................................81 programming auger reel speed.......................................... 114 auto raise height .......................................... 105 double windrower attachment (DWA) ............ 106 drive manifold.............................................. 106 engine intermediate speed control (ISC)........ 116 hay conditioner ............................................ 113
Page 524
header cut width .......................................... 109 header index mode ...................................... 103 hydraulic center-link..................................... 108 hydraulic overload pressure.......................... 102 knife overload speed.................................... 101 knife speed ...................................................99 return to cut mode........................................ 105 rotary disc hydraulics ................................... 109 rotary disc overload speed............................ 101 swath compressor ....................................... 111 tire size ....................................................... 115
swath compressor sensor calibration ................ 135 troubleshooting activating hydraulic purge............................. 159 draper drive activate function........................ 150 DWA activate function .................................. 155 engine error codes....................................... 137 forcing a header ID ...................................... 142 header sensors............................................ 138 header tilt activate function ........................... 147 header up/down........................................... 144 knife drive circuit.......................................... 149 reel drive circuit activate function .................. 152 reel fore-aft activate function......................... 157 reel up/down activate function....................... 145 rotary disc drive circuit activate function......... 154 sensor input signals ..................................... 141 windrower error codes.................................. 137
warning/alarms .................................................89 cab suspension limit straps ................................. 304 cab temperature, See HVAC systems cab-forward
definition ..........................................................27 CanWin service tool
cab display module (CDM) information/error codes ................................ 502
CDM, See cab display module (CDM) center-links ..........................................................27
definition ..........................................................27 self-locking center-link hook mechanism........... 209
CGVW definition ..........................................................27
circuit breakers accessing ....................................................... 388 replacing ........................................................ 390
climate controls .............................................. 5758 See also HVAC systems
component locations.............................................37 compressors, See HVAC systems configuring the CDM, See cab display module (CDM) configuring the windrower, See CanWin service tool consoles ..............................................................39 conversion chart................................................. 466 cutting height ..................................................... 211
D D Series headers
attaching ........................................................ 219 attaching header boots .................................... 218 deck shift........................................................ 272 deck shift control.......................................... 272 setting float options...................................... 273
draper index setting draper index ..................................... 268
draper speed setting draper speed .................................... 267 setting draper to ground speed ..................... 267 setting independent of ground speed............. 270 setting minimum draper speed...................... 267
header float float options with deck shift ........................... 273
header position ............................................... 264 reel fore-aft position ..................................... 264
hydraulics configuration - D Series ................... 263 knife speed..................................................... 271 setting knife speed while moving................... 272
reel height ...................................................... 264 reel speed ...................................................... 264 reel index .................................................... 264 reel minimum speed..................................... 264 reel only speed ............................................ 266 reel to ground speed .................................... 264
D1 Series headers attaching ........................................................ 219 attaching header boots .................................... 218 deck shift........................................................ 272 deck shift control.......................................... 272 setting float options...................................... 273
draper index setting draper index ..................................... 268
draper speed setting draper speed .................................... 267 setting draper to ground speed ..................... 267 setting independent of ground speed............. 270 setting minimum draper speed...................... 267
header float float options with deck shift ........................... 273
header position ............................................... 264 reel fore-aft position ..................................... 264
knife speed..................................................... 271 reel height ...................................................... 264 reel speed reel index .................................................... 264 reel minimum speed..................................... 264 reel only speed ............................................ 266 reel to ground speed .................................... 264
DDD definition ..........................................................27
INDEX
Page 525
decals fuse box decal ................................................ 391 GSL header switch functions..............................74 location of safety signs ......................................13
deck shift control ................................................ 272 declaration of conformity ......................................... ii DEF, See diesel exhaust fluid (DEF) system definition of terms .................................................27 diesel exhaust fluid (DEF) system........................ 334
exhaust system cleaning ................................. 172 diesel exhaust fluid (DEF) systems
filters supply module filter ...................................... 339
checking .................................................. 339 cleaning................................................... 341 inspecting ................................................ 341 installing .................................................. 341 removing ................................................. 339
vent hose filter changing.................................................. 336
tank ............................................................... 334 refilling........................................................ 335
displays diesel exhaust fluid (DEF)..................................67
DK definition ..........................................................27
DKD definition ..........................................................27
DM definition ..........................................................27
DOC definition ..........................................................27
double windrow attachment (DWA) ...................... 215 activating in CDM............................................ 155 deck position .................................................. 216 draper speed .................................................. 217
draper index setting for D Series.......................................... 268 setting for D1 Series headers ........................... 268
draper speed setting for D Series.......................................... 267 setting for D1 Series headers ........................... 267 setting independent of ground speed ................ 270 setting minimum draper speed ......................... 267
drive manifold cab display module (CDM) programming .......... 106
drive wheels, See wheels and tires installing......................................................... 411 nut tightening procedure .................................. 409
driving the windrower.......................................... 173 cab-forward operation ..................................... 175 driving on the road .......................................... 182 engine-forward operation................................. 177 entering/exiting ............................................... 174
reverse in cab-forward mode............................ 176 reverse in engine-forward mode ....................... 179 spin turn ......................................................... 179 stopping ......................................................... 180
DWA, See double windrow attachment (DWA)
E ECM
definition ..........................................................27 ECU
definition ..........................................................27 electrical systems........................................172, 360
accessing circuit breakers and fuses ................ 388 batteries ......................................................... 360 adding electrolyte ........................................ 364 battery main disconnect switch ..................... 361 boosting the batteries................................... 363 charging the batteries................................... 361 connecting .................................................. 368 installing ..................................................... 367 maintaining the battery ................................. 360 removing..................................................... 365
checking and replacing fuses ........................... 389 fuse box decal ................................................ 391 inspecting 125A main fuse ............................... 394 preventing damage to electrical system ............ 360 replacing 125A main fuse ................................ 394 replacing circuit breaker/relay .......................... 390 switches and sensors battery disconnect switch ............................. 361
engine air intake system............................................. 319 inspecting exhaust system............................... 350
engine compartment hoods, See hoods engine cooling systems
changing coolant............................................. 344 cooler box ...................................................... 355 cleaning cooler ............................................ 355 cleaning cooler box components ................... 357 screen cleaner duct to screen clearance........ 359
cooler box screen adjusting clearance...................................... 359 cleaning screen ........................................... 355 closing ........................................................ 359 opening....................................................... 355
engine coolant adding coolant............................................. 347 checking level.............................................. 342 checking strength ........................................ 343 cleaning tank............................................... 344 draining coolant ........................................... 344
pressurized coolant tank cap
INDEX
Page 526
inspecting ................................................... 344 engine operation
adjusting the throttle ........................................ 354 engine speed.................................................. 354 engine temperature ......................................... 171 exhaust aftertreatment system exhaust system cleaning .............................. 172
fuelling ........................................................... 332 intermediate speed control (ISC) ...................... 170 oil pressure..................................................... 171 shutting down the engine ................................. 171 starting the engine .......................................... 168 cold start ..................................................... 169 engine warm-up........................................... 170
engine-forward definition ..........................................................27
engines ............................................................. 313 air cleaner cleaning air cleaner primary filter................... 323
air filters primary air filter
installing .................................................. 321 removing ................................................. 319
secondary air filter replacing.................................................. 323
belts............................................................... 352 charge air cooling............................................ 325 checking interlock ........................................... 299 controls and display module...............................66 engine cooling system..................................... 342 engine error codes on CDM display .................. 160 engine oil change............................................ 317 engine safety ....................................................10 gearbox maintenance...................................... 348 adding lubricant ........................................... 348 changing lubricant ....................................... 349 checking lubricant level ................................ 348
general inspection........................................... 313 manuals ......................................................... 313 turning engine manually................................... 313 warning lights ........................................... 89, 172
error codes ........................................................ 499 cab display module (CDM)............................... 499 miscellaneous information/error codes .......... 502
engine error codes .......................................... 467 displaying.................................................... 137
windrower error codes displaying.................................................... 137
evaporator heater cores...................................... 309 cleaning ......................................................... 310
F FFFT
definition ..........................................................27 filters
DEF supply module filter.................................. 339 checking ..................................................... 339 cleaning ...................................................... 341 inspecting ................................................... 341 installing ..................................................... 341 removing..................................................... 339
DEF vent hose filter changing DEF vent hose filter ....................... 336
engine filters engine air cleaner
cleaning primary filter................................ 323 primary air filter
installing .................................................. 321 removing ................................................. 319
secondary air filter replacing.................................................. 323
fuel filters........................................................ 326 installing primary fuel filter ............................ 328 installing secondary fuel filter ........................ 329 removing primary fuel filter ........................... 326 removing secondary fuel filter ....................... 328
HVAC filters fresh air filter
inspecting/cleaning filter element ............... 306 installing .................................................. 306 removing ................................................. 305
return air cleaner/filter cleaning................................................... 308 servicing .................................................. 307
hydraulic filters changing oil filters ........................................ 399 charge oil filter ............................................. 400
installing .................................................. 400 removing ................................................. 400
return oil filter .............................................. 401 installing .................................................. 401 removing ................................................. 401
final drives ......................................................... 195 finger tight
definition ..........................................................27 float booster springs
spring with external booster spring kit ............... 430 spring with internal booster spring kit ................ 430
floats, See header float fluids, fuel, and lubricants.................................... 451
capacities ....................................................... 452 fuel specifications............................................ 451 storing............................................................ 451
fuel and diesel exhaust fluid (DEF) display
INDEX
Page 527
gauges.............................................................67 fuel and diesel exhaust fluid (DEF) display modules
tools menu........................................................69 fuel system
fluids, fuel, and lubricants ................................ 451 fuel systems....................................................... 325
fuel filters........................................................ 326 fuel/water separator ..................................... 332 installing primary fuel filter ............................ 328 installing secondary fuel filter ........................ 329 removing primary fuel filter ........................... 326 removing secondary fuel filter ....................... 328
fuel specifications............................................ 451 fuel tank draining....................................................... 330 filling........................................................... 332 fuel tank vent filter
installing .................................................. 325 removing ................................................. 325
fuel/water separator ..................................... 332 removing water from fuel system................... 333
priming procedure ................................................... 333 system priming ............................................ 333
fuel, fluids, and lubricants hydraulic oil .................................................... 396
fuse box decals .................................................. 391 fuses
accessing ....................................................... 388 checking and replacing.................................... 389 inspecting and replacing 125A ......................... 394
G gauges
fuel and diesel exhaust fluid (DEF) .....................67 gearbox ............................................................. 348 glossary...............................................................27 gps automated steering systems ......................... 427 GSL ....................................................................74
See also header controls definition ..........................................................27
GVW definition ..........................................................27
H header angles .................................................... 208 header controls ....................................................73
console header switches ...................................77 deck shift/float preset switch ...........................77 DWA/swath roller switch (if installed) ...............78
display selector switch.......................................75
ground speed lever (GSL) header switches.........74 header drive reverse button ...............................73 header drive switch ...........................................73 header position switches ...................................76 reel and disc speed switches .............................76 reel position switches ........................................75
header drives ..................................................... 207 header float........................................................ 199
adjusting float using drawbolts ......................... 201 checking float ................................................. 199 float operating guidelines................................. 199 float options and presets.................................. 202 float options with deck shift (D Series and D1 Series).......................................................... 273
header levelling.................................................. 204 header operation ................................................ 197
engaging the header ....................................... 207 header and reel hydraulics............................... 402 header angle .................................................. 208 header drive ................................................... 207 header drop rate ............................................. 215 levelling the header ......................................... 204 operating with a header A Series header........................................... 276 D Series header........................................... 263 D1 Series header......................................... 263 header float ................................................. 199 R Series header........................................... 284 R1 Series header......................................... 284
reversing the header ....................................... 207 header sensors
calibrating header sensors............................... 129 header float sensor ...................................... 133 header height sensor ................................... 129 header tilt sensor ......................................... 131
switching installed sensors on or off.................. 138 header tilt
calibrating header tilt sensor ............................ 131 header tilt control lockout on CDM.................... 118 testing header tilt activate function.................... 147
headers A Series headers attaching
non-self-aligning hydraulic center-link ........ 239 self-aligning hydraulic center-link ............... 233
detaching .................................................... 245 hydraulic center-link.................................. 245
D Series headers attaching
non-self-aligning hydraulic center-link ........ 224 self-aligning hydraulic center-link ............... 219
attaching header boots................................. 218 detaching .................................................... 230
hydraulic center-link.................................. 230
INDEX
Page 528
D1 Series headers attaching
non-self-aligning hydraulic center-link ........ 224 self-aligning hydraulic center-link ............... 219
attaching header boots................................. 218 detaching .................................................... 230
hydraulic center-link.................................. 230 definition ..........................................................27 drop rate ........................................................ 403 R Series headers attaching..................................................... 248 detaching .................................................... 259
hydraulic center-link.................................. 259 R1 Series headers attaching..................................................... 248 detaching .................................................... 259
hydraulic center-link.................................. 259 heater shut-off valves ...........................................57 heating, See HVAC systems hex keys
definition ..........................................................27 hoods
closing from highest position ............................ 290 closing from lower position............................... 289 opening to highest position .............................. 289 opening to lowest position................................ 288
horns...................................................................65 HVAC system
return air cleaner/filter...................................... 307 HVAC systems
A/C compressor compressor belt
replacing.................................................. 354 tensioning................................................ 353
coolant cycling............................................. 167 servicing the compressor.............................. 312
A/C condenser................................................ 309 air distribution ...................................................57 compressor .................................................... 311 controls ............................................................58 cover installing cover ............................................ 311 removing cover............................................ 309
evaporator heater core .................................... 309 cleaning ...................................................... 310
filters fresh air filter
installing .................................................. 306 removing ................................................. 305
fresh air intake filter cleaning filter element............................... 306
return air cleaner/filter cleaning................................................... 308 servicing .................................................. 307
fresh air intake filter ......................................... 305 heater shut-off valve..........................................57
hydraulic oil........................................................ 396 changing hydraulic oil ...................................... 398 checking and filling.......................................... 397
hydraulic system filters filter part numbers........................................ 453
hydraulic filters charge oil filter
installing .................................................. 400 removing ................................................. 400
return oil filter installing .................................................. 401 removing ................................................. 401
knife drive testing knife drive circuit using CDM.............. 149
hydraulics changing hydraulic oil filters ............................. 399 D Series header hydraulics .............................. 263 fittings flare-type..................................................... 460 O-ring boss (ORB) adjustable ....................... 461 O-ring boss (ORB) non-adjustable ................ 463 O-ring face seal (ORFS)............................... 464 tapered pipe thread fittings ........................... 465
header and reel hydraulics............................... 402 flow control blocks ....................................... 403 header drop rate .......................................... 403 pressure compensator valve......................... 402 reel drop rate............................................... 404
hydraulic filters charge oil filter ............................................. 400 return oil filter .............................................. 401
hydraulic hoses and lines................................. 406 hydraulic oil cooler .......................................... 398 hydraulic safety...................................................6 traction drive hydraulics ................................... 405 charge pump pressure ................................. 406 transmission oil pressure.............................. 405
warnings ........................................................ 396
K knife drives
testing knife drive circuit using CDM ................. 149 knife speed
setting while moving A-Series .......................... 282 setting while moving for D-Series header .......... 272
knife speeds A Series header .............................................. 282 D Series header.............................................. 271 D1 Series header ............................................ 271
INDEX
Page 529
L lighting.................................................................49
auto road..........................................................54 beacons ...........................................................53 replacing bulb.............................................. 383
cab-forward mode field ..............................................................50 road..............................................................52
engine-forward mode field ..............................................................51
field lights adjusting field lights ..................................... 374 replacing bulb.............................................. 375
floodlights adjusting cab-forward floodlights................... 375 adjusting rear floodlights .............................. 380 replacing bulb in cab-forward flood light ......... 375 replacing bulb in rear flood light..................... 381
headlights aligning headlights ....................................... 369 replacing bulb.............................................. 371
HID auxiliary lighting.................................377, 427 adjusting HID lights ...................................... 380 replacing lamp............................................. 377
interior lights .....................................................59 ambient light................................................ 388 dome light ................................................... 387
red and amber lights replacing bulbs ............................................ 382
red taillights replacing bulb.............................................. 383
turn signal indicators ....................................... 388 lubricating the windrower .................................... 296
lubricants/fluids/system capacities.................... 452 lubricating engine gearbox............................... 348 lubricating wheel drive adding lubricant ........................................... 413 changing wheel drive lubricant ...................... 413 checking lubricant levels .............................. 412
lubrication points............................................. 297 lubrication procedure....................................... 296 recommended fuel, fluids, and lubricants .......... 451 storing lubricants and fluids.............................. 451
lubrication .......................................................... 412
M maintenance
engine exhaust system.................................... 350 engine oil........................................................ 317 wheels and tires drive wheels .........................................408409
maintenance and servicing
A/C compressor belt replacing..................................................... 354 tensioning ................................................... 353
battery............................................................ 360 daily checks and maintenance ......................... 167 electrical system ............................................. 360 engine............................................................ 313 air intake system.......................................... 319 charge air cooling ........................................ 325 engine belt .................................................. 352 general engine inspection............................. 313 turning the engine manually.......................... 313
engine compartment opening and closing platforms ...................... 291
engine cooling system..................................... 342 engine gearbox............................................... 348 engine oil checking level.............................................. 315
filter part numbers ........................................... 453 fuel system ..................................................... 325 fuel, fluids, and lubricants ................................ 451 HVAC system ................................................. 305 fresh air filter
cleaning filter element............................... 306 installing .................................................. 306
hydraulic oil tank checking and filling hydraulic oil .................... 397
lighting aligning headlights ....................................... 369
lubricating the windrower ................................. 296 maintenance schedule .................................... 422 operator presence system ............................... 298 operators station ............................................ 298 checking engine interlock ............................. 299
preparing for servicing ..................................... 287 priming procedure ................................................... 333 system priming ............................................ 333
safety.................................................................5 safety systems................................................ 298 wheels and tires.............................................. 408 caster wheels .............................................. 414
maintenance platforms ....................................... 291 maintenance schedule........................................ 422 manifolds
cab display module (CDM) programming .......... 106 metric bolts
torque specifications ....................................... 457 minimum reel speed ........................................... 264
N neutral
INDEX
Page 530
adjustment troubleshooting.............................. 437 NPT
definition ..........................................................27
O oils (engine)
adding............................................................ 318 capacities and specifications............................ 452 checking level ................................................. 315 draining.......................................................... 317 replacing engine oil filter .................................. 317
operations.......................................................... 165 See also engine operation See also header operation
auto raise height feature .................................. 213 programming auto raise height feature .......... 214 using auto raise height ................................. 214
break-in period................................................ 165 daily checks.................................................... 167 double windrowing .......................................... 215 deck position ............................................... 216 draper speed............................................... 217
driving the windrower ...................................... 173 header float .................................................... 199 operating with a header ................................... 197 A Series header........................................... 276 D Series header........................................... 263 D1 Series header......................................... 263 R Series header........................................... 284 R1 Series header......................................... 284
owner/operator responsibilities......................... 161 preseason checks/annual service..................... 166 distributing A/C compressor coolant .............. 167
return to cut feature programming return to cut feature ................. 212 using return to cut feature............................. 213
safety props.................................................... 197 swath roller..................................................... 217 symbols.......................................................... 162
operator presence system.....................................41 engine and transmission....................................41 header drive .....................................................41
operators seat adjusting armrest ..............................................44 adjusting armrest angle .....................................45 adjusting fore-aft position...................................42 adjusting lumbar support ...................................45 adjusting seat tilt ...............................................43 adjusting suspension and seat height .................43 adjusting vertical dampener ...............................44 fore-aft isolator lock...........................................42
operators station.......................................... 39, 298
AM/FM radio.....................................................63 amenities .........................................................61 auto road light...................................................54 beacon lighting .................................................53 cab-forward lighting - field mode.........................50 cab-forward lighting - road .................................52 climate controls.................................................58 console ............................................................39 emergency exit .................................................60 engine controls and DEF display module ............66 engine-forward lighting - road.............................51 GSL adjustments ............................................ 300 adjusting GSL fore-aft movement.................. 301 adjusting GSL lateral movement ................... 300
header controls .................................................73 horn .................................................................65 interior light.......................................................59 lighting .............................................................49 operator presence system ......................... 41, 298 engine and transmission ................................41 header drive ..................................................41
rear view mirror.................................................56 safety systems................................................ 298 seat belts.................................................. 46, 298 steering adjustments ....................................... 302 steering column ................................................48 training seat......................................................47 windrower controls ............................................71 windshield wiper ...............................................55
options and attachments ..................................... 427 automated steering systems ............................ 427 booster spring kit (internal)............................... 430 cab AM/FM radio ............................................... 427 windshield shades ....................................... 427
double windrow attachment (DWA)................... 429 draper header case drain kit............................. 429 draper header reel drive and lift plumbing.......... 429 engine block heater ................................................ 428 engine fan air baffle ..................................... 428
header drive reverser ...................................... 429 hydraulic rotary header drive hydraulics....................... 430
light header flotation ........................................ 429 lighting HID auxiliary lighting .................................... 427 lighting/marking for cab-forward travel ........... 432
pressure sensor kit.......................................... 430 R1 disc drive kit (B4657).................................. 430 self-aligning center-link.................................... 430 spring with external booster spring kit ............... 430 swath compressor........................................... 431 swath roller..............................................217, 431
INDEX
Page 531
transport lighting/marking for cab-forward travel ........... 432 towing harness ............................................ 432 weight box................................................... 432
weight box ...................................................... 188 ORB
definition ..........................................................27 owner/operator responsibilities ............................ 161
P platforms ........................................................... 291
closing platform (major service position) ........... 294 closing platform (standard position) .................. 292 opening platform (major service position) .......... 293 opening platform (standard position)................. 291
pressurized coolant tank inspecting....................................................... 344
product overview ..................................................27 programming
auto raise height feature .................................. 214 return to cut-feature......................................... 212
programming the CDM, See cab display module (CDM)
R R Series headers................................................ 284
attaching ........................................................ 248 disc speed...................................................... 284 setting disc speed ........................................... 284
R1 Series headers.............................................. 284 attaching ........................................................ 248
radios .......................................................... 63, 427 rear view mirrors ..................................................56 reel height
D Series header.............................................. 264 D1 Series header ............................................ 264
reel index........................................................... 264 reel minimum speed ........................................... 264 reel speed.......................................................... 264
A40D header .................................................. 278 D Series header.............................................. 264 D1 Series header ............................................ 264
reel-to-ground speed .......................................... 264 reels
reel drop rate .................................................. 404 relays
replacing ........................................................ 390 return to cut feature ............................................ 211
programming return to cut................................ 212 using return to cut ........................................... 213
revisions ................................................................v
RoHS definition ..........................................................27
rpm definition ..........................................................27
S SAE
bolt torques .................................................... 455 definition ..........................................................27
safety battery safety......................................................8 engine safety ....................................................10 engine electronics.......................................... 11 high-pressure rail...........................................10
general safety .....................................................3 header safety props ........................................ 197 hydraulic safety...................................................6 maintenance safety .............................................5 operational safety............................................ 165 safety alert symbols ............................................1 safety sign decals .............................................12 installing decals .............................................12 interpreting decals .........................................17 locations .......................................................13
signal words .......................................................2 tire safety ...........................................................7 welding precautions ............................................9
screen cleaners adjusting clearance ......................................... 359
screws definition ..........................................................27
seat belts .............................................................46 maintaining seat belts...................................... 298
serial numbers location ............................................................. vi
shutting down the engine .................................... 171 SK
definition ..........................................................27 specifications .......................................................30
filter part numbers ........................................... 453 fuel ................................................................ 451 torque specifications ....................................... 455 windrower dimensions.......................................34
spm definition ..........................................................27
springs float springs spring with external booster spring kit ............ 430 spring with internal booster spring kit............. 430
starting the engine.............................................. 168 cold start ........................................................ 169 engine warm-up .............................................. 170
INDEX
Page 532
steering adjusting steering chain tension ....................... 304 adjusting steering column ..................................48 adjustments.................................................... 302 automated steering systems (option) ................ 427 checking steering chain tension........................ 304 checking steering link pivots............................. 302
storing the windrower.......................................... 196 swath compressors
activating swath compressor ............................ 111 calibrating sensor............................................ 135
swath rollers ...................................................... 217 symbols
definitions....................................................... 162 engine function ............................................... 162 header function............................................... 164 windrower operating........................................ 163
T T4
checking and replacing of fuses and relays ....... 393 electronic control unit (ECU) power fuse ........... 392 fuses and relays.............................................. 392
temperature cab ..................................................................57 engine............................................................ 171
TFFT definition ..........................................................27
torque definition ..........................................................27
torque angles definition ..........................................................27
torque specifications........................................... 455 flare-type hydraulic fittings ............................... 460 metric bolt specifications.................................. 457 bolting into cast aluminum ............................ 459
O-ring boss (ORB) hydraulic fittings (adjustable)................................................... 461
O-ring boss (ORB) hydraulic fittings (non- adjustable).................................................... 463
O-ring face seal (ORFS) fittings........................ 464 SAE bolt torque specifications.......................... 455 tapered pipe thread fittings............................... 465
torque-tension definition ..........................................................27
towing attaching tow-bar to windrower......................... 188 towing header with windrower .......................... 184 towing the windrower (emergency) ................... 194
training seats .......................................................47 transporting
attaching header transport hitch to header ........ 188
converting from field to transport mode ............. 185 converting from transport to field mode ............. 192
troubleshooting cab air............................................................ 446 electrical......................................................... 439 engine............................................................ 433 header drive ................................................... 441 header problems............................................. 144 hydraulics....................................................... 440 operators station ............................................ 450 steering and ground speed control.................... 445 traction drive................................................... 442 windrower problems ........................................ 137
U ULSD
definition ..........................................................27
V ventilating, See HVAC systems
W washers
definition ..........................................................27 weight boxes...................................................... 432
attaching to windrower..................................... 188 welding..................................................................9 wheels and tires ................................................. 408
caster wheels ..........................................181, 414 anti-shimmy dampener................................. 420 ballast requirement ...................................... 420 forked caster wheels
installing .................................................. 418 lowering................................................... 417 raising ..................................................... 416 removing ................................................. 417
formed caster wheels installing .................................................. 420 lowering................................................... 417 raising ..................................................... 416 removing ................................................. 419
inflating caster tire........................................ 414 tightening caster wheel nuts ......................... 415
drive wheels inflating drive tire ......................................... 408 lowering ...................................................... 411 nut tightening procedure............................... 409 raising......................................................... 409 removing..................................................... 410
INDEX
Page 533
safety.................................................................7 wheel drive checking lubricant levels .............................. 412 lubricating wheel drive
adding lubricant........................................ 413 changing lubricant .................................... 413
windrower control module (WCM) calibrating header sensors............................... 129
windshield wipers .................................................55
INDEX
Page 535
Lubricants, Fluids, and System Capacities
CAUTION To avoid injury or death, do NOTallow ANY machine fluids to enter the body.
Lubricant/Fluid Location Description Capacity
Diesel exhaust fluid (DEF)
Diesel exhaust fluid tank
Must meet ISO 22241 requirements 29 liters (7.5 US gallons)
Grease As required unless otherwise specified
SAE multi-purpose high temperature extreme pressure (EP2) performance with 1% max Molybdenum Disulphide
(NLGI Grade 2) lithium base
Diesel fuel Fuel tank
Ultra low sulphur diesel (ULSD) Grade No.2, or ULSD Grade No.1 and 2 mix87; refer to 8.1.2 Fuel Specifications, page
451 for more information
378 liters (97 US gallons)
Hydraulic oil Hydraulic reservoir SAE 15W-40 compliant with SAE specs for API class SJ and CH-4 engine oil.
65 liters (17.2 US gallons)
Gear lubricant Gearbox SAE 80W-14088, API service class GL-5.
Fully synthetic gear lubricant, (SAE J2360 preferred)
2.1 liters (2.2 US quarts)
Gear lubricant Wheel drive89
SAE 75W-90, API service class GL-5. Fully synthetic gear lubricant, (SAE
J2360 preferred)
1.4 liters (1.5 US quarts)
Antifreeze Engine cooling
system
ASTM D-6210 and Fleetguard ES Compleat; refer to 8.1.3 Lubricants,
Fluids, and System Capacities, page 452
27.5 liters (7.3 US gallons)90
Engine oil Engine oil pan SAE 15W-40 compliant with SAE specs for API class SJ and CJ-4 engine oil
11 liters (11.6 US quarts)
Air conditioning refrigerant
Air conditioning system
R134A 2.27 kg (5 lb.)
Air conditioning refrigerant oil91
Air conditioning system total capacity
PAG SP-15 240 cc (8.1 fl. oz.)
87. Optional when operating temperature is below 0C (32F). 88. SAE 75W-140 may be substituted for SAE 80W-140 if necessary. 89. SAE 85W-140 API Service Class GL-5. Extreme Pressure Gear Lubricant is used before initial change. 90. Equal parts with water, high quality, soft, de-ionized or distilled water as recommended by Supplier. 91. New compressor (MD #203013) comes filled.
Page 536
MacDon Industries Ltd. 680 Moray Street Winnipeg, Manitoba Canada R3J 3S3 t. (204) 885-5590 f. (204) 832-7749
MacDon Brasil Agribusiness Ltda. Rua Gr Nicco, 113, sala 404, B. 04 Mossungu, Curitiba, Paran CEP 81200-200 Brasil t. +55 (41) 2101-1713 f. +55 (41) 2101-1699
MacDon, Inc. 10708 N. Pomona Avenue Kansas City, Missouri United States 64153-1924 t. (816) 891-7313 f. (816) 891-7323
LLC MacDon Russia Ltd. 123317 Moscow, Russia 10 Presnenskaya nab, Block C Floor 5, Office No. 534, Regus Business Centre t. +7 495 775 6971 f. +7 495 967 7600
MacDon Australia Pty. Ltd. A.C.N. 079 393 721 P.O. Box 103 Somerton, Victoria, Australia Australia 3061 t.+61 3 8301 1911 f.+61 3 8301 1912
MacDon Europe GmbH Hagenauer
